Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 is an essential study material for students. Basic concepts of maths are clearly explained to score high marks for students. Also, in-depth knowledge of Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 BIM Grade 3 Answer Key mentioned with a brief explanation.

Furthermore, Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 is very convenient for students who are struggling and want to do extra practice in small groups. Every problem is solved and mentioned with a step-by-step explanation to support the students while their practice in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10

The quiz, homework, formative assessment, or just extra practice whatever you wish to solve can easily do using Bigideas Math Solution Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10. Improve problem-solving capacity by using Big Ideas Math Answer Grade 1. Just click on the below links and gain knowledge on this chapter.

Vocabulary

Lesson 1: Add 0

Lesson 2 Subtract 0 and Subtract All

Lesson 3: Add and Subtract 1

Lesson 4: Add Doubles from 1 to 5

Lesson 5: Use Doubles

Lesson 6: Add in Any Order

Lesson 7: Count on to Add

Lesson 8: Count Back to Subtract

Lesson 9: Use Addition to Subtract

Performance Task

Fluency and Strategies within 10 Vocabulary

Organize It

Review words:
addend
sum
difference

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Vocabulary-Question-1
Explanation:
A number that is added to another number is known as an addend.
In this case, 3 and 4 are the addends.
Sum is the result of adding two numbers.
So, 3 + 4 = 7
7 is the result that means sum.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Vocabulary-Question-2

Define It

Use your vocabulary cards to match.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Vocabulary-Define-it

Explanation:
A number line can be defined as a straight line with numbers placed at equal intervals or segments along its length. A number line can be extended infinitely in any direction and is usually represented horizontally.
Count on is nothing the count that goes forward.
Count back is nothing but count that goes backward.

Lesson 2.1 Add 0

Explore and Grow

Use linking cubes to model each story.

There are 6 ducks in the pond. 0 ducks join them. How many ducks are in the pond flow?

____ ducks

Answer:
Number of ducks in pond = 6
Number of ducks joined= 0
Total number of ducks= 6+0=6 Ducks

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 4
Answer:
Number of ducks in pond = 0
Number of ducks joined= 8
Total number of ducks= 0+8=8 ducks

Show and Grow

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 5
Answer:
4 + 0 = 4

Explanation:
By seeing the above picture we say that one of the addend is 4 and another addend is 0.
Now add both the numbers
4 + 0 = 4
Thus the result is 4.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 6
Answer:
0 + 1=1
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 1 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 1 = 1
Thus the result is 1.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 7
Answer:
0 + 6 = 6
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 6 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 6 = 6
Thus the result is 6

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 8
Answer:
8 + 0 = 8
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 8 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
8 + 0 = 8
Thus the result is 8.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 9
Answer:
7 + 0 = 7
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 7 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
7 + 0= 7
Thus the result is 7.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 10
Answer:
0 + 10 = 10
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 10 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 10 = 10
Thus the result is 10.

Question 7.
9 + 0 = _____
Answer:
9 + 0 = 9
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 9 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
9 + 0 = 9
Thus the result is 9.

Question 8.
0 + 8 = ______
Answer:
0 + 8 = 8
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 8 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 8 = 8
Thus the result is 8.

DIG DEEPER!
Find each sum. Think: What do you notice?

Question 9.
3 + 0 = ______
0 + 3 = ______
Answer:
3 + 0 = 3
0 + 3 = 3
We notice that any number added with 0 will be the same number.

Question 10.
0 + 6 = ______
6 + 0 = ______
Answer:
0 + 6 = 6
6 + 0 = 6
We notice that any number added with 0 will be the same number.

Question 11.
MP Logic
There are 7 penguins in all. How many penguins are inside the igloo?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 11
Answer:
Total Number of penguins = 7
Number of penguins outside = 7
Number of penguins inside = x
x + 7 = 7
x = 0

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are no students at a bus stop. Then 9 students arrive. How many students are at the bus stop now?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 12
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 13
Addition equation:

_________ students
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.1-Add-0-Think-Grow
0 + 9 = 9
Number of students at bus stop = 9 students
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 9 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 9 = 9
Thus the result is 9.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
Your friend does not have any tokens. You give your friend 7 tokens. How many tokens does your friend have now?
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 14
Addition equation:

__________ tokens
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.1-Add-0-Show-Grow-Question-12
0 + 7 = 7
Number of tokens with my friend = 7 tokens
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 7 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 7 = 7
Thus the result is 7.

Add 0 Practice 2.1

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 15
________ + 0 = _________
Answer:
9 + 0 = 9
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 9 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
9 + 0 = 9
Thus the result is 9.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 16
________ + 0 = _________
Answer:
0 + 3 = 3
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 3 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 3 = 3
Thus the result is 3

Question 3.
10 + 0 = ________
Answer:
10 + 0 = 10
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 10 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
10 + 0 = 10
Thus the result is 10.

Question 4.
0 + 5 = _______
Answer:
0 + 5 = 5
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 5 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 5 = 5
Thus the result is 5.

Question 5.
0 + 6 = _______
Answer:
0 + 6 = 6
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 6 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 6 = 6
Thus the result is 6.

Question 6.
0 + 0 = _______
Answer:
0 + 0 =0
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 0 = 0
Thus the result is 0.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Find each sum. Think: What do you notice?
7 + 0 = ______
0 + 7 = ______
Answer:
7 + 0 = 7
0 + 7 = 7
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 1 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. If the order of the addends changes, the sum stays the same.Now add both the numbers
0 + 1 = 1
Thus the result is 1.

Question 8.
MP Logic
There are 8 students in all. How many students are inside the museum?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 17
Answer:
Number of students = 8
Number of students out side the museum= 8
Number of students inside the museum=  x
x + 8 = 8
x = 0
Number of students inside the museum = 0

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
There are no seals on the shore. Then 10 seals swim to the shore. How many seals are on the shore now?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 18
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 19

__________ seals
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Add-0-Practice-2.1-Question-9
0 + 10 = 10
Number of seals on the shore = 0 + 10 = 10 seals
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 10 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
0 + 10 = 10
Thus the result is 10.

Review & Refresh

Write the number of goldfish.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 20
Answer:
1
Explanation:
As per above figure we notice only 1 goldfishes in the aquarium.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 21
Answer:
3
Explanation:
As per above figure we notice 3 goldfishes in the aquarium.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 22
Answer:
0
Explanation:
As per above figure we notice no goldfish in the aquarium.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 23
Answer:
2
Explanation:
As per above figure we notice 2 goldfishes in the aquarium.

Lesson 2.2 Subtract 0 and Subtract All

Explore and Grow

Use linking cubes to model each story.

There are 5 beavers on the log. None of the beavers leave. How many beavers are left?

________ beavers
Answer:
Number of beavers = 5
Number of beavers leave= 0
Number of beavers Remaining = 5 – 0 = 5

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 24
There are 5 beavers on the log. All of the beavers leave. How many beavers are left?

_________ beavers

Answer:
Number of beavers = 5
Number of beavers left = 5
Number of beavers remaining =5 – 5 = 0

Show and Grow

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 25
_________ – 0 = ________
Answer:
2 – 0  = 2
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 2 is minuend and 0 is subtrahend. Subtracting 0 from any number gives the number itself as the difference. Now subtract the 2 and 0
2 – 0 = 2
Thus the difference is 2

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 26
_________ – _________ = 0
Answer:
1 – 1 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 27
_________ – 0 = _________
Answer:
4 – 0 = 4
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 4 is minuend and 0 is subtrahend. Subtracting 0 from any number gives the number itself as the difference. Now subtract the 4 and 0
4 – 0 = 4
Thus the difference is 4

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 28
_________ – _________ = 0
Answer:
2 – 2 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 29
_________ – 0 = _________

Answer:
8 – 0 = 8
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 8 is minuend and 0 is subtrahend. Subtracting 0 from any number gives the number itself as the difference. Now subtract the 2 and 0
8 – 0 = 8
Thus the difference is 8

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 30
_________ – _________ = 0
Answer:
8 – 8 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 7.
5 – 5 = _______
Answer:
5 – 5 = 0

Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 8.
6 – 0 = ________
Answer:
6 – 0 = 6
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 6 is minuend and 0 is subtrahend Subtracting 0 from any number gives the number itself as the difference. Now subtract the 6 and 0
6 – 0 = 6
Thus the difference is 6

Question 9.
9 – 0 = ________
Answer:
9 – 0 = 9
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 9 is minuend and 0 is subtrahend Subtracting 0 from any number gives the number itself as the difference. Now subtract the 9 and 0
9 – 0 = 9
Thus the difference is 9

Question 10.
7 – 7 = ________
Answer:
7 – 7 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 11.
MP Structure
Complete the equation. Then use the words to complete the sentence.

Words:
difference
number
subtract

4 – ______ = 4
When you ______ 0 from a number,  the ______ is that ______ .
Answer:
4 – 0 = 4
When you subtract 0 from a number,  the number is that difference.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Your friend has 7 pennies. You have 7 fewer pennies than your friend. How many do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 31
Draw a picture:

Subtraction equation:

_________ pennies
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson -2.2-Subtract-0-Subtract-All-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Number of pennies with my friend = 7
Number of pennies with me  = x
x = 7 – 7 (7 fewer than my friend )
x = 0
Number of pennies with me = 0

Show and Grow

Question 12.
You have 6 pieces of chalk. You give all of your chalk to your friend. How many pieces do you have left?
Draw a picture:

Subtraction equation:

_________ pieces of chalk
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson -2.2-Subtract-0-Subtract-All--Show-Grow-Question-12
Number of chalks with me = 6
Number of chalks given to my friend = 6
Number of chalks remaining with me = 6 – 6 = 0

Subtract 0 and Subtract All Practice 2.2

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 32
________ – 0 = ________
Answer:
5 – 0 = 5

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 33
________ – _______ = 0
Answer:
5 – 5 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 3.
3 – 3 = _______
Answer:
3 – 3 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 4.
1 – 0 = _________
Answer:
1 – 0 = 1

Question 5.
1 – 1= _________
Answer:
1 – 1= 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 6.
7 – 0 = _________
Answer:
7 – 0 = 7

Question 7.
MP Structure
Complete the equation. Then use the words to complete the sentence.

Words:
difference
number
subtract

9 – ______ = 0
When you ______ a ______ from itself, the ______________ is 0.

Answer:
9 – 9 = 0
When you subtract a number from itself, the difference is 0

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life You have 4 stuffed animals. You give all of them to your friend. How many stuffed animals do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 34

________ stuffed animals

Answer:
Number of stuffed animals  with me = 4
Number of stuffed animals given to my friend= 4
Number of stuffed animals remaining = 4 – 4 = 0

Review & Refresh

Write the number of dots you see on each domino. Then write the numbers in order.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 35
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Subtract-0-Subtract-All-Practice-2.2-Question-9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 36
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Subtract-0-Subtract-All-Practice-2.2-Question-10

Lesson 2.3 Add and Subtract 1

Explore and Grow

Use linking cubes to model each story.

There are 7 kids on the bench. 1 kid joins them. How many kids are on the bench flow?
__________ kids

Answer:
Number of kids = 7
Number of kids joined = 1
Total number of kids = 7 + 1 = 8
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 37
There are 8 kids on the bench. 1 kid leaves. How many kids are left?
__________ kids

Answer:
Number of kids = 8
Number of kids left = 1
Total number of kids = 8 – 1 = 7

Show and Grow

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 38
___________ – __________ = ___________
Answer:
7 – 1 = 6
Explanation:
From the above figure, we notice six people are playing and one person is leaving . so we get equation as
6 + 1 = 7 .
In Total we notice 7 people in the picture .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 39
___________ + __________ = ___________
Answer:
7 + 1 = 8
Explanation:
From the above figure, we notice 7 people are playing and 1 person is joining. so we get equation as
7 + 1 = 8 .
In Total we notice 8 people in the picture .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 40
___________ + __________ = ___________
Answer:
9 + 1 = 10
Explanation:
From the above picture we notice 9 people in the pool and 1 person is joining the pool. so total number of people in pool is 9 + 1 = 10 .
Thus Total people in the pool are 10 people.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 41
___________ + __________ = ___________
Answer:
8 + 1 = 9
Explanation:
From the above picture we notice 8 people in the pool and 1 person is leaving the pool. so total number of people in the picture is 8 + 1 = 9 .
Thus Total people are 9 people.

Question 5.
5 – 1 = ________
Answer:
5 – 1 = 4
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 5 is minuend and 1 is subtrahend.
Now subtract
5 – 1 = 4
Thus the difference is 4

Question 6.
6 + 1 = ________
Answer:
6 + 1 = 7
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 6 and 1 are addends .Now add both the numbers
6 + 1 = 7
Therefore the sum is 7.

Question 7.
8 + 1 = ________
Answer:
8 + 1 = 9
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 8 and 1 are addends .Now add both the numbers
8 + 1 = 9
Therefore the sum is 9.

Question 8.
7 – 1 = ________
Answer:
7 – 1 = 6
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 7 is minuend and 1 is subtrahend.
Now subtract
7 – 1 = 6
Thus the difference is 6

DIG DEEPER!
Circle the problem with the greater sum or difference.
Question 9.
2 – 1                2 + 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.3-Add-Subtract-1-Question-9
Explanation:
from above equations we get
2 – 1 = 1 as difference and
2 + 1 = 3 as sum
now compare difference and sum
1 < 3
Therefore , 3 is greater than 1

Question 10.
5 + 1              6 – 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.3-Add-Subtract-1-Question-10
Explanation:
from above equations we get
6 –  1 = 5 as difference and
5 + 1 = 6 as sum
now compare difference and sum
6 > 5
Therefore , 6 is greater than 5

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Circle to show who is correct. Show how you know?
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.3-Add-Subtract-1-Question-11
Explanation:
when a given number is increased by 1 then we get the next number of that number, Also, we know that a next number of a number is called successor.
From the number line we can notice when 3 is added with 1 we get 4 as sum which is next number of 3.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 9 action figures. Newton has 1 more than you. Descartes has 1 fewer than you. Who has more, Newton or Descartes?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 43

Equations:            Newton            Descartes

Who has more    Newton           Descartes
Answer:
Number of action figures with me= 9
Number of action figures with Newton = 9 + 1 = 10
Number of action figures with Descartes = 9 – 1 = 8
Newton has 2 more action figures than Descartes.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
You have 5 video games. Newton has 1 fewer than you. Descartes has 1 more than you. Who has fewer, Newton or Descartes?
Equations:            Newton            Descartes

Who has fewer?    Newton           Descartes
Answer:
Number of video games with me = 5
Number of video games with Newton  = 5 – 1 = 4
Number of video games with Descartes = 5 + 1 = 6
Newton has 2 fewer than Descartes.

Add and Subtract 1 Practice 2.3

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 44
___________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
5 + 1 = 6
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 5 and 1 are addends .when a given number is increased by 1 then we get the next number of that number as sum, next number of 5 is 6
Now add both the numbers
5 + 1 = 6
Therefore the sum is 6.

Question 2.

___________ – ___________ = ___________
Answer:
5 – 1 = 4
Explanation:
when a number is reduced by 1, then we get the previous number of that number as difference.
previous number of 5 is 4 .
Therefore difference = 4

Question 3.
10 – 1 = ___________
Answer:
10 – 1 = 9
Explanation:
when a number is reduced by 1, then we get the previous number of that number as difference.
previous number of 10 is 9 .
Therefore difference = 9

Question 4.
7 + 1 = ___________
Answer:
7 + 1 = 8
Explanation:
From the above Equation we notice 7 and 1 are addends .when a given number is increased by 1 then we get the next number of that number as sum, next number of 7 is 8
Now add both the numbers
7 + 1 = 8
Therefore the sum is 8.

DIG DEEPER!
Circle the problem with the greater sum or difference.
Question 5.
4 – 1 4 + 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Add-Subtract-1-Practice-2.3-Question-5
Explanation:
from above equations we get
4 – 1 = 3 as difference and
4 + 1 = 5 as sum
now compare difference and sum
3 < 5
Therefore , 5 is greater than 3

Question 6.
7 + 1 8 + 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Add-Subtract-1-Practice-2.3-Question-6
Explanation:
from above equations we get
7 + 1 = 8 as sum and
8 + 1 = 9 as sum
now compare both the sums
8 < 9
Therefore , 9 is greater than 8

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Circle to show who is correct. Show how you know.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 46
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Add-Subtract-1-Practice-2.3-Question-7
Explanation:
when a number is reduced by 1, then we get the previous number of that number as difference.
previous number of 6 is 5 .
Therefore difference = 5

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You have 3 karate belts. Newton has I fewer than you. Descartes has I more than you. Who has fewer, Newton or Descartes?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 47
Who has fewer?           Newton          Descartes
Answer:
Number of karate belts = 3
Number of belts with Newton = 3 – 1 = 2
Number of belts with Descartes = 3 + 1 = 4
Newton have 2 fewer belts than Descartes.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Use the picture to complete the number bond.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 48
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Add-Subtract-1-Practice-2.3-Question-9

Lesson 2.4 Add Doubles from 1 to 5

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model the story.

You have 3 balls. Your friend has 3 balls. How many balls are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 49
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.4 -Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Explore-Grow
Explanation:
Here we have 2 groups . each group contains 3 balls.
So total number of groups = 2
Total number of balls  = 3 + 3 = 6

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 50
___________ – ___________ = ___________
Answer:
4 – 4 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 51
___________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
1 + 1 = 2
Explanation:
when a given number is increased by 1 then we get the next number of that number, Also, we know that a next number of a number is called successor.
The next number of 1 is 2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 52
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.4 -Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Show-Grow-Question-3
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
4 + 4 = 8
Therefore the sum is 8.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 53
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.4 -Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 3 are addends .Now add both the numbers
3 + 3 = 6
Therefore the sum is 6.

Apply and grow: Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 54
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.4 -Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 5 are addends .Now add both the numbers
5 + 5 = 10
Therefore the sum is 10.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 55
Answer:
2 + 2 = 4
2 – 2 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 7.
2 + 2 = ______
Answer:
2 + 2 = 4
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 2 are addends .Now add both the numbers
2 + 2 = 4
Therefore the sum is 4.

Question 8.
5 + 5 = _______
Answer:
5 + 5 = 10
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 5 are addends .Now add both the numbers
5 + 5 = 10
Therefore the sum is 10.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 56
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.4 -Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-9
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 3 are addends .Now add both the numbers
3 + 3 = 6
Therefore the sum is 6.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 57
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.4 -Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-10
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
4 + 4 = 8
Therefore the sum is 8.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Circle the equations you can complete using doubles.
________ + ________ =               6 ________ + ________ = 5

________ + ________ =               9 ________ + ________ = 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.4 -Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-11

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You and your friend color the same number of pictures. There are to pictures in all. How many pictures do you each color?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 58
Draw a Picture:

Addition equation:

__________ pictures

Show and Grow

Question 12.
You and your friend have the same number of flowers. There are 8 flowers in all. How many flowers do you each have?
Draw a picture:

Addition equation:

________ flowers
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.4 -Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Show-Grow-Question-12
Number of flowers with me = x
Number of flowers with my friend = x
Total number of flowers = 8
x + x = 8
4 + 4 = 8.

Add Doubles from 1 to 5 Practice 2.4

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 59
___________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
4 + 4 = 8

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 60
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Practice-2.4-Question-2

Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 3 are addends .Now add both the numbers
3 + 3 = 6
Therefore the sum is 6.

Question 3.
2 + 2 = ________
Answer:
2 + 2 = 4
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 2 are addends .Now add both the numbers
2 + 2 = 4
Therefore the sum is 4.

Question 4.
4 + 4 = _________
Answer:
4 + 4 = 8
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
4 + 4 = 8
Therefore the sum is 8.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 61
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Practice-2.4-Question-5
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 5 are addends .Now add both the numbers
5 + 5 = 10
Therefore the sum is 10.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 62
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Practice-2.4-Question-6
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 3 are addends .Now add both the numbers
3 + 3 = 6
Therefore the sum is 6.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Circle the equations you can complete using doubles.
_________ + _________ = 3            _________ + _________= 8

_________ + _________ = 4            _________ + _________ = 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Practice-2.4-Question-7

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Newton and Descartes each have the same number of linking cubes. There are 6 linking cubes in all. How many linking cubes do Newton and Descartes have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 63

 

________ linking cubes
Answer:
Total Number of linking cubes = 6.
Newton and Descartes each have the same number of linking cubes
Each have 3 linking cubes
3 + 3 = 6.
Newton and Descartes each have 3 linking cubes.

Review & Refresh

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 64
___________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
2 + 3 = 5
Explanation:
we notice 2 hippos in the mud and 3 hippos came to join them.
so total number of hippos are add 2 and 3
Total number of hippos = 2 + 3 = 5

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 65
___________ + ___________ = ___________
Answer:
4 + 5 = 9
Explanation:
We notice 4 zebras eating grass and 5 zebras joining them
so total number of zebras are add 4 and 5
Total number of zebras = 4 + 5 = 9

Lesson 2.5 Use Doubles

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model the story.

You collect 4 shells. Your friend collects 4 shells. How many shells are there in all?

____ shells

Answer:
Number of shells with me = 4
Number of shells with my friend= 4
Total Number of shells = 4 + 4 = 8

You collect 4 shells. Your friend collects 5 shells. How many shells are there in all?

 

____ shells
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 66
Answer:
Number of shells with me = 4
Number of shells with my friend= 5
Total Number of shells = 4 + 5 = 9

Show and Grow

Use the double 3 + 3 to find each sum.

Question 1.
3 + 4 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 67
Answer:
3 + 3 + 1 = 7

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 68
Answer:
3 + 3 – 1 = 5

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the double 2 + 2 to find each sum.

Question 2.
2 + 3 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 69
Answer:
2 + 2 + 1 =5

2 + 1 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 70
Answer:
2 + 2 – 1 = 3

Find the sum. Write the double you used.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 71
Answer:
3 + 4 = 7
3 + 3 + 1 = 6 + 1 = 7

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 72
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10- Lesson-2.5-Use-Doubles-Question-4

Question 5.
MP Number Sense
Use each card once to write two addition equations.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 73
Answer:
2 + 2 = 4
2 + 3 = 5

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You eat 4 grapes. Your friend eats I more than you. How many grapes do you and your friend eat in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 74
Which doubles can you use to find the sum?
4 + 4              5 + 5                3 + 3
Addition equation:

__________ grapes
Answer:
Number of grapes ate by me = 4
Number of grapes ate by my friend = 4 + 1
Number of grapes eaten = 4 + 4 + 1 = 9
4 + 4 is used to find the sum

Show and Grow

Question 6.
You have 5 toy cars. Your friend has I fewer than you. How many cars do you and your friend have in all?

Which doubles can you use to find the sum?
4 + 4            6 + 6              5 + 5
Addition equation:

 

_________ toy cars
Answer:
Number of toy cars with me = 5
Number of toy cars with my friend = 5 – 1
Total Number of cars = 5 + 5 – 1 = 10 – 1 = 9

Use Doubles Practice 2.5

Use the double 4 + 4 to find each sum.

Question 1.
4 + 5 = _______
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 75
Answer:
4 + 4 + 1 = 8 + 1 = 9

4 + 3 = _______
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 76
Answer:
4 + 4 – 1 = 8 – 1 = 7

Find the sum. Write the double you used.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 77
Answer:
1 + 1 = 2
1 + 2 = 3

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 78
Answer:
1 + 1 = 2
3 + 2 = 5

Question 4.
Number Sense
Use each card once to write two addition equations.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 79
Answer:
2 + 3 = 5
3 + 3 = 6

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Newton catches 2 butterflies. Descartes catches I more than Newton. How many butterflies do Newton and Descartes catch in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 80
Which doubles can you use to find the sum?
3 + 3              1 + 1              2 + 2

 

_________ butterflies
Answer:
Number of butterflies with Newton = 2
Number of butterflies with Descartes = 2 + 1.
Total number of butterflies both caught = 2 + 2 + 1 = 4 + 1 = 5

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Circle the model that shows the missing number.
2 + ______ = 5
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 81
Answer:
2 + 3 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10- Lesson-2.5-Use-Doubles-Question-6

Lesson 2.6 Add in Any Order

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model each problem. What do you notice?

4 + 3 = ____7_____

3 + 4 = ___7______

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 82
_________ + _________ = _________
Answer:
2 + 4 = 6
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 2 and 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
2 + 4 = 6
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 6

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 83
_________ + _________ = _________
Answer:
4 + 2 = 6
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 2 and 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
2 + 4 = 6

Question 2.Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 6
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 84
_________ + _________ = _________
Answer:
7 + 1 = 8
Explanation:
when a given number is increased by 1 then we get the next number of that number as sum.
The next number of 7 is 8 as sum.
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 8

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 85
_________ + _________ = _________
Answer:
1 + 7 = 8
Explanation:
when a given number is increased by 1 then we get the next number of that number as sum.
The next number of 7 is 8 as sum.
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 8

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 86
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10- Lesson-2.6-Add-Any-Order- Show and Grow-Question-3

2 + 3 = 5
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 2 and 3 are addends .Now add both the numbers
2 + 3 = 5
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 5

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 87
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10- Lesson-2.6-Add-Any-Order- Show and Grow-Question-3.

Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 2 and 3 are addends .Now add both the numbers
3 + 2 = 5
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 5

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 88
_________ + _________ = _________
Answer:
7 + 3 = 10
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 7 and 3 are addends .Now add both the numbers
7 + 3 = 10
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 10

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 89
_________ + _________ = _________
Answer:
3 + 7 = 10
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 3 and 7 are addends .Now add both the numbers
3 + 7 = 10
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 10

Find the sum. Then change the order of the addends. Write the new addition problem.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 90
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10- Lesson-2.6-Add-Any-Order- Show and Grow-Question-5
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 1 and 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
1 + 4 = 5 or 4 + 1 = 5
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 5

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 91
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10- Lesson-2.6-Add-Any-Order- Show and Grow-Question-6

Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 5 and 2 are addends .Now add both the numbers
5 + 2 = 7 or 2 + 5 = 7
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 7

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 92
Answer:
2 + 6 = 8
6 + 2 = 8
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 6 and 2 are addends .Now add both the numbers
6 + 2 = 8 or 2 + 6 = 8
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 8

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 93
Answer:
9 = 8 + 1
9 = 1 + 8
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 8 and 1 are addends .Now add both the numbers
8 + 1 = 9 or 1 + 8 = 9
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 9

Question 9.
MP Number Sense
Use the numbers shown to write two addition equations.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 94
Answer:
4 + 5 = 9
5 + 4 = 9
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 4 and 5 are addends .Now add both the numbers
4 + 5 = 9 or 5 + 4 = 9
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 9

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 7 shirts. 3 are green. The rest are blue. How many blue shirts do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 95
Which equations describe your shirts?
3 + 4 = 7            3 + 7 = 10
7 + 3 = 10          4 + 3 = 7
Show how you know:

You have ____ blue shirts.
Answer:
Number of green shirts = 3
Number of blue shirts  =  X
Total number of shirts = 7
3 + X = 7
X = 7 – 3 = 4
Number of blue shirts = 4
Equation: 3 + 4 = 7 or 4 + 3 = 7

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You have 5 cups. 2 are yellow. The rest are red. How many red cups do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 96
Which equations describe your cups?
5 + 2 = 7               2 + 3 = 5
2 + 5 = 7               3 + 2 = 5
Show how you know:

You have ____ red cups.
Answer:
Number of red cups = x
Number of yellow cups = 2
Total number of cups = 5
x + 2 = 5
x = 5 – 2 = 3
Number of red cups = 3
Equation : 3 + 2 = 5 or 2 + 3 = 5

Add in Any Order Practice 2.6

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 97

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 98
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10- Add-in-Any-Order-Practice-2.6-Question-1
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 3 and 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
3 + 4 = 7 or 4 + 3 = 7
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 7

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 99
Answer:
7 + 2 = 9

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 100
Answer:
2 + 7 = 9
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 2 and 7 are addends .Now add both the numbers
2 + 7= 9 or 7 + 2 = 9
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 9

Find the sum. Then change the order of the addends. Write the new addition problem.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 101
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10- Add-in-Any-Order-Practice-2.6-Question-3
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 6 and 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
6 + 4 = 10 or 4 + 6 = 10
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 10

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 102
Answer:
6 = 5 + 1
6 = 1 + 5
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 6 and 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
5 + 1 = 6 or 1 + 5 = 6
when a given number is increased by 1 then we get the next number of that number as sum
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 6

Question 5.
MP Number Sense
Use the numbers shown to write two addition equations.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 103
Answer:
2 + 8 = 10
8 + 2 = 10
Explanation:
From the above equations we notice 2 and 8 are addends .Now add both the numbers
2 + 8 = 10 or 8 + 2 = 10
Whatever may be the order of addends the sum is always the same.
Therefore the sum is 10

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You have 7 tomatoes. 2 are red. The rest are yellow. How many yellow tomatoes do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 104
Which equations describe your tomatoes?
2 + 5 = 7 5 + 2 = 7
7 + 2 = 9 2 + 7 = 9
Show how you know:

You have _______ yellow tomatoes.
Answer:
Total number of tomatoes = 7
Number of red tomatoes = 2
Number of yellow tomatoes = x
Explanation:
7 = 2 + x
x = 7 – 2 = 5
Number of yellow tomatoes = 5
Equations: 2 + 5 = 7 or 5 + 2 = 7

Review & Refresh

Use the ten frame to complete the equation.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 105
5 + _______ = 8
Answer:
5 + 3 = 8
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice to get 8 as sum what should be added for 5
if we add 3 to 5 we get 8 as sum.
Therefore 5 + 3 = 8 .

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 106
5 + ________ = 10
Answer:
5 + 5 = 10
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice to get 10 as sum what should be added for 5
if we add 5 to 5 we get 10 as sum.
Therefore 5 + 5 = 10 .

Lesson 2.7 Count on to Add

Explore and Grow

Model the story.

There are 5 coins in a piggy bank. You put in 2 more. How many coins are in the bank now?

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 107
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Explore-Grow
Number of coins in piggy bank = 5
Number of coins added = 2
Total coins = 5 + 2 = 7.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
7 + 2 = _________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 108
Answer:
7 + 2 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 7 and 2, start from 7 and count on 2 steps to arrive at the sum (9).

Question 2.
3 + 1 = ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 109
Answer:
3 + 1 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 3 and 1, start from 3 and count on 1 step to arrive at the sum (4).

Question 3.
4 + 6 = ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 110
Answer:
4 + 6 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-Strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Show-Grow-Question-3
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 4 and 6, start from 4 and count on 6 steps to arrive at the sum (10).

Question 4.
0 + 5 = ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 111
Answer:
0 + 5 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Show-Grow-Question-4

Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 0 and 5, start from 0 and count on 5 steps to arrive at the sum (5).

Apply and Grow: practice

Question 5.
4 + 2 = _________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 112
Answer:
4 + 2 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Apply-Grow-practice-Question-5
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 4 and 2, start from 4 and count on 2 steps to arrive at the sum (6).

Question 6.
6 + 1 = ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 112
Answer:
6 + 1 = 7

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Apply-Grow-practice-Question-6
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 6 and 1, start from 6 and count on 1 step to arrive at the sum (7).

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 113
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Apply-Grow-practice-Question-7
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 5 and 4 are addends .Now add both the numbers
5 + 4 = 9
Therefore the sum is 9.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 114
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Apply-Grow-practice-Question-8
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 3 and 2 are addends .Now add both the numbers
3 + 2 = 5
Therefore the sum is 5.

Question 9.
________ = 0 + 7
Answer:
7 = 0 + 7
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 7 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself.Now add both the numbers
0 + 7 = 7
Thus the result is 7.

Question 10.
________ = 2 + 8
Answer:
10 = 2 + 8
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 8 and 2 are addends .Now add both the numbers
2 + 8 = 10
Therefore the sum is 10.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Tell what problems Newton and Descartes solved. Think: How are the problems the same? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 115
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You and your friend are on a scavenger hunt. You find 3 clues. You and your friend find 8 clues in all. How many clues does your friend find?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 116
Model:

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 117

______ clues
Answer:
Number of clues with me = 3
Number of clues with my friend = x
Total number of clues = 8
Explanation:
3 + x = 8
x = 8 – 3 = 5
Number of clues with my friend = 5
Equation: 3 + 5 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 3 and 5 start from 3 and count on 5 steps to arrive at the sum (8).

Show and Grow

Question 12.
Your friend collects 4 cans. You and your friend collect 10 cans in all. How many cans do you collect?
Model:

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 117

________ cans
Answer:
Number of cans with my friend = 4
Total number of cans = 10
Number of cans with me  = X
Explanation:
4 + X = 10
X= 10 – 4 = 6
Number of cans with me = 6
Equation: 4 + 6 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.7-Count-on-to-Add-Show-Grow- Question-12
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 4 and 6, start from 4 and count on 6 steps to arrive at the sum (10).

Count on to Add Practice 2.7

Question 1.
4 + 3 = ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 118
Answer:
4 + 3 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10- Count-on-to-Add-Practice-2.7-Question-1
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 4 and 3 start from 3 and count on 3 steps to arrive at the sum (7).

Question 2.
8 + 1 = ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 118
Answer:
8 + 1 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10- Count-on-to-Add-Practice-2.7-Question-2
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 8 and 1 start from 8 and count on 1 step to arrive at the sum (9).

Question 3.
6 + 2 = ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 118
Answer:
6 + 2 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10- Count-on-to-Add-Practice-2.7-Question-3
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 6 and 2 start from 6 and count on 2 steps to arrive at the sum (8).

Question 4.
7 + 3 = ________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 118
Answer:
7 + 3 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10- Count-on-to-Add-Practice-2.7-Question-4
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 7 and 3 start from 7 and count on 3 steps to arrive at the sum (10).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 119
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10- Count-on-to-Add-Practice-2.7-Question-5

Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 0 and 9 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself.Now add both the numbers
0 + 9 = 9
Thus the result is 9.

Question 6.
______ = 1 + 5
Answer:
6 = 1 + 5
Explanation:
when a given number is increased by 1 then we get the next number of that number as sum.
The next number of 5 is 6
Therefore sum = 6 .

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Tell what problems Newton and Descartes solved. Think: How are the problems the same? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 120Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 120
Answer:
Both the problems are the same .
sum is the same only the order of the addends are different .
Newton have 3 and 4 as addends 3 added to 4 whereas in Descartes the 4 is added to 3. whatever may be the order of addends the sum will always be the same .
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10- Count-on-to-Add-Practice-2.7-Question-7

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You have 4 coins. You and your friend have 9 coins in all. How many coins does your friend have?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 121
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 118

 

__________ coins
Answer:
Number of coins with me = 4
Number of coins with my friend = X
Total coins = 9
Explanation:
4 + X = 9
X = 9 -4 = 5
Number of coins with my friend = 5
Equation : 4 + 5 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10- Count-on-to-Add-Practice-2.7-Question-8
Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 4 and 5 start from 4 and count on 5 steps to arrive at the sum (9).

Review & Refresh

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 122
Answer:
4 – 1 = 3
Explanation:
when a number is reduced by 1, then we get the previous number of that number as difference.
previous number of 4 is 3 .
Therefore difference = 3

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 123
Answer:
5 – 3 = 2
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 5 is minuend and 3 is subtrahend.
Now subtract
5 – 3 = 2
Thus the difference is 2

Lesson 2.8 Count Back to Subtract

Explore and Grow

Model the story.

There are 8 students in a line. 2 of them leave. How many students are left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 124
Answer:
Number of students = 8
Number of students left = 2
Number of students remained in class = 8 – 2 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Explore-Grow

Show and Grow

Question 1.
5 – 4 = _________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 125
Answer:
5 – 4 = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-1
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 4 from 5, one can start at 5 and count back 4 steps we get difference as 1.

Question 2.
7 – 3 = ________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 126
Answer:
7 – 3 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-2
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 3 from 7, one can start at 7 and count back 3 steps we get difference as 4.

Question 3.
6 – 1 = _________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 127
Answer:
6 – 1 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-3
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 1 from 6, one can start at 6 and count back 1 step we get difference as 5.

Question 4.
10 – 8 = ________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 127
Answer:
10 – 8 = 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-4
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 8 from 10, one can start at 10 and count back 8 steps we get difference as 2.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
10 – 6 = _________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 127
Answer:
10 – 6 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 6 from 10, one can start at 10 and count back 6 steps we get difference as 4.

Question 6.
9 – 3 = _________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 127
Answer:
9 – 3 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 3 from 9, one can start at 9 and count back 3 steps we get difference as 6.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 128
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-7
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 5 is minuend and 2 is subtrahends. Now subtract the 5 and 2
5 – 2 = 3
Thus the difference is 3

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 129
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-8

Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 8 is minuend and 0 is subtrahends Subtracting 0 from any number gives the number itself as the difference. Now subtract the 8 and 0
8 – 0 = 8
Thus the difference is 8

Question 9.
________ = 7 – 6
Answer:
1

Question 10.
_________ = 4 – 1
Answer:
3

Question 11.
MP Structure
Write the problem shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 130
_________ – _________ = ________
Answer:
9 – 5 = 4
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 5 from 9, one can start at 9 and count back 5 steps we get difference as 4.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 5 students on one side of a table and 5 students on the other. 7 students leave. How many students are left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 131
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 132

__________ students
Answer:
Total Number of students = 5 + 5 = 10
Number of students left = 7
Remaining Number of students = 10 – 7 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Think- Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 7 from 10, one can start at 10 and count back 7 steps we get difference as 3

Show and Grow

Question 12.
You have 4 board games and 4 card games. You give 3 games to your friend. How many games do you have left?
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 132

 

__________ games
Answer:
Total Number of games  = 4 + 4 = 8
Number of games given to my friend = 3
Remaining Number of games with me =8 – 3 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson-2.8-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-12
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 3 from 8, one can start at 8 and count back 3 steps we get difference as 5

Count Back to Subtract Practice 2.8

Question 1.
5 – 4 = ________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 133
Answer:
5 – 4 = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Practice-2.8-Question-1
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 4 from 5, one can start at 5 and count back 4 steps we get difference as 1

Question 2.
8 – 3 = ________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 133
Answer:
8 – 3 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Practice-2.8-Question-2
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 3 from 8, one can start at 8 and count back 3 steps we get difference as 5

Question 3.
9 – 1 = ________
Answer:
9 – 1 = 8
Explanation:
when a number is reduced by 1, then we get the previous number of that number as difference.
previous number of 9 is 8 .
Therefore difference = 8

Question 4.
6 – 2 = ________
Answer:
6 – 2 = 4
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 6 is minuend and 2 is subtrahend.
Now subtract
6 – 2 = 4
Thus the difference is 4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 134
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Practice-2.8-Question-5
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 7 is minuend and 5 is subtrahend.
Now subtract
7 – 5 = 2
Thus the difference is 2

Question 6.
__________ = 10 – 5
Answer:
5
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 10 is minuend and 5 is subtrahend.
Now subtract
10 – 5 = 5
Thus the difference is 5

Question 7.
MP Structure
Write the problem shown.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 135
__________ – _________ = _________
Answer:
9 – 7= 2
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 7 from 9, one can start at 9 and count back 7 steps we get difference as 2

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You have 4 star stickers and 4 heart stickers. You give 6 away. How many stickers do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 136

 

__________ stickers
Answers:
Total Number of stickers = 4 + 4 = 8
Number of stickers given away = 6
Remaining number of stickers = 8 – 6 = 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Practice-2.8-Question-8
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 6 from 8, one can start at 8 and count back 6 steps we get difference as 2

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Use the pictures to write the related equations.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 137
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Practice-2.8-Question-9

Lesson 2.9 Use Addition to Subtract

Explore and Grow

Use counters to model each problem.

 

4 + ___3___ = 7

 

7 – 4 = __3___

Show and Grow

Question 1.
5 – 4 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 138
Think 4 + ______ = 5
So, 5 – 4 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.9-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-1
Think 4 + 1 = 5
So, 5 – 4 = 1 .

Question 2.
6 – 3 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 139
Think 3 + ______ = 6
So, 6 – 3 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.9-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-2
Think 3 + 3 = 6
So, 6 – 3 = 3 .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
8 – 4 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 140
Think 4 + ______ = 8.
So, 8 – 4 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.9-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-3
Think 4 + 4 = 8.
So, 8 – 4 = 4 .

Question 4.
7 – 5 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 141
Think 5 + ______ = 7.
So, 7 – 5 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.9-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-4
Think 5 + 2 = 7.
So, 7 – 5 = 2 .

Question 5.
6 – 4 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 142
Think ______ + ______ = 6.
So, 6 – 4 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.9-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-5
Think 2+ 4 = 6.
So, 6 – 4 = 2 .

Question 6.
9 – 6 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 143
Think ______ + ______ = 9.
So, 9 – 6 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.9-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Apply-Grow-Practice-Question-6
Think 3 + 6 = 9.
So, 9 – 6 =  3 .

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
There are 8 goats. 2 of them leave. Newton uses addition to tell how many goats are left. Is he correct? Show how you know.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 144
Answer:
No, we have to subtract when goats leaves not addition.
8 – 2 = 6

Think and Grow: Modeling Real life

There are 10 puppies. 7 are brown. The rest are yellow. How many puppies are yellow?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 145
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 146
Subtraction equation:

_________ puppies
Answer:
Total number of puppies = 10
Number of brown puppies = 3
Number of yellow puppies = 10 – 3 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.9-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Think-Grow-Modeling-Real-life

Show and Grow

Question 8.
There are 8 eggs. I of them hatches. How many eggs still need to hatch?
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 147
Subtraction equation:

__________ eggs
Answer:
Total number of eggs = 8
Number of eggs hatched = 1.
Numbers of eggs left for hatching = 8 – 1 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Lesson 2.9-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Show-Grow-Question-8

Use Addition to Subtract Practice 2.9

Question 1.
3 – 2 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 148
Think 2 + ______ = 3.
So, 3 – 2 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Practice-2.9-Question-1
Think 2 + 1 = 3.
So, 3 – 2 = 1

Question 2.
10 – 5 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 149
Think 5 + ______ = 10.
So, 10 – 5 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Practice-2.9-Question-2
Think 5 + 5 = 10.
So, 10 – 5 = 5

Question 3.
9 – 5 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 150
Think ______ + ______ = ______.
So, 9 – 5 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Practice-2.9-Question-3
Think 4 + 5 = 9.
So, 9 – 5 = 4

Question 4.
7 – 6 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 151
Think ______ + ______ = ______.
So, 7 – 6 = _______ .
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Practice-2.9-Question-4
Think 1 + 6 = 7.
So, 7 – 6 = 1

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
There are 8 birds. 5 fly away. Descartes uses addition to tell how many birds are left. Is he correct? Show how you know.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 152
Answer:
Numbers of birds = 8
Number of birds flew = 5
Remaining number of birds = 8 – 5 = 3
Descartes is wrong we need to subtract not addition .

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life There are 9 kittens. 7 are adopted. How many kittens still need to be adopted?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 153

_______ kittens
Answer:
Total Number of kittens = 9
Number of kittens  adopted = 7
Number of kittens remaining for adoption = 9 – 7 = 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Practice-2.9-Question-6

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
You have 5 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 154 and 2 Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 155 How many dice do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 156
_________ + _________ = ________ dice
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Practice-2.9-Question-7
5 + 2 = 7
Number of red dices = 5
Number of blue dices = 2
Total dices = 5 + 2 = 7

Fluency and Strategies within 10 Performance Task

Question 1.
You plant 4 red flower seeds and 4 yellow flower seeds. Your friend plants 5 red flower seeds and 4 yellow flower seeds.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 157

a. I of your yellow seeds does not grow. How many of your flowers grow?

_________ flowers
Answer:
Total number flower seeds = 4 + 4 = 8
Number of yellow seeds didn’t grow = 1
Number of your flowers grown = 8 – 1 = 7

b. 3 of your friend’s red seeds do not grow. How many of your friend’s flowers grow?

________ flowers
Answer:
Total number of my friends flowers = 5 + 4 = 9 (red and yellow )
Number of red seeds didn’t grow of my friend’s = 3
Number of your flowers grown of my friend’s= 9 – 3 = 6

c. Who has more flowers?

You       Friend

Answer: I have more flowers

d. How many more red flowers do you have than your friend?

_______ flowers
Answer:
I have 4 red flowers
My friend 2 red flowers (5 – 3 )

Fluency and Strategies within 10 Chapter Practice

Add 0 Homework & Practice 2.1

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 158
_______ + 0 = ________
Answer:
2 + 0 = 2
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 2 and 0 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
2 + 0 = 0
Thus the result is 2.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 159
0 + _______ = ________
Answer:
0 + 5 = 5
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 5 and 0 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
5 + 0 = 0
Thus the result is 5.

Question 3.
7 + 0 = ________
Answer:
7 + 0 = 7
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 7 and 0 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
7 + 0 = 0
Thus the result is 7.

Question 4.
0 + 6 = ________
Answer:
0 + 6 = 6
Explanation:
From the above figure we notice 6 and 0 are addends . Adding 0 to any number gives the sum as the number itself. Now add both the numbers
6 + 0 = 0
Thus the result is 6.

Subtract 0 and Subtract All Homework & Practice 2.2

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 160
________ – 0 = ________
Answer:
7 – 0 = 7
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 7 is minuend and 0 is subtrahends Subtracting 0 from any number gives the number itself as the difference. Now subtract the 7 and 0
7 – 0 = 7
Thus the difference is 7

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 161
_________ – ________ = 0
Answer:
7 – 7 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 7.
9 – 9 = ______
Answer:
9 – 9 = 0
Explanation:
When a number is subtracted from itself the difference is always equal to 0.
Thus the difference is 0

Question 8.
8 – 0 = _______
Answer:
8 – 0 = 8
Explanation:
From the above equation we notice 8 is minuend and 0 is subtrahends Subtracting 0 from any number gives the number itself as the difference. Now subtract the 8 and 0
8 – 0 = 8
Thus the difference is 8

Add and Subtract I Homework & Practice 2.3

Use the picture to write an equation.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 162
________ + ________ = _________
Answer:
8 + 1 = 9
Explanation:
As per the above picture , we can notice 8 people are playing and 1 more person joining them
So total number of people are 8 + 1 = 9
Total number of people = 9

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 163
________ – ________ = _________
Answer:
8 – 1 = 7
Explanation:
As per the above picture , we can notice 7 people are playing and 1 person leaving them
So total number of people are 7 – 1 = 6
Total number of people = 6

Question 11.
3 – 1 = ________
Answer:
3 – 1 = 2
Explanation:
when a number is reduced by 1, then we get the previous number of that number as difference.
previous number of 3 is 2 .
Therefore difference = 2

Question 12.
5 + 1 = ________
Answer:
5 + 1 = 6
Explanation:
when a given number is increased by 1 then we get the next number of that number as sum
Therefore the sum is 6

Add Doubles from 1 to 5 Homework & Practice 2.4

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 164
Answer:
2 + 2 = 4

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 165Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 162
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Homework-Practice-2.4-Question-14
8 + 1 = 9

Question 15.
MP Reasoning
Circle the equations you can complete using doubles.
_________ + ________ = 10 _________ + ________ = 3

_________ + ________ = 6 _________ + ________ = 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Add-Doubles-from-1 to 5-Homework-Practice-2.4-Question-15

Use Doubles Homework & Practice 2.5

Use the doubles 2 + 2 to find each sum.

Question 16.
2 + 3 = _______

Answer:
2 + 3 = 5
2 + 2 + 1 = 5

2 + 1 = _______

Answer:
2 + 1 =3
2 + 2 – 1 = 3

Find the sum. Write the double you used.

Question 17.

Answer:
4 + 5 = 9
5 + 4 = 9

Question 18.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10- Use-Doubles-Homework-Practice-2.5-Question-18

Add in any Order Homework & Practice 2.6

Question 19.

_______ + ______ = ______
Answer:
5 + 2 = 7


_______ + ______ = ______
Answer:
2 + 5 = 7

Question 20.
MP Number Sense
Use the numbers shown to write two addition equations.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 172
Answer:
3 + 6 = 9
6 + 3 = 9

Count on to Add Homework & Practice 2.7

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 173
5 + 2 = _________
Answer:
5 + 2 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Count-Back-to-addition-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-21

Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 5 and 2, start from 5 and count on 2 steps to arrive at the sum (7).

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 173
6 + 4 = __________
Answer:
6 + 4 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Count-Back-to-addition-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-22

Explanation:
Count on method to add numbers. To add 6 and 4, start from 6 and count on 4 steps to arrive at the sum (10).

Count Back to Subtract Homework & Practice 2.8

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 173
9 – 7 = __________
Answer:
9 – 7 = 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-23

Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 7 from 9, one can start at 9 and count back 7 steps we get difference as 2

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 173
10 – 5 = _________
Answer:
10 – 5 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Count-Back-to-Subtract-Homework-Practice-2.8-Question-24
Explanation:
Use the count back method to subtract.To subtract 10 from 5, one can start at 10 and count back 5 steps we get difference as 5

Use Addition to Subtract Homework & Practice 2.9

Question 25.
5 – 3 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 174
Think 3 + ______ = 5.
So, 5 – 3 = ______.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Homework-Practice-2.9-Question-25
Think 3 + 2 = 5.
So, 5 – 3 = 2

Question 26.
9 – 8 =?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 2 Fluency and Strategies within 10 175
Think 8 + ______ = 9.
So, 9 – 8 = ______.
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-Key-Chapter-2-Fluency-strategies-within-10-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Homework-Practice-2.9-Question-26
Think 8 + 1 = 9.
So, 9 – 8 = 1

Conclusion:

Follow Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Answers for the strong foundation. Move with every step of solving the process to solve your problems easily. Get the pdfs of all Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Chapters @bigideasmathanswer.com

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10

Download pdf link of Elementary school Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 is available here. So, the Grade K students who are looking for the Bigideas Math Answer Key 6th Chapter Add Numbers within 10 can Download them from this page. Parents and teachers who feel difficult to teach their children math concepts can make use of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10. Understand the concepts of addition and solve the questions in a simple way.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10

The addition is the most basic and important concept in maths. If you want to become a master in maths it is necessary for elementary school students to learn the basics. Make use of the Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 pdf link to complete your assignment in time. Many different types of problems can be represented by addition or subtraction. The topics covered in this chapter are Understand Addition, Addition: Add To, Addition: Put Together, and so on.

Lesson: 1 Understand Addition

Lesson: 2 Addition: Add To

Lesson: 3 Addition: Put Together

Lesson: 4 Addition: Partner Numbers

Lesson: 5 Addition Number Patterns

Lesson: 6 Practice Addition

Lesson: 7 Use a Group of 5 to Add

Lesson: 8 Add to Make 10

Chapter: 9 – Add Numbers within 10

Add Numbers within 10 Vocabulary

Directions:
Name the parts and the whole for the group. Then complete the number bond.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 v 1

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-v-1

Explanation:
Number bond:
A number bond is a simple addition of two numbers that add up to give the sum. Using number bonds, one can instantly tell the answer without the need for the actual calculation.
Whole: Here we know that 7 is a whole number. The number 5 combines with other number 2 gives the result 7.
Parts: A number can be thought of as a whole made up of different pairs, or parts, added together.

Vocabulary Cards
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 v 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 v 3

Lesson 6.1 Understand Addition

Explore and Grow

Directions: Use counters to act out the story.

  • There are 3 students on the bus. Write the number.
  • 2 more students get on the bus. Write the number.
  • Tell how many students are on the bus now.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 1
Answer: 3 + 2 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-1

Explanation:
There are 3 students on the bus.
2 more students get on the bus.
Add both the numbers to know how many students are on the bus.
3 + 2 = 5

Think and Grow

Directions:
Complete the sentence to tell how many students are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 2
Answer: 1 + 3 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-2

Explanation:
From the above figure we can see that there is 1 student playing in the ground.
Number of students joining are 3
1 + 3 = 4
Thus there are 4 students in all.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Complete the sentence to tell how many students are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 3
Answer: 4 + 1 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-3

Explanation:
From the above figure we can see that there are 4 students.
And 1 student is joining.
Now add 4 and 1 we get 5
4 + 1 = 5
Thus there are 5 students in all.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 4
Answer: 2 + 3 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-4

Explanation:
From the above figure we can see that there are 2 students.
3 students are joining.
Now combine 2 and 3.
2 + 3 = 5
Thus there are 5 students in all.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 5
Answer: 4 + 3 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-5

Explanation:
From the above figure we can see that there are 4 students.
3 students are joining.
Now combine 4 and 3.
4 + 3 = 7
Thus there are 7 students in all.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
5 students are playing basketball. 5 more students join them. Draw the students who join the group. Then complete the sentence to tell how many students are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 6
Answer: 5 + 5 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-6

Explanation:
Given,
5 students are playing basketball. 5 more students join them.
Combine both 5 and 5 we get
5 + 5 = 10
Therefore there are 10 students in all.

Understand Addition Homework & Practice 6.1

Directions:
1 Complete the sentence to tell how many students are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 7
Answer: 3 + 1 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-7

Explanation:
There are 3 students in a group.
1 student is joining the group.
3 + 1 = 4
Thus 4 students are joining in all.

Directions:
2 and 3 Complete the sentence to tell how many students are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all. 4 Draw 3 students who join the group. Then complete the sentence to tell how many students are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 8
Answer: 2 + 4 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-8

Explanation:
From the picture we observe that there are 2 students in the group.
Now 4 students are joining the group.
Combine 2 and 4 we get
2 + 4 = 6

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 9
Answer: 6 + 2 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-9

Explanation:
From the picture we observe that there are 6 students in the group.
Now 2 students are joining the group.
Combine 6 and 2 we get
6 + 2 = 8
Thus there are 8 students in all.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.1 10
Answer: 5 + 3 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.1-10

Explanation:
From the picture we observe that there are 5 students in the group.
Now 3 students are joining the group.
Combine 5 and 3 we get
5 + 3 = 8
Thus there are 8 students in all.

Lesson 6.2 Addition: Add To

Explore and Grow

Directions: Use counters to act out the story.

  • There are 4 elephants in the water. Write the number.
  • 2 more elephants join them. Write the number.
  • Tell how many elephants are in the water now.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 1
Answer: 4 + 2 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-1

Explanation:
There are 4 elephants in the water.
2 more elephants join them.
Combine 4 and 2 we get
4 + 2 = 6
Thus there are 6 elephants in all.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Complete the sentence to tell how many animals are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all. Then complete the addition sentence to match.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 2
Answer: 5 + 2 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-2

Explanation:
There are 5 birds on the tree.
2 more birds are joining the group.
Combine both to know how many birds are on the tree.
5 + 2 = 7

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Complete the sentence to tell how many ducks are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all. Then complete the addition sentence to match. 2 and 3 Complete the addition sentence to tell how many animals there are in all.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 3
Answer: 2 + 2 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-3

Explanation:
There are 2 ducks in the water.
And 2 more ducks are joining them.
Combine both to find how many ducks are in the water.
2 + 2 = 4
Thus there are 4 ducks in all.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 4
Answer: 1 + 5 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-4

Explanation:
There is 1 fish in water.
5 more fishes are joining.
Add 1 and 5 to find how many fishes are there.
1 + 5 = 6
Thus there are 6 fishes in all.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 5
Answer: 2 + 7 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-5

Explanation:
There are 2 frogs.
7 more frogs are joining.
Combine both to find how many frogs are there in all.
2 + 7 = 9
Thus there are 9 frogs in all.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
There are 3 rabbits in a burrow. 6 more rabbits join them. Draw the rabbits that join the group. Then complete the addition sentence to tell how many rabbits there are in all.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 6
Answer: 3 + 6 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-6

Explanation:
There are 3 rabbits in a burrow. 6 more rabbits join them.
3 + 6 = 9
Thus there are 9 rabbits in a burrow.

Addition: Add To Homework & Practice 6.2

Directions:
1 Complete the sentence to tell how many monkeys are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all. Then complete the addition sentence to match.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 7
Answer: 3 + 2 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-7

Explanation:
There are 3 monkeys and 2 monkeys are joining them.
Combine both we get
3 + 2 = 5
Thus there are 5 monkeys in all.

Directions:
2 and 3 Complete the addition sentence to tell how many animals there are in all. 4 Draw 4 mice that join the group. Then complete the addition sentence to tell how many mice there are in all.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 8
Answer: 3 + 1 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-8

Explanation:
There are 3 bees on the tree. 1 bee is joining them.
Add 3 and 1 to find total number of bees.
3 + 1 = 4
Thus there are 4 bees in all.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 9
Answer: 4 + 5 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-9

Explanation:
There are 4 birds and 5 birds are joining them.
4 + 5 = 9
Thus there are 9 birds in all.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.2 10
Answer: 3 + 4 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.2-10

Explanation:
There are 3 rats and 4 rats are joining the group.
3 + 4 = 7
Thus there are 7 rats in all.

Lesson 6.3 Addition: Put Together

Explore and Grow

Directions: Use counters to act out the story.

  • There are 4 pencils in the case. Write the number.
  • There are 3 crayons in the case. Write the number.
  • Tell how many objects are in the case now.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 1
Answer: 4 + 3 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.3-1

Explanation:
There are 4 pencils in the case.
There are 3 crayons in the case.
4 + 3 = 7
Thus there are 7 items in the case.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the groups to put them together. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many objects there are in all.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 2
Answer: 5 + 4 = 9
1 + 7 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.3-2

Explanation:
There are 5 green cubes and 4 orange cubes.
5 + 4 = 9
In the second figure we observe that 1 ball and 7 cubes.
1 + 7 = 8

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Circle the groups to put them together. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many objects there are in all.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 3
Answer: 1 + 3 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.3-3

Explanation:
From the above figure we observe that there is 1 blue cube and 3 purple cubes.
The addition sentence is 1 + 3 = 4
Thus there are 4 cubes in all.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 4
Answer: 3 + 5 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.3-4

Explanation:
There are 3 red circles and 5 yellow squares.
Now write the addition sentence for the above figure
3 + 5 = 8

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 5
Answer: 6 + 3 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.3-5

Explanation:
There are 6 orange squares and 3 orange teddy bears.
We have to write the addition sentence for the above figure.
6 + 3 = 9

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • You have 5 balls of red clay and 1 ball of blue clay. Draw and color the balls of clay. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many balls of clay you have in all.
  • Your friend has 2 balls of red clay and 6 balls of blue clay. Draw and color the balls of clay. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many balls of clay your friend has in all.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 6
Answer:
5 + 1 = 6
2 + 6 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.3-6

Explanation:
You have 5 balls of red clay and 1 ball of blue clay
The addition sentence is 5 + 1 = 6
You have 2 balls of red clay and 6 ball of blue clay
The addition sentence is 2 + 6 = 8

Addition: Put Together Homework & Practice 6.3

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the groups to put them together. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many objects there are in all.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 7
Answer: 1 + 1 = 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.3-7

Explanation:
There is 1 red clay ball and 1 yellow clay ball.
The addition sentence for the above figure is 1 + 1 = 2

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 8
Answer: 4 + 2 = 6

Explanation:
There are 4 red linking cubes and 2 blue cubes.
The addition sentence is 4 + 2 = 6

Directions:
3 Circle the groups to put them together. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many objects there are in all. 4 You have 4 orange marbles and 4 purple marbles. Your friend has 7 orange marbles and 2 purple marbles. Draw and color your marbles and your friend’s marbles. Then write addition sentences to tell how many marbles you each have in all.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 9
Answer: 1 + 8 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.3-9

Explanation:
There is 1 green triangle and 8 teddy bears.
The addition sentence is 1 + 8 = 9

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.3 10

Answer: 4 + 4 = 8
7 + 2 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.3-10

Lesson 6.4 Addition: Partner Numbers

Explore and Grow

Directions:
You have 5 linking cubes. Some are red and some are blue. Color to show how many are red and how many are blue. Then complete the addition sentence to match your picture.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 1
Answer: 5 = 3 + 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-1

Explanation:
Given
You have 5 linking cubes. Some are red and some are blue.
3 are red and 2 are blue linking cubes
3 + 2 = 5

Think and Grow

Directions:
Use 2 colors to show partner numbers that make the whole. Then complete the addition sentence to match your picture.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 2
Answer:
4 = 2 + 2
7 = 3 + 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-2

Explanation:
You have 4 linking cubes. Some are orange and some are green.
2 are orange and 2 are green linking cubes
2 + 2 = 4
You have 7 linking cubes. Some are red and some are blue.
3 are red and 4 are blue linking cubes
3 + 4 = 7

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 4 Use 2 colors to show partner numbers that make the whole. Then complete the addition sentence to match your picture.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 4
Answer: 3 = 1 + 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-4

Explanation:
You have 3 linking cubes. Some are red and some are green.
1 is red and 2 are green linking cubes
1 + 2 = 3

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 5
Answer: 5 = 3 + 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-5

Explanation:
You have 5 balls. Some are red and some are green.
3 are red and 2 are green
3 + 2 = 5

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 6
Answer: 10 = 5 + 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-6

Explanation:
You have 10 balls. Some are red and some are green.
5 are red and 5 are green
5 + 5 = 10

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 7
Answer: 7 = 4 + 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-7

Explanation:
You have 7 balls. Some are red and some are green.
4 are red and 3 are green
4 + 3 = 7

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: You have 8 pieces of sidewalk chalk. Some are red and some are blue.

  • Color the pieces of chalk to show partner numbers that make 8. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.
  • Color to show another way to make 8. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 8
Answer:
4 + 4 = 8
5 + 3 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-8

Explanation:
There are 4 red chalks and 4 blue chalks
4 + 4 = 8
There are 5 green chalks and 3 red chalks.
5 + 3 = 8

Addition: Partner Numbers Homework & Practice 6.4

Directions:
1 and 2 Use 2 colors to show partner numbers that make the whole. Then complete the addition sentence to match your picture.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 9
Answer: 2 = 1 + 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-9 (1)

Explanation:
There are two linking cubes in the figure.
Color the cubes to know how many linking cubes are there in all.
2 = 1 + 1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 10
Answer: 9 = 5 + 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-10

Explanation:
There are 9 linking cubes in the figure.
Color the cubes to know how many linking cubes are there in all.
There are 5 orange and 4 green linking cubes
5 + 4 = 9

Directions:
3 Use 2 colors to show partner numbers that make the whole. Then complete the addition sentence to match your picture. 4 There are 6 paint spots on a paint tray. Some are purple and some are green. Color the paint spots to show partner numbers that make 6. Then color the paint spots to show another way to make 6. Write addition sentences to match your pictures.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 11
Answer: 5 = 3 + 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-11

Explanation:
There are 5 crayons in total.
3 orange crayons and 2 blue crayons.
Thus 3 + 2 = 5

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.4 12
Answer: 6 = 3 + 3
6 = 2 + 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.4-12

Explanation:
There are 3 red balls and 3 yellow balls.
3 + 3 = 6
Thus there are 6 balls in all.
There are 4 red balls and 2 yellow balls.
4 + 2 = 6
Thus there are 6 balls in all.

Lesson 6.5 Addition Number Patterns

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Color the boxes to show how many in all. Tell what you notice.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-1

Think and Grow

Directions:
Write an addition sentence to tell how many dots there are in all. Tell what you notice.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 2
Answer:
6 + 0 = 6
6 + 1 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-2

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we have to count the number of dots.
6 + 0 = 6
Thus the addition sentence is 6 + 0 = 6
By seeing the above figure we have to count the number of dots.
6 + 1 = 7
Thus the addition sentence is 6 + 1 = 7

Apply and Grow

Directions:
1 and 2 Write an addition sentence to tell how many dots there are in all. Tell what you notice. 3 – 6 Complete the addition sentence. Tell what you notice.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 3
Answer: 2 + 0 = 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-3

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we have to count the number of dots.
2 + 0 = 2
Thus the addition sentence is 2 + 0 = 2

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 4
Answer: 2 + 1 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-4

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we have to count the number of dots.
2 + 1 = 3
Thus the addition sentence is 2 + 1 = 3

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 5
Answer: 5 + 0 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-5

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence by seeing the above image.
5 + 0 = 5
Because any number added to zero will be always the same number.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 6
Answer: 5 + 1 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-6

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence by seeing the above image.
5 + 1 = 6
Thus the addition sentence is 5 + 1 = 6

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 7
Answer: 9 + 1 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-7

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence by seeing the above image.
9 + 1 = 10
Thus the addition sentence is 9 + 1 = 10

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 8
Answer: 10 + 0 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-8

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence by seeing the above image.
10 + 0 = 10
Because any number added to zero will be always the same number.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: You find 7 coins to put in your piggy bank.

  • You cannot find any more coins. Draw and color all of your coins. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many coins you have in all.
  • Your friend gives you a coin to put in your piggy bank. Draw and color all of your coins. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many coins you have in all.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 9
Answer:
5 + 2 = 7
3 + 4 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-9

Addition Number Patterns Homework & Practice 6.5

Directions:
1 and 2 Write an addition sentence to tell how many dots there are in all. Tell what you notice.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 10
Answer: 3 + 0 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-10

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we have to count the number of dots.
3 + 0 = 3
Thus the addition sentence is 3 + 0 = 3

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 11
Answer: 3 + 1 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-11

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we have to count the number of dots.
3 + 1 = 4
Thus the addition sentence is 3 + 1 = 4

Directions:
3 – 6 Complete the addition sentence. Tell what you notice. 7 You found 8 seashells at the beach yesterday. You do not find any more seashells today. Draw and color all of your seashells. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many seashells you have in all.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 12
Answer: 4 + 0 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-12

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence by seeing the above image.
4 + 0 = 4
Thus the addition sentence is 4 + 0 = 4

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 13
Answer: 4 + 1 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-13

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence by seeing the above image.
4 + 1 = 5
Thus the addition sentence is 4 + 1 = 5

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 14
Answer: 8 + 1 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-14

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence by seeing the above image.
8 + 1 = 9
Thus the addition sentence is 8 + 1 = 9

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 15
Answer: 9 + 0 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-15

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence by seeing the above image.
9 + 0 = 9
Thus the addition sentence is 9 + 0 = 9

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.5 16
Answer: 8 + 0 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.5-16

Explanation:
Given that you found 8 seashells yesterday. And no seashells total.
The total number of seashells are 8 + 0 = 8
Thus the addition sentence is 8 + 0 = 8

Lesson 6.6 Practice Addition

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Use counters in the five frame to show how many there are in all. Complete the addition sentences.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-1

Think and Grow

Directions:
Complete the addition sentence. Tell how you found your answer.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-2

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
1 and 4 gives 5
1 + 4 = 5
0 and 3 gives
0 + 3 = 3
1 and 3 gives
1 + 3 = 4

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 4 Complete the addition sentence. Tell how you found your answer. 5 Complete the addition sentences. Tell what you notice.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 3
Answer: 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-3

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
1 and 2 gives 3
1 + 2 = 3

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 4
Answer: 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-4

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
0 and 5 gives 5
0 + 5 = 5

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 5
Answer: 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-5

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
2 and 2 gives 4
2 + 2 = 4

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 6
Answer: 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-6

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
0 and 0 gives 0
0 + 0 = 0

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 7
Answer: 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-7

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
2 and 3 gives 5
2 + 3 = 5
3 and 2 gives 5
3 + 2 = 5

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • You have 4 game pieces. Some are green and some are yellow. Write an addition sentence to show partner numbers that make the whole. Color to show how you know.
  • There is 1 game piece on a game board. You put 2 more game pieces on the board. Write an addition sentence to tell how many game pieces are on the game board. Draw to show how you know.
  • You have 3 blue game pieces and 2 red game pieces. Write an addition sentence to show how many game pieces you have in all. Draw to show how you know.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 8
Answer:
2 + 2 = 4
1 + 2 = 3
3 + 2 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-8

Explanation:
You have 4 game pieces. Some are green and some are yellow.
There are 2 green game pieces and 2 yellow game pieces
2 + 2 = 4

Practice Addition Homework & Practice 6.6

Directions:
1 – 3 Complete the addition sentence. Tell how you found your answer.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 9
Answer: 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-9

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
0 and 2 gives 2
0 + 2 = 2

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 10
Answer: 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-10

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
1 and 3 gives 4
1 + 3 = 4

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 11
Answer: 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-11

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
1 and 2 gives 3
1 + 2 = 3

Directions:
4 Complete the addition sentences. Tell what you notice. 5 You have 5 game pieces. Some are red and some are black. Write an addition sentence to show partner numbers that make the whole. Color to show how you know. 6 There are no game pieces on a game board. You put 1 game piece on the board. Write an addition sentence to tell how many game pieces are on the game board. Draw to show how you know.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 12
Answer: 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-12

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
1 and 4 gives 5
1 + 4 = 5
4 and 1 gives 5
4 + 1 = 5

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 13
Answer: 2 + 3 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-13

Explanation:
There are 2 red balls and 3 black balls
2 + 3 = 5
Thus there are 5 balls in all.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.6 14
Answer: 0 + 1 = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.6-14

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
0 and 1 gives 1
0 + 1 = 1

Lesson 6.7 Use a Group of 5 to Add

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Add more counters to make 8. Then complete the addition sentence.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 1
Answer: 5 + 3 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-1

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
5 + _ = 8
The missing number is 3.
Thus there are 8 balls in all.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Draw more counters to show how many in all. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 2
Answer:
5 + 1 = 6
5 + 4 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-2

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure.
5 + _ = 6
The missing number is 1.
Thus there are 6 balls in all.
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure.
5 + _ = 9
The missing number is 4.
Thus there are 9 balls in all.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Draw more counters to show how many in all. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence. 3 Draw 5 counters. Draw more counters to show how many in all. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 3
Answer: 5 + 3 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-3

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
5 + _ = 8
The missing number is 3.
Thus there are 8 balls in all.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 4
Answer: 5 + 5 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-4

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
5 + _ = 10
The missing number is 5.
Thus there are 10 balls in all.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 5
Answer: 5 + 2 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-5

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
5 + _ = 7
The missing number is 2.
Thus there are 7 balls in all.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • A boy holds up 5 fingers to tell his age. His sister is 9 years old. Draw more fingers to show his sister’s age. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.
  • A girl holds up 3 fingers to tell her age. Her brother is 8 years old. Draw more fingers to show her brother’s age. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 6
Answer:
5 + 4 = 9
3 + 5 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-6

Explanation:
A boy holds up 5 fingers to tell his age. His sister is 9 years old.
The addition sentence is 5 + 4 = 9

Use a Group of 5 to Add Homework & Practice 6.7

Directions:
1 and 2 Draw more counters to show how many in all. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 7
Answer: 5 + 1 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-7

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
5 + _ = 6
The missing number is 1.
Thus there are 6 balls in all.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 8
Answer: 5 + 4 = 9
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-8

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
5 + _ = 9
The missing number is 9.
Thus there are 9 balls in all.

Directions:
3 Draw more counters to show how many in all. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence. 4 Draw 5 counters. Draw more counters to show how many in all. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence. 5 You are decorating your friend’s cubby. You blow up 5 balloons. You need 7 balloons in all. Draw more balloons to make 7. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 9
Answer: 5 + 0 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-9

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
5 + _ = 5
The missing number is 0.
Thus there are 5 balls in all.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 10
Answer: 5 + 5 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-10

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
5 + _ = 10
The missing number is 5.
Thus there are 10 balls in all.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.7 11
Answer: 5 + 2 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-11

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure
You are decorating your friend’s cubby. You blow up 5 balloons. You need 7 balloons in all.
We have to add 2 more balloons to make 7 balloons.
5 + 2 = 7

Lesson 6.8 Add to Make 10

Explore and Grow

Directions:
You have 10 linking cubes. Some are red and some are blue. Color to show how many are red and how many are blue. Then color to show another way. Complete the addition sentences to match your pictures.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 1
Answer:
5 + 5 = 10
7 + 3 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.8-1

Explanation:
You have 10 linking cubes. Some are red and some are blue.
Draw 5 red linking cubes and 5 blue linking cubes.
Add both to make 10 linking cubes.
5 + 5 = 10
Draw 7 red linking cubes and 3 blue linking cubes.
Add both to make 10 linking cubes.
7 + 3 = 10

Think and Grow

Directions:
Draw more counters to make 10. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 2
Answer:
3 + 7 = 10
8 + 2 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.8-2

Explanation:
There are 10 balls in all.
We have to find the missing number to get 10.
3 + _ = 10
You need to add 7 to get 10.
3 + 7 = 10
The addition sentence is 3 + 7 = 10
We have to find the missing number to get 10.
8 + _ = 10
You need to add 2 to get 10.
8 + 2 = 10
The addition sentence is 8 + 2 = 10

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Draw more counters to make 10. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence. 2 Color more linking cubes to make 10. Use the linking cubes to complete the addition sentence. 3 Color 4 linking cubes yellow. Color more linking cubes blue to make 10. Use the linking cubes to complete the addition sentence.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 3
Answer: 5 + 5 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.7-10

Explanation:
We have to find the missing number to get 10.
5 + _ = 10
You need to add 5 to get 10.
5 + 5 = 10
The addition sentence is 5 + 5 = 10

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 4
Answer: 2 + 8 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.8-4

Explanation:
We have to find the missing number to get 10.
2 + _ = 10
You need to add 8 to get 10.
2 + 8 = 10
The addition sentence is 2 + 8 = 10

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 5
Answer: 4 + 6 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.8-5

Explanation:
There are 10 linking cubes in all.
We have to write the addition sentence by using the above figure.
4 + 6 = 10
The addition sentence is 4 + 6 = 10

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: You need 10 tickets in all to win a prize.

  • You win 1 ticket. Draw more tickets to make 10. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.
  • Your friend wins 3 tickets. Draw more tickets to make 10. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.
  • Who needs more tickets? Circle your answer.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 6
Answer:
1 + 9 = 10
3 + 7 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.8-6

Explanation:
You need 10 tickets in all to win a prize.
You win 1 ticket.
1 + _ = 10
The missing number is 9.
The addition sentence is 1 + 9 = 10
Your friend wins 3 tickets.
3 + _ = 10
The missing number is 7.
The addition sentence is 3 + 7 = 10

Add to Make 10 Homework & Practice 6.8

Directions:
1 Draw more counters to make 10. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence. 2 Color more linking cubes to make 10. Use the linking cubes to complete the addition sentence.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 7
Answer: 7 + 3 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.8-7

Explanation:
We have to find the missing number to get 10.
7 + _ = 10
You need to add 3 to get 10.
7 + 3 = 10
The addition sentence is 7 + 3 = 10

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 8
Answer: 10 + 0 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.8-8

Explanation:
We have to find the missing number to get 10.
10 + _ = 10
You need to add 0 to get 10.
10 + 0 = 10
The addition sentence is 10 + 0 = 10

Directions:
3 Color more linking cubes to make 10. Use the linking cubes to complete the addition sentence. 4 Color 6 linking cubes yellow. Color more linking cubes blue to make 10. Use the linking cubes to complete the addition sentence. 5 You need 10 stickers in all to win a prize. You have 8 stickers. Draw more stickers to make 10. Write an addition sentence to match your picture.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 9
Answer: 4 + 6 = 10

Explanation:
There are 10 linking cubes in all.
There are 4 green linking cubes.
4 + _ = 10
The missing number is 6.
Thus the addition sentence is 4 + 6 = 10

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 10
Answer: 6 + 4 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.8-10

Explanation:
There are 10 linking cubes in all.
There are 4 blue linking cubes.
There are 6 yellow linking cubes.
6 + 4 = 10
Thus the addition sentence is 6 + 4 = 10

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 6.8 11
Answer: 8 + 2 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-6.8-11

Explanation:
There are 8 smileys we have to make it 10.
8 + _ = 10
The missing number is 2.
The addition sentence is 8 + 2 = 10

Add Numbers within 10 Performance Task

Directions:
1 You buy more red fish than blue fish at a pet store. Color to show the fish that you buy. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture. 2 Your friend buys 5 fish. Draw and color your friend’s fish to show fewer red fish than blue fish. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture. 3 You put your food pellets into your fish bowl to feed fish. The number of food pellets is equal to the number of fish. Draw the food pellets. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many objects are in your fish bowl in all.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 1

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 2
Answer: 5 + 0 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-1
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-2

Explanation:
There are 5 fishes in all.
The addition sentence is 5 + 0 = 5

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 3
Answer: 3 + 2 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-1-1

Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-3

Explanation:
There are 2 red fishes and 3 blue fishes.
3 + 2 = 5
The addition sentence is 3 + 2 = 5

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 4
Answer: 5 + 5 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-1-1
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-4

Explanation:
There are 5 red fishes we have to make them 10.
The addition sentence is 5 + 5 = 10

Add Numbers within 10 Activity

Add and Cover
Directions:
Start at Newton. Roll a die and move forward that number of spaces. Use the numbers on the space to find how many in all. Place a counter on a cloud with that number. If you land on a sun, cover a cloud of your choice. Repeat this process until you cover all of the clouds.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 5

Add Numbers within 10 Chapter Practice

Directions:
1 Complete the sentence to tell how many students are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all. 2 Complete the sentence to tell how many owls are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all. Then complete the addition sentence to match.

6.1 Understand Addition

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 1
Answer: 3 + 1 = 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-1

Explanation:
There are 3 students and 1 student in joining them.
3 + 1 = 4
Thus there are 4 students in all.

6.2 Addition: Add To

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 2
Answer: 2 + 3 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-2

Explanation:
There are 2 owls and 3 owls are joining them.
2 + 3 = 5
Thus there are 5 owls in all.

Directions:
3 Circle the groups to put them together. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many objects there are in all. 4 – 6 Use 2 colors to show partner numbers that make the whole. Then complete the addition sentence to match your picture.

6.3 Addition: Put Together

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 3
Answer: 1 + 6 = 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-3

Explanation:
There is 1 bear and 6 cubes.
We have to combine both.
1 + 6 = 7

6.4 Addition: Partner Numbers

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 4
Answer: 9 = 5 + 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-4

Explanation:
There are 9 linking cubes in all.
Some are red and some are yellow.
Add 5 red linking cubes and 4 yellow linking cubes.
9 = 5 + 4

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 5
Answer: 6 + 2 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-5

Explanation:
There are 8 balls in all.
6 balls are red and 2 balls are yellow.
6 + 2 = 8

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 6
Answer: 3 + 3 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-6

Explanation:
There are 3 green crayons and 3 blue crayons.
The addition sentence is 3 + 3 = 6

Directions:
7 Write an addition sentence to tell how many dots there are in all. Tell what you notice. 8 Complete the addition sentence. Tell what you notice. 9 and 10 Complete the addition sentence. Tell how you found your answer. 11 Complete the addition sentences. Tell what you notice.

6.5 Addition Number Patterns

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 7
Answer: 5 + 1 = 6
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-7

Explanation:
By seeing the above figure we have to count the number of dots.
5 + 1 = 6
Thus the addition sentence is 5 + 1 = 6

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 8
Answer: 8 + 0 = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-8

Explanation:
Add 8 and 0
8 + 0 = 8
The addition sentence is 8 + 0 = 8

6.6 Practice Addition

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 9
Answer: 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-9

Explanation:
Add 2 and 2 we get 4
The addition sentence is 2 + 2 = 4

Question 10
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 10
Answer: 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-10

Explanation:
Add 0 and 0 we get 0
The addition sentence is 0 + 0 = 0

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 11
Answer: 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-11

Explanation:
Add 2 and 1 we get 3
The addition sentence is 2 + 1 = 3
Add 1 and 2 we get 3
The addition sentence is 1 + 2 = 3

Directions:
12 Draw more counters to show how many in all. Use the ten frame to complete the addition sentence. 13 Color 3 linking cubes yellow. Color more linking cubes blue to make 10. Use the linking cubes to complete the addition sentence. 14 You need 10 tickets in all to win a prize. You win 2 tickets. Draw more tickets to make 10. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.

6.7 Use a Group of 5 to Add

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 12
Answer: 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-12

Explanation:
We have to complete the addition sentence using the above figure.
5 + _ = 10
The missing number is 5.
5 + 5 = 10
Thus there are 10 balls in all.

6.8 Add to Make 10

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 13
Answer: 3 + 7 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-13

Explanation:
There are 10 linking cubes.
Draw 3 yellow linking cubes and 7 blue linking cubes.
The addition sentence is 3 + 7 = 10

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 chp 14
Answer: 2 + 8 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-6-Add-Numbers-within-10-chp-14

Explanation:
Total number of tickets = 10
You win 2 tickets.
2 + _ = 10
The missing number is 8
2 + 8 = 10
The addition sentence is 2 + 8 = 10

Final Words

The answers are shown in this article regarding i.e, Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 6 Add Numbers within 10 are prepared by the math experts. After finishing your practice we suggest you guys solve the questions given at the end of the chapter. So that you can know in which topic you are lagging. Also, bookmark our site to get the solutions of all Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence pdf is given here. The students who are hunting for Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence Solution Key can easily get it here. Therefore, stop your search for the Grade 4 Chapter 11 Solution Key. Also, you can find each and every topic in detail from Grade 4 Chapter 11 Big Ideas Math Answers Understand Measurement Equivalence pdf here. Don’t pay a single penny to get Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11. Get chapter-wise Free Solutions from BIM Grade 4 Chapter 11 Answer Key.

Big Ideas 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence Math Book Answer Key

Practice as per your convenience by downloading the free 4th std Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence Answer key. You can use the 4th Grade Chapter 11 Solution Key either online or offline. There are various topics available in the 4th std Chapter 11. All the topics important formulae, videos, solved examples, and free PDFs are given below that helps you for the best practice. Solve every problem any number of times and make your preparation perfect to write the exam well. Score good marks by preparing with Big Ideas 4th Grade Chapter 11 Answer Key.

Lesson: 1 Length in Metric Units

Lesson: 2 Mass and Capacity in Metric Units

Lesson: 3 Length in Customary Units

Lesson: 4 Weight in Customary Units

Lesson: 5 Capacity in Customary Units

Lesson: 6 Make and Interpret Line Plots

Lesson: 7 Units of Time

Lesson: 8 Problem Solving: Elapsed Time

Lesson: 9 Mixed Measures

Performance Task

Lesson 11.1 Length in Metric Units

Explore and Grow

Work with a partner. Find 3 objects in your classroom, and use a meter stick to measure them. One of you measure in centimeters, and the other measure in millimeters. Think: What do you notice about the pairs of measurements? How does each measurement compare to1 meter?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 1
1 centimeter is 10 times as long as 1 millimeter.
1 meter is 100 times as long as 1 centimeter.
1 meter is 1000 times as long as 1 millimeter.

Structure
You know the length of an object in centimeters. Without measuring, how can you find its length in millimeters?
Answer:

Think and Grow: Find Equivalent Metric Lengths

Metric units of length include, centimeters, meters, millimeters and kilometers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 2

Example
Find the number of meters in 3 kilometers.
There are 1000 meters in 1 kilometer.
3 ×1000 =3000
So, there are meters in 3 kilometers.

Example
Find the number of millimeters in 9 meters.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 3
There are 100 centimeters in 1 meter.
9 ×100 = 9 centimeters
There are 10 millimeters in 1 centimeter.
900 × 10= 9000 millimeters
So, there are 9000 millimeters in 9 meters..

Show and Grow

Find the equivalent length.
Question 1.
8 km = ________ m

Answer:
8 km = 8000 m

Explanation:
one kilometer is 1000 times as long as 1 meter
8 x 1000 m = 8000 m
So, there are 8000 meters in 8 km.

Question 2.
7 m = ________ cm

Answer:
7  m= 700 cm

Explanation:
The meter is unit of length in the metric system equivalent to one hundred centimeters.
7×100 = 700cm
so, there are 700 cm in 7 m.

Question 3.
5 cm = ________mm

Answer:
5 cm = 50 mm

Explanation:
The centimeter is unit of length in the metric system equivalent to 10 millimeters.
5×10  =50 mm
so, there are 50 mm in 5 cm.

Question 4.
6 km = ________cm

Answer:
6 km = 600000 cm

Explanation:
1 km is equal to 1000 meters and one meter is equal to100 centimeters.
step 1: 6×1000=6000
step 2: 6000×100=600000

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the equivalent length.
Question 5.
3 cm =_______mm

Answer:
3 cm = 30mm

Explanation:
The centimeter is unit of length in the metric system equivalent to ten millimeters.
3 x 10=30mm

Question 6.
8 m = _______cm

Answer :
8 m = 800cm

Explanation:
The meter is unit length in the metric system equivalent to 100 centimeters.
8×100=800cm

Question 7.
9 cm = ______mm

Answer:
9 cm = 90mm

Explanation:
The centimeter is unit of length in the metric system equivalent to 10 millimeters.
9×10=90mm

Question 8.
4 m = _______ cm

Answer:
4 m = 400 cm

Explanation :
one meter is equal to 100 centimeter
4×100=400cm.
so, there are 400cm in 4m.

Question 9.
11 km = ________m

Answer:
11 km = 11000m

Explanation:
one kilometer is equal to 1000 meters
11×1000=11000m
so, there are 11000 m in 11 km.

Question 10.
2 km = ________ cm

Answer:
2 km = 200000 cm

Explanation:
one kilometer is equal to 1000 meters and one meter is equal to 100centimeters
2×1000=2000m
2000×100=200000cm

Question 11.
3 m = ______mm

Answer:
3 m = 3000mm

Explanation:
one meter is equal to 100 centimeter and one centimeter is equal to 10 millimeters
3×100=300
300×10=300mm.

Question 12.
5 km = ______m

Answer:
5 km = 5000m

Explanation:
one kilometer is equal to 1000 meters
5×1000=5000m.

Question 13.
A pencil is 19 centimeters long. How many millimeters long is the pencil?

Answer:
The centimeter is unit of length in the metric system equivalent to 10 millimeters.
19×10=190mm long pencil.

Question 14.
Number Sense
How does the meaning of each prefix relate to the metric units of length in this lesson?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 4
Answer:
one kilo is equal to one thousand meter
one centi is equal to hundredth of a meter
one milli is equal to thousandth of a meter.

DIG DEEPER!
Compare.
Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 5
Answer:
4 meters is equal to 400 cm

Explanation:
one meter is equal to 100 cm
4 x 100 =400cm

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 6
Answer:
5000mm is not equal to 50m

Explanation:
5000mm is equal to 5m.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
During 1 day of swim practice, your friend swam12,600 meters. Your friend’s goal was to swim 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) kilometers. Did he reach his goal?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 7
Make a table that shows the relationship between kilometers and meters.

Compare 2,600 meters to 2 \(\frac{1}{2}\) kilometers.

Answer:
2×1/2=2500
Your friend did not reach his goal.

Show and Grow

Question 17.
You have 42 millimeters of wire. You need 4\(\frac{1}{2}\) centimeters of wire to make an earring. Do you have enough wire to make the earring?

Answer: Yes,

Explanation:
The wire is 42 mm, we needed the wire for making earrings which is in cm we have to convert that in to mm.
one cm =10 mm
1cm =10mm
4 ×1/2 =9/2
= 4.5 ×10
=45 centimeters

Question 18.
Which insect’s wingspan is longer? How much longer is it?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 8
Answer:
5cm wing span is longer because 1 cm =10mm

Question 19.
DIG DEEPER!
There are signs posted every 500 meters along a 5-kilometer race. How many signs are posted?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 9
Answer:
10 signs

Explanation:
1 signs are posted for every 500 meters
1 km=1000m
so, there are 10 signs for 5 km.

Length in Metric Units Homework & Practice 11.1

Find the equivalent length.
Question 1.
3 km = ___ m

Answer:
3 km = 8000 m

Explanation:
one kilometer is 1000 times as long as 1 meter
3 x 1000 m = 3000 m
So, there are 3000 meters in 8 km.

Question 2.
5 m = _____ mm

Answer:
5 m = 5000mm

Explanation:
one meter is 1000 times as long as 1000 millimeter
5 x 1000 m = 5000 mm
So, there are 5000millimeters in 5 m.

Question 3.
12 km = ____ m

Answer:
12 km = 12000 m

Explanation:
one kilometer is 1000 times as long as 1 meter
12 x 1000 m = 12000 m
So, there are 12000 meters in 12 km.

Question 4.
8 m = _____ cm

Answer:
8 meters is equal to 400 cm

Explanation:
one meter is equal to 100 cm
8 x 100 =800cm

Question 5.
9 km = ____ cm

Answer:
9 km = 900000 cm

Explanation:
one kilometer is equal to 1000 meters and one meter is equal to 100centimeters
9×1000=9000m
9000×100=900000cm

Question 6.
6m = _____ mm

Answer:
6 m=6000mm

Explanation:
one meter is equal to 100 cm
one cm is equal to 10 millimeter
6m x 100 =600cm
600×10=6000mm

Question 7.
7 m = ____ cm

Answer:
7 m=700cm

Explanation:
one meter is equal to 100cm
7 x 100= 700cm

Question 8.
4 m = ____ mm

Answer:
4m = 4000mm

Explanation:
one meter is equal to 100 centimeter
one centimeter is equal to 10 mm
4 x 100 = 400cm
400 x 10 = 4000mm.

Question 9.
A basketball player is 2 meters tall. How tall is the player in centimeters?

Answer:
200cm

Explanation:
The basketball player is 2m tall,one meter is equal to 100 cm
2 x 100 =200cm
so, the player is 200cm.

Question 10.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which measurement does not belong with the other three?
50 m
500 km
5,000 cm
50,000 mm
Answer:
500 km

Question 11.
Patterns
Describe and complete the pattern.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 10
Answer:

Explanation:
one meter is equal to 100 cm and that is equal to 100mm.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
A pencil is 190 millimeters long. A pencil box 1is 20\(\frac{1}{2}\) centimeters long. Will the pencil fit inside the pencil box?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 11
Answer:

215 m long.

Explanation:
one centimeter is equal to 10mm, A pencil is 190 cm is long and the pencil box is 215 cm long it can easily fit in the box.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
An airplane runway is 4 kilometers long. An airplane starts at one end and travels 2,044 meters. How many more meters can the airplane travel before reaching the end of the runway?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.1 12
Answer:
1956meters

Explanation:
The airplane started and travelled 2044 m
total it has to travel is 4 km
one kilometer is equal to 1000m
4000-2044 =1956m

Review & Refresh

Find the factor pairs for the number.
Question 14.
11

Answer: 1,11
One of two or more numbers or expressions that are multiplied to obtain a given product

Question 15.
25

Answer: 1,5,25
One of two or more numbers or expressions that are multiplied to obtain a given product

Question 16.
12
Answer: 1,3,4,12.
One of two or more numbers or expressions that are multiplied to obtain a given product

Lesson 11.2 Mass and Capacity in Metric Units

Explore and Grow

Use a balance and weights to help you complete the statement.
1 kilogram is 1000 times as much as 1 gram.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 1

Use a 1-liter beaker to help you complete the statement.
1 liter is 1000 times as much as 1 milliliter.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 2

Structure
You know the mass of an object in kilograms. Without using a scale, how can you find its mass in grams?
Answer  with the help of :weighing machine

Think and Grow: Find Equivalent Metric Measures

Metric units of mass include grams and kilograms.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 3

Metric units of capacity include liters and milliliters.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 4

Example
Find the number of grams in 3 kilograms.
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
3 ×1000 = 3000
So, there are 3000 grams in 3 kilograms.

Example
The container holds 5 liters of water. How many milliliters of water does the container hold?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 5
There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter.
5 ×1000= 5000
So, the container holds 5000 milliliters of water.

Show and Grow

Find the equivalent mass.
Question 1.
6 kg = _______g

Answer:
6 kg = 6000g

Explanation:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
6 ×1000 = 6000
So, there are 6000 grams in 6 kilograms.

Question 2.
9 kg = _______g

Answer:
9 kg = 9000g

Explanation:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
9 ×1000 = 3000
So, there are 9000 grams in 9 kilograms.

Find the equivalent capacity
Question 3.
7 L =_________ mL

Answer:
7 l = 1000ml

Explanation:
There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter.
7 ×1000= 7000
So, 7l is equal to 7000 milliliters of water.

Question 4.
10 L = ____ mL

Answer:
10l = 10000ml

Explanation:
There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter.
10 ×1000= 10000
So, 10l has  10000 milliliters of water.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the equivalent mass.
Question 5.
8 kg = 8000 g
Answer:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
8 ×1000 = 8000
So, there are 8000 grams in 8 kilograms.

Question 6.
7 kg = 7000g
Answer:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
7×1000 = 7000
So, there are 7000 grams in 7 kilograms.

Question 7.
4 kg = 4000g
Answer:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
4 ×1000 = 4000
So, there are 4000 grams in 4 kilograms.

Question 8.
67 kg = 67000 g
Answer:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
67 ×1000 = 3000
So, there are 67000 grams in 67 kilograms.

Find the equivalent capacity.
Question 9.
9 L = _____ mL

Answer:
9 l = 9000 ml

Explanation:
one liter is equal to 1000ml
9 x 1000 =9000ml

Question 10.
3 L = _____ mL
Answer:
3 l = 3000ml

Explanation:
one liter is equal to 1000ml
3 x 1000 =3000ml.

Question 11.
23 L = ____ mL
Answer:
23l = 23000ml

explanation:
one liter is equal to 1000ml
23 x 1000= 23000ml

Question 12.
40 L = _____ mL
Answer:
40 l = 40000ml

explanation:
one liter is equal to 1000ml
40 x 1000= 40000ml

Question 13.
What is the mass of the bag of apples in grams?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 6
Answer:
2000g

Explanation:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
2 ×1000 = 2000
So, there are 2000 grams of apples in bag.

Question 14.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says that 4 liters is greater than 4,500 milliliters. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer:
one liter is equal to 1000m
4 l = 4000ml
my friend is not correct4 liters is less than 4500ml.

Question 15.
Writing
Compare the relationship between kilograms and grams to the relationship between liters and milliliters.
Answer:
one kilogram is equal to 1000g
one liter is equal to 1000ml
kilograms and grams are used measure solids
liters and milliliters are used to measure liquids.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A restaurant chef has 5\(\frac{3}{4}\) kilograms of rice. A recipe uses 5,875 grams of rice. Does the chef have enough rice to follow the recipe?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 7
Make a table that shows the relationship between kilograms and grams.
Compare 5\(\frac{3}{4}\) kilograms to 5,875 grams.
The chef _____ have enough rice to follow the recipe.

Answer:
No, The chef doesnot have enough rice to follow the recipe

Show and Grow

Question 16.
Your goal is to drink 1,500 milliliters of water each day. Yesterday, you drank 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) liters of water. Did you reach your goal?

Answer:
Goal=1500 ml
drank water = 2 x 1/2 =5/2= 2.5
2.5 x 1000 =2500ml
yes, I reached the goal.

Question 17.
Which egg has a greater mass? How much greater?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 8
Answer:
ostrich egg

Explanation:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
1 x 1/4 = 5/4 = 1.25kgs
but chicken egg is 581grams so ostrich egg is bigger

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
A scientist has 3 liters, 818 milliliters, and 410 milliliters of a solution in each of 3 beakers. The scientist wants to divide the solution equally among 7 beakers. How much of the solution should the scientist put into each beaker?
Answer:
In three beakers 1 has 3 liters, 2 has 818, 3 has 410.
he has to divide them to 7 beakers equally
3 x 1000 = 3000 + 818 + 410 = 4228
the total solution is 4228 ml is divided by 7 = 604

Mass and Capacity in Metric Units Homework & Practice 11.2

Find the equivalent mass.
Question 1.
2 kg = _________ g

Answer:
2 kg = 1000 g

Explanation:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
2 ×1000 = 2000
So, there are 2000 grams in 2 kilograms.

Question 2.
10 kg = ________g

Answer:
10 kg = 10000 g

Explanation:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
10×1000 = 10000
So, there are 10000 grams in 10 kilograms.

Question 3.
50 kg =_________g

Answer:
50 kg =50000g

Explanation:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
50 ×1000 = 50000
So, there are 50000 grams in 50 kilograms.

Question 4.
31 kg = _________ g

Answer:
50 kg =50000g

Explanation:
There are 1000 grams in 1 kilogram.
51 ×1000 = 51000
So, there are 51000 grams in 51 kilograms.

Find the equivalent capacity.
Question 5.
7 L = _____ mL

Answer:
7l = 7000 ml

Explanation:
There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter.
7 ×1000= 7000
So, 7l is equal to 7000 milliliters.

Question 6.
4 L = ____ mL

Answer:
4 l =4000 ml

Explanation:
There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter.
4 ×1000= 4000
So, 4l has 4000 milliliters.

Question 7.
8 L = ____ mL

Answer:
8 l = 8000ml

Explanation:
There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter.
8 ×1000= 8000
So, 8l has 8000 milliliters.

Question 8.
11 L = ____ mL

Answer:
11 l = 11000ml

Explanation:
There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter.
11 ×1000= 11000
So, 8l has 11000 milliliters.

Question 9.
A pitcher contains 3 liters of iced tea. How many milliliters of iced tea does the pitcher contain?
Answer:
3000mm

Explanation:
There are 1000 milliliters in 1 liter.
3 ×1000= 3000
So, the container holds 3000 milliliters of iced tea the pitcher.

Question 10.
Number Sense
The prefix “kilo-” means one thousand. The prefix “milli-” means one-thousandth. How does the meaning of each prefix relate to the metric units of mass and capacity in this lesson?

Answer:
meter

Explanation:
The prefix “kilo-” means one thousand. The prefix “milli-” means one-thousandth. To measure the values of  the meaning of each prefix relate to the metric units of mass and capacity in this lesson 

Question 11.
Number Sense
When measuring the mass of a chair, how will the size of the unit affect the size of the measurement?
Answer:
Dimensions are physical qualities one relates the other in the size of measurement.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
To cook a pound of pasta, you need1toboil 4,700 milliliters of water. You fill a pot with 4\(\frac{1}{4}\) liters of water. Is there enough water in your pot?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 9
Answer:
not enough

Explanation:
To cook a pound of pasta, you need1toboil 4,700 milliliters of water. You fill a pot with 4250 is not enough.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
A 4,500-gram bag of soil costs $3, and an 18-kilogram bag of soil costs $10. Which is the less expensive way to buy 18,000 grams of soil? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 10
Answer:
18kg bag

Explanation:
one kg is equal to 1000grams
18kg= 18000grams which costs of 10$
4500 g =3$

Review & Refresh

Find the difference. Then check your answer.
Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 11
Answer: 1714

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 12
Answer: 24613

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.2 13
Answer: 50243

Lesson 11.3 Length in Customary Units

Explore and Grow

Work with a partner. Use a yardstick todraw3 lines on a whiteboard that are 1 yard,2 yards, and 3 yards in length. Then measure the lengths of the lines in feet and in inches. Think: How do the lengths, in inches, compare to the lengths in feet? How does each length compare to 1 yard?
1 foot is ____ times as long as 1 inch.
1 yard is _____ times as long as 1 foot.
1 yard is _____ times as long as 1 inch.

Answer:
1 foot is 12 times as long as 1 inch.
1 yard is 3 times as long as 1 foot.
1 yard is 36 times as long as 1 inch.

Structure
You know the length of an object in feet. Without measuring, how can you find its length in inches?

Answer:
consider the length of an object is x
if we that in inches we have to multiply with 12
so, the answer is 12x

Think and Grow: Find Equivalent Customary Lengths

Customary units of length include inches, feet, yards, and miles.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.3 1
Example
Find the number of yards in 2 miles.
There are _____ yards in 1 mile.
2 × _____ = _____
So, there are _____ yards in 2 miles.

Answer:
There are 1760 yards in 1 mile.
2 × 1760 = 3250
So, there are 3520 yards in 2 miles.

Example
Find the number of inches in 7 yards.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.3 2
There are _____ feet in 1 yard.
7 × _____ = _____ feet
There are ______ inches in 1 foot.
21 × ____ = ____ inches
So, there are ________ inches in 7 yards.

answer:
There are 3 feet in 1 yard.
7 × 3 = 21 feet
There are 12 inches in 1 foot.
21 × 12 = 252 inches
So, there are 252 inches in 7 yards.

Show and Grow

Find the equivalent length.
Question 1.
6 mi= _____ yd

Answer:
6 mi =10560yd

explanation:
Answer:
There are 1760 yards in 1 mile.
6 × 1760 =10560
So, there are 10560 yards in 6 miles.

Question 2.
4 ft = _____ in.

Answer:
4 ft = 48 in
Answer:
There are 12 inches  in 1 feet.
12 × 4 = 48
So, there are 48 inches in 4 ft.

Question 3.
11 yd = _____ ft

Answer:
11yd = 33 ft.

Explanation:
one yard is equal to 3 feet
11x 3= 33ft

Question 4.
3 mi = _____ ft

Answer:
3 mi = 15840 ft

Explanation:
one mile is equal 5280 feet
3 x 5280 = 15840ft

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the equivalent length.
Question 5.
10 ft = ______ in.

Answer:
10 ft = 120 in

Explanation:
one feet is equal to 12 inch
10 x 12= 120in
so, there are 120 in in 10 ft.

Question 6.
8 yd = ______ in.

Answer:
8 yards = 288 in.

Explanation:
one yard is equal to 36 inches
8 x 36 = 288in

Question 7.
2 mi = ______ ft

Answer:
2mi = 10560 ft

Explanation:
one mile is equal to 5280 ft
2 x 5280 = 10560.

Question 8.
9 mi = ______ yd

Answer:
9 mi = 15840yd

Explanation:
Answer:
There are 1760 yards in 1 mile.
9 × 1760 = 15840
So, there are 15840 yards in 9 miles.

Question 9.
4 yd = ______ in.

Answer:
4 yd = 144 in

Explanation:
one yard is equal to 36 inch
4 x 36 = 144in

Question 10.
20 ft = ______ in.

Answer:
20ft = 240 in

Explanation:
one ft is equal to 36 inch
20 x 36 = 240in

Question 11.
7 mi = ______ yd

Answer:
7 mi = 12320yd

Explanation:
Answer:
There are 1760 yards in 1 mile.
7 × 1760 = 12320
So, there are 12320 yards in 7 miles.

Question 12.
5 mi = ______ ft

Answer:
5mi = 26400 ft

Explanation:
one mile is equal to 5280  feet.
5 x 5280 = 26400 ft.

Question 13.
You ran 54 yards. How many feet did you run?
Answer:
one yard is equal to 3 feet
54 x 3=162 ft
I need to run 162 feet in 54 yards

Question 14.
Precision
Three students measure the height of a bookshelf. Student A measures 72 units, Student B measures 2 units, and Student C measures 6 units. The teacher says all three students are correct. What units did each student use?
Answer:
1 feet = 12 inch
1 yard = 3 feet
1 yard = 36 inch
student A measures in inch
student B measures in yards
student c measures in feet.

Question 15.
Reasoning
What is one way you can check whether an answer is reasonable when converting from larger units to smaller units?
Answer:
converting from yards to feet

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A football player needs to run 6\(\frac{1}{3}\) yards to score. The player runs 17 feet. Does the player score?
Make a table that shows the relationship between yards and feet.
Compare 6\(\frac{1}{2}\) yards to 17 feet.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.3 3
The player _____ score

Answer: 19

Show and Grow

Question 16.
You have 3\(\frac{1}{4}\) feet of string. You need 36 inches of string to make a necklace. Do you have enough string to make the necklace?
Answer: 9 inches

Question 17.
Which snake is longer? How much longer?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.3 4
Answer: green anaconda
one yard is equal to 3 feet
green anaconda 28/3 = 9.33 x 3= 27.99feet

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 6 yards of ribbon. You wrap 3 feet of ribbon around a present. You wrap 16 inches of ribbon around another present. How many inches of ribbon do you have left?
Answer:
one yard is equal to 3 feet
6 x 3 =18
I have 18 feet of ribbon in total
3 feet for gift wrapping
18-3= 15
one feet is equal to 12 inch
12 inch ribbon for the 2 nd present
15-12 =3
so, the remaining ribbon is 3 inch.

Length in Customary Units Homework & Practice 11.3

Find the equivalent length.
Question 1.
25 ft = _____ in.

Answer:
300 in

Explanation:
one feet is equal to 12 inch
25 x 12 = 300in
there are 300 inches in 25 feet.

Question 2.
3 mi = _____ yd

Answer:
3mi = 5280yd

Explanation:
There are 1760 yards in 1 mile.
3 × 1760 = 5280
So, there are 5280 yards in 3 miles.

Question 3.
7 yd = _____ ft

Answer:
21 feet

Explanation:
one yard is equal to 3 feet.
7 x 3 = 21ft
there are 21 feet in 7 yards.

Question 4.
9 yd = _____ in.

Answer:
324

Explanation:
one yard is equal to 36 inch
9 x 36=324.
so, there are 324 inch in 9 yards

Question 5.
5 mi = _____ yd

Answer:
5 mi =8800 yd

Explanation:
There are 1760 yards in 1 mile.
5 × 1760 = 8800
So, there are 8800 yards in 5 miles.

Question 6.
6 mi = _____ ft

Answer:
31680

Explanation:
one mile is equal to 5280 ft
6 x 5280 = 31680
so there are 5280 feet in 6 miles

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{4}\)mi = _____ yd

Answer:
440yd

Explanation:
There are 1760 yards in 1 mile.
1760/4 = 440
So, there are 440 yards.

Question 8.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) yd = ____ ft

Answer:
1 feet
one yard is equal to 3 feet
1/3 x 3 = 1

Question 9.
A street is 2 miles long. How long is the street in yards?

Answer:
3520yd

Explanation:
There are 1760 yards in 1 mile.
2 × 1760 = 3250
So, there are 3520 yards in 2 miles.

Question 10.
Number Sense
Does it take more miles or more yards to equal a given length? Explain.
Answer:
when it is measured in miles 1 mile =1760 yd
as the miles contains less units it is easy to calculate.

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says 1 inch is \(\frac{1}{12}\) of a foot. Is your friend correct? Explain.

Answer:
he is correct

explanation:
one feet is equal to 12 inch

Question 12.
Number Sense
Which lengths are equivalent?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.3 5
Answer:
15 yards = 45 feet, 540 inch
540 inch = 45 feet

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
A plumber has 6\(\frac{1}{3}\) feet of piping. She needs inches of piping. Does she have enough piping?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.3 6
Answer:
A plumber has 6\(\frac{1}{3}\) feet of piping. she needs 38 inches of piping.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
A teacher has 12 yards of string for her class to make balloon zip lines. Each zipline needs 8 feet of string. How many zip lines can the class make?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.3 7
Answer:
The teacher has 12 yards of string for her class to make balloon zip lines. Each zipline needs 8 feet of string
1 yard is equal to 3 feet
12 x 3 = 36
36/8 = 4
so they can make 4 zip lines of 8 feets each.

Review & Refresh

Divide. Then check your answer.
Question 15.
\(\sqrt [ 3 ]{ 501 } \)
Answer:
67.14

Question 16.
\(\sqrt [ 2 ]{ 4,237 } \)
Answer:
130.18

Question 17.
\(\sqrt [ 5 ]{ 6,049 } \)
Answer:
388.87

Lesson 11.4 Weight in Customary Units

Explore and Grow

Use a platform scale to help you complete the statement.
1 pound is ______ times as heavy as 1 ounce.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 1
1 pound is 16 times as heavy as 1 ounce.
How can you use the number line to complete the statement?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 2
1 ton is ________times as heavy as 1 pound.
Answer:
1 ton is 2240 times as heavy as 1 pound.

Structure
You know the weight of an object in pounds. Without measuring, how can you find its weight in ounces?
Answer:
one pound is equal to 16 times of a ounce by multiplying with the number.

Think and Grow: Find Equivalent Customary Weights

Customary units of weight include ounces, pounds, and tons.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 3
Example
Find the number of ounces in 6 pounds.
There are ______ ounces in 1 pound.
6 × _____ = ____
So, there are _______ ounces in 6 pounds.

Answer:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
6 × 16 = 96
So, there are 96 ounces in 6 pounds..

Example
The vehicle shown weighs 8 tons. What is the weight in pounds?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 4
There are ______ pounds in 1 ton.
8 × _____ = _____
So, the vehicle weighs ______ pounds.

Answer:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
8 × 2000 = 16000
So, the vehicle weighs 16000 pounds.

Show and Grow

Find the equivalent weight.
Question 1.
5 T = ____ lb
Answer:
5 t = 10000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
5 × 2000 = 10000
So, it weighs 10000 pounds.

Question 2.
9 lb = _____ oz

Answer:
9 lb = 144 oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
9 × 16 = 144
So, there are 144 ounces in 9 pounds..

Question 3.
15 lb = ____ oz

Answer:
15 lb =  oz240

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
15 × 16 = 144
So, there are 240 ounces in 15 pounds..

Question 4.
7 T = _____ lb

Answer:
7 t = 14000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
7 × 2000 = 14000
So, it weighs 14000 pounds.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the equivalent weight.
Question 5.
6 T = _____ lb
Answer:
6 t = 12000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
6 × 2000 = 12000
So, it weighs 12000 pounds.

Question 6.
20 lb = ____ oz

Answer:
20 lb =  oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
9 × 16 = 320
So, there are 320 ounces in 16 pounds..

Question 7.
12 lb = _____ oz

Answer:
12 lb = 192 oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
12 × 16 = 192
So, there are 192 ounces in 12 pounds..

Question 8.
2 T = _____ lb
Answer:
2 t = 4000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
2 × 2000 = 4000
So, it weighs 4000 pounds.

Question 9.
4 T = ______ lb
Answer:
4 t = 8000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
4 × 2000 = 8000
So, it weighs 8000 pounds.

Question 10.
11 lb = _____ oz

Answer:
11 lb = 176 oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
11 × 16 = 176
So, there are 176 ounces in 11 pounds..

Question 11.
15 lb = _____ oz

Answer:
15 lb =  240oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
15 × 16 = 240
So, there are 240 ounces in 15 pounds..

Question 12.
10 T = _____ lb
Answer:
10 t = 20000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
10 × 2000 = 20000
So, it weighs 20000 pounds.

Question 13.
A bag of flour weighs 5 pounds. What is the weight of the bag of flour in ounces?

Answer:
5 lb = 80 oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
5 × 16 = 80
So, there are 80 ounces in 5 pounds.

Open-Ended Complete the statement.
Question 14.
54 ounces > _____ pounds
Answer: 54 ounces > 3.375

Question 15.
5,500 pounds < ______ tons
Answer:
5,500 pounds < 3 tons

DIG DEEPER!
Compare
Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 5
Answer: 2 lb > 25 oz

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 6
Answer:6,500 < 7 t

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A river otter eats 64 ounces of food each day. A zookeeper has 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds of fish to feed the otter. Does the zookeeper have enough food to feed the otter for 1 day?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 7
Make a table that shows the relationship between pounds and ounces.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 8
Compare 64 ounces to 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds.
The zookeeper ______ have enough food to feed the otter for 1 day.
Answer:
A river otter eats 64 ounces of food each day. A zookeeper has 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds of fish to feed the otter. The zookeeper does not have enough food to feed the otter for 1 day

Show and Grow

Question 18.
The weight limit of a bridge is10,000 pounds. Can the van cross the bridge?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 9
Answer:
4.25 t = 8500 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
4.25 × 2000 = 8500
So, it weighs 8500 pounds.

Question 19.
Your backpack weighs 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds. You take a 4-ounce book out of your backpack. How many ounces does your backpack weigh now?

Answer:
3.5 lb x 16 = 56

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
3.5 × 16 = 56
So, there are 56 ounces in 3.5 pounds. The bag pack weighs 56-4 = 52 oz.

Question 20.
DIG DEEPER!
A 195-pound man has twenty-five 40-pound packages to deliver. Can he bring all of the packages on the elevator at once? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 10
Answer:

2 t = 2000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
25 x 40 = 1000
so he can easily take it once in the elevator.

Weight in Customary Units Homework & Practice 11.4

Find the equivalent weight.
Question 1.
3 T = _____ lb
Answer:
3 t = 6000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
3 × 2000 = 6000
So, it weighs 6000 pounds.

Question 2.
13 lb = ____ oz

Answer:
13 lb = 208 oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
13 × 16 = 208
So, there are 208 ounces in 13 pounds.

Question 3.
22 lb = ____ oz

Answer:
22 lb = 352 oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
22 × 16 = 352
So, there are 352 ounces in 22 pounds.

Question 4.
8 T = _____ lb
Answer:
8 t = 16000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
8 × 2000 = 16000
So, it weighs 16000 pounds.

Question 5.
2 T = ____ lb
Answer:
2 t = 4000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
2 × 2000 = 4000
So, it weighs 4000 pounds.

Question 6.
20 lb = ______ oz

Answer:
20 lb = 320 oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
20 × 16 = 320
So, there are 320 ounces in 16 pounds.

Question 7.
5\(\frac{3}{4}\) lb = _____ oz

Answer:
5.75 lb = 93 oz

Explanation:
There are 16 ounces in 1 pound.
5.75 × 16 = 93
So, there are 93 ounces in 5.75 pounds.

Question 8.
6\(\frac{1}{4}\) T = _____ lb
Answer:
6.25 t = 12500 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
6.25 × 12500 = 10000
So, it weighs 12500 pounds.

Question 9.
A hippopotamus weighs 4 tons. What is the weight of the hippopotamus in pounds?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 11
Answer:

4 t = 8000 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
4 × 2000 = 8000
So, hippo weighs 8000 pounds.

Question 10.
Writing
Explain how to compare tons to ounces.
Answer:
calculate to pounds and then to ounces

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Workers need 20,000 pounds of concrete to create a driveway. The boss orders 10\(\frac{3}{4}\) tons of concrete.Does he order enough?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 12
Answer:
43/4t = 21500 lb

Explanation:
There are 2000 pounds in 1 ton.
43/4 × 2000 = 21500
So, it weighs 21500 pounds yes he ordered enough concrete.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
You buy crushed tomatoes in 6-ounce cans. You want to1make a recipe that calls for 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) pounds of crushed tomatoes. How many cans do you need to make the recipe?

Answer:
6 ounce cans are there
1.5 pounds of crushed tomatoes
1.5 x 16= 24 ounce
one pound is equal to 16 ounce
we need 3 cans

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
How many more ounces does the heaviest puppy weigh than the lightest puppy?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.4 13
Answer: 3/4 is the lightest puppy
7/4 is the heaviest puppy

Review & Refresh

Find the sum
Question 14.
\(\frac{2}{8}+\frac{4}{8}\) = _______
Answer: 6

Question 15.
\(\frac{1}{2}+\frac{4}{2}\) = _______
Answer: 2.5

Question 16.
\(\frac{5}{12}+\frac{3}{12}+\frac{1}{12}\) = ______
Answer:
0.41+4+0.8
=5

Lesson 11.5 Capacity in Customary Units

Explore and Grow

Use the diagram to complete each statement. Then check your answers using a gallon measurement set.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.5 1
1 gallon is _____ times as much as 1 quart.
1 quart is _______ times as much as 1 pint.
1 pint is ______ times as much as 1 cup.
1 gallon is _____ times as much as 1 cup.
Answer:
1 gallon is 4 times as much as 1 quart.
1 quart is 2 times as much as 1 pint.
1 pint is 2 times as much as 1 cup.
1 gallon is 16 times as much as 1 cup.

Structure
You know the capacity of a container in pints. Without measuring, how can you find its capacity in cups?
Answer: multiplying  with 2

Think and Grow: Find Equivalent Customary Capacities

Customary units of capacity include cups, pints, quarts, and gallons.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.5 2.1

Example
Find the number of quarts in 15 gallons.
There are ______ quarts in 1 gallon.
15 × _____ = _____
So, there are ______ quarts in 15 gallons.
Answer:
There are 4 quarts in 1 gallon.
15 × 4 = 60
So, there are 60 quarts in 15 gallons.

Example
Find the number of cups in 7 quarts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.5 2
There are _____ pints in 1 quart.
7 × ____ = ____ pints
There are ______ cups in 1 pint.
14 × _____ = _____ cups
So, there are ______ cups in 7 quarts.
Answer:
There are 2 pints in 1 quart.
7 × 2 = 14 pints
There are 2 cups in 1 pint.
14 ×2 =28cups
So, there are 28 cups in 7 quarts.

Show and Grow

Find the equivalent capacity.
Question 1.
4 pt = _____ c

Answer:
4 pt = 8 c

Explanation:
There are 2 pints in one cup
4 x 2 = 8.
so, there are 8 cups in 4 pints

Question 2.
6 qt = _____ pt

Answer:
6 qt =24 pt

Explanation:
There are 2 pints in 1 quart.
6 × 2 = 12 pints
There are 2 cups in 1 pint.
12 ×2 =24cups
So, there are 24 cups in 6 quarts.

Question 3.
9 gal = ____ qt
Answer:
9  gal =36  qt

Explanation:
one gallon is equal to 4 quarts
9x 4 = 36 qt

Question 4.
12 gal = _____ pt

Answer:
12 qt =48 pt

Explanation:
There are 2 pints in 1 quart.
12 × 2 = 24 pints
There are 2 cups in 1 pint.
24 ×2 =48cups
So, there are 48 cups in 24 quarts.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the equivalent capacity.
Question 5.
30 qt = ____ pt

Answer:
30 qt =120 pt

Explanation:
There are 2 pints in 1 quart.
30 × 2 = 60 pints
There are 2 cups in 1 pint.
60 ×2 =120cups
So, there are 120cups in 30 quarts.

Question 6.
5 gal = ____ pt

Answer:
5 gal = 40 pt

Explanation:
one gallon is equal to 4 quarts
5 x 4 = 20 qt
one quart is equal to 2 pints
20 x 2 =40

Question 7.
9 qt = _____ c

Answer:
9 qt = 36 c

Explanation:
one quart is equal to 4 cups
9 x 4 = 36 cups

Question 8.
8 gal = _____ qt

Answer:
8 gal = 32 qt

Explanation:
one gal is equal to 4 quarts
8 x 4 = 32.

Question 9.
25 pt = _____ c

Answer:
25 pt = 50 c

Explanation:
There are 2 pints in one cup
25 x 2 = 50.
so, there are 50 cups in 25 pints

Question 10.
11 gal = _____ pt

Answer:
11 gal = 88 pt

Explanation:
one gallon is equal to 4 quarts
11 x 4 = 44
one quart is equal to 2 pints
44 x 2 = 88
so, there are 88 pints in 11 gal.

Question 11.
18 gal = ____ qt

Answer:
18 gal =  106 qt

Explanation:
one gal is equal to 4 quarts
18 x 4 =106

Question 12.
16 qt = _____ c
Answer:
one quart is equal to 4 cups

Question 13.
You have a 10-gallon fish tank. How many quarts of water does it take to fill your fish tank?
Answer: 10 x 4 = 40 qt
40 quarts of water takes to fill the fish tank.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
Which measurements are greater than 5 gallons?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.5 3
Answer: 10 gallons 92 cups

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A berry salad uses 6 pints of blackberries, 2 quarts of strawberries, and 7 cups of blueberries. Which fruit do you use the greatest amount of?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.5 4
Make a table that shows the relationship between quarts, pints, and cups.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.5 5
Compare 6 pints, 2 quarts, and 7 cups.
You use the greatest amount as quarts.

Show and Grow

Question 15.
A caterer buys 2 gallons of milk, 12 quarts of lemonade, and 32 pints of apple juice. Which drink does the caterer buy the least amount of?
Answer: pints

Question 16.
You make 4 quarts of soup. You and your friend each eat 1 pint of soup. Will the leftover soup fit into a 10-cup container? Explain.
Answer: 3 pints

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
You use 16 gallons of water while taking a shower. Your friend uses 288 cups. Who uses less water? How much less?
Answer: 16 x 4 = 64 quarts
64 x 2 = 128  pints
128 x 2 = 236
288 – 236 = 52.

Capacity in Customary Units Homework & Practice 11.5

Find the equivalent capacity.
Question 1.
7 pt = _____ c

Answer:
7 pt = 14 c

Explanation:
There are 2 pints in one cup
7 x 2 = 14.
so, there are 14 cups in 7 pints

Question 2.
10 qt = _____ pt

Answer:
10 qt =40 pt

Explanation:
There are 2 pints in 1 quart.
10 × 2 = 20 pints
There are 2 cups in 1 pint.
20 ×2 =40cups
So, there are 40 cups in 10 quarts.

Question 3.
8 gal = ______ qt

Answer:
8 x 4 = 36 qt
one gal is equal to 4 quarts.

Question 4.
4 gal = _____ pt

Answer:
4 gal = 36 pt

Question 5.
12 qt = _____ c
Answer:
1 qt = 2 cups
12 x 2 = 24 cups

Question 6.
6 gal = ______ qt
Answer:
6 gal = 28 qt

Explanation:
one gal is equal to 4 qt
6 x 4 = 28 qt

Question 17.
3\(\frac{1}{4}\) gal = _____ pt

Answer:
3.5 x 4 = 13
13 x 2 = 26

Question 8.
4 \(\frac{1}{2}\) pt = _____ c

Answer:
9/2 pt = 9 c

Explanation:
There are 2 pints in one cup
9/2 x 2 = 9.
so, there are 9 cups in 4.5 pints

Question 9.
A bottle holds \(\frac{1}{2}\) quart of liquid. How many cups of water does the bottle hold?
Answer:1 cups of water

Question 10.
Writing
Compare the relationship between pints and cups to the relationship between quarts and pints.

Answer:
1 pint = 2 cups
one quart = 2 pints

Question 11.
Logic
Your friend makes a table of equivalent capacities. What are the labels for the columns?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.5 6
Answer: cups to quarts

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
Turning off the faucet while brushing your teeth can conserve 32 quarts of water. Using a low-flow shower head can conserve15 gallons of water. Using a dishwasher can conserve112 pints of water. Which activity conserves the greatest amount of water?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.5 7
Answer:

Explanation:
There are 2 pints in 1 quart.
52× 2 = 104 pints

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
Some pitcher plants are large enough to hold 2 gallons of water. A household pitcher holds 16 cups of water. How much more water can a pitcher plant hold than the household pitcher?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.5 8
Answer:
one gallon equal to 4 parts
2 x 4 = 8
8 quarts are needed.

Review & Refresh

Question 14.
A car dealership owner needs to transport 150 cars and 95 trucks to an island. A ferry can hold 8 vehicles. How many trips with vehicles will the ferry need to make?
Answer: 150 + 95 = 245
245/8 =  30. 8
it has to make almost 30 trips.

Lesson 11.6 Make and Interpret Line Plots

Explore and Grow

Measure your hand length with a ruler. Record the length to the nearest half-inch. Collect the hand lengths of all the students in your class, including yourself. Create a line plot of the results.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 1
Think: How will you label the scale? What title will you give your line plot?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 2
Construct Arguments
What conclusions can you make from the line plot?
Answer:
Teacher length is high when compared to kids
but the difference between the kids are less

Think and Grow: Make Line Plots

Example
You plant 10 seeds. After 6 days, you measure the height of each plant. Make a line plot to display the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 3
Step 1: Write the data values as fractions with the same denominator.
The denominators of the data values are 2, 4, and 8. Because 2 and 4 are factors of 8, use a denominator of 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 4
Step 2: Use a scale on a number line that shows all of the data values.
Step 3: Mark an X for each data value.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 5

Answer: 3/8


3/8 plant height is most common.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You survey 10 people about the amount of water each person drinks in 1 day. Make a line plot to display the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 6
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 7
Which amount of water consumed is the most common?
Answer:
2/8


Explanation:
to make this make the denominator to equal

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
The table shows the lengths of 10 chameleons in a pet store. Make a line plot to display the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 8
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 9
Which is most common chameleon length?
Answer:
6/8

Question 3.
A scientist is studying the weights of 15 sugar gliders. Make a line plot to display the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 10
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 11
How many sugar gliders weigh more than \(\frac{1}{8}\) pound?
Answer:

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
Use your line plot from Exercise 3. How many times as many \(\frac{2}{3}\) pound sugar gliders are there as \(\frac{3}{8}[/latex] pound sugar gliders? Explain.

Answer:
2/8

Explanation:
denominator is equalized and the factors are multiplied.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You record the distances you rode your bike for 10 days. What is the difference in the length of your longest ride and the length of your shortest ride?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 12
Make a line plot. Use a scale that shows all of the data values.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 13
Subtract the shortest ride from the longest ride.
5 − 6 = 1.
The difference in the length of your longest ride and the length of your shortest ride is 1 miles.

Show and Grow

Question 5.
You record the total monthly rainfall for 10 months. What is the difference of the greatest monthly rainfall and the least monthly rainfall?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 14

How much did it rain during the 10 months in all?
Answer:
the total rain fall during all the 10 months is 62/8

Make and Interpret Line Plots Homework & Practice 11.6

Question 1.
The table shows the thicknesses of 10 books in a series. Make a line plot to display the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 15
The least common thickness is ______ inch.
There are ______ books that are less than [latex]\frac{5}{8}\) inch thick.
Answer:

The least common thickness is 6/8 inch.
There are 4 books that are less than \(\frac{5}{8}\) inch thick.

Question 2.
DIG DEEPER!
Use your line plot from Exercise 1. How many times as many \(\frac{3}{4}\) inch thick books are there as \(\frac{1}{8}\)-inch thick books?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 16
Answer:
6/8 are more

Question 3.
A zoologist is studying the weights of 15 skinks. Make a line plot to display the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 17
Answer:

Question 4.
Reasoning
In Exercise 3, do most of the skinks weigh more than \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound?
Answer:
yes most of the skinks weigh more than \(\frac{5}{8}\) pound.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A painter records the amounts of paint he uses in 10 different rooms. What is the difference of the greatest amount of paint used and the least amount of paint used?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.6 18
How many gallons of paint were used in all 10 rooms combined?
Answer:
4/2 is least paint used
7/2 is the greatest paint used

Review & Refresh

Write the fraction as a sum of unit fractions.
Question 6.
\(\frac{5}{6}\)
Answer:
0.83

Question 7.
\(\frac{8}{3}\)
Answer:
2.6

Lesson 11.7 Units of Time

Explore and Grow

Use a clock or a stopwatch to help you complete the statements.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.7 1
1 minute is ______ times as long as 1 second.
1 hour is _______ times as long as 1 minute.
Answer:
1 minute is 60 times as long as 1 second.
1 hour is 60 times as long as 1 minute.

Structure
You know an amount of time in minutes. Without using a clock or a stopwatch, how can you find the amount of time in seconds?
Answer: multiply with 60.

Think and Grow: Find Equivalent Amounts of Time

Units of time include seconds, minutes, hours, days, weeks, months, and years.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.7 2

Example
Find the number of minutes in 6 hours.
There are ______ minutes in 1 hour.
6 × _____ = _____
So, there are _____ minutes in 6 hours.

answer:
There are 60 minutes in 1 hour.
6 × 60 =120_
So, there are 120 minutes in 6 hours.

Example
Find the number of hours in 4 weeks.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.7 3
There are ______ days in 1 week.
4 × _____ = ____ days
There are ______ hours in 1 day.
28 × _____ = ______
So, there are ____ hours in 4 weeks.

Answer:
There are 7 days in 1 week.
4 × 7 = 28 days
There are 24 hours in 1 day.
28 × 24 = 672
So, there are 672 hours in 4 weeks.

Show and Grow

Find the equivalent amount of time.
Question 1.
10 min = ______ sec

Answer:
one minute is equal to 60 seconds
10 x 60 =  600 seconds

Question 2.
5 d = _____ h

Answer:
5d = 120 h

Explanation:
one day is equal to 24 hours
5 x 24 = 120 h.

Question 3.
8 wk = _____ d

Answer:
8 wk = 56 days

Explanation:
one week is equal to 7 days
8 x 7 = 56 days

Question 4.
2 d = _____ sec

Answer:
2 d = sec

Explanation:
one day is equal to 24 hours
one hour is equal to 60 seconds
24 x 60 = 2880  sec

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the equivalent amount of time.
Question 5.
7 yr = ____ wk

Answer:
7yr = 364 wk

Explanation:
one year is equal to 56 weeks
7 x 52 = 364 wk

q6.
4 d = _____ min

Answer:
4 d = 240   min

Explanation:
one day is equal to 60 minutes
4 x 60 = 240 min

Question 7.
3 wk = _____ d

Answer:
3 wk = 21 d

Explanation:
one week is equal to 7 days
3 x 7 = 21 days

Question 8.
6 h = _____ sec

Answer:
6 h =  360 sec

Explanation:
one hour is equal to 60 sec
6 x 60 = 360 sec

Question 9.
2 yr = _____ mo

Answer:
2 yr = 24 months

Explanation:
one year is equal to 12 months
2 x 12 = 24 months

Question 10.
1 wk = _____ h

Answer:
1 wk =  168 hours

Explanation:
one week is equal to 7 days
one day is equal to 24  hours
7 x 24 = 168 hours

Question 11.
24 h = _____ min

Answer:
24 h = 1440  min

Explanation:
one hour is equal to 60 minutes
24 x 60 = 1440 min

Question 12.
10 yr = _____ d

Answer:
10  yr = 3650 d

Explanation:
one year is equal 365 days
365 x 10 = 3650 days

Question 13.
Your friend turns 8 years old today. How many months old is your friend?

Answer:
8 y = 96 months

Explanation:
one year is equal to 12 months
8 x 12 = 96 months
my friend is 96 months old

Question 14.
Writing
Explain how you can show that 3,000 seconds is less than 1 hour.

Answer:
one min is equal to 60 sec
one hour is equal to 60 minutes
60 x 60 = 3600
3600- 3000 = 600 sec
one hour is equal to 3600 minutes
600 sec lesser.

Question 15.
Structure
The number pairs describe the relationship between which two units of time? Explain.
2 and 104
3 and 156
4 and 208
Answer:
2 years is equal to 104 weeks
3 years is equal to 156 weeks
4 years is equal to 208 weeks
year and week relation ship

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Your cousin makes a 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) minute long music video. Your friend makes a 200-second long music video. Who records a longer music video?
Make a table that shows the relationship between minutes and seconds.
Compare 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) minutes to 200 seconds.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.7 4
Your friend records a longer music video.

Show and Grow

Question 16.
You put a puzzle together in 150 minutes. Your friend puts the same puzzle together in 1hours. Who put the puzzle 2\(\frac{1}{4}\) together faster?
Answer:
one hour is equal to 60 min
You put a puzzle together in 150 minutes
2 x 1/ 4 = 2.25 x 60
= 135 min

Question 17.
In the wild, a California sea lion can live to be 20 years old. In captivity, it can live to be 360 months old. Does a California sea lion live longer in the wild or in captivity? How much longer?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.7 5
Answer:
one year is equal to 12 months
20 x 12 = 240 months
360 is higher than 240 so in captivity.

Question 18.
Movie A is 98 minutes long. Movie B is 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours long. Movie C is 1\(\frac{3}{4}\) hours long. Order the movies from longest to shortest.
Answer:
movie a = 98 min
movie b = 90 min
movie c = 105 min
movies c is longest

Units of Time Homework & Practice 11.7

Find the equivalent amount of time.
Question 1.
9 yr = _____ wk

Answer:
9 yr = 468 wk

Explanation:
one year is equal to 52 week
9 x 52= 468 wk

Question 2.
10 min = _____ sec

Answer:
10 min = 600 sec

Explanation:
one minute is equal to 60 sec
10 x 60 =600 sec

Question 3.
1 wk = _____ h

Answer:
1 wk =  168 hours

Explanation:
one week is equal to 7 days
7 x 24 = 168 hours.

Question 4.
6 yr = _____ mo

Answer:
6 yr = months

Explanation:
one year is equal to 12 months
6 x 12 = 72 months

Question 5.
3 yr = _____ d

Answer:
3 yr = 1095 d

Explanation:
one year is equal to 365 days
3 x 365 = 1095 days

Question 6.
2 d = ______ min

Answer:
2 d =

Explanation:
one day is equal to 24 hours
one hour is equal to 60 min
2 x 24 = 48 hours
48 x 60 = 2880 min

Question 7.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) d = _____ h

Answer:
8 hours

Question 8.
2\(\frac{3}{4}\) yr = ______ wk

Answer:
2. 75 yr
one year is equal 52 week
2. 75 = 143 week

Question 9.
How many hours are in 1 week?

Answer:
one week is equal to 7 days
one day is equal to 24 hours
7 x 24 = 168 hours

Question 10.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend labels the first column Weeks and the second column Years. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.7 6
Answer:
yes , my friend is correct the table discribes years and weeks.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
How many days is Newton thinking of?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.7 7
Answer:
one week is equal to 7 days
one day is equal to 24 hours
7 x 2 = 14
14 x 24 = 336  hours
yes newton is correct.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
You have 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours before dinner. You want to watch a movie that is 118 minutes long. Do you have enough time to watch the entire movie?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.7 8
Answer: no

Question 13
DIG DEEPER!
The world record for holding a person vertically overhead with one hand is 1\(\frac{1}{12}\) minutes. The world record for holding a person horizontally overhead with one hand is 76 seconds. Which world record is longer? How much longer?
Answer:
one minute is equal to 60 sec
13/ 12 = 1.08
1. 08 x 60 = 65 sec
The world record for holding a person horizontally overhead with one hand is 76 seconds.
is longer

Review & Refresh

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 14.
Estimate: _____
418 × 3 = _____
Answer:
1254

Question 15.
Estimate: _____
729 × 5 = _____
Answer:
3645

Question 16.
Estimate: _____
9 × 3,026 = _____
Answer:
27234

Lesson 11.8 Problem Solving: Elapsed Time

Explore and Grow

Use a clock to help answer each question.

How much time has passed since you woke up?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.8 1
How much time has passed since school started?
Answer:
If my school started at 9 o’ clock and now it is 3 o’ clock then the time passed is 6 hours

Construct Arguments
Explain to a partner how you found your answers.
Answer:
The time which had passed away we have to calculate that.

Think and Grow: Problem Solving: Time Intervals

Example
A dinosaur museum closes in 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours. Do you have enough time to spend 20 minutes at each of 4 exhibits in the museum?

Understand the Problem
What do you know?
• The museum closes in 1\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours.
• You want to spend 20 minutes at at each of 4 exhibits.

What do you need to find?
• You need to find whether you have enough time to spend 20 minutes at the each of 4 exhibits.museum closes.

Answers:
a. 1 x 1/2 = 3/ 2
1.5
one hour is equal to 60 min
1.5 x 60 = 90 min
b. there are 4 exhibits each takes 20 min
4 x 20 = 80 mins
90 – 80 = 10
c. so the time is sufficient

Make a Plan
How will you solve?
• Find the number of minutes until the museum closes.
• Find the total number of minutes it takes to visit the exhibits.

Solve
Step 1: Find the number of minutes until the museum closes.
There are ______ minutes in 1 hour.
1\(\frac{1}{2}\) × ____ = ______
There are _____ minutes until the museum closes.

Step 2: Find how many minutes it takes to visit the exhibits.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.8 2
It takes _____ minutes to visit the exhibits, which is ______ than 90 minutes.

You ______ have enough time to visit the exhibits.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You have a total of 9\(\frac{1}{2}\) minutes to complete 4 tasks in a video game. Do you have enough time to spend 150 seconds on each task?

Answer:
total time is 9 x1/2
19 / 2
= 9.5 min
9.5 x 60 = 570 sec
there are 570 sec in total
we have 4 tasks 150 s each
4 x 150= 600
600 – 570 = 30
we want more thirty sec to finish the task.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.
Question 2.
You spend 1\(\frac{1}{4}\) hours exploring the woods. Then you spend 25 minutes sitting at a campfire. How many total minutes do you spend exploring the woods and sitting at the campfire?

Answer:
my spend time is 1 x 1/4 = 5/4
=1.25
one hour is equal to 60 minutes 25 minutes sitting at a campfire.
1.25 x 60 = 75
Total minutes do me spend exploring the woods and sitting at the campfire is 75 minutes

Question 3.
A bodybuilder spends 2\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours lifting weights. She spends 20 minutes running. How many more minutes does she spend lifting weights than running?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.8 3
Answer:
lifting weights is 2 x 1/2
3/2 = 1.5
1.5 x 60 = 90 min
running = 20
90 – 20= 70
she spend lifting weighs than running is 70 minutes.

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 4.
You visit an animal shelter for 1\(\frac{3}{4}\) hours. You spend an equal amount of time with each of the 7 animals. How many minutes do you spend with each animal?

Answer:
The animal shelter visiting time is 1 x 3/4 =
7 / 4 = 1.75
one hour is equal to 60 minutes
1.75 x 60= 105 minutes
an equal amount of time with each of the 7 animals
105 / 7
= 15minutes is the time me spend with each animal

Question 5.
A skate park closes in 3\(\frac{1}{4}\) hours. Do you have enough time to spend 15 minutes practicing each of 13 different skateboard tricks?

Answer:
A skate park closes at 13/4
3.25
one hour is equal to 60 minutes
3.25 x 60 = 195 min
15 x 13 =195
yes I have  enough time to spend 15 minutes practicing each of 13 different skateboard tricks.

Question 6.
A basketball team practices drills for 20 minutes and then scrimmages for 40 minutes. The overall practice time is divided evenly into3 sessions. How many minutes is each session?

Answer:
drills = 20 min
scrimmages= 40 mins
drills + scrimmages
20 + 40 =60min
the total time is 60 min
it is divided to 3 equal parts that is 60/ 3 = 20 mins

Question 7.
A high school music concert is 55 minutes long. The band plays25 minutes to start the concert. The rest of the concert time is divided equally among the choir, band, orchestra, and jazz ensemble. For how many minutes does the orchestra play?

Answer:
Total time is 55 mins
25 mins to start the the concert
55-25= 30
there are 4 types
choir, band, orchestra, and jazz ensemble
orchestra plays 7.5 mins long

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Field day starts at 12:15 .. and ends at 3:30 ..You spend an equal amount of time at each activity.How much time do you spend at each activity?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.8 4
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Step 1: How long is field day?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.8 5
Step 2: How many minutes long is field day?
There are ______ minutes in 1 hour. _____ × _____ = _____
____ + 15 = ______ Add 15 minutes.
Field day is ______ minutes long.
Step 3: Divide the total amount of time by the number of field day activities.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.8 6
You spend _____ minutes at each activity.

Answer:
The field day is 3 hours 15 mins long
There are 60 minutes in 1 hour. 60 × 60 x 60 = 180
180+ 15 =  Add 15 minutes.
Field day is 195 minutes long.
Divided the total amount of time by the number of field day activities.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
You start exercising at 6:30 A.M. and finish at 7:45 A.M. You spend an equal amount of time stretching, walking, and running. How much time do you spend doing each exercise?

Answer:
The total exercise time is 6:30 – 7.45 = 1hr 15 min
1 hr = 60 min
60 + 15 = 75/3 = 25 mins
time do you spend doing each exercise is 25 mins

Problem Solving: Elapsed Time Homework & Practice 11.8

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 1.
It takes Descartes 1\(\frac{1}{4}\) minutes to run 3 laps around his house. Each lap takes him the same amount of time. How many seconds does it take him to run each lap?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.8 7
Answer:
5/4 = 1.25 x 60 = 75sec
one minute is equal to 60 sec
Each lap takes him the same amount of time 75 seconds it take him to run each lap.

Question 2.
You watch television for 60 minutes. There are 18 minutes of commercials. The rest of the time is divided evenly between 2 shows. How many minutes long is each show?

Answer:
Total watching time is 60m
18 mins for commercial 60 – 18 = 42
The rest of the time is divided evenly between 2 shows 42/2 = 24 minutes long is each show.

Question 3.
You spend 5\(\frac{1}{2}\) hours at the park this week. You spend 210 fewer minutes at the library than you do at the park. How many minutes do you spend at the library?

Answer:
hours at the park this week is 11/2 = 5.5
5.5 x 60 = 330
330 – 210 = 120 minutes.

Question 4.
Your class spends \(\frac{1}{4}\) hour setting up an experiment. You spend 55 more minutes recording data than you do setting up the experiment. For how many minutes do you record data?

Answer:
1/4 of hour is 60/4 =15min
You spend 55 more minutes recording data than you do setting up the experiment.
55-15 = 40 minutes  you record data.

Question 5.
You have 7\(\frac{1}{2}\) minutes left to successfully complete 3 rock climbing walls. It normally takes 155 seconds to climb each wall. Do you have enough time to climb all three walls?

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.8 8
Answer:
15/2 = 7.5
=450 one min is equal to 60 sec
It normally takes 155 seconds to climb each wall 155 x 3 = 465
 time to climb all three walls 465 – 450 = 15 sec less time.
The time does not enough to climb all the three walls

Question 6.
Writing
Write and solve a two-step word problem involving elapsed time.
Answer :
Sam and his mom arrive at the doctor’s office at 2:30 p.m. They see the doctor at 3:10 p.m. How long was their wait?
40 mins

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
A family attends a family expo from 1:30 P.M. to 5:15 P.M. They spend an equal amount of time at each activity. How many minutes do they spend at each activity?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.8 9
Answer:
There are 5 family expo activities timing from 1:30 to 5:30 is 4 hours
4 x 60 = 240 min
240/5 = 48 min they spend an equal amount of time at each activity.

Review & Refresh

Find the product.
Question 8.
20 × 50
Answer:
100

Question 9.
38 × 30
Answer:
1140

Question 10.
60 × 82
Answer:
4920

Lesson 11.9 Mixed Measures

Explore and Grow

Measure your height, the height of a classmate, and the height of your teacher. Write each height in the table.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 1
Who is taller, you or your classmate? How much taller?

Who is taller, you or your teacher? How much taller?
Answer:

Structure
Without measuring, how can you find each height in inches?
Answer:
by multiplying with 12

Think and Grow: Adding and Subtracting Mixed Measures

Example
Add 3 feet 4 inches and 2 feet 5 inches.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 2
The differences is ____ hours ____ minutes
Answer:
The differences is 2 hours 48 minutes

Show and Grow

Add or Subtract
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 3
Answer:
5 days  21 hours

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 4
Answer:
3 T     1500 lb

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 5
Answer:
2 gal 14 c

Apply and Grow: Practice

Add or Subtract
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 6
Answer:
3 yr 7 mon

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 7
Answer:
8 lb 11 oz

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 8
Answer:
9 yd 2 ft

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 9
Answer:
12 gal 3 qt

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 10
Answer:
43 sec

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 11
Answer:
16 mi  591 yd

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 12
Answer:
1 wk 5 d

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 13
Answer:
2 pt  1 c

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 14
Answer:
4 yr   36 wk

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 15
Answer:
3 qt 1 pt

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 16
Answer:
3 mi 4851ft

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 17
Answer:
12 gal 9 pt

Question 16.
A truck driver transports new vehicles. The total weight of the cargo is 14 tons 1,544 pounds. The truck driver drops off 1 car that weighs 1 ton1,693 pounds. What is the weight of the cargo now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 18
Answer:
12 ton 1851 pounds

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the unknown numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 19
Answer:

Question 18.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton finds the difference between 5 yards 1 foot and 2 yards 2 feet. Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 20

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A commercial airplane is 121 feet 6 inches shorter than Air Force One. How long is the commercial airplane?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 21
Subtract 121 feet 6 inches from the length of Air Force One.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 22
The commercial airplane is ______ feet ______ inches long.
Answer:
The commercial airplane is 110 feet 4 inches long.

Show and Grow

Question 19.
An art teacher has 3 quarts 1 pint of yellow paint. The teacher has 1 quart 2 pints less red paint than yellow paint. How much red paint does the teacher have?
Answer: 1 quart 3 pints

Question 20.
A 1-month-old puppy weighs 7 pounds 3 ounces. How much does the puppy weigh after 3 months?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 23
Answer:
10 lb 2 oz

Question 21.
DIG DEEPER!
How long do you work on your science fair project in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 24
Answer: each part is raising by hundred

Mixed Measures Homework & Practice 11.9

Add or Subtract
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 25
Answer:
4 lb 7 oz

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 26
Answer:
2 min 5 sec

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 27
Answer:
3 mi 825 ft

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 28
Answer:
1 t

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 29
Answer:
6 gal 2 qt

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 30
Answer:
5 hr  47 min

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 31
ans:
9 yd 2 ft

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 32
Answer:
6 pt

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 33
Answer:
2 ft 10 in

Question 10.
You are making punch. You use 3 quarts 1 pint of pineapple juice and 2 quarts 1 pint of orange juice.How much juice do you use?
Answer:
5 quart 2 pints

Question 11.
Writing
Explain when you need to regroup when subtracting mixed measures.
Answer:
To find out the lengths

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
How much longer did it take one person to cycle the length of South America than a two-person team?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 34
Answer:
8 days 4 hours 2 minutes

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
It rains 1 inch each day for 3 days. A meteorologist says that if the rain had been snow,each inch of rain would have been 1 foot 1 inch of snow. What would have been the total snowfall for the 3 days?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 11.9 35
Answer:
3 foot 3 inch

Review & Refresh

Subtract
Question 14.
\(\frac{5}{10}-\frac{1}{10}\) = ______
Answer:
0.5 -0.1
= 0.4

Question 15.
\(\frac{9}{5}-\frac{4}{5}\) = ______
Answer:
1.8-0.8=
1

Question 16.
\(\frac{11}{12}-\frac{7}{12}\) = _____
Answer:
0.91-0.58=
0.33

Understand Measurement Equivalence Performance Task

You and a friend make a gravity-powered racer for an upcoming race.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 1
Question 1.
The rules state that the racer must be less than 40 inches wide and less than 96 inches long. The weight of the racer must be less than 70 pounds.
a. Your racer is 2 feet wide and 1 yardlong. Does your racer meet the size requirements? Explain.
b. Your racer weighs 65 pounds without wheels, and each wheel weighs 22 ounces. Is your racer under the weight limit? Explain.
Answer:
a) one feet is equal to 12 inch
2 x 12 = 24
the required measurement is 40 inch
the racer does not met the requirments.
b) one pound  equal to 16 ounce
so the racer original weight is 64 pounds 4 ounce
the required weight is 70 pounds /
so he is qualified

Question 2.
You test your racer on a track. The length of the track is \(\frac{1}{2}\) mile. What is the length of the track in feet?

Answer:
one mile is equal 5280 feet
5280/ 2 = 2640 feet
the track length is 2640

Question 3.
The table shows the race times for all of the teams.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 2
a. Make a line plot to display the data.
b. How many seconds later did the last team finish than the first team?
Answer: after one minute

Question 4.
After the race, you drink 5 cups of water and your friend drinks 3 pints of water. Who drinks more water? How much more?

Answer:
my friend drank the more water
one pint is equal to 2 cups
3 x 2 = 6
I drank 5 cups my friend drink 6 cups

Understand Measurement Equivalence Activity

Conversion Flip and Find
Directions:
1. Choose which conversion cards you will play with.
2. Place the cards face down on the board.
3. Players take turns flipping two cards.
4. If your two cards show equivalent measures, keep the cards. If your cards show different measures, flip the cards back over.
5. The player with the most matches wins!
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence 3

Understand Measurement Equivalence Chapter Practice

11.1 Length in Metric Units

Find the equivalent length.
Question 1.
7 km = _____ m

Answer:
7 km = 7000m

Explanation:
one kilometer is equal to 1000m
7 x 1000= 7000m
so there are 7000 meter in 7 km

Question 2.
9 m = _____ mm

Answer:
9 m = 9000mm

Explanation:
one meter is equal to 1000 millimeter
9 x 1000 = 9000
so there are 9000 mm in 9 m.

Question 3.
3 cm = _____ mm

Answer:
3 cm = 30 mm

Explanation:
one cm is equal to 10 mm
3 x 10 = 30mm
so there are 30mm in 3 cm

Question 4.
5 km = _____ cm

Answer:
5 km = 500000 cm

Explanation:
one kilometer is equal to 1000 m
5 x 1000 = 5000m
one meter is equal to 100 cm
5000 x 100 = 500000cm.

11.2 Mass and Capacity in Metric Units

Find the equivalent mass.
Question 5.
3 kg = _____ g

Answer:
3 kg = 3000g

Explanation:
one kg is equal to 1000 g
3 x 1000 = 3000g
so there are 3000g in 3 kg.

Question 6.
7 kg = _____ g

Answer:
7 kg = 7000g

Explanation:
one kg is equal to 1000g
7 x 1000 = 7000g
so there are 7000 g in 7 kg

Question 7.
8 kg = _____ g

Answer:
8 kg = 8000g

Explanation:
one kg is equal to 1000 grams
8 x 1000 = 8000g
so there are 8000g in 8 kg

Question 8.
46 kg = ____ g

Answer:
46 kg = 46000g

Explanation:
one kg is equal to 1000 g
46 x 1000= 46000g
so there are 46000 g in 46kgs

Find the equivalent capacity.
Question 9.
2 L = _____ mL

Answer:
2 L = 2000ml

Explanation:
one liter is equal to 1000ml
2 x 1000 = 2000l
so there are 2000 ml in 2L

Question 10.
10 L = _____ mL

Answer:
10 L = 10000ml

Explanation:
one liter is equal to 1000ml
10 x 1000 = 10000l
so there are 10000 ml in 10L

Question 11.
4 L = ____ mL

Answer:
4 L = 4000ml

Explanation:
one liter is equal to 1000ml
4 x 1000 = 4000l
so there are 4000 ml in 4L

Question 12.
98 L = ____ mL

Answer:
98 L = 98000ml

Explanation:
one liter is equal to 1000ml
98 x 1000 = 98000l
so there are 98000 ml in 98L

Question 13.
What is the mass of the potatoes in grams?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 13
Answer:
5 kg = 5000g

Explanation:
one 1 kg is equal to 1000g
5 x 1000 g = 5000g

11.3 Length in Customary Units

Find the equivalent length.
Question 14.
8 ft = ___ in.

Answer:
one feet is equal to 12 inch
8 x 12 = 96inch

Question 15.
10 yd = _____ ft

Answer:
10 yd = 30 ft

Explanation:
one yard is equal to 3 feet
10 x 3 = 30 feet

Question 16.
12 yd = _____ in.

Answer:
12 yd = 432 in.

Explanation:
one yard is equal to 3 feet
12 x 3 =36 feet
one feet is equal to 12 inch
36 x 12 = 432inch.

Question 17.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) mi = _____ yd
Answer:
one mile is equal to 1760 yard
3/ 4 of 1760 is 1320

Question 18.
Modeling Real Life
You have a 4-foot-long roll of magnetic tape. You use 2 inches for each picture you hang on the refrigerator. How many pictures can you hang?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 18
Answer:
I have 4 foot of magnetic tape
one foot is equal to 12 inch
4 x 12 = 48
48/2 = 24 pictures i can paste

11.4 Weight in Customary Units

Find the equivalent weight.
Question 19.
4 T = ______ lb

Answer:
4 t = 8000lb

Explanation
one ton is equal to 2000 pounds
4 x 2000 = 8000 pounds

Question 20.
15 lb = _____ oz

Answer:
15 lb = 240 oz

Explanation:
one pound is equal to 16 ounce
15 x 16 = 240 ounce
there are 240 ounce in 15 pounds

Question 21.
12 lb = _____ oz

Answer:
12 lb = 192 oz

Explanation:
one pound is equal to 16 ounce
12 x 16 = 192 ounce
there are 192 ounce in 12 pounds

Question 22.
15 T = ______ lb

Answer:
15 t = 30000lb

Explanation
one ton is equal to 2000 pounds
15 x 2000 = 30000 pounds

Question 23.
2\(\frac{1}{2}\) lb = _____ oz
Answer:
one pound is equal to 16 ounce
2. 5 pound is equal to 40 ounce

Question 24.
\(\frac{3}{4}\) T = _____ lb
Answer:
1500 pounds

11.5 Capacity in Customary Units

Find the equivalent capacity.
Question 25.
6 pt = _____ c

Answer:
6 pt = 12 cups

Explanation:
one pint is equal to 2 cups
6 x 2 = 12 cups
so there are 12 cups in 6 pints

Question 26.
3 qt = ______ pt

Answer:
3 qt = 6 pt

Explanation:
one quart is equal to 2 pints
3  x2 = 6 pints
so there are 6 pints 3 quarts

Question 27.
9 gal = ______ qt

Answer:
9 gal = 36 quarts

Explanation:
one gallon is equal to 4 quarts
9 x 4 = 36 quarts
so there are 36 quarts in 9 gal

Question 28.
2 gal = ______ pt

Answer:
2 gal = 16 pt

Explanation:
one galllon is equal to 4 quarts
one quart is equal to 2 pints
2 x 4 = 8 quarts
8 x 2 = 16 pints

Question 29.
10\(\frac{3}{4}\) gal = ______ pt
Answer:
3 / 4 of one gallon
10. 75 gal is equal to 86 pints

Question 30.
6\(\frac{1}{2}\) pt = _____ c
Answer:
6 x 0.5= 6.5
6.5 x 2= 13 cups

11.6 Make and Interpret Line Plots

Question 31.
A scientist is studying the lengths of 15 sea horses. Make a line plot to display the data.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 31
Answer:

Question 32.
Precision
Use the line plot in Exercise 31. How many times as many \(\frac{3}{8}\)-inch sea horses are there as \(\frac{1}{4}\)-inch sea horses? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 32
Answer: 8 times of 3/8 sea horses are there.

Question 33.
Reasoning
In Exercise 31, are most of the sea horses less than \(\frac{5}{8}\) inch long? Explain.
Answer:
each sea horse is greater than 5/8.
according to the table

11.7 Units of Time

Find the equivalent amount of time.
Question 34.
5 yr = _____ wk
Answer:
one year is equal to 52 week
5 x 52 = 260wk

Question 35.
15 min = _____ sec
Answer:
one minute is equal to 60 sec
15 x 60 = 900 sec

Question 36.
\(\frac{1}{3}\) d = _____ h
Answer:
one day is equal to 24 hours
24/ 3 = 8 hours.

Question 37.
1\(\frac{1}{2}\) yr = _____ wk
Answer:
one year is equal to 52 week
one and half year is equal to 76 wk

11.8 Problem Solving: Elapsed Time

Question 38.
A gymnastics competition is 2\(\frac{3}{4}\) hours long. The competition time is divided equally among 5 age groups. For how many minutes does each age group perform?
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 38
Answer:
each team participates 41 minutes long

11.9 Mixed Measures

Add or subtract
Question 39.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 39
Answer:
11 yr 10 mo

Question 40.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 40
Answer:
8 gal 1 qt

Question 41.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 41
Answer:
11 pints 1 cup

Question 42.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 42
Answer:
6 yd 2 feet
one yard is equal to 3 feet.

Question 43.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 43
Answer:  4 days 15 h.
one day is equal to 24 hours

Question 44.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence chp 44
Answer:
8 miles 1651 yd
one mile is equal to 1760 yards

Understand Measurement Equivalence Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Four laps around a track is equal to1 mile. You run 3 laps around the track. Which number line show show many miles you run?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 1
Answer:
option b

Question 2.
When estimating to find the product of 25 and 32, which expressions will give an estimate that is greater than the product of 25 and 32?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 2
Answer:
option a

Question 3.
A bottle of sand art is \(\frac{3}{8}\) full of purple sand and \(\frac{3}{8}\) full of blue sand. The rest of the bottle is full of green sand. How much of the bottle is filled with both purple sand and blue sand?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 3
Answer:
option c
is true

Question 4.
Which statements are true?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 4
Answer:
option c is wrong

Question 5.
Compare the fractions using benchmarks. Which comparisons are true?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 5
Answer:
option b is wrong statement

Question 6.
What number is shown by the model?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 6
Answer:
option c
5/10 = 0.5

Question 7.
Which fraction cannot be written as a mixed number?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 7
Answer:
option d

Question 8.
What is the missing number in _____ ÷ 2 = 400?
A. 200
B. 800
C. 8,000
D. 600
Answer:
option b
800/ 2 = 400.

Question 9.
Which statements are true?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 9
Answer:
option c
1000 m is equal to 1 kilometer

Question 10.
Multiply 2 × 3\(\frac{5}{6}\).
A. 6\(\frac{5}{6}\)
B. 7\(\frac{4}{6}\)
C. 5
D. \(\frac{5}{36}\)
Answer:
option a

Question 11.
Which one does not belong?
A. \(\frac{3}{10}\)
B. 0.30
C. 0.03
D. \(\frac{30}{100}\)
Answer:
option d

Question 12.
Which expression shows \(\frac{4}{3}\) as a sum of unit fractions?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 12
Answer:
option d
4 / 3 is represented as 1 / 3 + 1 / 3 + 1/ 3 + 1 / 3.

Question 13.
Look at the dot pattern below. How many dots are in the 112th figure?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 13
Answer: 448 dots

Question 14.
Which show 5 hundredths?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 14
Answer:
option a 5/100

Question 15.
A child ticket costs $12 less than an adult ticket. In 1 day, 25 adult tickets and 34 child tickets are sold.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 15
Part A How much money was raised from adult tickets?
Part B How much money was raised from child tickets?
Part C How much more money was raised from child tickets than from adult tickets? Explain.
Answer:
a. $65
b. $12
c.  $ 53

Question 16.
Which measures are equivalent to8 gallons?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 16
Answer:
32 quarts

Question 17.
You want to find 4 × 598 using the Distributive Property. You begin solving as shown. What is your next step?
4 × 598 = 4 × (600 – 2)
A. 4 × 600 × 2
B. (4 × 600) + (4 × 2)
C. (4 × 600) – (4 × 2)
D. (4 × 600) – 2
Answer:
option c
formula: a x  (b – c)
4 (600-2)
4 x 600 – 4 x2

Question 18.
A recipe calls for \(\frac{3}{4}\) cup of peanut butter. You make 3 batches of the recipe. Which expressions show how many cups of peanut butter you use?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence cp 18
Answer:
3 x 3/4
option c

Understand Measurement Equivalence STEAM Performance Task

An electrical circuit is a pathway of wires that electricity can flow through. Many homes have an electrical panel that provides power to electrical circuits. The circuits are connected to electrical outlets throughout the home.
Question 1.
Watts are the measure of how much power a circuit can provide. Every electrical current has two components: volts and amps.
Watts = volts × amps
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence spt 1
a. For a wire that carries 120 volts and 20 amps, how many watts of power are available?
b. For a wire that carries 240 volts and 15 amps, how many watts of power are available?
Answer:
a. watts = volts x amps
120 x 20 = 2400
2400 watts of power are available
b. watts = volts x amps
240 x 15= 3600
for a wire that carries 240 v and 15 a the power of watts available are 3600.

Question 2.
An electrician checks the circuits in your house.
a. One of the circuits has a maximum capacity of 15 amps. The electrician recommends that you only use \(\frac{4}{5}\) of the total amps on the circuit. How many amps should be used?
b. The wire from this 15-amp circuit carries 120 volts. How many watts should be used on this circuit?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence spt 2
c. Your toaster is plugged in to the 15-amp circuit. Use the table to find another appliance that can be used on the same circuit and stay within the recommended amount of amps.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence spt 3
d.Can you run the microwave and the refrigerator on the15-amp circuit? Explain.
Answer:
yes by the above table recordings

Question 3.
You are decorating for a party at your house.
a. There are 15 bulbs on a string of lights. Each bulb uses 12 watts of energy. How many watts of energy does one string of lights use?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence spt 4
b. You connect 7 strings of lights together. Can the lights be plugged into a 15-amp circuit, or is a 20-amp circuit needed? Explain.
c. The length of each string is 20\(\frac{3}{4}\) feet. What is the total length of all 7 strings of lights?
d. Five of the bulbs burn out. Of the bulbs that are lit, \(\frac{2}{10}\)are purple, \(\frac{1}{10}\) are blue, \(\frac{2}{10}\) are green, and the rest are red.What fraction of the bulbs are red?
e. How many more bulbs are purple than blue?
f. The lights are plugged in from 4:35 P.M. until 9:35 P.M. Each hour that the lights are on costs about $0.18 in electricity.What is the total cost to have the lights on for the party?

Answer:
a. one bulb = 8 watts
one string = 15 bulbs
8 x 15 = 120 watts
b.  7 x 120 = 840 watts make an ampire 15 amp wire is enough
1 amp = 120 watt
15 amp 15 x 120 = 1800 watt capacity circuit
c.   145
d.    0.2 are purple
0.1 is blue
0.2 are red
the fraction of the bulbs are red
e.     0.1bulbs are purple than blue
f.     5 x 0.18
= 5.08
is the total cost to have the lights on for the party

Conclusion:

We wish the information provided in this article regarding the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence Circumference, Area, and Volume is beneficial for all the students. Make use of the given links and practice well for the exams. If you have any queries about Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 11 Understand Measurement Equivalence you can post your comments in the below section.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7

Big Ideas Math Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers Answers PDF link is available here. Students who have been looking for the solutions of BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 7 can download the solution key provided in pdf format and begin preparation. This answer key is useful to complete the homework within time. Students can get the answers for every question in BIM Book 3rd Grade 7th Chapter Round and Estimate Numbers in the following sections.

Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers

BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers includes the topics like Place value, Round Numbers Using a Number Line, Round Numbers Using Place Value, Estimate Sums, and Estimate Differences. After preparing these lessons, you will find the performance task section where you can check skills. To become an expert in maths, you need to prepare as per Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers.

The solutions provided here are solved by experts in mathematics. So, download Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade 7th Chapter Round and Estimate Numbers Answer Key PDF. You can also get the direct links for every lesson in the below sections. Just tap on those links and get the answers easily.

Lesson 1: Place value

Lesson 2: Round Numbers Using a Number Line

Lesson 3: Round Numbers Using Place Value

Lesson 4: Estimate Sums

Lesson 5: Estimate Differences

Performance Task

Lesson 7.1 Place value

Explore and Grow
Model each number. Write each number in expanded form.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 1
130
310
103

Answer:
100+30+0=130
300+10+0=310
100+00+3=103
Reasoning
Which number is the greatest? How do you know?

Answer: 310 is the greatest number because the number value of the digit in hundreds place is great compared to others numbers i.e 103 and 130.

Think and Grow: Place value

Find the value of the underlined digit.
Example
253
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 2
Expanded form: 200 + 50 + 3
The digit 5 has a value of _5 tens_, or __50__.

Example
517
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 3
Expanded form: _500__ + __10__ + ___7__
The digit 5 has a value of __5 hundreds___, or ___500__.

Show and Grow
Circle the value of the underlined digit.

Question.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 4

Answer:


Circle the value of the underlined digit.

Question.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 5

Answer:



Write the value of the underlined digit

Question 8.
152

Answer:

The value of the place of  one digit in the number 152.
The digit 1 has a place value of  100 because its in the hundreds place.
Question 9.
725

Answer:

The value of the place of the five digit in the number 725.
The digit 5 has a place value of one’s because its in the one’s place.

Question 10.
2o7

Answer:

The value of the place of the digit in the number 207.
The digit 0 has a place value of  tens because its in the tens place.

Identify the value of each digit.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 6

Answer:

The value of 3 in 386 = 300
The value of 8 in 386 = 80
The value of 6 in 386 = 6
Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 7

Answer:

The value of 5 in 569 = 500
The value of 6 in 569 = 60
The value of 9 in 569 = 9

Question 13.
Reasoning
Use each number card once to write the greatest three-digit number. Then use each number card once to write the least three-digit number.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 8

Answer:
Among three digits given hundreds place= 8( its greater than other 2 three digits)
Among 2 digits three digits given tens place= 5 (its greater than other  2)
Last ones place = 2(its left out digit)

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
Newton spends two hundred two dollars atthe grocery store.Descartes spends $220. Who spends more money?
Make quick sketches:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 9
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 10
_____ spends more money.

Answer:
Newton amount spent value= 2 hundred and 2 dollar
= $200+ $2=$202
Descartes amount spent value= $220
$202   <    $220
Hence, Descartes spends more money.

Show and Grow

Question 4.
Newton spends one hundred forty-two dollars at the pet store. Descartes spends $124. Who spends more money?

Answer:
Newton amount spent value= 1 hundred and forty two dollar
= $100+ $40+$2=$142
Descartes amount spent value= $124
$142   >    $124
Hence, Newton spends more money.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
Order the weights of the zoo animals from least to greatest. Which animal weighs the least? Which animal weighs the most?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 11

Answer:

Lion weighs the least of a weighting of 404 pounds.
Zebra weighs the most of weighting of 474 pounds.

Place value Property Homework & Practice 7.1

Circle the value of the underlined digit.

Question.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 12

Answer:




The value of 2 in 325= 20
The value of 1 in 541= 1
The value of 6 in 653= 600
The value of 4 in 194= 4

Write the value of the underlined digit

Question 5.
736

Answer:

7 X 100 +3 X 10 +6 X 1=700+30+6 = 736
The value of 3 digit in the number 736 is 3 tens or 30.

Question 6.
962

Answer:

9 X 100+6 X 10+2 X 1=900+60+2 = 962
The  value of 9 digit in the number 962 is 9 hundreds or 900.

Question 7.
897

Answer:

8 X 100+9 X 10+7 X 1=800+90+7 = 897
The value of 7 digit in the number 897 is  7 one’s or 7.

Identify the value of each digit.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 13

Answer:

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 14

Answer:

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Descartes is thinking of a number. What is his number?
The three digits of my number are 2, 7, and 5.
My number is even.
My number is less than 750.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 15

Answer:
The three digits numbers are 2,7,5
CONDITIONS :
The three digits numbers are 2,7,5
My number is even.
My number is less than 750.
So, Among three digits 2 is even, the last digit is “2”
Out of 7 and 5 digits,5 < 7. so the first digit in my number is 5.
The middle digit is going to be 7.
Hence,the three-digit my number= 572.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life A skating rink gives out three hundred thirty glow sticks on Friday and 303 glow sticks on Saturday. On which day does the skating rink give out more glow sticks?

Answer:
Glow  sticks given on Friday = three hundred thirty
=3 x 100+3 x 10=300+30=330
Glow  sticks given on Saturday=303
Comparison:  330 > 303
Hence, the day the skating rink given out more glow sticks is on Friday.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Order the basketball field goals made in a season of the basketball players from least to greatest. Which player made the least number of field goals? Which made the most number of field goals?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.1 16

Answer:

Player who made the least number of field goals is D player.
Player who made the most number of field goals is C player.

Review & Refresh
Complete the related facts

Question 13.
9 ÷ 3 = ____
3 × ____ = 9

Answer:
9 ÷ 3 = 3
3 × __3__ = 9

Question 14.
40 ÷ 8 = __5___
8 × ___5_ = 40

Answer:
40 ÷ 8 = __5___
8 × ___5_ = 40

Question 15.
63 ÷ 7 = __9__
7 × ___9_ = 63

Answer:
63 ÷ 7 = __9__
7 × __9___ = 63

Lesson 7.2 Round Numbers Using a Number Line

Explore and Grow
Plot 32 on the number line. Circle the two closest multiples of ten.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 1
Which multiple of ten is 32 closer to?

Answer:

The two closest multiples of 32 ten is 30 and 40.

Hence, the multiple of ten close to 32 is 30.

Repeated Reasoning
Which multiple of ten is closer to 38? 31? 36? How did you decide? Explain.

Answer:

38 is between 30 and 40.
38 is closer to 40 than it is to 30.
So, 38 is rounded to the nearest ten to 40.

Think and Grow: Round Numbers Using a Number Line
To round a number to the nearest ten, replace the number with its nearest multiple of ten. When a number is half way between two multiples of ten, use the greater number.
Example
Round 23 to the nearest ten.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 2
23 is between 20 and 30.
23 is closer to ___ than it is to _____. So, 23 rounded to the nearest ten is _____

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 2
23 is between 20 and 30.
23 is closer to 20 than it is to 30.
So, 23 rounded to the nearest ten is 20.

Example
Round 175 to the nearest ten
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 3
175 is halfway between 170 and 180.
So, 175 rounded to the nearest ten is _____.
You can round a number to the nearest hundred in a similar way.

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 3
175 is halfway between 170 and 180.
175 rounded to the Nearest Ten is 180.
So, the Nearest Hundred  Value of 175 is 200.

Example
Round 465 to the nearest hundred
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 4
465 is close to ____ than it is to ____.
So, 465 rounded to the nearest hundred is _____.

Answer:

465 is halfway in between  460 and 470.
So, the Nearest Hundred Value of 465 is 500.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Round 59 to the nearest ten _____.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 5

Answer:

The Nearest Ten of 59  is 60.

Question 2.
Round 350 to the nearest ten _____.

Answer:

The Nearest Ten is 350 is 350.

Apply and Grow: Practice
Round the number to the nearest ten and to the nearest hundred/

Question 3.
203
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 7

Answer:

Nearest Ten: 200

Nearest Hundred: 200
Question 4.
75
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 8

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 75 is 80.

The nearest Hundred of 75 is 100.

Question 5.
961
Nearest ten: ______
Nearest hundred: _____

Answer:
Nearest Ten of 961 is 960.

Nearest Hundred of 961 is 1000

Question 6.
47
Nearest ten: _______
Nearest hundred: _____

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 47 is 50.

Nearest Hundred of 47 is 0.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Round ? to the nearest ten and to the nearest hundred
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 9
Nearest ten: ____
Nearest hundred: ______

Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 9
Nearest Ten is 550
Nearest Hundred is 600.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
On which days does the school collect about 90 food items?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 10
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 11
The school collects about 90 food and items on _____ and _____

Answer:

The school collects about 90 food and items on Monday and Thursday because they are nearest to 90 on number line.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Use the table above to and on which days the school collects about 80 food items.

Answer:

The school collects about 80 food and items on Wednesday and Friday because they are nearest to 80 on number line.

Question 9.
Your teacher wants you to read a book with about 200 pages. Circle the books you can read. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 12

Answer:


Books contains 200 about pages are 272 pages and 238 pages because these books having pages of 200 pages and above.
Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 9 rows and 9 columns of soup cans on a shelf. Round the number of soup cans in all to the nearest ten and to the nearest hundred.

Answer:
Number of rows of soups=9
Number of columns of soups=9
Total number of cans of soups in all shelf=9 x 9=81
Nearest Ten of 81= 80
Nearest Hundred of 81=100

Round Numbers Using a Number Line Homework & Practice 7.2

Round the number to the nearest ten and to the nearest hundred.

Question 1.
39
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 13

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 13


39 lies between 30 and 40.
So, the Nearest Ten of 39 is 40.

39 lies between 0 and 100.
So, the Nearest Hundred of 39 is 100.

Question 2.
156
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 14

Answer:

156 lies in between 150 and 160.
So, the Nearest ten of 156 is 160.

156 lies in between 100 and 200.
So, the Nearest Hundred of 156 is 200.
Round the number to the nearest ten and to the nearest hundred.

Question 3.
402
Nearest ten: _____
Nearest hundred: _____

Answer:

402 lies in between 400 and 410.
So, the Nearest Ten of 402 is 400.

402 lies in between 400 and 500.
So, the Nearest Hundred of 402 is 400.

Question 4.
627
Nearest ten: _____
Nearest hundred: ______

Answer:

627 lies in between 620 and 630.
So, the Nearest Ten of 627 is 630.

627 lies in between 600 and 700.
So, the Nearest Hundred of 627 is 600.

Question 5.
Writing
Explain how to use a number line to round 24 to the nearest ten.

Answer:

A line on which numbers are marked at intervals used to illustrate simple numerical operations is known as a number line.
24 is closest to 20 because the number does not cross half way between 20 and 30 on the line. Hence, rounded 24 to the nearest ten is 20.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
Your class is painting stones for a garden mosaic. On which days does your class paint about 30 stones?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 15

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 15
The class paint about 30 stones on Monday and Friday because on these days the paints are above and about 30.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
A giant panda eats about 300 pounds of bamboo every week. Which weights of bamboo can a zookeeper buy to  feed a giant panda for a week?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 16

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.2 16
Weight of bamboo eats the giant panda per week= 300 pounds
Hence,weights of bamboo a zookeeper buys to  feed the giant panda for a week= 310 and 340 pounds(because these two are more than 300 pounds).
Review & Refresh
Tell whether the product is even or odd.

Question 8.
3 × 5 ______

Answer:
3 x 5 = 15

So,15 is odd number.

Question 9.
10 × 8 ______

Answer:
10 x 8 = 80
So, 80 is even number.

Question 10.
7 × 2 _____

Answer:
7 x 2 = 14
So, 14 is even number.

Lesson 7.3 Round Numbers Using Place Value

Explore and Grow
Plot 376 on each number line. Round the number to the nearest ten and to the nearest hundred.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 1
Nearest ten: ______
Nearest hundred: ______

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 376 is 380

Nearest Hundred of 376 is 400.
Reasoning
How can you round the number without using the number line?

Answer:
We can round the number without using the number line by checking if it is less than 5, then the digit in the place you are rounding decreases by 1. If it is 5 or greater, then the digit in the place you are rounding increases by 1 .

Think and Grow: Round Numbers Using Place Value
Use Place Value to Round Numbers
• Find the place to which you are rounding.
• Look at the digit to the right. If it is less than 5, then the digit in the place you are rounding stays the same. If it is 5 or greater, then the digit in the place you are rounding increases by 1.
• Write Zeros for the digits to the right of the place you are rounding.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 2.1
Example
Round 68 to the nearest ten.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 2
68 rounded to the nearest ten is ______.

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 2
The Nearest Ten  of  68 is 70.
Example
Round 235 to the nearest hundred and to the nearest ten.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 3
235 rounded to the nearest hundred is ____. 235 rounded to the nearest ten is ____.

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 3
The Nearest Hundred of 235 is 200.
The Nearest Ten of 235 is 240.

Show and Grow
Round the number to the nearest ten.

Question 1.
41 _____

Answer:


41 lies in between 40 and 50.
So, Nearest Ten of 41 is 40.

Question 2.
85 _____

Answer:

85 lies in between 80 and 90.
85 is the half way of 80 and 90.
So,Nearest Ten of 85 is 90.

Question 3.
153 _____

Answer:


153 lies in between 150 and 160.
Nearest Ten of 153: 150.
Round the number to the nearest hundred.

Question 4.
749 _____

Answer:


749 lies between 700 and 800.
Nearest hundred of 749 is 700.

Question 5.
372 ______

Answer:

372 lies in between 300 and 400.
Nearest Hundred of 372 is 400.

Question 6.
94 _____

Answer:

94 lies in between 0 and 100.
The nearest Hundred of 94 is 100.

Apply and Grow: Practice
Round the number to the nearest ten.

Question 7.
17 ____

Answer:

17 lies in between 10 and 20.
So, the Nearest Ten of 17 is 20.

Question 8.
52 _____

Answer:

52 lies in between 50 and 60.
So, Nearest Ten of 52 is 50.

Question 9.
79 _____

Answer:

79 lies in between 70 and 80.
So, Nearest Ten of 79 is 80.

Question 10.
673 _____

Answer:

673 lies in between 670 and 680.
So, Nearest Ten of 673 is 670.

Question 11.
521 ____

Answer:

521 lies in between 520 and 530.
So, Nearest Ten of 521 of 520.

Question 12.
208 ___

Answer:


208 lies in between 200 and 210.
So, Nearest Ten of 208 is 210.
Round the number to the nearest hundred.

Question 13.
161 ____

Answer:

161 lies in between 100 and 200.
So, the Nearest Hundred of 161 is 200.

Question 14.
738 _____

Answer:


738 lies in between 700 and 800.
So, the Nearest Hundred of 738 is 700.

Question 15.
504 ____

Answer:

504 lies in between 500 and 600.
So, Nearest Hundred of 504 is 500.

Question 16.
50 ____

Answer:

50 lies in between 0 and 100.
So, Nearest Hundred of 50 is 100.

Question 17.
22 ____

Answer:

22 lies in between 0 and 100.
So, Nearest Hundred of 22 is 0.

Question 18.
999 _____

Answer:


999 lies in between 900 and 1000.
So, the Nearest Hundred of 999 is 1000.

Round the number to the nearest ten to the nearest hundred.

Question 19.
836
Nearest ten: ______
Nearest hundred: ____

Answer:

The nearest Ten of  836 is 840.


The nearest Hundred of 836 is 800.

Question 20.
945
Nearest ten: ______
Nearest hundred: ____

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 945 is 950.


Nearest Hundred of 945 is 900.

Question 21.
72
Nearest ten: ______
Nearest hundred: ____

Answer:


Nearest Ten of  72 is 70.


Nearest Hundred of 72 is 100.

Question 22.
Number Sense
Newton rounds 587 to 590. To what place does he round?

Answer:
Newton rounds 587 to 590.

Newton rounds 587 to its Nearest ten-value 590.

Question 23.
Number Sense
Which numbers round to 400 when rounded to the nearest hundred?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 4

Answer:


Numbers rounded to 400 when rounded to the nearest hundreds are 356 and 437.
Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
On which day do about 800 people attend the concert? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 5
About 800 people attend the concert on ______
Explain:
About 800 people attend the concert on all the days because in all the days people count is about n above 800.

Show and Grow

Question 24.
Use the table above to find on which days about 940 people attend the concert. Explain.

Answer:
About  940 people attend the concert on Friday and Sunday because in these days the people count is about n above 940.
DIG DEEPER!
Round the time to the nearest ten minutes.

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 6

Answer:
The nearest Ten minutes of 7:23 is 7:20.

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 7

Answer:
The nearest Ten minutes of 3:05 is 3:10.

Question 27.
Explain how using place value to round is similar to using a number line to round.

Answer:
In math, every digit in a number has a place value.
Place value can be defined as the value represented by a digit in a number on the basis of its position in the number.
number line is a line on which numbers are placed in intervals, to show basic numerical calculations.
Using place value to round is similar to using a number line to round is THE SAME. If we’re rounding the number 111 to the nearest ten, it’s between 110 and 120 on the number line, and it’s closer to 110. Furthermore, the process is the same when we’re rounding to the nearest hundred–only now we’re asking which two multiples of 100 the number falls between.

Round Numbers Using a Place Value Homework & Practice 7.3

Round the number to the nearest ten

Question 1.
29 _____

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 29 is 30.

Question 2.
564 _____

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 564 is 560.

Question 3.
843 ____

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 843 is 840.
Round the number to the nearest hundred

Question 4.
281 ____

Answer:


The nearest Hundred of 281 is 300.

Question 5.
36 ____

Answer:


The nearest Hundred of 36 is 0.

Question 6.
975 ____

Answer:


The nearest Hundred of 975 is 1000.
Round the number to the nearest ten to the nearest hundred.

Question 7.
152
Nearest ten: ______
Nearest hundred: ____

Answer:


Nearest Ten of 152 is 150.


Nearest Hundred of 152 is 200.

Question 8.
308
Nearest ten:
Nearest hundred: ____

Answer:

The nearest ten of 308 is 310.


The nearest hundred of 308 is 300.

Question 9.
45
Nearest ten: ______
Nearest hundred: ____

Answer:


Nearest Ten of 45 is 50.


The nearest Hundred of 45 is 0.

Question 10.
What is the least number that rounds to 20 when rounded to the nearest ten? What is the greatest number?
Least: ____
Greatest: ____

Answer:

The least number that rounds to 20 when rounded to the Nearest Ten is 15.

The greatest number that rounds to 20 when rounded to the Nearest Ten is 24.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Number Sense A three-digit number has the digits 3, 5, and 6.It rounds to 700 when rounded to the nearest hundred. What is the number? Explain.

Answer:
Given: Three digit number digits are 3,5 and 6.
Three digit number rounded to 700 is 653 because in given numbers Hundred place has to be 6 as it has to be rounded to 700.
Tens place has to be equal to 5 or greater than 5, 5 taken for tens place.
Ones place is left out digit that is 3.

The number is 653.

Question 12.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says that a number rounded to the nearest ten can be greater than the same number rounded to the nearest hundred. Is Descartes correct? Explain.

Answer:
Descartes says that a number rounded to the Nearest Ten can be greater than the same number rounded to the Nearest Hundred is correct.
For Example: Estimate the sum 1,472 + 398 + 772 + 164 by rounding each number to the nearest hundred.

1,472….1,500

398……. 400

772……..800

164……..200

Total amount rounded to hundred:2900

In the example above, the exact sum is 2,806. Note how close this is to the estimate, which is 94 greater.
Estimate the sum 1,472 + 398 + 772 + 164 by first rounding each number to the nearest ten.

1,472….1,470

398…….. 400

772………770

164………160

Total amount rounded to tens place is 2,800.

Note that the estimate is 2,800, which is only 6 less than the actual sum of 2,806.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
On which months are there about 450 people at the basketball courts? Explain
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 8

Answer:
Months about 450 people at the basketball courts are July and August because in these months only courts count is about and above 450.

DIG DEEPER!
Round the time to the nearest ten minutes.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 9

Answer:
Nearest Ten Minutes of 5:48 is 5:50.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 10

Answer:
Nearest Ten Minutes of 2:35 is 2:40.

Review & Refresh
Find the product

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 11

Answer:
9 X 0=0.

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 12

Answer:
10 X 9= 90.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 13

Answer:
9 X 3= 27.

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.3 14

Answer:
6 X 9= 54.

Lesson 7.4 Estimate Sums

Explore and Grow
Round each addend. Then find the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 1

Answer:
83 rounded=80                                                       156 rounded=200
119 rounded=120                                                   103 rounded= 100
Sum =120+80=200                                             Sum= 200+100= 300

Construct Arguments
Compare your answers to your partner’s answers. Explain why they are the same or why they are different.

Answer:
The answers are different because the numbers are given to me and my partner are completely different.

Think and Grow: Estimate Sums
An estimate is a number that is close to an exact number. You can estimate a sum by rounding or by using compatible numbers. Compatible numbers are numbers that are easy to add mentally and are close to the actual numbers.
Example
Estimate 258 + 631.
One Way: Use rounding. Round each addend to the nearest hundred. Then f ind the sum of the rounded numbers.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 2
Another Way: Use compatible numbers.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 3

Answer:

ONE WAY: Rounding system
258 rounded nearest hundred: 300
631 rounded nearest hundred: 600
Total Rounded Nearest Hundred of 258 and 631=900
OTHER WAY:  Use Compatible number
Compatible number of 258=250
Compatible number of 631= 625
Total Sum of Compatible number of  258 and 631= 250+625= 875

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Round to the nearest ten to estimate the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 4

Answer:


Nearest Ten of 38= 40.


Nearest Ten of 45= 50
Total sum of Nearest Ten of 45 and 38=40+50=90.

Question 2.
Round to the nearest hundred to estimate the sum.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 5

Answer:


Nearest Hundred of 407= 400.

Nearest Hundred of 189= 200
Total Sum of Nearest Hundred of 407 and 189= 400+200=600.

Use compatible numbers to estimate the sum.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 6

Answer:
71 Compatible Number= 75
22 Compatible Number=  20
Total Sum of  Compatible Number of 71 and 22= 75+20=95.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 7

Answer:
353 Compatible Number= 355
142 Compatible Number= 140
Total Sum of Compatible Number of 353 and 142=  355+140= 495.

Apply and Grow: Practice
Round to the nearest ten to estimate the sum.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 8

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 214= 210.

Nearest Ten of 357= 360
Sum of Nearest Ten of 214 and 357= 210+360 =  570.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 9

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 465= 470.


Nearest Ten of 23= 20
Sum of Nearest Ten of 465 and 23= 470+20 = 490.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 10

Answer:


 Nearest Ten of 532= 530.

Nearest Ten of 241= 240
Total Sum of Nearest Ten of 214 and 357= 530+240 = 570.
Round to the nearest hundred to estimate the sum.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 11

Answer:


Nearest Hundred of 62 = 100.

Nearest Hundred of 75= 100
Total Sum of Nearest Hundred of 62 and 75=  100+100=200.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 12

Answer:

Nearest Hundred of 304 = 300.


Nearest Hundred of 381= 400
Total Sum of Nearest Hundred of 304 and 381= 300+400=700.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 13

Answer:


Nearest Hundred of 897 = 900.


Nearest Hundred of 126= 100
Total Sum of Nearest Hundred of 897 and 126= 900+100=1000.
Use compatible numbers to estimate the sum.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 14

Answer:
Compatible Number of 222= 225
Compatible Number of 678= 670
Total Sum of Compatible Number of 222 and 678= 225+670=895.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 15

Answer:
Compatible Number of 491= 495
Compatible Number of 407= 465
Total Sum of Compatible Number of 491 and 407= 495+465=960.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 16

Answer:
Compatible Number of 347= 350
Compatible Number of 52= 45
Total Sum of Compatible Number of 347 and 52= 395.

Estimate the sum.

Question 14.
326 + 472
__ + ___ = ____

Answer:
Sum of 326 + 472 = 798.

Question 15.
205 + 101
____ + ____ = _____

Answer:
Sum of 205 + 101 = 306.

Question 16.
58 + 24
____ + ____ = ____

Answer:
Sum of 58 +24 = 82.

Question 17.
Structure
Estimate the sum of 324 + 277 two different ways.

Answer:
ONE WAY: Rounding system
Nearest Ten of 324= 320
Nearest Ten of 277= 280
Total Sum of Nearest Hundred of 324 and 277= 320+280= 600.
OTHER WAY: Compatible Numbers
Compatible Numbers of  324=330
Compatible Numbers of 277= 285
Total Sum of Compatible Numbers of 324 and 277=330+285=615.
Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
An airplane flies from Cleveland to Saint Louis. Then it flies from Saint Louis to Chicago. About how many miles does the airplane fly in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 17
Understand the problem:
Make a plan:
Solve:
The airplane flies about ______ miles in all.

Answer:

Distance covered by the airplane flies  overall = 262 miles+49 miles+253 miles+547 miles= 1553 miles .
Distance covered by Airplane from Cleveland to Saint Louis=491 miles
Distance covered by Airplane from Saint Louis to Chicago= 262 miles
Total  distance covered by the Airplane from Cleveland to Saint Louis and  Saint Louis to Chicago = 491 miles + 262 miles= 753 miles.
Show and Grow

Question 18.
Use the map above. An airplane flies from Dallas to Saint Louis, and then flies from Saint Louis to Nashville. About how many miles does the airplane fly in all?

Answer:
Miles covered by the airplane from Dallas to Saint Louis= 547 miles
Miles covered by the airplane from Saint Louis to Nashville= 253 miles
Total Number of miles the airplane flew in all= 547 miles+253 miles= 800 miles.

Question 19.
There are 178 third-grade students, 239 fourth-grade students, and 309 fifth-grade students at a museum. About how many students are at the museum? Explain.
Is there another way you can estimate to solve the problem? Explain.

Answer:
Number of third-grade students at a museum=178
Number of fourth-grade students at a museum=239
Number of fifth-grade students at a museum=309
Total Number of students at a museum=178+239+309=726.
No, there is no other way to estimate the solution except addition.

Estimate Sums Homework & Practice 7.4

Round to the nearest ten to estimate the sum.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 18

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 239= 240.


Nearest Ten of 417= 420
Total Sum of Nearest Ten of 239 and 417= 240+420 = 660.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 19

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 351= 350.


Nearest Ten of 164= 160
Total Sum of Nearest Ten of 351 and 164 = 350+160 = 510.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 20

Answer:


Nearest Ten of 55= 60.


Nearest Ten of 43= 40
Total Sum of Nearest Ten of 55 and 43 = 60+40 = 100.
Round to the nearest hundred to estimate the sum.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 21

Answer:

Nearest Hundred of 523= 500.


Nearest Hundred of 376=400
Total Sum of Nearest Hundred of 523 and 376= 500 + 400 = 900.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 22

Answer:

Nearest Hundred of 648=600


Nearest Hundred of 21=0
Total Sum of Nearest Hundred of 648 and 21= 600+0 = 600.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 23

Answer:

Nearest Hundred of 762=800.


Nearest Hundred of 235= 200
Total Sum of Nearest Hundred of 762 and 235 = 800+200 = 1000.

Use compatible numbers to estimate the sum.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 24

Answer:
Compatible Number of 26= 30
Compatible Number of 51= 55
Total Sum of Compatible Number of 26 and 51 = 30+55 = 85.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 25

Answer:
Compatible Number of 454= 465
Compatible Number of 448= 455
Total Sum of Compatible Number of 454 and 448 = 465+455 = 910.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 26

Answer:
Compatible Number of 177= 185
Compatible Number of 522= 530
Total Sum of Compatible Number of 177 and 552 =185+530 = 715.

Estimate the sum

Question 10.
621 + 314
____ + ____ = ____

Answer:
Sum of 621 + 314 = 935.

Question 11.
105 + 82
____ + ____ = _____

Answer:
Sum of 105 + 82 =187.

Question 12.
228 + 276
____ + ____ = _____

Answer:
Sum of 228 + 276 = 504.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Will Newton’s estimated sum be greater than or less than the actual sum? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 27

Answer:
Actual Sum of 486 + 379 = 486 + 379 = 865
Estimated Sum of 486 + 379 =500 + 400 = 900
Comparison:   865 >  900
Hence, the Actual Sum is lesser than the Estimated Sum because the estimated value is the value roughly calculated whereas the actual sum is the correct and accurate value.

Question 14.
Logic
Newton has $25. Descartes has $32. Do they have more than $50 in all? Use estimates to explain.

Answer:
Amount Newtons having= $ 25
Estimated value of $25= $ 30
Amount Descartes having = $32
Estimated value of $32 = $35
Total  Estimated Sum Newtons and Descartes having= $ 30 + $35 = $65.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
An airplane flies from San Francisco to Las Vegas and then files from Las Vegas to Los Angeles. About how many miles does the airplane fly in all?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 28

Answer:

Distance covered by Airplane from San Francisco to Las Vegas=418 miles.
Distance covered by Airplane from Las Vegas to Los Angeles= 236 miles.
Total  distance covered by the Airplane from San Francisco to Las Vegas and Las Vegas to Los Angeles= 418 miles + 236 miles = 654 miles.

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
A beach hut owner sells 118 towels, 121 surfboards, and 162 bathing suits. About how many items does the owner sell? Explain.

Answer:
Number of towels the owner sells= 118
Number of surfboards the owner sells= 121
Number of bathing suits the owner sells= 162
Total number of items the owner sells= 118 towels + 121 surfboards +162 bathing suits = 401.
Review & Refresh
Compare

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 29

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 29 =

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 30

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 30 =

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 31 =

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.4 31 =

Lesson 7.5 Estimate Differences

Explore & Sum
Estimate each difference.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 1

Answer:

Use Compatible numbers

Construct Arguments—–
Compare your answers to your partner’s answers. Explain why they are the same or why they are different.

Answer: The answers differ from my partners answer because the numbers given to me and him are differ  may be the process is same which we followed to solve.
Think and Grow: Estimate Differences
You can estimate difference by rounding or by using compatible numbers
Example
Estimate 673 – 429.
One Way: Use rounding. Round each number to the nearest ten. Then find the difference of the rounded numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 2
Another Way: Use compatible numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 3

Answer:
One way: Rounding numbers
Nearest ten of 673= 670
Nearest ten of 429= 430
Difference of Nearest ten of 673 and 429= 670 – 430 = 240.
Another Way: Use compatible numbers.
Compatible number of 673 =675
Compatible number of 429=425
Difference of Compatible number of 673 and 429= 675 – 425 = 250.
Show and Grow

Question 1.
Round to the nearest ten to estimate the difference.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 4

Answer:


Nearest Ten of 72= 70.


Nearest Ten of 37= 40
Difference of Nearest Ten of 72 and 37= 70- 40 = 30.

Question 2.
Round to the Nearest Hundred to estimate the difference.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 5

Answer:

Nearest Hundred of 586= 600.


Nearest Hundred of 314= 300
Difference of Nearest Ten of 586 and 314= 590- 310 = 280.
Use compatible numbers to estimate the difference

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 6

Answer:
Compatible number of 95=100
Compatible number of 26= 25
Difference of Compatible Number of 95 and 26= 100 – 25 = 75.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 7

Answer:
Compatible number of 768=775
Compatible number of 273= 270
Difference of Compatible Number of 768 and 273= 775 – 270 = 505.
Apply and Grow: Practice
Round to the nearest ten to estimate the difference.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 8

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 556=560.


Nearest Ten of 129= 130
Difference of Nearest Ten of 556 and 129 = 560 – 130 = 430.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 9

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 384=380.

Nearest Ten of 31= 30
Difference of Nearest Ten of 384 and 31 = 380 – 30 = 350.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 10

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 702=700.


Nearest Ten of 428= 430
Difference of Nearest Ten of 702 and 428= 700 – 430 = 270.
Round to the nearest hundred to estimate the difference.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 11

Answer:

Nearest Hundred of 763=800.


Nearest Hundred of 98 =100
Difference of  Nearest Hundred of 763 and 98= 800 – 100 =700.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 12

Answer:

Nearest Hundred of 901= 900

Nearest Hundred of 305 = 300
Difference of  Nearest Hundred of 901 and 305= 900 – 300 = 600.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 13

Answer:

Nearest Hundred of 875 = 900.


Nearest Hundred of 529 = 500
Difference of  Nearest Hundred of 875 and 529 = 900 – 500 = 400.
Use compatible numbers to estimate the difference

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 14

Answer:
Compatible Number of 985= 990
Compatible Number of 148=  145
Difference of Compatible Number of 985 and 148= 990 – 145 = 845.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 15

Answer:
Compatible Number of 676= 680
Compatible Number of 226= 255
Difference of Compatible Number of 676 and 226 = 680 – 255 = 455.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 16

Answer:
Compatible Number of 549= 550
Compatible Number of 52=  45
Difference of Compatible Number of 549 and 52 = 550 – 45 = 505.
Estimate the difference

Question 14.
455 – 221
____ – ____ = _____

Answer:
Difference of 455 – 221 = 234.

Question 15.
674 – 348
____ – ____ = ____

Answer:
Difference of 674 – 348 =  326.

Question 16.
97 – 53
____ – _____ – _____

Answer:
Difference of 97 – 53 = 44.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
Write a subtraction problem using 2 three-digit numbers that have an estimated difference of 200.

Answer: A Fruit seller has 469 mangoes with him on Monday. On Tuesday he finds 269 mangoes got rotten. How many are left out with him on Tuesday?

Question 18.
Structure
Did Descartes round to the nearest ten or to the nearest hundred to estimate the difference?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 17

Answer:
Given: 407 – 302 = 100

Nearest Ten of 407= 410


Nearest Ten of 302= 300
Difference of Nearest Ten of 407 and 302= 410 – 300 = 110.

Nearest Hundred of 407=400

Nearest Hundred of 302= 300
Difference of Nearest Hundred of 407 and 302= 400 – 300 = 100
Therefore, Descartes rounds to the nearest hundred of 407 and 302.
Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
The diagram shows the numbers of days it takes four planets to orbit the Sun. About how many more days does it take Mars to orbit the Sun than Venus?
Estimate:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 18
It takes Mars about _____ more days than Venus.

Answer:
Number of days Mars to orbit the sun= 687 days
Number of days Venus to orbit the sun= 225 days

Number of more days it takes Mars to orbit the Sun than Venus= 687 – 225 = 462 days.

Show and Grow

Question 19.
Use the diagram above to find about how many more days it takes Earth to orbit the Sun than Mercury.

Answer:
Number of days Earth to orbit the sun = 365 days
Number of days Mercury to orbit the sun = 88 days
Number of more days it takes Earth to orbit the Sun than Mercury= 365 – 88 = 277 days.

Question 20.
Your school gym can seat 500 people on one side and 350 people on the other side. There are 459 people in their seats. About how many more people can be seated in the gym?

Answer:
Number of people seating on one side in the gym = 500
Number of people seating on other side in the gym = 350
Total number of seats in the gym = 500 + 350 = 850
Number of people occupied in the seats in the gym = 459
Number of more people can be seated in the gym = total seats – seats occupied = 850 – 459 =  391 seats.

Question 21.
A bus is traveling 876 miles from Raleigh to New Orleans. The bus travels 264 miles in the morning and 327 miles in the afternoon. About how many more miles does the bus have left to travel? Explain.

Answer:
The distance the bus traveled from Raleigh to New Orleans = 876 miles
The distance the bus traveled in the morning = 264 miles
The distance the bus traveled in the afternoon = 327 miles
Total distance covered by the bus in the morning and afternoon= 264 miles+ 327 miles = 591 miles
The number of more miles the bus has left to travel = 876 miles – 591 miles = 285 miles.

Estimate Differences Homework & Practice 7.5

Round to the nearest ten to estimate the difference.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 19

Answer:


Nearest Ten of 847= 850


Nearest Ten of 468= 470
Difference of Nearest Ten of 847 and 468= 850 – 470= 380.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 20

Answer:


Nearest Ten of 153=  150

Nearest Ten of 129= 130
Difference of Nearest Ten of 153 and 129= 150 – 130 = 20.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 21

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 34= 30

Nearest Ten of 21= 20
Difference of Nearest Ten of 34 and 21 = 30 – 20= 10.
Round to the nearest hundred to estimate the difference.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 22

Answer:

Nearest Hundred of 598= 600

Nearest Hundred of 347= 350
Difference of Nearest Hundred of 598 and 347= 600  – 350 = 250.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 23

Answer:


Nearest Hundred of  811 =800

Nearest Hundred of 67 = 100
Difference of Nearest Hundred of 811 and 67 = 800 – 100 =700.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 24

Answer:


Nearest Hundred of 931 = 900


Nearest Hundred of 747 =700
Difference of Nearest Hundred of 931 and 747 = 900 – 700 = 200.
Use compatible numbers to estimate the difference

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 25

Answer:
Compatible Number of 96 = 100
Compatible Number of 47 = 45
Difference of Compatible Number of 96 and 47= 100 – 45 = 65.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 26

Answer:
Compatible Number of 678 = 685
Compatible Number of 142 = 135
Difference of Compatible Number of 678 and 142 = 685 – 135 = 550.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 27

Answer:
Compatible Number of 746 = 755
Compatible Number of 51 = 45
Difference of Compatible Number of 746 and 51 = 755 – 45 = 715.
Estimate the difference.

Question 10.
258 – 205
___ – ____ = ____

Answer:
Difference of 258 – 205 = 53.

Question 11.
781 – 62
____ – ____ = ____

Answer:
Difference of 781 – 62 = 719.

Question 12.
914 – 522
____ – ____ = ____

Answer:
Difference of 914 – 522 = 392.

Question 13.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend estimated the difference by rounding to the nearest hundred. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 28

Answer:
Given:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 28
Nearest Hundred of 649 = 600
Nearest Hundred of 308 =  300
Difference of Nearest Hundred of 649 and 308 = 600 – 300 = 300
My friend’s value of the difference of Nearest Hundred of 649 and 308 is wrong because he has added the numbers instead of subtracting.

Question 14.
Structure
Estimate the difference of 581 – 213 in two different ways.

Answer:
ONE WAY: Rounding System
Nearest Hundred of 581= 600
Nearest Hundred of 213= 200
The difference of Nearest Hundred of 581 and 213= 600 – 200 = 400.
OTHER WAY: Use Compatible Numbers
Compatible Number of 581= 575
Compatible Numbers of 213 = 220
Difference of Compatible Numbers of 581 and 213= 575 – 220 =  355.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
A drama club sold 259 tickets for a school play. So far, 103 people have arrived for the play. About how many more people are expected to arrive?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 29

Answer:
Number of tickets sold for school play= 259
Number of people arrived for the play = 103
Number of people expected to arrive still = 259 – 103 = 156.

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
Construction workers are building an 800-foot tall building. They complete 76 feet one month and 195 feet the next month. About how many more feet do they have left to build?

Answer:
The total length of the foot ball building = 800 feet
Number of feet workers completed in one month =76 feet
Number of feet workers completed in next month = 195 feet
Construction left out to build = Total -Completed work in one month – Completed work in next month
=800 – 76 – 195 = 529 feet.

Review & Refresh

Question 17.
Find the area of the rectangle
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 7.5 30

Answer:
Given: Length of Rectangle= 10 m
Breath of Rectangle= 2 m
Area of Rectangle= Length x Breath = 10 m X 2 m = 20 square metres.

Round and Estimate Numbers Performance Task

Question 1.
The table shows the number of photos a photographer takes each day.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 1
a. About how many more photos does the photographer take on Saturday than Sunday?
b.Estimate the total number of photos taken all four days.
c.Is the actual number of photos more than or less than your estimate from above? Explain.
d.The photographer’s camera can store 700 photos. About how many more photos can the photographer take?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 2
e. The photographer gives you all of the photos. You put some photos in an album. You have 453 photos left. How many photos are in your album?
f. Your album has 10 pages. You put an equal number of photos on each page. How many photos are on each page?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 3

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 1
a) Photos taken on Saturday by the photographer = 221
Photos taken on Sunday by the photographer = 91

Difference of photos taken on Saturday than on Sunday by the photographer= 221 – 91 = 130.
b) Photos taken on Thursday by the photographer = 157
Photos taken on Friday by the photographer = 104
Photos taken on Saturday by the photographer = 221
Photos taken on Sunday by the photographer = 91

Total Number of photos taken by the photographer in all four days= 157+104+221+91 =  573.
c)Actual total number of photos the album holds =700
Total photos were taken by the photographer = 573
The actual total number of photos is greater than the total estimated photos taken by the photographer.
d)Actual number of photos taken =573
Total number of photos camera can hold = 700
Number of more photos can the photographer take= 700 – 573 = 127.
e) Total number of photos given to me by the photographer = 573
Number of photos left with me = 453
Number of photos are in your album = 573 – 453 = 120.
f) Number of pages the album has = 10 pages
Total number of photos album holds = 700
Number of photos on each page= 700 10 =70 pages.

Round and Estimate Numbers Activity

Round to Find a Pearl
Directions:
1.Players take turns rolling a die.
2.On your turn, move your piece the number of spaces shown on the die. If the space is purple, then round the number to the nearest ten. If the space is green, then round the number to the nearest hundred.
3.Find the rounded number on a pearl and cover it with a counter.
4.Repeat this process until all of the pearls are covered.The player who covers the most pearls wins
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers 4

Round and Estimate Numbers Chapter Practice

7.1 Place Value
Circle the value of the underlined digit.

Question
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers chp 1

Answer:


Identify the value of each digit.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers chp 3

Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers chp 4

Answer:

7.2 Round Numbers Using a Number Line
Round the number to the nearest ten and to the nearest hundred.

Question 5.
725
Nearest ten: ____
Nearest hundred: _____

Answer:

The nearest Ten of 725 is 730.

The nearest Hundred of 725 is 700.

Question 6.
34 Nearest ten: ______
Nearest hundred: ______

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 34 is 30.

Nearest Hundred of 34 is 0.
7.3 Round Numbers Using Place Value
Round the number to the nearest ten and to the nearest hundred.

Question 7.
247
Nearest ten: ____
Nearest hundred: _____

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 247 is 250.

Nearest Hundred of 247 is 200.

Question 8.
571
Nearest ten: ____
Nearest hundred: _____

Answer:

The nearest Ten of 571 is  570.

The nearest Hundred of 571 is 600.

Question 9.
86
Nearest ten: ____
Nearest hundred: _____

Answer:

Nearest Ten of  86 is 90

The nearest Hundred of 86 is 100.

Question 4.
Number Sense
Descartes rounds 742 to 700. To what place does he round?

Answer:

Nearest Ten of 742 is 740

The nearest Hundred of 742 is 700.
Descartes rounds 742 to its Nearest Hundred.
7.4 Estimate Sums
Estimate the sum

Question 11.
33 + 59
___ + ____ = ___

Answer:
Sum of 33 + 59 = 92.

Question 12.
124 + 477
____ + ____ = ____

Answer:
Sum of  124 + 477 = 601.

Question 13.
122 + 181
____ + ____ = ____

Answer:
Sum of 122 + 181 = 303.
7.5 Estimate Differences
Estimate the difference

Question 14.
692 – 71
___ – ____ = _____

Answer:
Difference of 692 – 71 = 621

Question 15.
478 – 152
____ – ____ = ____

Answer:
Difference of 478 – 152 = 326.

Question 16.
537 – 409
____ – ____ = _____

Answer:
Difference of 537 – 409 = 128.

Question 17.
Modeling Real Life
A killer whale is 312 inches long. A striped dolphin is 102 inches long. About how much longer is the killer whale than the striped dolphin?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers chp 17

Answer:
Length of killer whale = 312 inches
Length of striped dolphin = 102 inches
The difference in Length of the killer whales and striped dolphin = 312 inches – 102 inches = 210 inches.

Final Words:
The answers seen in this chapter are as per the latest edition. The Big Ideas Math Solutions are prepared by math experts so you don’t worry about the answers. I hope the details provided in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 7 Round and Estimate Numbers made you happy. Please share answers pdf with your friends and help them to overcome the difficulties of solving questions. Stay in touch with us to get answer keys for more chapters of grade 3.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K is the best solution to overcome the difficulties in maths for elementary school students. Learn the basics of maths before you join the school with the help of the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100. In order to excel in the exam, you have to prepare well and practice the problems a number of times. Thus Refer to Big Ideas Math Book Solution Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 to enhance your math skills and to score good marks in the exams.

Big Ideas Math Book Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100

Check out the topics discussed in this chapter before your start preparing for the exams. The topics included in this chapter are Count to 30 by Ones, Count to 50 by Ones, Count to 100 by Ones, Count by Tens and Ones, etc. Tap the links of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 and begin your preparation.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Count to 30 by Ones

Lesson: 2 Count to 50 by Ones

Lesson: 3 Count to 100 by Ones

Lesson: 4 Count to 100 by Tens

Lesson: 5 Count by Tens and Ones

Lesson: 6 Count by Tens from a Number

Chapter: 10 – Count to 100

Count to 100 Vocabulary

Directions:
Circle 10 balloons. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many balloons there are in all.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 v 1

Answer:


Explanation:
In the above picture 10 balloons are circled and the 5bvalloons without circle around them.If we add 10 with 5 we get 15.So, there are 15 balloons in all.

Vocabulary Cards

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 v 2
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 v 3

Lesson 10.1 Count to 30 by Ones

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Point to each number as you count to 30. Color the number 30

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 1

Answer:
color 30

Explanation:
I point to the 1 and is counted as 1, point to the 2 and is counted as  2, point to the 3 and is counted as 3 and so on till 30 and coloured the number 30.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the missing number. Count to 30 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 2
Answer:
circle and color

Explanation:
In the above question, the first grid has an empty box after 22. So, what comes after 22? -23 comes after 22. Therefore circle 23, color, and count the number boxes from 23 to 30.
The second grid has an empty box after 8. So, what comes after 8? -9 comes after 8. Therefore circle 8, color, and count the number boxes from 8 to 30.
The third grid has an empty box after 19. So, what comes after 19? -20 comes after 19. Therefore circle 20, color, and count the number boxes from 20 to 30

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the missing number. Count to 30 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. 2 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike. 3 Find and circle the number twenty-three.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 3
Answer:
circle 14 and color from 14 to 30

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 13. So, what comes after 13? -14 comes after 13. Therefore circle 14, color and count the number boxes from 14 to 30

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 4

Answer:
circle 26,27,28.

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 26,27,28. The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 5
Answer:
Find and circle 23

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 23 circle it.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Circle the missing date for each sticker on the calendar. Circle the sticker that covers the earliest missing date. Underline the sticker that covers the latest missing date.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 6
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing date of each sticker are 14 in the flag sticker, 3 in the hat sticker and 29 in the balloons sticker.
The earliest missing date is 3 So, the hat sticker is circled and the latest missing date is 29 So, the balloons sticker is underlined.

Count to 30 by Ones Homework & Practice 10.1

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the missing number. Count to 30 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 7
Answer:
circle 28 and color number boxes from 28 to 30.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 27. So, what comes after 27? -28 comes after 27. Therefore circle 28, color and count the number boxes from 28 to 30

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 8
Answer:
circle 13 and color number boxes from 13 to 30.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 12.So, what comes after 12? -13 comes after 12. Therefore circle 13, color and count the number boxes from 13 to 30

Directions:
3 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike. 4 Find and circle the number fourteen. 5 Circle the missing date for each sticker on the calendar. Circle the sticker that covers the earliest missing date. Underline sticker that covers the latest missing date.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 9
Answer:
circle 17,18,19.

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 17,18,19.The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 10
Answer:
Find and circle 14

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 14 circle it.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.1 11
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing date of each sticker are 16 in the man sticker,13 in the balloons sticker.
The earliest missing date is 13 So, the balloons sticker is circled and the latest missing date is 16 So, the man sticker is underlined.

Lesson 10.2 Count to 50 by Ones

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Point to each number as you count to 50. Color the number 50.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 1
Answer:
circle 50

Explanation:
I point at 1 and count it as 1, I point at and count it as 2, I point at 3 and count it as 3, so on till 50 and color the number 50.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the missing number. Count to 50 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 2
Answer:
circle and color

Explanation:
In the above question, the first grid has an empty box after 26.So, what comes after 26? -27 comes after 26. Therefore circle 27, color and count the number boxes from 27 to 50.
The second grid has an empty box after 43.So, what comes after 43? -44 comes after 43. Therefore circle 44, color and count the number boxes from 44 to 50.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the missing number. Count to 50 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. 2 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike. 3 Find and circle the numbers thirty-two and forty-seven.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 3
Answer:
circle 21 and color from 21 to 30.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 20.So, what comes after 20? -21 comes after 20. Therefore circle 21, color and count the number boxes from 21 to 50.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 4
Answer:
Circle 37,38,39.

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 37,38,39. The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 5
Answer:
Find and circle 23 and 47.

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 32 circle it and continue counting the numbers by pointing each number again when you reach number 47 circle it.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Circle the missing floor number for each color on the elevator keypad. Circle the color that covers the lowest missing floor number. Underline the color that covers the highest missing floor number.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 6
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing floor number for each color on the elevator keypad are 31 in blue color,18 in yellow color and 35 in green color. Circle the yellow color as it covers the lowest missing floor number. Underline the green color as it covers the highest missing floor number

Count to 50 by Ones Homework & Practice 10.2

Directions:
1 and 2 Circle the missing number. Count to 50 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 7
Answer:
Circle 34 and color from 34 to 50.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 33.So, what comes after 34? -34 comes after 33. Therefore circle 34, color, and count the number boxes from 34 to 50.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 8
Answer:
circle 30 and color from 30 to 50.

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 29.So, what comes after 29? -30 comes after 29. Therefore circle 30, color, and count the number boxes from 30 to 50.

Directions:
3 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike. 4 Find and circle the numbers twenty-six and forty-two. 5 Circle the missing floor number for each color on the elevator keypad. Circle the color that covers the lowest missing floor number. Underline the color that covers the highest missing floor number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 9
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 41,42,43. The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 10
Answer:
Find and circle 26 and 42.

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 26 circle it and continue counting the numbers by pointing each number again when you reach the number 42 circle it also.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.2 11
Answer:

Explanation:
Circle the missing floor number 40 for blue color on the elevator keypad and 41 for yellow color on the elevator keypad. Circle the blue color as it covers the lowest missing floor number 40. Underline the yellow color as it covers the highest missing floor number 41.

Lesson 10.3 Count to 100 by Ones

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Point to each number as you count to 100. Color the numbers30, 50, and 100.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 1
Answer:
count and color 30,50,100.

Explanation:

I point at 1 and is count as 1, point to the 2 and is count it as  2, the point at 3 and is count it as 3 and so on till 30 and colour the number 30.
I point at 31 and count it as 31, the point at 32 and count 32 and so on till 50 and color the number  50.
I point at 51 and count as 51, the point at 52 and count it as 52 and so on till 100 and color the number 100.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the first missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the other missing numbers as you count and color to 100.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 2
Answer:
Circle 36, 59,73 and color from 36 to 100.

Explanation:
In the above question, the first missing number is 36, circle the number 36, count and color till you find the second missing number  59, circle 59 and continue counting and coloring numbers until you find the number third missing number 73, circle 73, and count and color the numbers till 100.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the first missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the other missing numbers as you count and color to 100.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 3
Answer:
Circle 47,61,93 and color from 47 to 100.

Explanation:
In the above question, the first missing number is 47 circle the number 47, count and color till you find the second missing number 61, circle 61 and continue counting and coloring numbers until you find the number third missing number 93, circle 93 and count and color the numbers till 100.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: Your friend, Newton, and Descartes each have 10 prize tickets. They each lose 1 ticket.

  • Circle the owner of each lost ticket.
  • The winning ticket number is 1 more than 70. Circle the winning ticket number. Who is the winner? Circle the face of the winning ticket holder.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 4
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above question the circle the owner of the lost ticket.
The owner of ticket 78 is Newton, 67 is me and 86 is Descartes.
The winning ticket is 71 so, circle ticket 71, the winner is Newton, and circle the face of Newton.

Count to 100 by Ones Homework & Practice 10.3

Directions:
1 Circle the first missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the other missing number as you count and color to 100.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 5
Answer:
Circle 53,83.

Explanation:

In the above question, the first missing number is 53 circle the number 53, count and color till you find the second missing number is 83, circle 83 and continue counting and coloring numbers until you reach 100.

Directions:
2 Circle the missing numbers. 3 Newton and Descartes both have 10 prize tickets. They both lose 1 ticket. Circle the owner of each lost ticket. The winning ticket number is 1 more than 50. Circle the winning ticket number. Who is the winner? Circle the face of the winning ticket holder.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 6
Answer:
Circle the missing numbers  79,80,81.

Explanation:
Find the missing numbers and choose the missing numbers from the options and circle them.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.3 7
Answer:

Explanation:
The missing numbers are 53 and 68.
The owner of lost ticket 53 is Newton and 68 is Descartes. circle the winning ticket number 51.
Newton is the winner and circle Newton.

Lesson 10.4 Count to 100 by Tens

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Count to 10. Circle the number. Count 10 more. Circle the number. Repeat this process until you reach 100.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 1
Answer:
Count and circle 10,20,30,——100.

Explanation:
Count the numbers up to 10 and circle 10, count next up to 20 and circle 20, count again up to 30 and circle 30 and so on till you reach 100 and circle 100.

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Count to 100 by tens. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the missing decade number.
  • Count the linking cubes. Circle the number that tells how many.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 2
Answer:
Circle the missing decade number 90 and circle 70 after counting the linking cubes.

Explanation:
Count the decades 10,20,30,—- to find 90 and circle 90 and color the boxes you counted.
count the linking cubes and circle the number 70.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. 3 Count to 100 by tens. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the missing decade numbers.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 3
Answer:
Count and circle 30.

Explanation:
Count the objects there are 3 linking cubes of ten cubes each so, circle 30.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 4
Answer:
Count and circle 80.

Explanation:
Count the grapes bunches, there are 8 bunches of grapes and each bunch has 10 grapes.So, circle 80.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 5
Answer:
Count, color all the decade boxes and circle 20,30,40.

Explanation:
Count to 100 by tens. Color the boxes 10,20,30—-till 100 as you count. Circle the missing decade numbers 20,30,40.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: Newton and Descartes each toss 6 balls. Each time a ball lands in their bucket, they earn 10 points. The player with the most points wins.

  • Newton gets 3 balls in his bucket. Circle the number of points Newton earns. Draw a picture to show how you found your answer.
  • Descartes gets 5 balls in his bucket. Circle the number of points Descartes earns. Draw a picture to show how you found your answer.
  • Who earns more points? Circle the face of the winning player.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 6

Answer:
Descartes wins more points.

Explanation:
Newton gets 3 balls in his bucket. Circle the number of points 30. The picture is shown with 3 balls circled.
Descartes gets 5 balls in his bucket. Circle the number of 50. The picture is shown with 5 balls circled.
Descartes wins more points as he has more balls in his bucket and Descartes is the winner.

Count to 100 by Tens Homework & Practice 10.4

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 7
Answer:
Circle 50.

Explanation:
Count the linking cubes of tens there are 5 lines of ten cubes each.So, circle the number 50.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 8
Answer:
Circle 70

Explanation:
Count the balloons bunches by tens and as there are 10 balloons in each bunch circle the number 70.

Directions:
4 Count the bowling pins. Circle the number that tells how many. 5 Count to 100 by tens. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the missing decade numbers. 6 Each time a ball sticks to the wall you earn 10 points. Four of your balls stick to the wall. Circle the number of points you earn. Draw a picture to show how you found your answer.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 9
Answer:
circle 100

Explanation:
There are 10 groups of bowling pins and each group has 10 bowling pins.So, there are 100 bowling pins in all and circle 100.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 10
Answer:
Circle 70,80,90.

Explanation:
Count the numbers by tens and color all the decades up to 100 and circle the missing numbers 70,80,90.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.4 11
Answer:
circle 40.

Explanation:
When a ball sticks to the wall I earn 10 points, there are 4 balls on the wall. So, I earned 40 points in all. I found this from the picture and circled the 4 balls and the number 40.

Lesson 10.5 Count by Tens and Ones

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Circle groups of 10 ladybugs. Count the ladybugs. Circle the number in the chart that tells how many. Color to show how you counted.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 1
Answer:
Circle, count and color.

Explanation:
Count the ladybugs by tens, make 10 ladybugs as a group and circle them. There are 2 groups of ladybugs and there are 4 ladybugs left.Finally there are 24 ladybugs so, color 10,20,21,22,23 and 24.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count the linking cubes. Find the number in the hundred chart that tells how many. Color the number. Tell how you counted.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 2
Answer:
Color 47,68 and 72.

Explanation:
Count linking cubes count by tens and ones. There are 4 lines of ten red cubes and 7 cubes. So, there are 47 red linking cubes in all. Therefore color 47. There are 6 lines of ten blue cubes and 8 cubes. So, there are 68 red linking cubes in all. Therefore color 68. There are 7 lines of ten green cubes and 2 cubes. So, there are 72 red linking cubes in all. Therefore color 72.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
13 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. Tell how you counted.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 3
Answer:
Circle 53

Explanation:
Count the number by tens and ones. In the above set of cube, there are 5 lines of ten linking cubes and 3 cubes. There are 53 linking cubes in all. So, circle 53.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 4
Answer:
Circle 29

Explanation:
Count the number by tens and ones. In the above set of crayons, there are 2 sets of ten crayons each and 9  crayons. There are 29 crayons in all. So, circle 29.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 5
Answer:
Circle 84

Explanation:
Count the number by tens and ones. In the above picture, there are 8 flower vases with 10 flowers each and 4  flowers. There are 84 flowers in all. So, circle 84.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: A toy store sells bouncy balls individually and in bags of 10.

  • Count the bouncy balls. Circle the number that tells how many.
  • The store orders 2 more bags of bouncy balls. Draw the new bags of balls.
  • Circle the number that tells how many bouncy balls the store has now.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 6
Answer:

Explanation:
count by tens and ones
The toy store has 5 sets of 10 bouncy balls each and it has 9 individual bouncy balls. There are 59 balls in all. So, circle 59.
When the toy store orders 2 more bags of balls. The toy store now will have 20 more balls than 59. So, now the toy store has 79 bouncy balls in all. So, circle 79.

Count by Tens and Ones Homework & Practice 10.5

Directions:
1 and 2 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. Tell how you counted.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 7
Answer:
Circle 19

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There is a line of ten linking cubes and 9 individual cubes. There are 19 linking cubes in all. So, circle 19.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 8
Answer:
Circle 47

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 4 packs of 10 ball each and there are 7 individual balls. There are 47 balls in all. So, circle 47.

Directions:
3 and 4 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. Tell how you counted. 5 Count the bottles of bubbles. Circle the number that tells how many. Draw 3 more packs of bubbles. Circle the number that tells how many bottles of bubbles there are now.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 9
Answer:
Circle 92

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 9 packs of ten markers each and 2 individual markers. There are 92 markers in all. So, circle 92.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 10
Answer:
Circle 63

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 6 packs of 10 packs of clay each and 3 individual packs of clay. There are 63 packs of clay in all. So, circle 63.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.5 11
Answer:
circle 36 and 66

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 3 packs of 10 bottles of bubbles and 6 individual bottles of bubbles. There are 36 bottles of bubbles in all. So, circle 36.
When I draw 3 more packs of bottles of bubbles we will have 30 bottles more than the first. So, we will have 36+30 =66 bottles in all. So, circle 66.

Lesson 10.6 Count by Tens from a Number

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Count each group of linking cubes. Circle the numbers in the chart that tell how many for each group. What is the same in each number? What is different in each number?

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 1
Answer:
Circle 7,17,27.

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are three groups of linking cubes.
In the first group, there are 7 linking cubes. So, circle 7.
In the second group, there is 1 line of 10 linking cubes and 1 line of 7 linking cubes. There are 17 cubes in all in the second group. So, circle 17.
In the second group, there are 2 lines of 10 linking cubes and 1 line of 7 linking cubes. There are 27 cubes in all in the third group. So, circle 27.
In the three numbers, the ones place is the same and the tens place is different.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the correct group of missing numbers.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 2
Answer:
Circle 14,24,34 and 58,68,78.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 4 then the next decades are 14,24,34.So, circle 14,24,34.
Count by tens from the number 48 then the next decades are 58,68,78.So, circle 58,68,78.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the numbers that tell how you counted. 4 Circle the missing number. Tell how you counted.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 3

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 4
Answer:
Circle 17.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 17 then the next decades are 27,37,47.So, circle 27,37,47.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 5
Answer:
Circle 34.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 34 then the next decades are 44,54,64.So, circle 44,54,64.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 6
Answer:
Circle  56,66,76.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 46 then the next decades are 56,66,76.So, circle 56,66,76.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 7
Answer:
Circle 69.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 59 then the next decade is 69.So, circle 69.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
A grocery store sells milk cartons individually and in boxes of 10.

  • Count the milk cartons. Circle the number that tells how many.
  • You need 75 milk cartons in all. Draw to show how many more boxes of milk cartons you need.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 8
Answer:
Circle 25

Explanation
Count by tens and ones. There are 2 boxes of 10 packs of milk and 5 individual milk packets in a grocery store. There are 25 milk packets in all. So, circle 25.
If we need 75 milk packets in all we have to draw 5 more boxes of 10 packs of milk each.

Count by Tens from a Number Homework & Practice 10.6

Directions:
1 Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the missing numbers.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 9
Answer:
Circle 21,31,41.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 11 then the next decades are 21,31,41.So, circle 21,31,41.

Directions:
2 – 4 Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the numbers that tell how you counted. 5 Circle the missing number. Tell how you counted. 6 Count the cups of applesauce. Circle the number that tells how many. You need 36 cups of applesauce in all. Draw to show how many more boxes you need.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 10
Answer:
Circle 72,82,92.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 62 then the next decades are 72,82,92.So, circle 72,82,92.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 11
Answer:
Circle 29,39,49.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 19 then the next decades are 29,39,49.So, circle 29,39,49.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 12
Answer:
Circle 63,73,83.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 53 then the next decades are 63,7,83.So, circle 63,73,83.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 13
Answer:
Circle 87.

Explanation:
Count by tens from the number 77 then the next decade is 87. So, circle 87.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 10.6 14
Answer:
circle 16

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There is a pack of 10 cups of apple sauce and there are 6 individual cups. There are 16 cups of apple sauce in all. So, circle 16.
If we need 36 cups we have to draw 2 more packs of 1o cups of sauce. Then the number of cups will be 36.

Count to 100 Performance Task

Directions:
A store sells gift bags and party blowers in packages of 10 and individually. 1 Count the gift bags. Circle the number that tells how many. 2 You buy an equal number of party blowers and gift bags. Draw more party blowers to complete the picture. 3 You buy 3 more packages of party blowers for the adults. Circle the number that tells how many party blowers there are in all. Circle the group of numbers that tells how you counted.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 1
Answer:
Circle 56

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 5 boxes of 10 gift bags each and there are 6 individual bags. There are 56 gift bags in all. So, circle 56.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 2
Answer:
24 more party blowers are needed.

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 32 party blowers in the above picture. We need 56 blowers. Subtract 32 from 56, we get 24. So, we need to draw 24 more party blowers so that they will be equal to the number of gift bags.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 3
Answer:
Circle 66,76,86.

Explanation:
When I buy 3 more packages of party bombs count by tens. We already have 56 bombs so, count by tens ie 66,76,86.So, circle 66,76,86.

Count to 100 Activity

Hundred Chart Puzzle
Directions:
Cut out the Hundred Chart Puzzle Pieces. Put the pieces together to complete the hundred chart.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 4

Count to 100 Chapter Practice

Directions:
1 Circle the missing number. Count to 30 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. 2 Find and circle the number twenty-nine. 3 Circle the missing numbers. Tell how the missing numbers are alike.

10.1 Count to 30 by Ones

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 1
Answer:
Circle 17 and color from 17 to 30.
Th

Explanation:
The grid has an empty box after 16. What comes after 16? -17 comes after 16. Therefore circle 17 and count and color the number boxes from 17 to 30.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 2
Answer:
Circle 29

Explanation:
Count the numbers by pointing each number when you reach the number 29 circle it.

10.2 Count to 50 by Ones

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 3
Answer:
Circle 21,22,23.

Explanation:
Count numbers by ones. The missing numbers are 21,22,23. The missing numbers are alike as they are in sequence.

Directions:
4 Circle the first missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color the boxes as you count. Circle the other missing numbers as you count and color to 100.

10.3 Count to 100 by Ones

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 4
Answer:
Circle 22,55,71,89

Explanation:
In the above question, the first missing number is 22, circle the number 22, count and color till you find the second missing number 55, circle 55 and continue counting and coloring numbers until you find the number third missing number 71, circle 71, and count and color the numbers till you find the last missing number 89, circle 89 and count and color the numbers again till 100.

Directions:
5 and 6 Count the objects. Circle the number that tells how many. 7 Count the crayons. Circle the number that tells how many. Tell how you counted.

10.4 Count to 100 by Tens

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 5
Answer:
Circle 40

Explanation:
Count the numbers by tens. There are 4 groups of 10 balls each. So, circle 40.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 6
Answer:
Circle 60

Explanation:
Count by tens. There are 6 bunches of grapes of 10 grapes each. So, circle 60.

10.5 Count by Tens and Ones

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 7
Answer:
circle 99

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 9 packs of crayons which contain 10 crayons in each pack and 9 individual crayons. So, circle 99.

Directions:
8 Count the apples. Circle the number that tells how many. Draw 2 more bags of apples. Circle the number that tells how many apples there are now. 9 and 10 Count by tens starting with the circled number. Circle the numbers that tell how you counted. 11 Count the water bottles. Circle the number that tells how many. You need 42 water bottles in all. Draw to show how many more cases you need.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 8
Answer:
Circle 34,54.

Explanation:
count by tens and ones. There are 3 packs of 10 apples and 4 individual apples. So, circle 34. If I draw 2 more packs of apples then I will have 54 apples.

10.6 Count by Tens from a Number

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 9
Answer:
Circle 19,29,39.

Explanation:
Count by tens. After 9 the next tens is 19, after 19 the next tens is 29 and after 29 the next tens is 39.Circle 19,29,39.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 10
Answer:
Circle 56,66,76

Explanation:
Count by tens. After 46 the next tens is 56, after 56 the next tens is 66 and after 66 the next tens is 76.So, circle 56,66,76.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 chp 11
Answer:
Circle 32

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There are 3 cases of 10 water bottles each and 2 separate water bottles. So, circle 32. If I need 42 water bottles I need to draw 1 more case of 10 water bottles.

Count to 100 Cumulative Practice

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 1 and 2 Which number tells how many? 3 Which number completes the addition sentence?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 1
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones. There are 20 markers in the above picture. So, shade the circle next to 20.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 2

Answer:

Explanation:
Count by tens. There are 9 lines of 10 linking cubes each. So, shade the circle next to 90.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 3
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones.After 3 comes 4 or 3+1=4.So, shade the circle next to 4.

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 4 Which number sentence does not tell how many flowers there are in all? 5 Which number is not greater than 7? 6 Which ten frame shows the number of tomatoes?

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 4
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones. There are 10 flowers in the first box and 5 flowers in the second box. Add the flowers in both the boxes ie 10+5 or 5+10 =15. Therefore there are 15 flowers in all. The number sentence 15-10=5 is wrong. So, shade the circle next to the number sentence 15-10=5.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 5
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones. Number 9 is 2 more than number 7. Number 8 is 1 more than number 7.Number 10 is 3 more than number 7. Number 6 is one less than number 7.So, shade the circle next to 6.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 6
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones. In the above picture, there are 2 sets of 5 tomatoes each. There are 10 tomatoes in all. So, shade the circle next to option 10.

Directions:
7 Count the peaches. Say the number. Write the number. 8 Circle the missing number. Count to 100 starting with that number. Color boxes as you count. Then circle a number in the chart that is greater than the missing number. 9 Draw 19 leaves on the ground. Write the number.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 7
Answer:

Explanation:
Count the given peaches by ones. there are 11 peaches in all. So, write 11.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 8
Answer:
Circle 84 and 93.

Explanation:
There is an empty box after 83.84 comes after 83. So, circle 84 and count and color from 54 t0 100. As 93 is greater than 84 circle the number 93.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 9
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones and draw 19 leaves. So, write the number 19.

Directions:
10 Count forward from 9 and stop at 14. Write the numbers you count. 11 Take apart the linking cubes. Circle the parts. Then write a subtraction sentence by taking one of the parts from the whole. 12 Count the granola bars. Circle the number that tells how many. You need 48 granola bars in all. Draw to show how many more boxes you need.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 10
Answer:

Explanation:
Count by ones.After 9 comes 10,11,12,13.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 11
Answer:

Explanation:
Separate the linking cubes. Count by ones. There are 9 linking cubes in all. If we separate 1 cube from whole cubes the number sentence will be 9-1=8.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 cp 12
Answer:
Circle 18

Explanation:
Count by tens and ones. There is 1 box of granola bars and 8 individual granola bars. So, there are 18 bars in all. Therefore circle 18. If I need 48 granola bars in all then I have to add 3 more boxes of bars. So, draw 3 boxes of granola bars.

Final Words:

Our aim is to provide quality education for the students. Keeping this in mind we have prepared the solutions for each and every question in a simple manner. We hope Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 10 Count to 100 are beneficial for all the students. The concepts of maths are applicable in modeling Real life so compare the questions with real-life and understand the concepts. Keep in touch with our page to get the latest information regarding BIM Kth Grade Answer Key from Chapters 1 to 13.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13

Big Ideas Math Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Answers: Students who are studing grade 3 must know about the geomteric shapes like square, triangle, rectangle and others before learning about two dimensional shapes. You can get the direct link to download Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Answers pdf in the below sections. By learning this chapter, you will be ab;e to define various two dimensional shapes, explain their features and compare one with another and draw shapes.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Solutions

Below provided BIM Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Answer Key helps the students in easy and quick learning. So, download Big Ideas Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes PDF for free to kickstartyour preparation. Find the solutions for all BIM 3rd Grade 13th Chapter questions in this article. The various lessons included in Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Chapter are Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals, Describe Quadrilaterals, Classify Quadrilaterals, and Draw Quadrilaterals.

After all these lessons, you can see performance task section where you can test your math skills. Improve your performance in the exam byreferring Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes AnswerKey. Scroll down to getthe quick links of all the topics of BIM Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes.

Lesson 1: Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals

Lesson 2: Describe Quadrilaterals

Lesson 3: Classify Quadrilaterals

Lesson 4: Draw Quadrilaterals

Performance Task

Lesson 13.1 Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals

Explore and Grow

Sort the Polygon Cards.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 1Structure
Does the sort change if you sort by the number of vertices? Explain.
Think and Grow: Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals

A polygon is a closed, two-dimensional shape with three or more sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 2

Answers:

A quadrilateral is a polygon with four sides. Quadrilaterals have four vertices and four angles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 3

Quadrilaterals can have parallel sides and right angles. Parallel sides are two sides that are always the same distance apart. A right angle is an L-shaped angle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 4

When two straight lines intersect each other at 90˚ or are perpendicular to each other at the intersection, they form the right angle. A right angle is represented by the symbol ∟.

Parallel lines are lines in a plane that are always the same distance apart. Parallel lines never intersect. Parallel lines are represented as ll.

Example
Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 5
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___
Answer:
fig1

Right angles: 2 (The symbol in pink shows right angles)
Pairs of parallel sides: 1 ( The sides in yellow shows parallel lines)

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 6
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

square

Right angles: 4 (The symbols in pink are right angles).
Pairs of parallel sides: 2 (yellow and green sides are 2 pairs of parallel sides)

Show and Grow
Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 7
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:


Explanation:
Right Angles : 0
Pairs of parallel sides: 2 (sides in yellow and green are 2 pairs of parallel sides)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 8
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answers:

quadilateral

Right angles: 2 (In L shape)
Pairs of parallel sides:0

Apply and Grow: Practice

Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 9
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answers:

q3

Right angles: 2
Pairs of parallel sides: 1 (1 II 2 as per figure).

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 10
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:
q4

Right angles: 4 (L shape)
Pairs of parallel sides: 2 (sides 1 ll 2 and 3 ll 4 as per above fig).

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

q5

Right angles: 2 (L SHAPE)
Pairs of parallel sides: 2 (sides 1 ll 2 and 3 ll 4).

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 12
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

q6

Right angles: 0
Pairs of parallel sides: 0

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 13
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

q7

Right angles: 1
Pairs of parallel sides: 0

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 14
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 1
Pairs of parallel sides: 0

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the yellow sides are parallel. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 15

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Use quadrilateral pattern blocks to complete the puzzle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 16

Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Use quadrilateral pattern blocks to complete the puzzle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 17

Answer:

Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals Homework & Practice

Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 18
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 0
Pairs of parallel side: 2 (side 1 ll 2 and 3 ll 4)

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 19
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 2
Pairs of parallel side: 1 (side 1 ll 2).

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 20
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 20

Right angles: 0
Pairs of parallel side: 0

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 21
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 1 (angle between side 1 and 2 )
Pairs of parallel side: 0

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 22
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 0
Pairs of parallel side: 3 (side 1 ll 5, 2 ll 6, 3 ll 7 and 4 ll 8 as per above figure)

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 23
Right angles: ___
Pairs of parallel side: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 3 ( angles between side 2&3, side 4&5 and 1&5)
Pairs of parallel side: 1 ( sides 1 ll 4).

Question 7.
Reasoning
Can a quadrilateral have exactly three right angles? Explain.

Explanation:
The types of quadrilaterals that have 3 right angles are known as:
1.Squares
2.Rectangles
3.Other shapes where all angles are 90°.

The reason for this is:
All quadrilaterals interior angles must add up to exactly 360°.
So:
= 360−(90+90+90)
= 90°.
And thus, the fourth angle must be 90°.
Thefore, the only quadrilaterals where all angles are 90° are squares and rectangles.
Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Use pattern blocks to complete the puzzle.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 24

Answer:

 

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Newton has 28 cards. Descartes has 24 cards. Newton divides his cards into 4 equal stacks and gives Descartes one stack. How many cards does Descartes have now?

Explanation:
Given:
Cards with Descartes  = 24 cards
Cards with Netwon = 28 cards
Cards divided into 4 stacks .
Each stack contains 7 cards

Total cards with Descartes= 24+7= 31 Cards.

Lesson 13.2 Describe Quadrilaterals

Explore and Grow

Sort the Quadrilateral Cards.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 25
Structure
What is another way you can sort the quadrilaterals?

Answer:

Think and Grow: Idenify Quadrilaterals

You can identify a quadrilateral using its sides and angles. A quadrilateral can have more than one name.
Quadrilateral
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 26
4 sides
4 angles
Trapezoid
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 27
exactly 1 pair of parallel sides
Parallelogram
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 28
2 pairs of parallel sides
Rectangle
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 29
2 pairs of parallel sides
4 right angles
Rhombus
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 30
2 pairs of parallel sides
4 equal sides
square
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 31
2 pairs of parallel sides
4 equal sides
4 right angles

Example
Circle all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Answer:

Show and Grow

Circle all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 33

Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 34

Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 35
Answer:
Rhombus
2 pairs of parallel sides
4 equal sides

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 36

Answer:
Trapezoid – only 1 pair of parallel sides

Name all of the quadrilaterals that can have the given attribute.

Question 5.
2 pairs of parallel sides

Answer:
Square, Rhombus , Rectangle and Parallelogram.

Question 6.
4 right angles

Answer:
Square and Rectangle.

Question 7.
Precision
Is the shape a rhombus? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 37

Answer:
No.
Explanation:
Rhombus contains 2 pairs of parallel sides and 4 equal sides but the given figure doesnot have equal sides and parallel sides.

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend not says the shape is a rhombus. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 38

Answer:
Yes .
Explanation:
Rhombus contain 2 pairs of parallel sides and 4 equal sides. but it doesn’t contain 4 right angles. so it is square not rhombus.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Write all of the names for the red quadrilateral in the painting.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 39

Show and Grow

Use the painting above.

Question 9.
Write all of the names for the blue quadrilateral.

Answer:
1 Square and 4 triangles.

Question 10.
What color is the rhombus that is not a square?
Answer:
Purple.

Question 11.
How many trapezoids are in the painting? Circle them.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 40

Answer:

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
There are 4 squares and 8 rectangles in a floortile pattern. Find the total number of right angles in the pattern. Explain.

Answer:
one square contain 4 right angles
4 squares = 4×4=16 right angles
one rectangle contain 4 right angles
8 rectangles = 8×4=32 right angles.
Therefore Total Right angles = 16 +32 = 48 angles.

Describe Quadrilaterals Homework & Practice 13.2

Circle all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 41

Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 42

Answer:

Write all of the names for the quadrilateral.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 43

Answer:
Parallelogram.
Explanation:
It contains 2 pairs of parallel sides.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 44

Answer:
Square .

Explanation:
It contains 2 pairs of parallel sides, 4 equal sides and 4 right angles.

Name all of the quadrilaterals that can have the given attributes.

Question 5.
4 sides and 4 angles

Answer:
Quadilateral.

Question 6.
exactly 1 pair of parallel sides

Answer:
Trapezoid.

Question 7.
Writing
Explain how a trapezoid is different from a parallelogram.

Answer:
A Trapezoid contains only 1 pair of parallel sides where as, parallelogram contains 2 pairs of parallel sides .

Question 8.
Reasoning
Explain why the rectangle shown is not a square.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 45

Answer:
As per the figure only opposite sides are equal but where as square contains all 4 sides equal.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
What is Descartes’s shape?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 150

Answer:
Rectangle.

Question 10.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which not does belong with the other three? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 46

Answer:
Trapezoid as it contains one one parallel side.

Modeling Real Life
Use the mosaic

Question 11.
Write all of the names for the purple quadrilateral.
Answer:
Triangle and Rhombus

Question 12.
How many parallelograms are in the mosaic? Circle them.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 47

Answer:

Review & Refresh

Question 13.
Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 48
___6_ × __2_ = ______

Answer:
Area = _________12 sqft____

Explanation:
Area of rectangle is length x Breadth.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 49
_4___ ×  5__ = _____
Area = ____________

Answer:
Area=20 sqcms.

Explanation:
Area of rectangle is length x Breadth.

Lesson 13.3 Classify Quadrilaterals

Explore and Grow

Use each description to model a quadrilateral on your geoboard. Draw each quadrilateral.

Two pairs of parallel sides
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 50

Answer:

Exactly one pair of parallel sides
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 51

Answer:

Four right angles that do not form a square

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 52

Answer:

Two pairs of parallel sides and no right angles

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 53

Answer:

Structure
Compare your quadrilaterals to your partner’s. Are your quadrilaterals the same? Are you both correct? Explain.

Answer:
Different Answer for 1 condition because Two pairs of parallel sides are rectangle,square,rhombus and parallelogram.

Same Answers for 2,3 and 4 conditions.

Think and Grow:
How are the parallelograms and rhombuses alike? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 54
Ways they are alike:
Each has ___ sides.
Each has ___ angles.
Each has ___ pairs of parallel sides.

Answer:
A parallelogram is a rhombus if the diagonals are perpendicular.

Ways they are alike:
Each has __4_ sides.
Each has __2_ angles.
Each has __2_ pairs of parallel sides.

 

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 55
Ways they are different:
Rhombus always have __4__ equal sides.
What names can you use to classify all parallelograms and rhombuses?
Answer:
Squares and Rectangles.
A rectangle has two sets of parallel sides, so it is a parallelogram.
A rhombus has four congruent sides and a square has four congruent sides and angles. Therefore, a rhombus is a square when it has congruent angles.

Show and Grow

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 56

Question 1.
How are squares and rectangles alike? How are they different?

Answer:
Squares and rectangles both are a type of quadrilateral, both have their four interior angles equal to 90 degrees and opposite sides parallel to each other.

The difference between square and rectangle is that a square has all its sides equal whereas a rectangle has its opposite sides equal.

Question 2.
What names can you use to classify all squares and rectangles?

Answer:
Parallelogram because A Rectangle is a Parallelogram with all right angles. A Square is a Rectangle with adjacent sides equal.

Question 3.
Draw a quadrilateral that is not a square or a rectangle. Explain.

Answer:

q6

Explanation:
Trapezoids contain only 1 pair of parallel sides.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 57

Question 4.
How are trapezoids and parallelograms alike? How are they different?

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 58

Answer:
A trapezoid has one pair of parallel sides and a parallelogram has two pairs of parallel sides.
A trapezoid can be called a parallelogram when it has more than one pair of parallel sides.

Question 5.
What name can you use to classify all trapezoids and parallelograms?

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 59
Question 6.
How are rhombuses and squares alike? How are they different?

Answer:
Rhombuses and Square are alike as they contain 2 pairs of parallel sides and 4 equal sides. Different as Square have 4 right angles, but rhombus does not.

Question 7.
What names can you use to classify all rhombuses and squares?

Answer:
Parallelogram.

Question 8.
Draw a quadrilateral that is a rhombus but not a square.

Answer:

Question 9.
Draw a quadrilateral that is not a rhombus or a square. Explain.

Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life
Sort the road signs into two groups by shape. What is alike and what is different between the two groups? What name can you use to classify all of the road sign shapes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 60

Answer:

Explanation:
Rectangles contain 2 pairs of parallel sides but where as , Trapezoid contain only 1 pair of parallel sides .

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Sort the road signs into two groups by shape. What is alike and what is different between the two groups? What names can you use to classify all of the road sign shapes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 61

Answer:

Explanation:
Square and Rectangles are alike as they contain 2 pairs of parallel sides and
4 right angles. they are different as square contain all sides equal but rectangle contain only opposite sides equal.

Classify Quadrilaterals Homework & Practice 13.3

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 151

Question 1.
How are rectangles and rhombuses alike? How are they different?

Answer:
Rectangle and Rhombus are alike because both contain 2 pairs of parallel lines. they are different because rectangle contain 4 right angles and opposite sides equal.Rhombus contain all sides equal with 0 right angles.

Question 2.
What names can you use to classify all rectangles and rhombuses?

Answer:
Parallelogram.

Question 3.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend says a shape is a rectangle. Newton says the same shape is a rhombus, and Descartes says it is a square. Can they all be correct? Explain.

Answer:
In rhombus,Square and Rectangle all the opposite sides are equal.

Question 4.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 62

Answer:
Trapezoids have only one pair of parallel sides; parallelograms have two pairs of parallel sides. A trapezoid can never be a parallelogram.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
Sort the earrings into two groups by shape. What is alike and what is different between the two groups? What name can you use to classify all of the earring shapes?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 63

Answer:


Explanation:
Trapezoid contain only 1 pair of parallel sides .Square contains 2 pairs of parallel sides .

 

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Use the number line to find an equivalent fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 64

Answer:

Question 7.
Write two fractions that name the point shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 65

Answer:

Lesson 13.4 Draw Quadrilaterals

Explore and Grow

Model each quadrilateral on your geoboard. Move one vertex of each quadrilateral to create a new quadrilateral. Draw each new quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 66

Answer:

 


Structure
Create your own quadrilateral. Move one vertex to create a new quadrilateral. Draw your quadrilaterals. Name each quadrilateral
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 67

Answer:

Think and Grow: Draw Quadrilaterals
Example
Draw a quadrilateral that has four right angles. Name the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 68

Answer:
Square.

Example
Below are three rhombuses. Draw a quadrilateral not that is a rhombus. Explain why it is not a rhombus.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 69
The quadrilateral is not a rhombus because _______
______________________________________.

Answer:

Explanation:
The quadrilateral is not a rhombus because rectangle contains only opposite sides equal .

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Draw a quadrilateral that has exactly one pair of parallel sides. Name the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 70

Answer:
Trapezoid.

Question 2.
Draw a quadrilateral that is not a square. Explain why it is not a square.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 71

Answer:

Explanation:
Square contains 2 pairs of parallel sides , 4 equal sides and 4 right angles.
Rectangle contains 2 pairs of parallel sides and 4 right angles .

Apply and Grow: Practice

Name the group of quadrilaterals. Then draw a quadrilateral that does not belong in the group. Explain why it does not belong.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 72

Answer:


Explanation:
Trapezoid contains only 1 pair of parallel side but whereas rhombus contain 2 pairs of parallel sides .

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 73

Answer:

Explanation:
Rectangle and Square contains 2 pairs of parallel sides but whereas Trapezoid contains only 1 pair of parallel sides .

Question 5.
Precision
Circle the quadrilaterals that are not rhombuses.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 74

Answer:

Question 6.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend draws the shape and says it is a parallelogram because it has two pairs of parallel sides. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 152

Answer:
It is a pentagon as it contains 5 sides, whereas parallelogram contain only 4 sides.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw the quadrilateral with two pairs of parallel sides. One side is given.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 75

Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A helicopter travels to various Colorado cities. Draw to show a route that forms a parallelogram. Write the names of the cities you use.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 76

Answer:

Sterling, eckley, pritchett and La junta forms parallelogram .

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Use the map above. Drawtoshow a route that forms a trapezoid. Write the names of the cities you use.

Meeker,walden,loveland and cedaredge.

Question 9.
You have four markers of equal length. Name all of the quadrilaterals you can make using the markers as sides.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 77

Answer:
Rhombus and Square .

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
Use a ruler to draw a trapezoid for each description.

  • one side length of 1 inch
  • one side length of 1 inch
  • one side length of 2 inches
  • one side length of 2 inches
  • two right angles
  • no right angles

Answer:

Trapezoid with 2 right angles

Draw Quadrilaterals Homework & Practice 13.4

Question 1.
Draw a quadrilateral that has two pairs of parallel sides. Name the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 78

Answer:

Question 2.
Draw a quadrilateral that is not a rhombus.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 79

Answer:

Question 3.
Name the group of quadrilaterals. Then draw a quadrilateral that does not belong in the group. Explain why it does not belong.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 153

Answer:

Explanation:
Square, Rhombus and Rectangle contains 2 pairs of parallel sides. where Trapezoid contains only 1 pair of parallel side .

Question 4.
Precision
Circle the quadrilaterals that are not trapezoids.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 80

Answer:

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
A bus tour wants to travel to various locations. Draw to show a route that forms a rectangle. Write the names of the location drop-off points you use.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 81

 

Answer:

The Drop off point is The Discovery of king Tut exhibit .

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Tell whether the shape shows equal parts or unequal parts. If the shape shows equal parts, then name them
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 82
_____ parts _____

Answer:
11 square parts – equal parts .
8 rectangle parts – unequal parts .

Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Performance Task

Your class is learning about fossils.

Question 1.
Your teacher wants to create cards using the fossils below. Use each polygon description to write the fossil name on the correct card.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 83

Answer:

Question 2.
Your teacher uses the cards and a sandbox to create an archaeological dig site. Your teacher lays a grid with eight grid squares over the top of the sandbox. Each square has 10-inch side lengths. How many square inches is the bottom of the sandbox?

Answer:

 

Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Activity

Identify That Quadrilateral!

Directions:
1. Players take turns rolling a die.
2. On your turn, move your piece the number of spaces shown on the die.
3. Cover a space on the board that describes the shape where you landed.
4. If there are no spaces that match your shape, then you lose your turn.
5. The first player to cover six spaces wins!
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 87

Answer:

Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice

13.1 Identify Sides and Angles of Quadrilaterals

Identify the number of right angles and pairs of parallel sides.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 90
Right angles: ____
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

Right angles: __0__
Pairs of parallel sides: __2_( sides 1 ll 2 and 3 ll 4 ) .

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 91
Right angles: ____
Pairs of parallel sides: ___

Answer:

Right angles: 2
Pairs of parallel sides: 0

Question 3.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the yellow sides are parallel. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 92

Answer:
Yes.
Explanation:
It is a Trapezoid it contains only 1 pair of parallel sides.

13.2 Describe Quadrilaterals

Question 4.
Write all of the names for the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 93

Answer:
Rectangle

Question 5.
Name all of the quadrilaterals that can have no right angles.

Answer:
Trapezoid, Rhombus and Parallelogram.

13.3 Classify Quadrilaterals

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 94

Question 6.
How are squares and trapezoids alike? How are they different?

Answer:
Both are quadrilaterals, so both of them have four sides. The square has two pairs of parallel sides, while the trapezoid only has one pair of parallel sides. So, we can say that both  have one pair of parallel sides in common.

squares have all sides equal . but whereas trapezoid sides are different.
squares have 4 right angles but whereas trapezoid have different angles.

Question 7.
What name can you use to classify all squares and trapezoids?

Answer:
Quadilaterals and Parallelogram.

13.4 Draw Quadrilaterals

Question 8.
Draw a quadrilateral that has four right angles. Name the quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 95
Answer:
Square.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A helicopter travels to various locations in Wyoming. Draw to show a route that forms a square. Write the names of the locations you use.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes 96

Answer:
lander, farson, points of rocks and sweetwater.

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes

I hope that the details prevailed in this page regarding Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 13 Classify Two-Dimensional Shapes Answer Key is useful for all the students and also for teachers. Make use of the answers to secure best grades in the exams. Stay in touch with oursite to get the latest solutions for other Big Ideas Grade 3 Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12

Elementary school grade 3 students can get Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade 12th Chapter Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Solutions in the following sections. This BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Answer Key has the answers for all the questions of 8 lessons and performance task. Students who want to become a pro in maths can just download Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Solutions pdf and start their preparation. We are giving the answers pdf for free of cost.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass

Are you worried about completing maths homework in time? No need to worry. We are giving the direct link to download BIM Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Answer Key pdf. This pdf contains problems from Measure Mass, Understand and Estimate, Measure Liquid Volume, Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume, Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems, Measure Elapsed Time across the Hour, Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour, and Time to the Nearest Minute.

The success criteria of students after solving Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade 12th Chapter Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Solutions questions is solving time interval problems, get the appropriate way to measure an object, compare one measurement to another. Get the quick links for all lessons in the below sections and begin preparation.

Lesson 1 – Time to the Nearest Minute

Lesson 2 – Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour

Lesson 3 – Measure Elapsed Time across the Hour

Lesson 4 – Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems

Lesson 5 – Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume

Lesson 6 – Measure Liquid Volume

Lesson 7 – Understand and Estimate

Lesson 8 – Measure Mass

Performance Task

12.1 Time to the Nearest Minute

Explore and Grow

Write each time.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 1

Precision
How did you find each time ?
Answer:
The short hand is on 2 and the minute hand is on 1. So the time for the first clock is 2:05
The short hand is on 2 and the minute hand exceeded 1. So the time for the second clock is 2:06
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-1

Think and Grow: Tell Time to the Nearest Minute:

Example
What time does the clock show? What are some other ways to say the time?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 2
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 3
It takes 1 minute for the minute hand to move from one mark to the next.
Step 1: Look at the hour hand.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 4

  • The hour hand is between the 4
  • So, it is after 4:00 and before 5 : 00.

Step 2: Look at the minute hand.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 5

  • Count by 5s from the 12 to the 7.
  • Count on by 1s from the 7 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.

So, the time is ___ : ____
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“___ minutes after 4.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“___ minutes before 5.”
Answer:
The time is 04 : 37
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“37 minutes after 4.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“23 minutes before 5.”

Show and Grow

Write the time. Write another way to say the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 6
Answer: 09:13

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-6

Explanation:
Look at the hour hand.
The hour hand is between the 9 and 10.
The minute hand is between the 2 and 3.
The time between 2 and 3 is 5 minutes.
Count on by 1s from the 3 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.
The time is 09 : 13
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“13 minutes after 9.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“47 minutes before 10.”

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 7
Answer: 11:29
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-7

Explanation:

Look at the hour hand.
The hour hand is between the 11 and 12.
The minute hand is between the 5 and 6.
The time between 5 and 6 is 5 minutes.
Count on by 1s from the 4 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.
The time is 11 : 29
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“29 minutes after 11.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“31 minutes before 12.”

Apply and Grow

Write the time. Write another way to say the time.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 8
Answer: 05:14

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-8
Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“14 minutes after 5.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“46 minutes before 6.”
The time is 05:14

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 9
Answer:07:57

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-9

Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“57 minutes after 7.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“3 minutes before 8.”
The time is 07:57

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 10

Answer: 12:43

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-10
Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“43 minutes after 12.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“17 minutes before 1.”
The time is 12:43

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 300

Answer: 01:28
Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“28 minutes after 1.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“32 minutes before 2.”
The time is 01:28

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 301

Answer:10:32

Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“32 minutes after 10.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“28 minutes before 11.”
The time is 10:32

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 302

Write the time.
Answer: 06:06
Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“6 minutes after 6.”
Count the minutes before the next hour. Say,“54 minutes before 7.”
The time is 06:06

Question 9.
24 minutes after 3
Answer: 03:24

Explanation:
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“24 minutes after 3.”
The time is 03:24

Question 10.
13 minutes before 9
Answer: 08:47

Explanation:
Count the minutes before the hour. Say,“13 minutes before 9.”
The time is 08:47

Question 11.
7 minutes before 1
Answer: 12:53

Explanation:
Count the minutes before the hour. Say,“53 minutes before 1.”
The time is 12:53

Question 12.
Which One Doesn’t Belong? Which time does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 11
Answer:  Digital clock does not belong with the other three
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-11
Explanation: as in digital clock its shows 5:33  i.e, 33 minutes after 5
so, Digital clock does not belong with the other three

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A train leaves a station at 12 minutes before 8. Show and write the time the train leaves the station.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 12
Answer: 07:48
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-12
Explanation: The time train leaves the station at 48 minutes after 7
07:48

Show and Grow

Question 13.
You go for a walk at 26 minutes after 2. Show and write the time you go for a walk.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 13
Answer: 02:26

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-13
walk at 26 minutes after 2
so the time is 02:26

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton and Descartes start playing a game at 3 : 11. They play for 47 minutes. Show and write the time they stop playing the game.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 14
Answer: 03:58

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-14
Newton and Descartes start playing a game at 3 : 11. They play for 47 minutes.
3 hour 11 minutes + 47 minutes we get 3 hour 58 minutes
So they stop playing the game at 03:58

Question 15.
You eat breakfast at 34 minutes before 9. You eat dinner at 42 minutes after 6. Show and write the times. Circle A.M. or P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 15
Which time is earlier? Explain
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-15

Count the minutes before the hour. Say,“34 minutes before 9.”
The time is 08:26
So, the breakfast time is 8:26 A.M
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“42 minutes before 6.”
The time is 06:42 P.M
Thus the dinner time is 6:42 P.M

Time to the Nearest Minute Homework & Practice 12.1

Write the time. Write another way to say the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 16
Answer: 11 minutes after 2

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-16
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“11 minutes after 2.”
The time is 02:11

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 310

Answer: 2 minutes before 5

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-310
Count the minutes before the hour. Say,“2 minutes before 4.”
The time is 04:58

Write the time. write two other ways to say the time.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 17
Answer:
1. 03:49
2. Count the minutes before the hour. Say, 11 minutes before 4

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 18
Answer:
08:32
count the minutes after the hour say 32 minutes after 8

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 19
Write the time
Answer:
1. 12:04
2.count the minutes after the hour say 4 minutes after 12

Question 6.
32 minutes after 10
Answer: 10:32

Explaination:
Count the time after hour say 32 minutes after 10
so the time is 10:32

Question 7.
8 minutes before 6
Answer: 05:52

Explanation:
Count the time before hour say 8 minutes before 6
so the time is 05:52

Question 8.
16 minutes before 8
Answer: 07:44

Explanation:
Count the time before hour say 16 minutes before 8
so the time is 07:44

Question 9.
Writing
Explain when you would stop counting by 5s and start counting by 1s when telling time to the nearest minute.
Answer:

Question 10.
Precision
Explain where the hands of an analog clock point at 1:27.
Answer:
Look at the hour hand.
The hour hand is between the 1 and 2.
The minute hand is between the 5 and 6.
The time between 5 and 6 is 5 minutes.
Count on by 1s from the 2 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.
The time is 01 : 27

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You start practicing taekwondo 19 minutes before 7. Show and write the time you start practicing.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 312
Answer: 06:41
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-312
Look at the hour hand.
The hour hand is between the 6 and 7.
The minute hand is between the 10 and 11.
The time between 10 and 11 is 5 minutes.
Count on by 1s from the 1 to the mark where the minute hand is pointing.
the time you start practicing  is 06 : 41

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
some friends start jumping rope at 12:22. They jump rope for 24 minutes. Show and write the time they stop jumping rope.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 20
Answer: 12:46
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-20
Given they start jumping rope at 12:22
They jump rope for 24 minutes
so add 12:22 + 24 minutes we get 12:46
hence they stop jumping at 12:46

Review & Refresh

Question 13.
Estimate: ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 21
Answer: 330

Explanation:
The estimated number of 526 is 530.
The estimated number of 203 is 200.
530
-200
330

Question 14.
Estimate: ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 22
Answer: 590

Explanation
The estimated number of 945 is 950
The estimated number of 362 is 360
950
–  360
590

Question 15.
Estimate: ___
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 23
Answer: 260
Explanation:
The estimated number of 412 is 410
The estimated number of 145 is 150
410
–  150
   260

Lesson 12.2 Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour

Explore and Grow

Write each time. How much time has passed?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 24
___ minutes have passed.

Reasoning
How many more minutes until a half hour has passed? Explain.
Answer: 23 minutes have passed and 7 more minutes until half hour has passed
Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-24

The start time is 05:00
Count the minutes after the hour. Say,“23 minutes after 5.”
The time is 05:23
23 minutes have passed and 7 more minutes until half hour has passed

Think and Grow: Measure Elapsed Time

Elapsed time is the amount of time that passes from a starting time to an ending time.
Example
Find the elapsed time between 2:05 P.M. and 2:43 P.M.
Example
One Way: Use an analog clock.
Step 1: Draw the starting time.
Step 2: Mark the ending time.
Step 3: Count the minutes by5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 25
So, the elapsed time is ____ minutes.
Answer: 37 minutes

Another Way: Use a number line.
Step 1: Plot the starting time on a number line.
Step 2: Count on until you reach the ending time.
Step 3: Add the jumps to find the elapsed time.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 26
So, the elapsed time is ___ minutes.
Answer: 37 minutes

Show and Grow

Find the elapsed time.

Question 1.
Start: 11:10 A.M. End: 11:43 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 27
Answer: 33 minutes

Explanation:

Question 2.
Start: 1:25 P.M. End: 1:56 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 28
Answer: 31 minutes

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the elapsed time

Question 3.
Start: 7:30 A.M. End: 7:53 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 29
Answer: 23 minutes

Question 4.
Start: 5:15 P.M. End: 5:41 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 30
Answer: 26 minutes

Question 5.
Start: 10:50 A.M. End: 10:59 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 31
Answer: 9 minutes

Question 6.
Start: 8:05 P.M. End: 8:37 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 32
Answer: 32 minutes

Question 7.
Structure
Find the elapsed time and the end time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 33
Answer: Elapsed time 25 minutes end time is 09:52 Am

Question 8.
Writing
Explain how to use an analog clock to find the elapsed time from 6:20 P.M. to 6:38 P.M.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A magic show starts at 3:15 P.M. It ends at 3:57 P.M. How long is the show?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 34
Model:
The show is ___ minutes long.
Answer: 42 minutes
magic show starts at 03:15 P.M. it ends at 03:57 pm
so we have to subtract start time and end time to find how long the show run
03:57-03:15 is 42 minutes.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
A nature walk starts at 10:30 A.M. It ends at 10:46 A.M. How long is the walk?
Answer: 16 minutes
Given,
A nature walk starts at 10:30 A.M. It ends at 10:46 A.M.
To find how long is the walk we have to subtract the start time from end time.
10: 46 – 10:30 = 16 minutes

Question 10.
An Internet video is 13 minutes long. You start the video at 1:23 P.M. At what time does the video end?
Answer: 01:36 P.M.

Explanation:

Given,
Internet video is 13 minutes
video start at 1:23 P.M.
so add 13 minutes to 1:23 P.M1:23+13 = 1:36 P.M

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You play hopscotch for 27 minutes. You stop at 4:40 P.M. At what time did you start playing hopscotch?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 35
Answer: 04:13

Explanation:
given played hopscotch for 27 minutes
play stoped at 4:40 P.M
so to know at what time playing hopscotch start we need to Subtract stoped time and played minutes
therefore 4:40-27minutes = 04:13 P.M
Hence at 04:13 P.M playing hopscotch started.

Question 12.
You practice the guitar from 12:06 P.M. to 12:35 P.M. on Saturday and from 9:25 A.M. to 9:47 A.M. on Sunday. How long did you spend practicing the guitar in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 36

Answer: 29+22= 51 Minutes.

Explanation:
Given,
practice the guitar from 12:06 P.M to 12:35 P.M.
so  minutes practiced is subtract from 12:35 – 12:06 = 29 minutes
practiced on Saturday from 9:25 A.M. to 9:47 A.M
So minutes practiced on Saturday. subtract from 9:47-9:25 =22 minutes
therefore to find how long spend on practicing the guitar overall is to add the first and second session  29 minutes + 22 minutes = 51 minutes

Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour Homework & Practice 12.2

Find the elapsed time.

Question 1.
Start: 6:05 A.M. End: 6:44 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 37
Answer: 39 minutes

Question 2.
Start: 3:30 P.M. End: 3:51 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 38
Answer: 21 minutes

Find the elapsed time.

Question 3.
Start: 4:10 P.M. End: 4:56 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 39
Answer: 46 minutes

Question 4.
Start: 9:25 A.M. End: 9:33 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 40
Answer: 8 minutes

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 41
Answer: No. the correct answer is 28 minutes

Question 6.
Writing
Explain how to use a number line to find the elapsed time from 10:15 A.M. to 10:49 A.M.
Answer: 34 minutes

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
Your teacher places a beaker of water over a burner at 2:15 P.M. The water boils at 2:26P.M. How long does it take for the water to boil?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 42
Answer: 11 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
The teacher places a beaker of water over a burner at 2:15 P.M
water boils at 2:26 P.M
so to find how long water to boil is to subtract from 2:26 P.m and 2:15 P.m
So we get 2:26-2:15 = 11 minutes
it takes 11 minutes for the water to boil.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Descartes plays outside from 1:32 P.M. to 1:45 P.M. He stops to eat lunch. Then he plays outside from 2:20 P.M. to 2:47 P.M. How long did he play outside in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 43
Answer: 13+27=40 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
Descartes plays outside from 1:32 P.M. to 1:45 P.M
so subtract from 1:45 P.M. and 1:32 we get 13 minutes.
after lunch, he plays outside from 2:20 P.M. to 2:47 P.M
so subtract from 2:20 P.M. to 2:47 P.M we get 27 minutes
To find how long did he play outside in all is  add both sessions 13 minutes+ 27 minutes = 40 minutes

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
There are 134 third graders and 106 fourth graders at a state park. There are 220 fewer teachers than students at the park. How many teachers are at the park?
Answer:

Lesson 12.3 Measure Elapsed Time Across the Hour

Explore and Grow

Write each time. How much time has passed?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 44
___ minutes have passed.
Answer: 20 minutes

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-44
as shown in the analog clock start time is 02:45 P.M and the end time is 03:05 P.M
s0 subtract from the end time and start time
we get 03:05-02:45=20 minutes
hence  20 minutes have passed.

Critique Reasoning
Newton says one hour has passed because the digit for the hour increased by 1. Why is Newton incorrect?

Think and Grow: Measure Elapsed Time Across an Hour

Example
Find the elapsed time between 7:45 A.M. and 8:12 A.M.
One Way: Use an analog clock.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 45
Step 1: Draw the starting time.
Step 2: Mark the ending time.
Step 3: Count the minutes by 5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
So, the elapsed time is __ minutes.
Answer: 21 minutes

Another Way: Use a number line.
Step 1: Plot the starting time on a number line.
Step 2: Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Step 3: Add the jumps to find the elapsed time.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 46
So, the elapsed time is ___ minutes.
Answer: 27 minutes

Show and Grow

Find the elapsed time.

Question 1.
Start: 3:55 P.M. End: 4:41 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 47
Answer: 46 minutes

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-47
Explanation:
Draw the starting time.
Mark the ending time.
Count the minutes by 5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
the elapsed time is 46minutes.

Question 2.
Start: 10:40 A.M. End: 11:19 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 48
Answer: 39 minutes

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-48

Explanation:
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 39 minutes is the elapsed time.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the elapsed time.

Question 3.
Start: 1:35 P.M. End: 2:11 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 49
Answer: 36 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-49
Explanation:
Draw the starting time.
Mark the ending time.
Count the minutes by 5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
the elapsed time is 36minutes.

Question 4.
Start: 8:50 A.M. End: 9:34 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 50
Answer: 44 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-50
Explanation:
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 44 minutes is the elapsed time.

Question 5.
Start: 5:25 P.M. End: 6:07 P.M.
Answer: 42 minutes

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-50 (1)
Explanation:
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 42 minutes is the elapsed time.

Question 6.
Start: 11:30 A.M. End: 12:26 P.M.
Answer: 56 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-50
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 56 minutes is the elapsed time

Question 7.
Reasoning
Find the end time.
start: 4:42 P.M.
Elapsed time : 38 minutes
End: ___P.M.
Answer: 5:20 P.M.

Explanation:
Given start time 4:42 P.M.
Elapsed time: 38 minutes
To find End  add 4:42 P.M + 38 minutes.
so the end time is 5:20 P.M

Question 8.
Writing
Explain two different ways to find the elapsed time from 6:55 A.M. to 7:29 A.M.
Answer:  34 minutes

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A volleyball game begins at 5:45 P.M. It ends at 6 : 17 P.M. How long is the game?
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 51
The game is ___ minutes long.
Answer: 32 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
The volleyball game begins at 5:45 P.M
the game ends at 6:17 P.M
to find how long the is to subtract from end time to start time we get 6:17-5:45 = 32 minutes
Hence the game is 32 minutes.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
You start playing a virtual reality game at 1:50 P.M. You stop playing at 2:09 P.M. How long do you play the game?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 320
Answer: 19 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
The game starts Playing at 1:50 P.M.
Stopped playing at 2:09 P.M
To find how long the game played is to subtract from end time to start time 2:09-1:50=19 minutes
19 minutes game was played.

Question 10.
You listen to an audiobook that is 47 minutes long. The book ends at 10:25 A.M. At what time did you start the book?
Answer: 09:38 A.M.

Explanation:
Given,
audiobook listen for 47 minutes long
the book ends at 10:25 A.M.
to find at what time the book start we need to subtract 47 minutes from end-time 10:25 A.M., we get 09:38 A.M.
at 09:38 A.M started the book.

Question 11.
Newton roller-skates from 11:35A.M. to 12:12P.M. Descartes roller-skates from 3:40 P.M. to 4:26 P.M. Who skates longer?
Answer: Descartes skates longer 46 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
Newton roller-skates from 11:35 A.M. to 12:12 P.M.
so subtract from end time to start time we get 12:12 P.M – 11:35 A.M = 37 Minutes
Descartes roller-skates from 3:40 P.M. to 4:26 P.M.
so subtract from end time to start time we get 4:26 P.M. – 3:40 P.M = 46 Minutes
so Descartes skates longer 46 minutes.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You practice juggling from 10:40 A.M. to 11:04 A.M. Your friend practices juggling for the same amount of time as you. She stops at 11:21 A.M. At what time did your friend start juggling?
Answer: 10:57  A.M

Explanation:
Given in the question that Friend practices juggling for the same amount of time as you.
So that you started practice at 10:40 A.M to 11:04 A.M
So the amount of time you practiced subtract from end time to start time we get 11:04-10:40= 24 minutes
so your friend  stops at 11:21 A.M
Hence to find your friend and started at  is subtract 24 minutes of your practice time in to end time of your friend that is 11:21 A.M
we get 11:21 A.M. – 24 minutes = 10:57 A.M
so the answer is 10:57 A.M.

Measure Elapsed Time Across the Hour Homework & Practice 12.3

Find the elapsed time.

Question 1.
Start: 3:50 P.M. End: 4:06 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 52
Answer: 16 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-52
Explanation:
Draw the starting time.
Mark the ending time.
Count the minutes by 5s and 1s until you reach the ending time.
the elapsed time is 16minutes.

Question 2.
Start: 9:35 A.M. End: 10:23 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 53
Answer: 48 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-53
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 48 minutes is the elapsed time

Find the elapsed time

Question 3.
Start: 2:20 P.M. End: 3:03 P.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 54
Answer: 43 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-53 (1)
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 43 minutes is the elapsed time

Question 4.
Start: 11:15 P.M. End: 12:12 A.M.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 55
Answer: 57 minutes
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-53 (2)
Explanation:
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 57 minutes is the elapsed time

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Descartes correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 56
Answer: Wrong the correct answer is 42 minutes

Question 6.
Writing
Write a word problem that requires finding an elapsed time.
Answer:
Start: 11:15 P.M. End: 12:12 A.M.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-3rd-Grade-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-53 (2)
Plot the starting time on a number line.
Count the minutes from the starting time to the next hour. Then count the minutes from the hour to the ending time.
Add the jumps to 57 minutes is the elapsed time

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
You start looking for animals tracks at 10:25 A.M. You find some at 11:06 A.M. How long does it take you to find the tracks?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 316
Answer: 41 minutes

Explanation:
Given
We start looking for animals tracks at 10:25 A.M
we find some at 11:06 A.M
so subtract 11:06 – 10:25 = 41 minutes

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You create pictographs from 4:40 P.M. to 5:02 P.M. Your friend creates pictographs for the same amount of time as you. He stops at 6:16 P.M. What time did your friend start creating pictographs?
Answer: 5:56 P.M

Explanation:
Given in the question that your friend creates pictographs for the same amount of time as you
so you created pictographs from 04:40 P.M to 05:02 P.M.
to find the amount of time you created pictographs we need to subtract the start and end time we get
05:02 P.M. – 04:40 P.M =  22 minutes.
Your friend stops creating pictographs at 06:16 P.M.
Now to find your friend start time of creating pictographs
we need to Subtract your 22 minutes of creating a time of pictographs as given that you and your friend create pictographs for the same time
so we get  06:16 P.M. – 22 minutes = 05:56 P.M.
Hence your friend starts creating pictographs at 05:56 P.M.

Review & Refresh
Question 9.
Plot \(\frac{11}{6}\) on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 317
Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-317

Lesson 12.4 Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems

Explore and Grow

You wait in line for 16 minutes to ride a roller coaster. Then you wait in line for 15 minutes to ride a Ferris wheel. How much time do you spend waiting in the lines altogether?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 57
Make Sense of Problems
Write an equation for the problem. What operation did you use? Why?

Think and Grow: Solve Time Interval Problems

A time interval is an amount of time.

Example
Some friends have 60 minutes to solve a mystery. They have been working for 44 minutes. How much time do they have left to solve the mystery?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 58

Understand the Problem

What do you know?

  • Some friends have ___ minutes to solve a mystery.
  • They have been working for __ minutes.

What do you need to find?

  • You need to find how much ___ they have left to solve the mystery.

Make a Plan

  • Subtract ___ from ___ to find how much ___ they have left.

Solve

Use a number line to represent the problem and show the time intervals.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 59
So, the friends have __ minutes left to solve the mystery.
Answer: 16 minutes

Show and Grow

Question 1.
You spend 26 minutes playing games on a tablet and 17 minutes listening to music on a tablet. How much time do you spend using the tablet?
Answer: 43 minutes

Explanation:
Given You spend playing games on a tablet is 26 minutes.
and listening to music on a tablet is 17 Minutes.
Now to find how much time you spend using the tablet is
So we need to add both the spending times on tablet that is
26 minutes + 17 minutes = 43 minutes
Hence you have spent 43 minutes using the tablet

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 2.
You have 30 minutes to play outside before dinner. You already played for 19 minutes. How much time do you have left to play?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 60
Answer: 11 minutes

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-57
Given you have 30 minutes to play outside
and you have played 19 minutes already
to find how much time you have left to play we need to Subtract from the total given time by time you have played till now
we get 30 minutes – 19 minutes = 11 minutes
Hence 11 minutes of time you have left to play.

Question 3.
Library class is 43 minutes long. During class, you spend 15 minutes searching for books and the rest of the time reading. How much time do you spend reading?
Answer: 28 minutes

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-57 (1)
Given Duration of the library class is 43 minutes
you spend searching for books in 15 minutes
to find how much time do you spend reading we need to subtract from the total duration of library class and search for books time
we get 43 minutes – 15 minutes= 28 minutes.
Hence you have spent 28 minutes reading.

Question 4.
You spend 13 fewer minutes planning a constellation picture than creating it. You spend 12 minutes planning the picture. How much time do you spend creating it?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 61
Answer:

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
You spend 3 hours at an adventure park. Which equations show how many minutes you spend at the park?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 62
Answer:  180 minutes

Explanation:
Given you spent 3 hours in the adventure park
as we know that 1 hour is equal to 60 minutes.
so we can use two equations one is 3 hours multiplied by 60 minutes that is 3 × 60 = 180 minutes
or we spent 3 hours = 1 hour + 1 hour + 1 hour =  60 min +60 min +60 min = 180 minutes
Hence you spent 180 minutes in the park

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You write and illustrate a short story. You spend 36 minutes writing the story, 15 minutes drawing the pictures, and 13 minutes coloring the pictures. How many more minutes do you spend writing than illustrating?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 63
Understand the problem:
Make a plan:
Solve:
You spend __ more minutes writing the story.
Answer: 8 minutes

Explanation:
Given you spend writing the story is 36 minutes
and took  15 minutes for drawing and 13 minutes for coloring the picture’s
so add both illustrating minutes total of 15 minutes + 13 minutes = 28 minutes
Now to find how many more minutes spent writing than illustrating by subtracting writing 36 minutes and illustrating  28 minutes.
we get  36- minutes – 28 minutes = 8 minutes
Hence you spend 8 more minutes writing the story

Show and Grow

Question 6.
A play with three acts is 57 minutes long. The first act is 24 minutes long, and the second act is 19 minutes long. How long is the third act?
Answer: 14 minutes

Explanation:
Given,
play with three acts is 57 minutes long.
the first act is 24 minutes long,
and the second act is 19 minutes long
To find how long is the third act we have to add the first act and second act duration minutes
we get 24 minutes + 19 minutes = 43 minutes.
Now subtract the 43 minutes with Play with three-act 57 minutes.
we get 57 minutes – 43 minutes = 14 minutes.
Hence the third act is 14 minutes long.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
How many more minutes do you spend playing sports after school than doing homework? How much time do you spend on all of your after-school activities?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 64
You start your math homework at 3:35 P.M. You start your science homework immediately after you finish your math homework. At what time do you finish your science homework? Explain.
Answer: 04:16 P.M.

Explanation:
Given,
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-64
You start math homework at 3:35 P.M.
as per the given table duration of math homework is 23 minutes
Math Homework finishes at   3:35 P.M + 23 minutes = 3:58 P.M
Science home works start after completing math homework is 3:58 P.M
To find science homework finishes as given in table duration is 18 minutes so add to start time
we get 3:58 + 18 minutes = 4:16 P.M.
At 4:16 P.M. finished science homework

Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems Homework & Practice 12.4

Question 1.
You spend 28 fewer minutes stretching than practicing. You practice for 40 minutes. How much time do you spend stretching?
Answer:

Question 2.
You spend 11 more minutes playing a board game than you do creating it. You spend 49 minutes playing the board game. How much time do you spend creating the board game?
Answer:

Question 3.
Open-Ended
A dog groomer has 60 minutes togive3 dogs a bath. Each bath takes at least 15 minutes, and the first bath takes the longest. What is one way the 60 minutes can be divided among the three baths?
Bath 1: ___ minutes
Bath 2: ___ minutes
Bath 3: ___ minutes
Answer:
Bath 1: _30__ minutes
Bath 2: _15__ minutes
Bath 3: _15__ minutes

Question 4.
Which two events can be done back-to-back in less than a half hour? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 65
Answer: Caricature and Horse Ride

Explanation:
Given in the picture That
Tractor pull takes 19 minutes
Horse Ride: 14 minutes
Caricature : 12 minutes
So to conduct two back to back events within half-hour
Consider two lowest minutes so we can notice Caricature 12 minutes and Horse ride 14 minutes so 12 minutes + 14 minutes = 26 minutes
So 26 minutes back to back event will be completed with in half hour

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You have 55 minutes to find 3 items. You find the first item in 26 minutes, and you find the second item in 9 minutes. How many minutes do you have left to find the third item?
Answer: 20 Minutes

Explanation:
Given,
You have 55 minutes to find 3 items
Found the first item in 26 minutes
The second item in 9 minutes
To find how many minutes we have left for the third item
Subtract first and second item duration with the total time given for 3 items we get
55 minutes – 26 minutes – 9 minutes = 20 minutes
Hence it takes 20 minutes for the third item.

Question 6.
DIG DEEPER!
How many more minutes do you spend dancing than playing musical instruments? How much time do you spend on all of your activities?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 66
Answer: You spend 18 minutes you spend dancing than playing musical instruments and you spend 100 minutes on all of your activities.

Explanation:
Given in table that
Time spend for step dance and hip-hop dance is  25 min and 34 minutes
Total time for the dance we get 25 minutes + 34 minutes = 58 minutes
Time spend on play drums and play the piano is 22 minutes and 19 minutes
Total time for instruments we get 22 minutes + 19 minutes = 41 minutes
so to find how many more minutes you spend dancing than playing instruments is
difference between total time for dancing and total time for playing instrument weget
58 minutes – 41 minutes = 18 minutes
And to find the total time spend on all of your activities is to add all the durations in the table we get
25 minutes + 34 minutes + 22 minutes + 19 minutes = 100 minutes.
Hence You spend 18 minutes you spend dancing than playing musical instruments and you spend 100 minutes on all of your activities.

 

You start playing the drums at 5:25 P.M. You start playing the piano immediately after you finish playing the drums. At what time do you finish playing musical instruments? Explain.
Answer: 06:06 P.M

Explanation:
Given
You start playing the drum at 5:25 P.M
As per the given table duration for playing drums is 22 minutes
Add duration to 5:25 P.M we get 5:47 P.M
Also given you started playing piano immediately after finishing playing drums that is at 5:47 P.M
As per the given table duration for playing the piano is 19 minutes
add duration to 5:47 P.m we get 06:06 P.M
Hence at 6:06 P.M, we finish playing musical instruments

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 67
Answer:7/7

Explanation:
Given 5/5 by dividing we get 1
in the same way 7/7 we get 1
so the value is 7/7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 68
Answer: 2/4

Explanation:
Given 1/2 by dividing we get 0.5
in the same way 2/4 we get 0.5
so the value is 2/4

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 69
Answer: 4/8

Explanation:
Given 2/4 by dividing we get 0.5
in the same way 4/8 we get 0.5
so the value is 4/8

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 70
Answer: 1/3

Explanation:
Given 2/6 by dividing we get 1/3
in the same way, 1/3
so the value is 1/3

Lesson 12.5 Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume

Explore and Grow

About how many bottles of water would fill the pot?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 74

Reasoning
The bottle holds 1 litre of water. How can you estimate the number of litres of water the pot can hold?
Answer: 5 litres

Explanation:
Given bottle holds 1 litre of water
we need to estimate the number of litres of water the pot can hold
by observing the pot we can estimate that the pot can hold up to 5 litres
Hence the answer is 5 litres bottles

Think and Grow: Understand Liquid Volume

Liquid volume is the amount of liquid in a container.
A litre (L) is the standard metric unit used to measure liquid volume.
A millilitre (mL) is another metric unit used to measure liquid volume.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 75

Example
Which units should you use to measure the liquid volume, litres millilitres or ? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 76
A fishbowl contains ___ liquid than a water bottle.
Answer: More liquid than a water bottle

Explanation:
One bottle contains one litre of liquid
by observing the picture we know that the water in the fishbowl is more than a litre bottle
Hence A fishbowl contains more liquid than a water bottle.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 77
A small glass contains ___ liquid than a 1-litre water bottle.
Answer: Less

Explanation:
AS we know that 1-litre water bottle contains more water than a glass of water
Hence A small glass contains less liquid than a 1-litre water bottle.

Show and Grow

Which units should you use to measure the liquid volume, or millilitres? Explain.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 78
Answer: Liquid volume millilitres

Explanation:
As we know that Tea cup dint hold litre volume
Hence A Hence tea cup to measure the liquid millilitres.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 79
Answer: Liquid volume litres

Explanation:
bucket of liquid contains litres of liquid.
by observing the picture we know that the liquid is in litres of liquid contain in litres

Apply and Grow: Practice

Which units should you use to measure the liquid volume, litres or millilitres ? Explain.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 80
Answer: Millilitres

Explanation:
One drop of liquid contains one millilitres of liquid
by observing the picture we know that the liquid
One millilitres of liquid contain one millilitres

4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 81
Answer: Liquid volume in litre

Explanation:
Tea pot of liquid contains one litres of liquid
by observing the picture we know that the liquid is in litres of liquid contain litres

Choose the better estimate.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 82
Answer: 250 L

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the bowl volume can hold 250 L so the better estimate is 250 L

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 83
Answer: 15 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the water bottle cannot hold 15 L so the better estimate is 15 mL

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 84
Answer: 30 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the water key chain cannot hold 3L so the better estimate is 30 mL

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 85
Answer: 4 L
Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the fountain hold 40L so the better estimate is 4L

Question 9.
Reasoning
Match
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 86
Answer: 60 mL and 200 mL are match and 4L and 2L are a match

Explanation: In the given picture we can observe that Liters L and mL are shown
Hence we can match liters L and mL separately
so 60 mL and 200 mL are match and 4L and 2L are a match

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Use Picture A to estimate the liquid volume shown in Picture B.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 87
Compare:
The liquid volume is about ___ liters.
Answer: 20 L

Explanation:
Given in picture A contains 5L
we can estimate liquid volume is picture B as the volume is full of can
hence The liquid volume is about 20 liters.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Use Picture C to estimate the liquid volume shown in Picture D
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 88
Answer: 250 mL

Explanation:
Given in Picture D volume is 125 mal which is half of the bottle
So we can estimate in Picture D is 250 mL as it is filled completely with volume

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Use Picture X to estimate the liquid volumes shown in Pictures Y and Z.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 89
Answer: picture Y 75 L and picture Z 150 liters

Explanation:
Given Picture X is 25L
so we can estimate the Picture Y 75 L as the container is filled fully which is 3 times than picture X
whereas Picture Z we can estimate 150 L as its double the size of the Picture Y

Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume Homework & Practice 12.5

Which units should you use to measure the liquid volume, liters or milliliters ? Explain.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 90
Answer: liquid volume Liters

Explanation:
By observing the picture the can be estimated in liquid volume Liters as it contains more than milliliters and measuring in liters is flexible

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 91
Answer: milliliters

Explanation:
By observing the picture the can be estimated in liquid volume milliliters as it contains less than liters and measuring in milliliters is flexible

Choose the better estimate.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 92
Answer: 300 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the balloon cannot hold 300L so the better estimate is 300 mL

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 93
Answer: 6L

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the Tube is more than 6 mL because the boy observing boy height  so the better estimate is 6 L

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 94
Answer: 270 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the Glass and spoon volume cannot hold 27 L so the better estimate is 270 mL

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 95
Answer: 1 L

Explanation:
By observing the picture we can estimate that the bowl  volume cannot hold 10 L so the better estimate is 1 L

Question 7.
Descartes wants to estimate how much water Newton used to fill his dog pool. Would 1,000 milliliters or 100 liters be a better estimate? Explain.
Answer: 100 liters

Explanation:
Given 1000 milliliters is equal to 1 liter which is a smaller quantity for a dog pool
and also given 100 liters which is enough to fill the dog pool.
hence 100 liters is  better

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the liquid volume in the bowl is less than 10 milliliters. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 96
Answer: wrong

Explanation:
Given in the pictured bowl filled with 10 L
Hence the liquid in the bowl is more than 10 milliliters as liter is always greater than milliliters

Question 9.
Number Sense
Order the liquid volumes from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 97
Answer: 1 mL, 50mL, 2000 mL, 5L

Explanation:
as we know that milliliters mL is smaller than liters L
hence  the order is from least to greatest is
1 mL, 50mL, 2000 mL, 5L

Question 10.
Reasoning
An elephant can hold up to10 liters of water in its not trunk. Which of the following is the amount of water an elephant can hold? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 98
Answer: 1 L, 1000 mL, and 100 mL

Explanation:
Given that elephant can hold up to 10 liters
so 1 L, 1000 mL, and 100 mL are less than 10 liters where elephant can hold
But 100L is more than the capacity which an elephant can hold.
Hence 1 L, 1000 mL, and 100 mL amount of water an elephant can hold

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Use Picture A to estimate the liquid volume shown in Picture B.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 99
Answer: 500 mL

Explanation:
by observing Picture A the glass is filled with half which is 350 ml
hence the estimated volume of the Full glass of Picture B is 500 mL

Review & Refresh

Question 12.
Your friend saves $5 each week for 6 weeks. He spends all of the money on 3 toys that each cost the same amount. How much does each toy cost?
Answer: 10 $

Explanation:
A given friend saved $5 each week
he saved for 6 weeks so multiply $5 with 6 weeks we get $30
To find the cost of each toy divide the total six weeks amount by 3 toys as said he spend all of the money on 3 toys
so we get  $30 divided by  = $10
each toy cost $10

Lesson 12.6 Measure Liquid Volume

Explore and Grow

Estimate the capacities of four different containers. Then use a 1-liter beaker to fill each container with liquid. What is the actual liquid volume in each container?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 100
Precision
How can you use your results to get a better estimate for a fifth container?
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-100

Think and Grow: Measure Liquid Volume

Example
What is the liquid volume in each container?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 101

The liquid volume in the soup can is ___ milliliters.
Answer: 5 mL
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 102
The liquid volume in the coffeepot is ___ liters ___ milliliters.
Answer:   2 ml

Show and Grow

What is the liquid volume in the container?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 103
Answer: 1 mL

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 104
Answer: 2 mL

Write the total liquid volume shown

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 105
Answer: 1 liter and 600mL

Explanation:
By observing the containers we know that each container is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the second container is above the 500 mL mark which is near the 600 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 1 liter and 600mL

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 106
Answer: 2 Liters and 200 mL
Explanation:
By observing the containers we know that both containers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the Third container is near  the 200 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 200 mL

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 107
Answer: 4 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we know that 4 drops are in the trolley
Hence the estimated volume is 4 mL

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 108
Answer: 3 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture we know that 3 drops are in the bottle
Hence the estimated volume is 3 mL

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 109
Answer: 2 liters and 500 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 1st and 3rd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the second beakers is near  the 500 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 500 mL

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 110
Answer: 3 liters

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that all 3 beakersare 1 L with measuring volumes on it
hence the estimated volume is 3 liters

Question 9.
Which One Doesn’t Belong? Which group of beakers does not have the same liquid volume as the other two?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 111
Answer: 2nd-row beakers containers are Doesn’t Belong

Explanation:
By observing the pictures we can know that row one and three beakers contain 1 liter 800 mL
whereas Second-row beakers contains 1 liter 900 mL
Hence 2nd-row beakers containers are Doesn’t Belong

Question 10.
Precision
How much water did the basketball team drink during practice? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 112
Answer: 10 L

Explanation:
Given in picture before practice jar contains 17L
after observing measurements on the jar after practice the water level is at 7 L
So subtract from before practice volume by after practice volume we get 17 L-7L= 10L

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You drink two of the cartons of milk shown. How many milliliters of milk do you drink?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 113
Equation:
You drink ___ milliliters of milk.
Answer: 472 milliliters of milk

Explanation:
Given You drink two of the cartons of milk shown
each carton contains 236 mL
so 2 carton multiply by 236 mL we get 472 mL
hence 472 milliliters of milk do you drink

Show and Grow

Question 11.
You pour 250 milliliters of the juice shown into a cup. How many milliliters of juice are left in the jug?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 114
Answer: 696 mL

Explanation:
Given jar volume on the picture is 946 mL
You pour 250 milliliters of the juice shown into a cup
so the juice left in a jar will be 946 mL – 250 mL = 696 mL
Hence 696 milliliters of juice are left in the jug

Question 12.
A school custodian repaints 5 classrooms. He needs 9 liters of paint for each classroom. How many liters of paint does he need in all?
Answer: 45 liters

Explanation:
Given 9 liters of paint for each classroom
custodian repaints 5 classrooms
so to find How many liters of paint does he need in all is multiply 5 class rooms with 9 liters each
we get 5 × 9 liters = 45 liters
Hence 45 liters of paint does he need in all

Question 13.
A baby pool holds 72 liters of water. You use an 8-liter bucket to fill the pool with water. How many times do you fill the bucket?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 115
Answer: 9 times

Explanation:
Given baby pool holds 72 liters of water
8-liter bucket to fill the pool with water
So to find How many times do you fill the bucket
is divide 72 by 8 liters we get number times to fill
we get 72/8 = 9 Times
hence 9 Times you fill the bucket

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
A frozen treat tray has 6 molds. Each mold holds 90 milliliters of liquid. You mix 375 milliliters of orange juice with 175 milliliters of pineapple juice. Do you have enough juice to fill the tray? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 116
Answer: Yes

Explanation:
Given frozen treat tray has 6 molds and Each mold holds 90 milliliters of liquid.
you mix 375 milliliters of orange juice with 175 milliliters of pineapple juice
so Add 375 milliliters of orange juice and 175 milliliters of pineapple juice we get 550 milliliters
Now divde 550 milliliters with 90 milliliters we get 6.1 Molds
so yes you have enough juice to fill the tray

Measure Liquid Volume Homework & Practice 12.6

Write the total liquid volume shown.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 117
Answer: 200 mL and 2 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture in the beaker the volume is 200 mL and from coconut is 2 mL

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 118
Answer: 1 liter and 502 mL

Explanation
By observing the picture in 2 beakers the volume is 1 liter and 500 mL and from the jar is 2 mL
Hence 1 liter and 502 mL

Explanation

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 119
Answer: 2 liters 600 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 1st and 3rd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the second beakers is near the 600 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 600 mL

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 120
Answer: 1 liter 900 mL

Explanation:
By observing the containers we know that each container is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the second container is below the 1 L mark which is near the 900 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 1 liter and 900mL

Question 5.
Precision
You mix the two juices shown. How much juice do you have in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 121
Answer: 900 mL

Explanation:
Given Blue, Rasberry juice is 300 mL
Lemonade is 600 mL
Add both the volumes we get 600 mL + 300 mL = 900 mL
900 mL juice do you have in all

Question 6.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the liquid volume of the beaker is 100 liters. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 318
Answer: incorrect

Explanation:
by observing the picture the volume in the beaker is 100 mL which is less than 100 liters
Hence your friend is incorrect

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
You and your friend each drink one of the juice bottles shown. How many milliliters of juice do you and your friend drink in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 122
Answer: 592 mL

Explanation:
Given You and your friend each drink one of the juice bottles shown
Each bottle contains 296 mL
so multiply 296 mL with 2 we get 592 mL
hence 592 mL of juice do you and your friend drink in all

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
You use 120 milliliters of water from the spray bottle shown. How many milliliters of water are left in the bottle?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 123
Answer: 95 mL

Explanation:
Given You use 120 milliliters of water from the spray bottle shown
in picture its given spary bottle contains 215 mL
So subtract 215 mL with 120 mL we get 215 mL-120mL = 95 mL
Hence 95 milliliters of water are left in the bottle

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
You use 20 liters of water to water a garden. You use a 5-liter watering can to water the garden. How many times do you fill they can? Explain.
Answer: 4 times

Explanation:
Given You use 20 liters of water to water a garden.
You use a 5-liter watering can to water the garden
to find how many times  we need to divide 20 liters by 5 liters we get 4 times
Hence 4 times do you fill the can

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
A muffin tray has 6 molds. Each mold holds 60 milliliters of batter. You make 184 milliliters of blueberry batter and 145 milliliters of banana batter. Do you have enough batter to fill the tray? Explain.
Answer: No

Explanation:
Given A muffin tray has 6 molds. Each mold holds 60 milliliters of batter
You make 184 milliliters of blueberry batter and 145 milliliters of banana batter.
add both 184 milliliters of blueberry batter and 145 milliliters of banana batter we get 329 milliliters
Now divide 329 milliliters with 60 milliliters we get 5.48 molds
So No, you dont have enough batter to fill the tray

Review & Refresh

Circle the value of the underlined digit.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 124
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-124

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 125
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-125

Lesson 12.7 Understand and Estimate Mass

Explore and Grow
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 126

Which object has more mass ?

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 127
Answer: scissor , and blue cubes

Reasoning
Examine a $ 1 and a $ 10 bill. What do you notice about the masses and the values?

Think and Grow: Understand Mass

Mass is the amount of matter in an object.
A gram (g) is the standard metric unit used to measure mass.
A kilogram (kg) is another metric unit used to measure mass.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 128
Example
Which units should you use to measure the mass, grams or kilograms? Explain
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 129
An apple has _less__ matter than a basketball bat.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 130
A watermelon has _less__ matter than a baseball bat.
Answer: less

Show and Grow

Which units should you use to measure the mass, or kilograms? Explain.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 131
Answer: Mass is in kilogram

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is a chair which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. and chair is easy to estimate in kilograms
hence chair use to measure the Mass is in kilogram units

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 132
Answer: grams

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is a crayon which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. easy to estimate in grams
hence crayon is small and  use to measure in  grams units

Apply and Grow: Practice

Which units should you use to measure the mass, or kilograms? Explain.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 133
Answer: Mass in kilograms

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is a boat which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. the boat heavy and  is easy to estimate in kilograms
hence boat to measure in kilograms units

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 134
Answer: Grams

Explanation:
A gram (g) is the standard metric unit used to measure the mass
easy to estimate in grams as it is small

Choose the better estimate.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 135
Answer: 300 g

Explanation:
As shown in the picture the book is small and it won’t be 300Kgs heavy as books are easy to carry
Hence estimation is 300 g

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 136
Answer: 27 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture Dog will not be 27 g less weight
so the estimated weight is 27 kg

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 137
Answer: 1 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture book will not be 8 g less weight
so the estimated weight is 1 kg

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 138
Answer: 15 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture Goggles  will not be heavier weight like 150g
so the estimated weight is 15 g

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says 50 grams is a greater unit of measurement than 50 kilograms because 50 liters is greater than 50 milliliters. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Answer: wrong/incorrect

Explanation:
as we know 1 Kilogram = 1000 grams
and 1 liter = 1000 milliliters
so your friend says 50 grams is greater than 50 kgs statement is incorrect
and  50 liters is greater than 50 milliliters is correct.
So the correct statement is 50 grams is lesser than 50 kgs

Question 10.
Reasoning
A bowling ball and a beach ball are the same size. Do the objects have about the same mass? Explain.
Answer: No

Explanation:
as we know that a Bowling ball weight is heavier than the beach ball as it filled with air inside
Hence objects don’t have the same mass

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Use the mass of the small bag of potatoes to estimate the mass of the large bag of potatoes.
Compare:
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 139

Show and Grow

Question 11.
Use the mass of the banana to estimate the mass of the bunch of bananas.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 140
Answer: 480 g

Explanation:
Given one banana weights 120 g
So the second image shows 4 bananas so multiply 120 by 4 we get 480 g

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Use the mass of the small egg carton to estimate the mass of the larger egg cartons.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 141
Answer:  580 g and 870 g

Explanation:

Given in the first image that 6 eggs  weights 290 grams so 1 egg weights 48.3 g
so to find 12 eggs weight in second image  multiply with 48.3 by 12 eggs we get 580 g
so to find 18 eggs weight in third image  multiply with 48.3 by 18 eggs we get 870 g

Understand and Estimate Mass Homework & Practice 12.7

Which units should you use to measure the mass, grams or kilograms ? Explain.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 142
Answer: Grams

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is groundnut which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. easy to estimate in grams
hence groundnut is small and uses to measure in  grams units

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 143
Answer: Kilograms

Explanation:
As we know that the given picture is a cot/ bed which is an object
so  Mass is the amount of matter in an object. easy to estimate in kilograms
hence cot/ bed is large and uses to measure in  kilograms units

Choose the better estimate

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 144
Answer: 30 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture cover pack will not be heavier weight like 30 kg
so the estimated weight is 30 g

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 145
Answer: 9 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture cycle will not be 9 g weight
so the estimated weight is 9 kg

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 146
Answer: 100 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture Scarf will not be heavier weight like 10 kg
so the estimated weight is 100 g

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 147
Answer: 2 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture oranges will not be heavier weight like 20 kg
so the estimated weight is 2 kg

Question 7.
Logic
Which objects have a mass greater than 1 kilogram?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 148
Answer: Computer, Desk, Microwave

Explanation:
Given objects
the pencil cherry and scissors will not have more than 1-kilogram mass
A computer is heavy so it will have more than 1-kilogram mass
The desk and microwave are also heavy so it will have more than 1-kilogram mass
So we get Computer, Desk, Microwave have a mass greater than 1 kilogram

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the mass of the kangaroo is greater than 25 grams. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 149
Answer: Yes, Correct

Explanation:
Given in the picture that kangaroo mass is 25 kg
Hence the kangaroo is greater than 25 grams
so the kangaroo is greater than 25 grams.
Yes, your friend correct

Question 9.
Number Sense
Order the masses from least to greatest.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 150
Answer: 6g, 1 kg, 3000g, 20 kg

Explanation:
As we know that Kilograms are greater than grams
as 1 kilogram is equal to 1000 Grams
so the Order of the masses from least to greatest is
6g, 1 kg, 3000g, 20 kg

Question 10.
Writing
Explain how grams and kilograms are related.
Answer:
In the metric system, “milli” means 1/1,000 and “kilo” means 1000.
This means that a milligram is 1/1000 of a gram, and a kilogram is 1000 grams.
So a kilogram is much heavier than a milligram
in fact, a kilogram is a million times as heavy as a milligram

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Use the mass of the lightbulb to estimate the mass of the box of lightbulbs.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 151
Answer: 148 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture that one bulb mass is 37 g
So to find 4 bulb mass multiply 37 g with 4
we get 148g
estimate the mass of the box of lightbulbs is 148 g

Review & Refresh

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 152
Answer: 3/4 is greater than 3/6

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 153
Answer: 3/4 is greater than 1/2

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 154
Answer: 6/8 is greater than 5/8

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 155
Answer: 3/3 is greater than 1/3

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 156
Answer: 2/4 equals to 4/8

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 157
Answer: 7/8 is greater than 5/6

Lesson 12.8 Measure Mass

Explore and Grow

Estimate the masses of four different objects. Then use a balance and weights to measure the actual mass of each object to the nearest gram or kilogram.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 158
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 159
Precision
How can you use your results to get a better estimate for a fifth object?
Answer:

Think and Grow:
Example
What is the mass of each object?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 160
The mass of the tub of clay is ___ grams.
Answer: 151 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture the weights are 100 g, 10g,10g,10g,10g,10g, and 1g
so add the weights we get 151 g

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 161
The mass of the candle is ___ kilogram ___ grams.
Answer: 1 kg 205 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture the weights are 1 Kg ,100 g,100g,5g
so add the weights we get 1 kg 205 grams
The mass of the candle is 1 kilogram 205 grams

Show and Grow

Write the total mass shown.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 162
Answer: 4 kg

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 4 1 kg weights
So the total mass is by adding 4 1 kg weights we get 4 kgs
the total mass is 4 kg

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 163
Answer: 327 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 100g, 100g, 100g, 10g, 10g, 5g, 1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 327 g
the total mass is 327 g

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 164
Answer: 842 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 500g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 10g, 10g,10g,10g, 1g, 1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 842 g
the total mass is 842 g

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 165
Answer: 2 kgs 595 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 500g, 10g, 10g, 10g, 10g, 10g,10g,10g, 10g, 10g,5g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 2 kgs 595 grams
the total mass is 2 kgs 595 grams

Apply and Grow: Practice

Write the total mass shown.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 166
Answer: 3 kg 702 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 1 kg, 500g, 100g, 100g, 1g, 1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 3 kg 702 grams
the total mass is 3 kg 702 grams

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 167
Answer: 2 kg 458 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 100g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 10g, 10g,10g,10g, 10g, 5g,1g, 1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 2 kg 458 grams
the total mass is 2 kg 458 grams

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 168
Answer:  5 kg 213 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 1kg, 1kg, 1kg, 100g, 100g, 10g,1g,1g, 1g,  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 5 kg 213 grams
the total mass is 5 kg 213 grams

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 169
Answer: 2 kg 836 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 10g, 10g, 10g, 500g, 5g, 10g,100g,100g, 100g, 1g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 2 kg 836 grams
the total mass is 2 kg 836 grams

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the stuffed animal has a mass that is less than 25 grams. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 170
Answer: No, Incorrect

Explanation:
Given weights 25g
As we observe the image the animal has more mass than the weights 25 grams
So Your friend says the stuffed animal has a mass that is less than 25 grams. Is incorrect

Question 10.
Choose Tools
Choose the best tool to measure each time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 171
The liquid volume of a bowl: ___
The length of a spoon: ___
The mass of an orange: ___
The number of minutes you jog: ___
Answer:
The liquid volume of a bowl:  C
The length of a spoon: B
The mass of an orange: A
The number of minutes you jog: D

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Third graders should eat 454 grams of vegetables each day. You eat the vegetables shown on the balance. How many more grams of vegetables should you eat today?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 172
Equation:
You should eat __ more grams of vegetables.
Answer: 232 grams

Explanation:
Given Third graders should eat 454 grams of vegetables each day
You eat the vegetables shown on the balance we get 226 grams
so to find How many more grams of vegetables should you eat today is 454 grams – 226 grams
we get 232 grams

Show and Grow

Question 11.
A tablet’s mass is 324 grams more than the cell phone’s mass. What is the mass of the tablet?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 173
Answer: 553 grams

Explanation:
Given A tablet’s mass is 324 grams more than the cell phone’s mass
as shown in the balance cell phone’s mass is 229 g by adding weights
so to find the mass of the tablet add both values 324 grams and 229 grams
we get 553 grams
Hence the mass of the tablet is 553 grams

Question 12.
The mass of a nickel is 5 grams. There are 40 nickels in a standard roll. What is the mass of a standard roll of nickels?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 174
Answer: 200 grams

Explanation:
Given The mass of a nickel is 5 grams
There are 40 nickels in a standard roll.
to find the mass of a standard roll of nickels multiply 5 grams with 40 nickels
we get 200 grams
hence 200 grams is the mass of a standard roll of nickels

Question 13.
Newton eats 6 kilograms of dog food each week. He buys a 24-kilogram bag of dog food. For how many weeks will Newton eat from the bag of dog food?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 175
Answer:  4 weeks

Explanation:
Given Newton eats 6 kilograms of dog food each week.
buys a 24-kilogram bag of dog food
now to find how many weeks will Newton eat from the bag of dog food
we need to divide 24 kilograms with 6 kilograms we get 4 weeks
Hence in 4 weeks, Newton eat from the bag of dog food

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
You make fruit smoothies using 369 grams of strawberries, 227 grams of raspberries, and 283 grams of blueberries. Do you use more than 1 kilogram of fruit? Explain.
Answer: No

Explanation:
Given You make fruit smoothies using 369 grams of strawberries,
227 grams of raspberries,
and 283 grams of blueberries
So by adding all the mass we get 879 grams
Hence 879 grams is less than 1 kilogram of fruit.

Measure Mass Homework & Practice 12.8

Write the total mass shown.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 176
Answer: 5 kg

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 5 1 kg weights
So the total mass is by adding 5 1 kg weights we get 5 kgs
the total mass is 5 kg

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 177
Answer:  923 grams
Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 500g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 10g,10g,1g,1g,1g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 923 grams
the total mass is 923 grams

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 178
Answer: 4 kg 732 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 1kg, 1kg, 500g, 100g, 100g, 10g,10g,10g, 1g,1g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 4 kg 732 grams
the total mass is 4 kg 732 grams

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 179
Answer: 1 kg 449 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 5g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 100g, 1g, 1g,1g,1g, 10g,10g,10g,10g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 1 kg 449 grams
the total mass is 1 kg 449 grams

Question 5.
Open-Ended
Choose two objects that have different masses. Draw the objects on the balance with one object on each side.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 180
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-170

Question 6.
Precision
Use each measurement once to complete the list.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 181
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-181

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
216 grams of strawberries count as a daily serving of fruit for children. You eat the berries shown. How many more grams of berries should you eat today?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 182
Answer: 54 grams

Explanation:
Given 216 grams of strawberries count as a daily serving of fruit for children.
You eat the berries shown. 162 grams
so subtract from actual 216 grams – 162 grams we get 54 grams
54 more grams of berries should you eat today

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A Japanese one-yen coin weighs 1 gram. Newton and Descartes each have 70 one-yen coins. What is the mass of all of their one-yen coins?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 183
Answer: 140 grams

Explanation:
Given A Japanese one-yen coin weighs 1 gram.
Newton and Descartes each have 70 one-yen coins. total of 140 coins combined
so by multiplying with 1 gram as per given data we get 140 grams
the mass of all of their one-yen coins is 140 grams.

Review & Refresh

What fraction of the whole is shaded?

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 154
Answer: \(\frac{1}{6}\) is shaded

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-154

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 185
Answer: \(\frac{1}{4}\) is shaded

Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-185

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Performance Task

Question 1.
You decide to keep track of the weather today
a. The rain begins 14 minutes before 1. The rain stops at 2:45. How many minutes does the rain last?
b. Write another way to say the time the rain stops.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 186
c. The rain starts again 48 minutes after it stopped the first time. Show the time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 187
Answer:
a. The rain begins 14 minutes before 1. The rain stops at 2:45. How many minutes does the rain last
Given The rain begins 14 minutes before 1 hence the time is 12:46
so to find how many minutes does the rain last is subtract from stop time 2:45 – 12:46 = 181 minutes

b. another way to say the time the rain stops is the rain started at 12:46 and ended at 2:45

c. The rain starts again 48 minutes after it stopped the first time. Show the time.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-187
stopes at 3:33

Question 2.
This morning, you set a beaker outside before it started to rain.
a. You check the beaker after the first time the rain stops. Write the amount.
b. You check the beaker after the last time the rain stops. The beaker has 200 more milliliters of water. What is the total amount of water in the beaker today?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 188
c. Did you collect more or less than half of a liter of water today? Explain.
Answer:
a. the beaker after the first time the rain stops.  the amount of water is 400 ml as shown in the picture
b. check the beaker after the last time the rain stops. The beaker has 200 more milliliters of water. What is the total amount of water in the beaker today is 400 ml + 200 ml = 600 ml
c. collect more than half of a liter of water today as 600 ml is greater than 500 ml

Question 3.
You color the model to show the number of days it rained last week. What fraction of the week did it not rain?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 189
Answer: 3/7

Explanation:
as per the given data in the image
in a week it rained 4 days
and 3 times it doesn’t rain
Hence the fraction is 3/7

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Activity

Roll to Cover: Elapsed Time

Directions:

  1. Take turns rolling a die. Find a problem on the board with the number you rolled.
  2. Find the elapsed time. Tell whether the time is greater than or less than a half hour.
  3. Cover the answer and the problem. The player with the most answers covered wins!

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 190
Answer:
1. Take turns rolling a die got 1
a problem on the board with the number you rolled is start time 7:04 A.M end  7:44 A.M
2. the elapsed time is 40 mins the time is greater than a half-hour.
3. Cover the answer and the problem. The player with the most answers covered wins.

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Chapter Practice

12.1 Time to the Nearest Minute

Write the time. Write two other ways to say the time.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 192
Answer:
1. 1:39
2. Count the minutes after the hour say 39 minutes after 1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 193
Answer:
1. 7:12
2. Count the minutes after the hour say 12 minutes after 7

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 194
Answer:
1. 10:24
2. Count the minutes after the hour say 24 minutes after 10

Write the time.

Question 4.
8 minutes after 9
Answer: 9:08

Question 5.
14 minutes before 5
Answer: 4:46

Question 6.
3 minutes before 1
Answer: 12:57

12.2 Measure Elapsed Time within the Hour

Question 7.
Find the elapsed time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 195

Answer: 0 minutes

Explanation:
By observing the given picture there is no time elapsed hence 0 minutes

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A model rocket takes 23 minutes to build. You start building the rocket at 11:36 A.M. At what time do you finish it?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 196
Answer: 11:59 A.M

Explanation:
Given A model rocket takes 23 minutes to build
You start building the rocket at 11:36 A.M.
Hence at 11:59 A.M you finished it

12.3 Measure Elapsed Time Across the Hour

Question 9.
Find the elapsed time.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 197
Answer: 0 minutes

Explanation:
By observing the given picture there is no time elapsed hence 0 minutes

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
Newton naps from 2:50 P.M. to 3:17 P.M. Descartes naps from 3:55 P.M. to 4:23 P.M. Who naps longer?
Answer: Both naps equally

Explanation:
Newton naps from 2:50 P.M. to 3:17 P.M. = 27 minutes
Descartes naps from 3:55 P.M. to 4:23 P.M. = 27 minutes
Both naps equally

12.4 Problem Solving: Time Interval Problems

Question 11.
You spend 24 more minutes creating a sculpture than you do painting it. You spend 18 minutes painting the sculpture. How much time do you spend creating the sculpture?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 198
Answer: 42 minutes.

Explanation:
Given You spend 24 more minutes creating a sculpture show than you do painting it
spend 18 minutes painting the sculpture
time do you spend creating the sculpture 24 minutes + 18 minutes = 42 minutes
time do you spend creating the sculpture is 42 minutes.

Question 12.
You spend 43 minutes on a puppet show. You spend 28 minutes writing the story and the rest performing the show. How many minutes do you spend performing the show?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 199
Answer: 15 minutes

Explanation:
Given You spend 43 minutes on a puppet show as shown in piture
You spend 28 minutes writing the story
the rest performing the show so we get 43 minutes- 28 minutes = 15 minutes
spent performing the show is 15 minutes

12.5 Understand and Estimate Liquid Volume

Choose the better estimate.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 200
Answer: 3 L

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the paint can will be more than 3 mL so the better estimate is 3L

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 201
Answer: 55 mL

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the Sprinkler cannot hold 55L so the better estimate is 55 mL

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 202
Answer: 1 L

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the Tea can can hold 1 L so the better estimate is 1 L

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 203
Answer: 4 L

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the Plastic can  cannot hold 40 L so the better estimate is 4 L

12.6 Measure Liquid Volume

Write the total liquid volume shown

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 204
Answer: 200 mL

Explanation:
observing the picture we can estimate that the volume is 200 mL as its indicated 0n the beaker

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 205
Answer: 1 liter 100 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture in 2 beakers the volume is 1 liter and 100 mL
Hence 1 liter and 100 mL

Question 19.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 206
Answer: 2 liter 400 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 1st and 2nd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the third beaker is near  the 400 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 400 mL

Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 207
Answer: 1 liter 700 mL

Explanation:
By observing the picture in 2 beakers the volume is 1 liter and 700 mL
Hence 1 liter and 700 mL

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 208
Answer: 2 liter 600 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 2nd and 3rd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the 1st beaker is near  the 600 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 600 mL

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 209
Answer:  2 liter 800 mL

Explanation:
By observing the beakers we know that both 1st and 3rd  beakers is 1 L with measuring volumes on it
the 2nd beaker is near  the 800 mL mark
hence the estimated volume is 2 Liters and 800 mL

12.7 Understand and Estimate Mass

Choose the better estimate.

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 210
Answer: 50 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture the watch will not be heavier weight like 50 kg
so the estimated weight is 50 g

Question 24.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 211
Answer: 6 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture Pumpkin will not be 6 g less weight
so the estimated weight is 6 kg

Question 25.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 212
Answer: 285 g

Explanation:
as shown in the picture the rat will not be heavier weight like 28 kg
so the estimated weight is 285 g

Question 26.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 213
Answer: 3 kg

Explanation:
as shown in the picture the brick will not be heavier weight like 30 kg
so the estimated weight is 3kg

12.8 Measure Mass

Write the total mass shown.

Question 27.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 214
Answer: 3 kg

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 3 1 kg weights
So the total mass is by adding 3 1 kg weights we get 3 kgs
the total mass is 3 kg

Question 28.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 215
Answer: 734 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 500g, 100g, 100g, 10g, 10g,10g,1g, 1g, 1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 734g
the total mass is 734g

Question 29.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 216
Answer: 2 kg 622 g

Explanation:
Given in the picture there is 1 kg, 1 kg, 500g, 100g, 10g, 10g,1g,1g weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get 2 kg 622 g
the total mass is 2 kg 622 g

Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 217
Answer: 1 kg 819 grams

Explanation:
Given in the picture there are 1 kg, 500g, 100g, 100g, 100g,10g,5g, 1g,1g,1g,1g  weights
So the total mass is by adding all weights we get1 kg 819 grams
the total mass is1 kg 819 grams

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Cumulative Practice

Question 1.
Which array matches the equation 3 × 4?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 218
Answer: c

Explanation:

By observing the picture the option C has 3 rows and 4 columns
hence the array matches the equation 3 × 4 is option C

Question 2.
Which fractions name the point plotted on the number line?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 219
Answer: 4/8

Explanation:
As shown in the figure, the point plotted on the number line
the mark is plotted at 4 and the total markings are 8
hence the fraction is 4/8

Question 3.
What time does the clock show?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 500
Answer: Option B 5:47

Explanation:
Count the minutes After the hour. Say,“47 minutes after 5.”
The time is 5:47

Question 4.
A package of batteries has 5 rows of 6 batteries. You use not 8 batteries. How many batteries are used?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 221
Answer: Option B 22

Explanation:
Given A package of batteries has 5 rows of 6 batteries. that is 30 batteries
You use not 8 batteries
To find batteries are used that is 30 – 8 we get 22 batteries

Question 5.
Which statement is true?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 222
Answer:  Option C
The option C statement is true

Question 6.
The mass of a horse is 582 kilograms. The mass of a pig is 355 kilograms less than the mass of the horse. What is the mass of the pig?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 223
Answer: 227 kilograms

Explanation:
Given The mass of a horse is 582 kilograms.
The mass of a pig is 355 kilograms less than the mass of the horse. that is 582 kg- 355 kg we get 227 kgs
Hence the mass of the pig is 227 kilograms

Question 7.
Which number makes the equation true?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 224
Answer:  Option A

Explanation:
As shown 6 /    = 1
so 6 / 6 = 1
hence the true equation is 6/6 and the empty value is 6

Question 8.
A parade starts at the time shown on the clock. It ends at 1:18 P.M. How long is the parade?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 225
Answer: 38 minutes

Explanation:

As shown in the clock parade start at 12:20 P.M
and it ends at 1:18 P.M.
hence the difference is 38 minutes
38 minutes long is the parade

Question 9.
Which fraction is not equivalent to the number 2?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 226
Answer: Option C

Explanation:
as option C 6/3 is not dividable on both side with 2 unlike other options

Question 10.
Which models show \(\frac{1}{6}\) shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 227
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-3-Chapter-12-Understand-Time-Liquid-Volume-and-Mass-227

after observing the model figure the tick parked in the image shows \(\frac{1}{6}\)

Question 11.
Which set of fractions is in order from least to greatest?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 228
Answer: Options A and C

Explanation:
By dividing the given options and arranging them in the lowest we will get the answers which are in the least to greatest

Question 12.
A customer buys a game console that costs $229 and 3 video games that cost $60 each. How much money does the customer spend?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 229
Part A
Write an equation to represent the problem. Use a letter to represent the unknown number.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 230
Part B
Solve the problem. Explain how you solved it.
Part C
Check whether your answer is reasonable. Explain.
Answer: $ 409

Explanation:
Given A customer buys a game console that costs $229
3 video games that cost $60 each. that is 3×$60 = $180
To find How much money does the customer spend is $229 + $ 180 we get $ 409

Question 13.
Which equation does show the Distributive Property?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 231
Answer: Option A

Explanation:
As we know that For all real numbers a, b, and c, a(b+c)=ab+ac. What this means is that when a number multiplies an expression inside parentheses, you can distribute the multiplication to each term of the expression individually
so while observing options in the picture the option A  9×(10+10) = (9 × 10) + ( 9 × 10)  has the distributive property.

Question 14.
A photographer has 478 photos of people and 326 photos of nature. About how many photos does the photographer have in all?
A. 700
B. 200
C. 800
D. 900
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 232
Answer: Option C

Explanation:
A photographer has 478 photos of people
326 photos of nature
To find how many photos does the photographer have in all add both given
we get 478+326 = 804
Hence the nearest option is C which is 800

Question 15.
Which liquid volumes should be measured in liters?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 233
Answer: all can be measured in liters

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 234
Answer: all the fraction shows

Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass Steam Performance Task 1-12

Question 1.
Newton and Descartes are warming up for a baseball game.
a. Which units should be used to measure grams the mass of the baseball bat, grams or kilograms? Explain.
b. Which units should be used to measure the liquid volume of the team water jug, milliliters or liter? Explain.
c. Who practices baseball longer, Newton or Descartes? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 235
Answer:
a. in kilogram units should be used to measure grams the mass of the baseball bat, as the mass of the bat  is easy to calculate in kilograms compared to grams
b. Liter units should be used to measure the liquid volume of the team water jug, as the volume of the jug s easy to calculate in liters compared to milliliters
c. No data was given about who practices longer

Question 2.
Your doctor recommends that you exercise about an hour each day, get plenty of sleep, and drink about 1,500 milliliters of water daily.
a. What are some ways you like to exercise?
b. You drink 3 cups of water. Each cup holds 300 milliliters. Did you drink enough water to meet your doctor’s recommendation?
Answer:
a. by doing jogging, cycling and stretching are some ways you like to exercise
b. No, 3 cups of water each cup holds 300 milliliters that are 3 multiply with 300 mL we get 900 milliliters
Hence the target 1500 milliliters didn’t complete

Question 3.
Your heart rate is the number of times your heart beats in 1 minute. Your heart rate is lower when you are at rest and higher when you are active. One way doctors measure your health is by finding your resting heart rate.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 236
a. You count the number of times your heart beats in 6 seconds. How can you use this number to find the number of times your heart beats in 1 minute?
b.Your heart beats 8 times in 6 seconds while you are at rest. What is your resting heart rate?
c. After playing outside, your heart beats 13 times in 6 seconds. How much greater, in beats per minute, is your heart rate now than when you were at rest?
d. Your friend says that another way to find the number of beats per minute is to multiply the number of times your heart beats in 10 seconds by 6. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 237
Answer:
a.  by checking we get 8 times our heartbeats in 6 seconds.
so to find the number of times our heart beats in 1 minute
as we know that 1 minute is equal to 60 seconds
so for 6 seconds our heart beat 8 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 80 times
b.  our heart beats 8 times in 6 seconds while you are at rest.
so to find the number of times our heart beats in 1 minute
as we know that 1 minute is equal to 60 seconds
so for 6 seconds our heart beat 8 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 80 times our heart beats at rest
c. Given
After playing outside, your heart beats 13 times in 6 seconds.
as we know that at rest our heart beats 80 times in one minute
so for 6 seconds, our heart beat 13 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 130 times our heart beats
50 times greater, in beats per minute, is your heart rate now than when you were at rest
d. yes, a friend says that another way to find the number of beats per minute is to multiply the number of times your heart beats in 10 seconds by 6. Is correct
if our heart beats 8 times in 6 seconds while you are at rest.
so to find the number of times our heart beats in 1 minute
as we know that 1 minute is equal to 60 seconds
so for 6 seconds, our heart beat 8 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 80 times our heart beats at rest

Question 4.
You can use your pulse to find your heart rate.
a. How many times does your heart beat in 6 seconds? Use this number to find your resting heart rate.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass 238
b. Count the number of times your heart beats in one minute. How does this number compare to your answer above? Explain.
Answer:
a. 8 times our heart beat in 6 seconds
so to find the number of times our heart beats in 1 minute
as we know that 1 minute is equal to 60 seconds
so for 6 seconds, our heart beat 8 times so 8 multiply by 10 we get 80 times our heart beats
b. By Count the number of times our heart beats in one minute is 80 times.
when we compare the above answer and our heart rate is the same
as were checking at the resting rate in both situations.

Conclusion:

I hope that the information provided here regarding Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 12 Understand Time, Liquid Volume, and Mass is helpful for you to learn the subject. If you have any doubts or queries you can post them at the comment section. Bookmark our site to get the latest edition of solutions for all remaining Big Ideas Grade 3 Answers.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6

Make your learning fun and interesting with the help of Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication Answer Key. Here students can find the solutions for all the questions in pdf format. So, students who are searching for the Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 6th Chapter Relate Area to Multiplication Solutions can download the pdf for free of cost.

Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication

Students must have a look at the topics of Relate Area to Multiplication chapter before going to start their preparation. The various lessons included in BIM Book Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication are Understand Area, Measure Area Using Standard Units, Find Area by Multiplying, Area and the Distributive Property, and Find Areas of More Shapes.

By solving the questions of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication, you can know how to use the formula for suitable problems. Hence make use of the below links and learn the fundaments from the elementary level itself.

Lesson: 1 Understand Area

Lesson: 2 Measure Area Using Standard Units

Lesson: 3 Find Area by Multiplying

Lesson: 4 Area and the Distributive Property

Lesson: 5 Find Areas of More Shapes

Performance Task

Lesson 6.1 Understand Area

Explore and Grow

Try to cover the rectangle with the given number of color tiles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 1
How many color tiles do you need to completely cover the rectangle with no gaps or overlaps?
____ color tiles
Answer:
6 + 10 + 8 = 24 tiles are needed to cover the rectangle

Precision
Why is it important to line up the tiles side to side?
Think and Grow: Counting to Find Area

Answer:
It is important to line up tiles side to side with out gaps so that we can count tiles to find area of the shape.
Area is the amount of surface a shape covers. The area of a unit square is 1 square unit.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 2
12 unit squares cover the rectangle with no gaps or overlaps. So, the area of the rectangle is 12 square units.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 3

Example
Find the area of the rectangle. Count the unit squares needed to cover the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 4.1
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 4
___ unit squares cover the rectangle.
So, the area is ___ square units.

Answer:
18 unit squares cover the rectangle.
So, the area is 18 square units.

Explanation:
There are 3 rows with 6 color tiles each in the grid
6+6+6=18.
18 unit squares cover the rectangle.
So, The area is 18 square units.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the area of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 5
___ unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is ___ square units.
Answer:
16 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 16 square units.

Explanation:
There are 4 color tiles in row and there are 4 such rows of color tiles in the shape.
So, 4+4+4+4=16
Therefore 16 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 16 square units.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 6
___ unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is ___ square units.

Answer:
10 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 10 square units.

Explanation:
There are 5 color tiles in a row and there are 2 such rows in the shape.
So, 5×2=10
Therefore
10 unit squares cover the shape.
So, The area is 10 unit squares.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area of the shape.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 7
___ unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is ___ square units.

Answer:
16 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 16 square units.

Explanation:
So, There are 8 color tiles in a row and there are 2 such rows in the shape.
8×2=16
Therefore 16 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 16 unit squares.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 8
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area =10 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 10 color boxes.
So, the area of the given shape is 10 square units.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 9
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 11 square units.

Explanation:

In the above grid there are 11 color boxes
so, the area of the shape is 11 square units.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 10
Area = ___ square units.
Answer:
Area =18 square units.

Explanation:
There are 2 color boxes in first row and there are 4 color boxes in the following 4 rows.
So, 2+4+4+4+4=18
Therefore the area of the shape is 18 square units.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 11
Area = square units.
Answer:
Area = 10 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 2 color boxes in the first row ,last row and 3 color boxes each in middle two rows.
So,2+3+3+2=10
Therefore the area of the shape is 10 square units.

Question 8.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 12
Newton uses 4 color tiles to cover the rectangle. He says the area is 4 square units. Is he correct? Explain.
Answer:
No, Newton is not correct. To find the area of the shape using tiles they must be arranged side by side without any gaps or overlaps. In the above picture there are gaps between the color tiles.

Question 9.
Open-Ended
Draw a shape that has an area of 16 square units
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 13
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Part of a zoo map is shown. What is the area of the lion exhibit?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 14
The lion exhibit is ___ square units.

Answer:
The lion exhibit is  50 square units.

Explanation:
In the above zoo map the area of lion exhibit is represented using yellow colored tiles.
There are 10 yellow colored tiles in a row and there are 5 such rows of yellow color tiles.
So,10×5=50
Therefore the area of the lion exhibit in the zoo is 50 square units.

Show and Grow

Use the field day map to answer the question.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 15

Question 10.
What is the area of the relay race section?

Answer:
Area of Relay Race section is 23 square units.

Explanation:
In the above field day map Relay Race section is represented using blue colored tiles.
There are 3 tiles in first row and 10 tiles in the following two rows.
So,3+10+10=23
Therefore the area of the Relay Race section is 23 square units.

Question 11.
Which area is greater, the ring toss section or the relay race section? Explain.

Answer:
The ring toss section is greater than relay race section.

Explanation:
The area of ring toss section is 30 square units and the area of the relay race section is 23 square units.so the ring toss section is greater than relay race section.

Understand Area Homework & practice 6.1

Find the area of the shape.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 16
___ unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is ___ square units.

Answer:
18 unit squares cover the shape.
So, the area is 18 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there is 1 blue color tile in first row followed by 3 tiles in the next,5 tiles in the later and 9 tiles at the end.
So,1+3+5+9=18
18 color tiles cover the area.
Therefore the area of the given shape is 18 square units.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 17
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 20 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 4 red colored tiles in a row and there are 5 such rows.
So,4×5=20
20 tiles cover the shape.
Therefore the area of the given shape is 20 square units.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 18
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 17 square units.

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 17 purple colored tiles.
Therefore the area of the given shape is 17 square units.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 19
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 14 square units.

Explanation:
There are 6 yellow colored tiles in 2 rows each followed  by 2 more tiles in the third row.
So,6+6+2=14
14 tiles cover the shape.
Therefore the area of the shape is 14 square units.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 20
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 11 square units.

Explanation:
There are 3 green colored boxes in the first and third row of the above shape and 5 boxes in the middle row.
So,3+5+3=11
11 color tiles cover the shape.
Therefore the area of the shape is 11 square units.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 21
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area =12 square units.

Explanation:
There are 6 color tiles each in two rows.
So,6+6=12
12 color tiles cover the shape
Therefore the area of the shape is 12 square units.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 22
Area = ___ square units.

Answer:
Area = 20 square units.

Explanation:
There are 20 color tiles in the above grid.
So, the area of the shape is 20 square units.

Question 8.
Your friend says each shape has an area of 8 square units. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 23

Answer:
My friend is incorrect.

Explanation:
One of the shape in in the above grid has gaps.

Modeling Real Life
Use the amusement park map to answer the question.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 24
Answer:

Question 9.
What is the area of the food court section?

Answer:
The area of the food court is 51 square units.

Explanation:
There are 9 green tiles in first 2 rows each and 11 green tiles in the following 3 rows.
So,9+9+11+11+11=51
51 green tiles cover the food court area
Therefore the area of the food court is 51 square units.

Question 10.
Which area is greater, the kiddie land section or the picnic tables section? Explain.

Answer:
Area of kiddie land section is greater than area of picnic tables.

Explanation:
The kiddie land section is covered with 39 color tiles and the picnic tables section is covered with 35 color tiles.

Review & Refresh

Find the quotient.
Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 25
Answer:6
Explanation:(2×6=12)

Question 12
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 26
Answer:4
Explanation:(7×4=28)

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 27
Answer:9
Explanation:(6×9=54)

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 28
Answer:7
Explanation:(7×7=49)

Lesson 6.2 Measure Area Using Standard Units

Explore and Grow

Use the colored squares.
How many blue squares do you think it will take to cover the rectangle?
___ blue squares
How many red squares do you think it will take to cover the rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 29
Answer:

Find the area of the rectangle using the blue squares.
Area = ___ blue square units
Find the area of the rectangle using the red squares.
Area = ___ red square units
Answer:

Reasoning
Why is the number of blue squares needed to cover the rectangle different from the number of red squares needed?

Answer:
The number of blue squares needed to cover the rectangle is different from the number of red squares as sizes of the squares are different.

Think and Grow: Measuring Area Using Standard Units

You can measure area using different standard units. Here are some standard units of length and area.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.1 31
Unit squares can represent different standard units.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 32
Each side is 1 unit. The area is 1 square unit.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 33
Each Side represents 1 inch. The area is 1 square inch.

Example
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 34
Find the area of the rectangle
___ unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents
___________________
So, the area is _____

Answer:
In the above grid there are 3 yellow colored tiles in a row and there are 4 such rows.
So,3×4=12
12 unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square meter.
So, the area is 12 square meters.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 35.1
Find the area of the shape.
___ unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents
________
So, the area is ____

Answer:
In the above grid there are 7 color tiles.
7 unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square foot.
So, the area is 7 square feet.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area of the shape.
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 35
Area = ____
Answer:

There are 14 color tiles in the above grid.
14 unit squares cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square foot.
So, the area is 14 square feet.

 

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 36
Area = ___

Answer:
There are 16 color tiles in the above grid.
16 unit squares cover the area.
Each unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
So, the area is 16 square centimeters.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 37
Area = ____

Answer:
There are 18 color tiles in the grid
18 square units cover the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square inch.
So, the area is 18 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 38
Area = ___

Answer:
There are 8 color boxes in the above grid.
8 unit squares cover the shape.
Each unit square represents 1 square meter.
So, the area is 8 square meters.

Question 6.
Number Sense
Which rectangle has an area of 12 square inches?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 39

Answer:
In the above grid  the green rectangle has 12 colored tiles, Yellow rectangle has 15 colored tiles and the orange rectangle also has 12 colored tiles but the unit square representation of orange rectangle is square meter. As green rectangle unit square representation is square inch, Green colored rectangle has the area of 12 square inches.

Question 7.
Reasoning
Is the area of a blanket more likely to be 30 square feet or 30 square centimeters? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 40
Answer:
Centimeter is the smaller when compared to feet. usually we have blankets in bigger size so that a person fits in to it.
Therefore the area of the blanket will more likely be 30 square feet.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Whose puzzle has a greater area?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 41

Answer:
Newton’s puzzle is covered with 48 tiles and Descartes puzzle is covered with 40 tiles.
Area of Newton’s puzzle is 48 square inches and area of  Descartes’s puzzle is 40 square inches.
48>40.
Therefore Newton’s puzzle has the greater area.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Compare the area of Newton’s puzzle shown above to the area of your friend’s puzzle. Whose puzzle has a greater area?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 42

Answer:
In the above given puzzle there are 49 colored tiles .
The area of my friend’s puzzle is 49 square inches.
The area of Newton’s puzzle is 48 square inches.
48<49
Therefore Area of my friend’s puzzle is greater.

Question 9.
You want to weave a rectangular rug that has an area of 12 square feet. Draw and shade a rectangle to represent the rug.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 43

Answer:

Measure Area Using Standard Units  Homework & Practice 6.2

Find the area of the shape.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 44

Answer:
Area = 8 square centimeters

Explanation:
There are 8 colored unit squares in the rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
So, area is 8 square centimeters.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 45
Area = ___

Answer:
Area = 15 square meters

Explanation:
There are 15 colored unit squares in the above rectangle.
Each unit square represents 1 square meter.
So, area is 15 square meters.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 46
Area = ___

Answer:
Area = 16 square feet

Explanation:
There are 16 color unit squares in the above grid.
Each unit square represents 1 square foot.
So, area of the shape is 16 square feet.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 47
Area = ___

Answer:
Area = 20 square centimeters

Explanation:
There are 20 colored unit squares in above grid.
Each unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
So, area of the shape is 20 square centimeters.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 48
Area = ___

Answer:
Area = 10 square inches

Explanation:
There are 10 colored unit squares in the above grid.
Each unit square represents 1 square inch.
So, area of the shape is 10 square inches.

Question 6.
Precision
Your friend says the area of the shape is 13. What is wrong with her answer?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 49

Answer:
My friend’s answer wrong as he/she didn’t mention the units of the area.
There are 13 color unit squares in the above grid.
Each unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
Therefore area is 13 square centimeters.

Question 7.
Number Sense
Find the area of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 50

Answer:
Area = 32 square feet

Explanation:
In the above grid there are 32 color unit squares.
Each unit square represents 1 square foot.
Therefore area of the given shape is 32 square feet.

 

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
Compare the areas of your bookmark and your friend’s bookmark. Whose bookmark has a greater area?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 51

Answer:
My book mark has 12 colored unit squares and my friend’s book mark has 5 colored unit squares.
So area of my book mark is 12 square inches and my friend’s book mark is 5 square inches.
12>5
So, area of my book mark is greater.

Review & Refresh

Question 9.
Find the product of 4 × 5.
Number of jumps: ___
Size of jumps: ___
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 52
4 × 5 = ___

Answer:
Number of jumps =4
Size of jumps=5
4×5=20.

Lesson 6.3 Find Area by Multiplying

Explore and Grow

Write an equation for the array.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 1

Answer: 2×3=6

Cover the rectangle with color tiles. Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 2
Answer:

Structure
How can you use an array to find the area of rectangle?

Answer:
We can count the number of unit squares in a row and number of unit squares in a column and note them in the form of an array.
The answer of the equation will be the area of the rectangle.

Think and Grow: Find Area by Multiplying

Example
Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 3
One Way:
Count the unit squares to find the area.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 4
There are ___ unit squares

Another Way:
Think of the rectangle as an array.
Then use repeated addition or multiplication to find the area.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 5
3 rows of ____ unit squares
7 + 7 + 7 = ____
3 × 7 = _____
So, the area is _____.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 6

Answer:
There are 5 rows of 2 unit squares in each row.
So, 5 rows of 2 unit squares
2+2+2+2+2=10
Area=10 unit squares

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 7

Answer:
6ft×4ft=24ft
Area =24 square feet.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area of the rectangle
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 8
____ × _____ = ____
Area = _____

Answer:
There are 4 rows of 1 unit square in each row.so,
4×1=4
Area=4 square centimeter.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 9
____ × _____ = ____
Area = _____

Answer:
There are 5 rows with 3 unit squares in each roe.so,
5×3=15
Area =15 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 10
___ × ____ = ____
Area = _____

Answer:
7ft×6ft=42ft
Area=42 square feet

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 11
____ × _____ = ____
Area = ______

Answer:
8m×4m=32m
Area=32 square meters.

Question 7.
Open-Ended
Draw and label two different rectangles that each have an area of 12 square meters.

Answer:

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Explain how to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 12

Answer:
We can find area of the given rectangle by counting the number of square units in a row and in a column and multiplication of both is the area of the rectangle.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Space Poster Your rectangular animal poster is 4 feet long and 1 foot wide. Which poster has a greater area, your animal poster or your space poster?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 13
Understand the problem:
Make a plan:

Solve:
Area of my  animal poster is
4ft×1ft=4 square feet.
Area of my space poster is
3ft×2ft=6 square feet.
4<6
So, my space poster has a greater area.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
Descartes’s rectangular tablet is 10 inches long and 7 inches wide. Whose tablet has a greater area, Newton’s tablet or Descartes’s?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 14

Answer:
Area of Newton’s table is
9in.×6in.=54 square inches.
Area of Descartes’s table is
10in.×7in.=70 square inches.
54<70
Therefore Descartes’s table has greater area.

Question 10.
Your friend paints a rectangular tile that is 8 inches long and 4 inches wide. You paint a square tile that is 6 inches long. Whose tile has a greater area?

Answer:
Area of rectangular tile is
8in.×4in.=32 square inches.
Area of square tile is
6in.×6in.=36 square inches.
32<36
So, square tile has greater area.

 

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
A sign has an area of 18 square feet. The sign is 6 feet long. How wide is the sign?

Answer:
There is a sign with an area of 18 square feet and length of 6 feet.
We have to find width of sign
Area=length ×width
18=6×width Or 6×width=18
Calculate and check 6 table 6×1=6,6×2=12,6×3=18
Therefore width of the sign is 3 feet.

 

Find Area by Multiplying Homework & Practice 6.3

Find the area of the rectangle
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 15
____ × ____ = ____
Area = _____

Answer:
There are 4 rows with 4 unit squares in each row.
4×4=16
Area =16 square feet.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 16
____ × _____ = _____
Area = _____

Answer:
There are 3 rows with 8 unit squares in each row.
3×8=24
Area=24 square centimeters.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 17
____ × _____ = _____
Area = _____

Answer:
6 in.×2 in.=12
Area=12 square inches.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 18
____ × _____ = _____
Area = _____

Answer:
7 m×4 m=28
Area=28 square meters.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing side length.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 19

Answer:
Given Area of rectangle =30 square centimeters
Length =10 square meters
We have to find the length of the other side called breadth or width
Area= length ×width
30=10×width or 10×width=30
Count 10 table10×1=10,10×2=20,10×3=30
Therefore width or the length of the other side is 3 square meters.

Question 6.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says he only needs the length of one side of a square to find the area. Is he correct? Explain.

Answer:
Yes he is correct. A square has sides with equal lengths on all sides.so length of one side is sufficient to measure the area of a square.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
A picture of your friend is 6 inches long and 4 inches wide. Which picture has a greater area, the picture of your friend or the picture of your pets?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 20

Answer:
Area of my friend’s picture is
6 in.×4 in.=24 square inches.
Area of my pets picture is
7 in.×5 in.=35 square inches.
24<35
Therefore pets picture has greater area.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
A city street parking spot has an area of 72 square feet. The parking spot is 9 feet long. How wide is the parking spot?

Answer:
The city street parking spot has an area of 72 square feet. The length of the parking spot is 9 feet
We have to find the width of the parking spot.
Area =length × breadth
72=9×width or 9×width=72
So 9×1=9,9×2=18,———9×8=72
Therefore Width of the parking spot is 8 feet.

Review & Refresh

Use the Distributive Property to fill in the blanks
Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 21

Answer:
9×3= 9×(2+1)
= (9×2)+(9×1)
= 18+9
= 27

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.3 22

Answer:
6×7 = (5+1)×7
= (5×7)+(1×7)
= 35+7
= 42

Lesson 6.4 Area and the Distributive Property

Explore and Grow

Find the area of the rectangle two different ways.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 1

Structure
How does the area of the large rectangle compare to the areas of the smaller rectangles? What property does this show?

Answer:
The area of larger rectangle is divided in two smaller rectangles so the sum of the areas of smaller rectangles will be equal to area of larger rectangle.

Think and Grow: Area and the Distributive Property

You can use the Distributive Property to find the area of a rectangle. First, break apart the large rectangle into smaller rectangles. Then find the sum of the areas of the smaller rectangles.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 2

Example
Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 3
So, the area is _____.

Show and Grow

The area  of  large rectangle=sum of area of smaller rectangles
In the above grid there are 6 rows and 9 columns in the larger rectangle and this rectangle is divided into two smaller rectangles with 5 and 4 columns each.

Therefore
6×9=6×(5+4)
6×9=(6×5)+(6×4)
6×9=30+24
6×9=54
So, the area is 54 square inches.

Question 1.
Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 4

Answer:
In the above rectangle there are 4 rows and 5 columns. This is divided  into smaller rectangles with 3 and 2 columns each.
Therefore
4×5=4×(3+2)
4×5=(4×3)+(4×2)
4×5=12+8
4×5=20
Area=20 square centimeters.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 5

Answer:
There are 6 columns in the above large rectangle so the columns of  smaller rectangles are 4 and
2 columns each.
Therefore
7×6=7×(4+2)
7×6=(7×4)+(7×2)
7×6=28+14
7×6=42
Area=42 square meters.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 6

Answer:
Here we divide the rectangle using rows.
There are 3 rows in the above rectangle. so, the rows of the smaller rectangles are 2 and 1 each.
3×4=(2+1)×4
3×4=(2×4)+(1×4)
3×4=8+4
3×4=12
Area=12 square feet

Question 4.
Structure
Which equation represents the area of the rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 7
5 × 7 = 5 × (6 + 1) = (5 × 6) + (5 × 1)
5 × 8 = 5 × (6 + 2) = (5 × 6) + (5 × 2)
5 × 7 = 5 × (2 + 5) = (5 × 2) + (5 × 5)

Answer:
Form the above grid we can understand that the large rectangle has 7 columns is divided into two smaller rectangles with 2 and 5 columns each. Therefore the 3rd equation represents the area of the rectangle.

Question 5.
DIG DEEPER!Explain how to use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 8

Explanation:
To find the area of the rectangle using distributive property we have to divide the length of the rectangle into two and make two small rectangles.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Descartes cuts 1 rectangular piece of construction paper into2 rectangles. One rectangle is 8 inches wide and 10 inches long. The other rectangle is 8 inches wide and2 inches long. What were the dimensions and total area of the paper before it was cut?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 9
Draw a picture:
Multiplication equation:
Distributive Property:

The piece of paper was _____ inches wide and ____ inches long before it was cut.
The total area of the piece of paper was _____ square inches.

Show and Grow

Question 6.
You cut 1 rectangular piece of fabric into 2 rectangles. One rectangle is 3 feet wide and 6 feet long. The other rectangle is3 feet wide and 9 feet long. What were the dimensions and total area of the fabric before it was cut?
Answer:

The piece of paper was 3 feet wide and 15 long before it was cut.
The total area of the piece of paper was 45 square feets.

Area of rectangle 1: 3×6=18 square feet
Area of rectangle 2: 3×9=27 square feet.
Area of paper is area of rectangle 1+2=18+27=45 square feet

Area and the Distributive Property Homework & Practice 6.4

Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 10

Answer:
In the above large rectangle there are 9 rows so, using Distributive Property we will find the area of large rectangle by dividing it  into two smaller rectangles of 5 and 4 rows each.
9×4=(5+4)×4
9×4=(5×4)+(4×4)
9×4=20+16
9×4=36
Therefore Area=36 square feet.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 11

Answer:
In the above large rectangle there are 5 columns so, using Distributive Property we will find the area of the large rectangle by dividing it into two smaller rectangles of 3 and 2 columns each.
6×5=6×(3+2)
6×5=(6×3)+(6×2)
6×5=18+12
6×5=30
Area=30 square centimeters.

Structure
Draw rectangle for the expression
Question 3.
6 × (4 + 5)
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 12
Answer:

6x(4+5)= (6×4)+(6×5)
=24+30
=54.

 

Question 4.
(7 + 1) × 3
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 13
Answer:

 

(7+1)x3=(7×3)+(1×3)
= 21+3
=24

Question 5.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which is not a way to break apart the rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 14
5 × (4 + 4)
5 × (4 + 1)
(4 + 1) × 8
(2 + 3) × 8

Answer:
5×(4+1) is not a way to break apart the given rectangle as the columns given in the rectangle are 8 and the equation shows only 5 columns.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You cut a rectangular piece of wrapping paper into2 rectangles. One rectangle is 10 inches wide and 6 inches long. The other rectangle is 10 inches wide and 5 inches long. What werethe dimensions and the total area of the wrapping paper before it was cut?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.4 15

Answer:
As we know that the area of the larger rectangle is the sum of the areas of the smaller rectangles. So the areas of 2 rectangles are
Rectangle 1: 10 in. ×6 in.=60 square inches.
Rectangle 2: 10 in. ×5 in.=50 square inches.
Therefore Total Area=110(60+50) square inches.

Review & Refresh

Write the fact family for the numbers.
Question 7.
3, 8, 24
___ × ____ = _____
___ × ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____

Answer:
Fact family of the numbers  3,8,24 is given below.
3×8=24
8×3=42
24÷3=8
24÷8=3

Question 8.
4, 9, 36
___ × ____ = _____
___ × ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____

Answer:
Fact family of the numbers 4,9,36 is given below.
4×9=36
9×4=36
36÷4=9
36÷9=4

Question 8.
2, 7, 14
___ × ____ = _____
___ × ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____
___ ÷ ____ = _____

Answer:
Fact family of the numbers 2,7,14 is given below.
2×7=14
7×2=14
14÷2=7
14÷7=2

Lesson 6.5 Find Areas of More Shapes

Explore and Grow

Break apart the shape into two rectangles. Color each rectangle a different color. Find the area of each rectangle. Then find the total area of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 1
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle 1: _____ × ____ = _____ square inches
Rectangle 2: _____ × ____ = ______ square inches
Total Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square inches

Answer:
We have broken the shape into two rectangles
Rectangle 1:3×10=30 square inches
Rectangle 2: 5×7  =35 square inches
Total Area of Shape: 30+35=75 square inches.

Reasoning
Break apart the shape into two different rectangles and find the total area. What do you notice? Why is this true?

Answer:
When we broke apart the shape into two rectangles we noticed that the counting of rows and columns or units squares became possible. yes it is right to break the shape to find the area.

Think and Grow: Find Areas of More Shapes

Example
Find the area of the shape
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 2

One Way:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 3
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle A: 5 × 4 = _____ square feet
Rectangle B: 2 × 4 = ______ square feet
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square feet

Another Way:
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 4
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle A: 3 × 4 = _____ square feet
Rectangle B: 2 × 8 = ______ square feet
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square feet

Answer:
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle A:3×4=12 square feet
Rectangle B:2×8=16 square feet
Area of the shape:12+16=28 square feet.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Find the area of the shape
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 5
Areas of Rectangles
Rectangle A: _____ × ____ = _____ square meters
Rectangle B: _____ × ____ = ______ square meters
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square meters

Answer:


Rectangle A:3×4=12 square meters
Rectangle B:4×2=8 square meters
Area of shape:12+8=20 square meters.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the area of the shape
Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 6
Areas of Rectangle A: _____ × ____ = _____ square inches
Areas of Rectangle B: _____ × ____ = ______ square inches
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square inches

Answer:


Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 3 rows and 5 columns 2nd rectangle with 2 rows and 7 columns
Area of Rectangle A:3×5=15 square inches
Area of Rectangle B:2×7=14 square inches
Area of shape:15+14=29 square inches.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 7
Area = _____

Answer:

Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 2 rows and 6 columns 2nd rectangle with 3 rows and 3 columns
Area of Rectangle 1: 2×6=12 square centimeters
Area of Rectangle 2: 3×3=9 square centimeters
Area of shape: 12+9=21 square centimeters.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 8
Area = ____

Answer:


Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 1 row and 6 columns 2nd rectangle with 3 rows and 4 columns
Area of Rectangle 1: 1×6=6 square inches
Area of Rectangle 2: 3×4=12 square inches
Area of shape: 6+12=18 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 9
Area = ____

Answer:


Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 4 rows and 5 columns 2nd rectangle with 6 rows and 2 columns
Area Of Rectangle 1:4×5=20 square feet
Area of Rectangle 2:6×2=12 square feet
Area of shape : 20+12=32 square feet.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 10
Area = _____

Answer:


Divide the shape into two rectangles as 1st rectangle with 3 rows and 8 columns 2nd rectangle with 2 rows and 5 columns
Area of Rectangle 1:3×8=24 square meters
Area of Rectangle 2:2×5=10 square meters
Area of shape:24+10=34 square meters.

Question 7.
YOU BE THE ANSWER
Your friend says there is only one way to break apart the shape. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 11

Answer:
No my friend is correct if we break the shape in any other way we will not get 2 rectangles.we may get 1 square and 1 rectangle.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton uses square tiles to make the design. Each tile is 2 inches long. What is the area of the design? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 12

Answer:
Given: Each tile is 2 inches long and tile is square shape
Therefore area of each square tile is 2×2=4 square inches.
In the above shape we have 4 tiles
So, Area of shape = 4 × (area of tile) = 4 ×4=16 square inches.
Area=16 square inches.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

What is the area of the balcony?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 13

Answer:
The area of the balcony is 46 square feet

Explanation:
Area of Rectangle A:5×8=40 square feet , Area of Rectangle B:3×2=6 square feet
Area of the balcony:46 square feet

Show and Grow

Find the area of the miniature golf hole.
Question 9.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 14

Answer:
Area of Rectangle A:4×(8+6)=4×(14)=56 square feet
Area of Rectangle B:6×(10-4)=6×6=36 square feet
Area of the golf hole:56+36=92 square feet

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 15

Answer:
Area=52 square feet

Explanation:
To find area here we need to calculate the total area and subtract the middle area from it. Total shape Length =6+4=10 , width =2+3+2=7 , Area of total shape =10×7=70 square feet, Part to be subtracted length =3 ,width =6
Area =3×6=18 square feet
Therefore area of the shape =Total area-area of part to be subtracted
=70‐18=52 square feet.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
The floors of the classroom and closet have an area of 98 square meters. What is the area of the closet floor? Explain
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 16

Answer:
Area of closets =8 square meters.

Explanation:
Given here that total area is 98 square meters. As shown in the figure above area of class room is 9×10=90 square meters.
Therefore Area of closets = Total area – Area of class room
=98-90=8
Area of closets =8 square meters.

Find Areas of More Shapes Homework & Practice 6.5

Find the area of the shape
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 17
Areas of Rectangle A: _____ × ____ = _____ square feet
Areas of Rectangle B: _____ × ____ = ______ square feet
Area of Shape: ____ + ____ = ____ square feet

Answer:


Area of Rectangle A:4×2=8 square feet
Area of Rectangle B:=1×7=7 square feet
Area of shape:=8+7=15 square feet.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 18
Area = ____

Answer:


Area of Rectangle A: 2×3=6 square meters
Area of Rectangle B: 3×6=18 square meters
Area of shape: 6+18=24 square meters.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 19
Area = _____

Answer:


Area of Rectangle A: 3×7=21 square feet
Area of Rectangle B: 2×3=6 square feet
Area of shape: 21+6=27 square feet.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 20
Area = _____

Answer:


Area of Rectangle A:2×6=12 square inches.
Area of Rectangle B:4×8=36 square inches.
Area of shape :12+36=48 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 21
Area = _____

Answer:


Area of square A:4×4=16 square centimeters
Area of square B:4×4=16 square centimeters
Area of shape:16+16=32 square centimeters.

Question 6.
Number Sense
Newton makes a design with squares. What is the total area of his design?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 22

Answer:
Area of blue square is 2×2=4 square meters
Area of yellow square is 4×4=16 square meters
Area of green square is 6×6=36 square meters
Therefore Area of shape=4+16+36=56 square meters

Question 7.
Precision
A landscaper sketches a design for a yard.How much greater is the area of the grass than the area of the rocks?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 23

Answer:
Area of rock is 3×4=12 square feet.
To find area of the grass we divide it into 2 rectangles with 3 rows, 7 columns and 6 rows and 3 columns.
Area=(3×7)+(7×6) =21+42=63.
Area of grass- area of rock=63‐12=51.
So, area of grass is 53 square feet more than area of rock.

Question 8.Modeling Real Life
What is the area of the counter top?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 24

Answer:
Divide the shape into 2 parts
1:8ft×3ft=24 square feet
2:6ft×2ft=12 square feet
Area of counter top = 21+12=33 square feet.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
The floors of the barn stall and feeding area havean area of 22 square meters. What is the area of the barn stall floor? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 25

Answer:
The total area of bran stall and feeding areas 22 square meters. Feeding area =3×2=6 square meters
The area of only barn stall floor =Total area ‐feeding area
=22‐6 = 16 square meters
Therefore area of barn stall floor is 16 square meters.

Review & Refresh

Complete the table.
Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 26
Answer:

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 6.5 27
Answer:

Relate Area to Multiplication Performance Task

Question 1.
The map shows the top view of an obstacle course.
a. What is the area of the net?
b. What is the area of the hopscotch track?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 53
c. The area of the mud pit under the monkey bars is 10 square feet. What is the missing side length of the mud pit?
d. Each stepping-stone in the sandbox covers 1 square foot. What not is the area of the sandbox not covered with stones?
e. What is the area of just the grass?
Answer:

a.

Area of net=length ×width =3×2=6 square feet
Therefore area of net =6 square feet

b.

To find area of hopscotch track we have to find length of the track.
Total length of obstacle course is 10 ft
Length below the hopscotch= total length-length of sand box and net ie 10-4+3=3
Length above the hopscotch is 2 ft
Therefore Length of hopscotch =total length- length above and below the track=10-(2+3)=5ft
So, area of hopscotch course =5ft×1ft=5 square feet.

c.

Area of mud pit under the monkeys bars is 10 square feet.
Length of monkeys bars is 5ft
Length of the other side of monkeys bars is total area divided by length
Width of other side=10÷5=2
Therefore length of other side of mud pit is 2 feet.

d.

The total area of sand box is
8×2=16 square feet + 2×2=4 square feet
Area=20 square feet
As given in the question each sandbox covers 1 square foot of area.
As there are 7 sandboxes area of sandboxes is 7 square feet.
Therefore area of sandbox not covered with stones is 20-7 = 13 square feet.

e.

The area of just grass is the total area subtracted with area of all courses .
Total area=10×10= 100 square feet.
Area of net=6 square feet, Area of hopscotch =5 square feet, Area of monkeys bar=10 square feet, Area of sandbox = 20 square feet
Area of just grass= 100‐(6+5+10+20)=100‐41
Therefore area of just grass=59 square feet.

Question 2.
The obstacle course opens at 1 o’clock. It is half past 12. How many more minutes until the course opens?

Answer:
1 hour = 60 minutes, Half past 12 indicates 12:30
As Obstacle course opens at 1 o’ clock so, There are 30 more minutes until the course open.

Relate Area to Multiplication Activity

Area Roll and Conquer

Directions:

  1. Players take turns rolling two dice.
  2. On your turn, create a rectangle with the numbers on the dice as the side lengths. Your rectangle cannot cover another rectangle.
  3. Shade the rectangle in your color. Record the multiplication equation for the rectangle.
  4. If you cannot create a rectangle on the board, then you lose your turn. Play 10 rounds, if possible.
  5. The player with the greatest area covered wins!

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 54
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 55
Answer:

Relate Area to Multiplication Chapter Practice

6.1 Understand Area

Find the area of the shape.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 56
Area = ___ square units

Answer:
In the above grid there are 8 color tiles.
1 tile is equal to 1 square unit.
So, area =8 square units.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 57
Area = ___ square units

Answer:
In the above grid there are 15 color tiles.
1 tile is equal to 1 square unit.
So, area =15 square units.

6.2 Measure Area Using Standard Units

Find the area of the shape.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 58
Area = ___

Answer:
In the above grid there are 4 colored unit squares.
1 unit represents 1 square meter.
Therefore Area=4 square meters.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 59
Area = ___

Answer:
In the above grid there are 3 colored unit squares.
1 unit square represents 1 square inch.
Therefore Area=3 square inches.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 60
Area = ___

Answer:
In the above grid there are 30 colored unit squares.
1 unit square represents 1 square centimeter.
Therefore Area=30 square centimeters.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 61
Area = ___

Answer:
In the above grid there are 16 colored unit squares.
1 unit square represents 1 square foot.
Therefore Area=16 square feet.

6.3 Find Area by Multiplying

Question 7.
Find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 62

Answer:
The above rectangle is 7ft long and 4 feet wide
So area of the rectangle is length ×breadth
7ft×4ft=28 square feet.
Therefore Area=28 square feet.

Question 8.
Modeling Real Life
A textbook cover has an area of 80 square inches. The cover is 8 inches wide. How long is the cover?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 63

Answer:
Area of the book is 80 square inches and width is 8 inches, We have to find the length of the book
Area=length × width
So, 80=length ×8 or 8×length=80 square inches
Count 8 table: 8×1=8,8×2=16,——8×10=80.
Therefore Length f the book is 10 inches.

6.4 Area and the Distributive Property

Question 9.
Use the Distributive Property to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 64

Answer:
The above rectangle has 9 columns and to find  the area of rectangle using Distributive property this is divided into two smaller rectangles with  6 and 3 columns each.
6×9=6×(6+3)
6×9=(6×6)+(6×3)
6×9=36+18
6×9=54
Area=54 square meters.

6.5 Find Area of More Shapes

Question 10.
Find the area of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 6 Relate Area to Multiplication 65
Area=________

Answer:
To find the area of the shape we can divide the shape into two rectangles. Rectangle A:3 rows and 8 columns Rectangle B:4 rows and 3 columns
Area of rectangle A:3×8=24 square feet
Area of rectangle B:4×3=12 square feet
Therefore area of shape:24+12=35 square feet.

Conclusion:

We wish that the Big Ideas Math 3rd Grade 6th Chapter Relate Area to Multiplication Solution Key provided here is helpful to score good marks in the exams. It also helps the teachers and parents to explain problems to their child. Feel free to clarify your doubts by leaving a comment below. Stay tuned to our site to check the answer keys of other chapters of grade 3.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes

Learn the basics of Two-Dimensional Shapes with the help of our Big Ideas Math Grade K Answer Key for Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes. So the students who are looking for Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes can Download the pdf form here. We provide step by step explanations with pictures for all the problems here. The solutions for all these questions are prepared by the math experts. Hence Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes pdf for free of cost.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes

Start answering all the questions in the exams by practicing from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes. You can prove yourself in the tests by referring to Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes. Just tap on the topic you wish and learn various questions involved in it easily. We have listed all of them with examples and explained every problem clearly.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Describe Two-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 2 Triangles

Lesson: 3 Rectangles

Lesson: 4 Squares

Lesson: 5 Hexagons and Circles

Lesson: 6 Join Two-Dimensional Shapes

Lesson: 7 Build Two-Dimensional Shapes

Chapter: 11 – Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes

Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes Vocabulary

Directions:
Classify the animals into the categories shown. Write the marks in the chart. Count the marks and write the numbers to tell how many animals are in each category. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes v 1

Answer:

Explanation:
In the above image their are 7 animals out of them 4 animals have spots and 3 animals do not have spots on their body.So, as 3 is lessthan 4 draw a line through 3.

Vocabulary Cards
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes v 3

Vocabulary Cards
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes v 4

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes v 5

Lesson 11.1 Describe Two-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Cut out the Two-Dimensional Shape Cards. Sort the cards into the categories shown.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 1

Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture there is 1 shape that has curves and 4 shapes that have no curves.

Think and grow

Directions:

  • Color the shape that has a curve.
  • Color the shape that does not have any vertices.
  • Color the shape that has more than 4 vertices.
  • Color the shape that has only 3 sides.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 2
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes, the shape that has curves and a shape that do not have any vertices is a circle. So, color the circle.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 3
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes, the shape that has more than 4 vertices is a hexagon. So, color hexagon.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 4
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes, the shape that has only 3 sides is a triangle. So, color triangle.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Color the shapes that have only 4 sides. 2 Color the shapes that have only 3 vertices. 3 Color the shapes that have 6 vertices. 4 Color the shapes that have curves.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 5
Answer:

Explanation:
The shapes that have only 4 sides are square and rectangle. So, color square and rectangle.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 6
Answer:

Explanation:
The shape that has only 3 vertices is the triangle. So, color the triangles.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 7
Answer:

Explanation:
The shape that have 6 vertices is a hexagon. So, color the hexagons.

Question 4.
Answer:

Explanation:
The shape that has curves is a circle. So, color the circles.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: Write the number that answers the question.

  • How many stickers in the picture have more than 4 vertices?
  • How many stickers in the picture have all straight sides?
  • How many stickers in the picture have both curves and straight sides?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 9
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture, there are 2 stickers that have more than 4 vertices, 6 stickers that have all straight sides, and 4 stickers that have curves and straight sides.

Describe Two-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 11.1

Directions:
1 Color the shape that has 6 sides. 2 Color the shape that has more than 3 straight sides.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 10
Answer:

Explanation:
The shape that has 6bsides is a hexagon. So, color the hexagon.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 11
Answer:

Explanation:
The shape that has more than 3 straight sides is a rectangle. So, color the rectangle.

Directions:
3 Color the shapes that have curves. 4 Color the shapes that have only 4 vertices. 5 How many stickers have less than 4 vertices? Write the number. How many stickers have more than 3 sides? Write the number.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 12
Answer:

Explanation:
The shape that has curves is a circle. So, color the circles.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 13
Answer:

explanation:
The shapes that have 4 vertices are rectangle and square. So, color the shapes rectangle and square.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.1 14
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture, there are 3 stickers that have less than 4 vertices, 5 stickers that have more than 3 sides.

Lesson 11.2 Triangles

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Cut out the Triangle or Not a Triangle Sort Cards. Sort the cards into the categories shown.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 1

Think and Grow

Directions:
Color any triangles. Tell why your answers are correct.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 2
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes, the triangles are colored as triangles has 3 sides and 3 vertices.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Color any triangles. Tell why your answers are correct. 3 Trace the shapes that are triangles. Write the number of sides and the number of vertices of a triangle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 3
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes, the triangle is colored as a triangle has 3 sides and 3 vertices.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 4
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes, the triangles are colored as a triangle has 3 sides and 3 vertices.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 5
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes, the shapes that have 3 sides and 3 vertices are triangles. So, trace the triangles.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
You use triangle-shaped flags to make two banners for a party. You use 10 flags in all.

  • Draw and color flags to make the banners.
  • Write an addition sentence to match your picture.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 6
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture we have to draw and color 5 triangle-shaped flags in 2 banners. So, there will be 2 banners with 5 flags each. Therefore the addition sentence is 5+5=10.

Triangles Homework & Practice 11.2

Directions:
1 – 2 Color any triangles. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 7
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the triangle is colored as triangle has 3 sides and 3 vertices.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 8
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the triangle is colored as triangle has 3 sides and 3 vertices.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 9
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the triangles are colored as triangle has 3 sides and 3 vertices.
Directions:
4 Color any triangles. Tell why your answers are correct. 5 Trace the shapes that are triangles. Write the number of sides and the number of vertices of a triangle. 6 You use triangle-shaped flags to make two banners for a party. You use 8 flags in all. Draw and color flags to make the banners. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 10
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the triangles are colored as triangle has 3 sides and 3 vertices.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 11
Answer:

Explanation:

In the above shapes the shapes that has 3 sides and 3 vertices are triangles. So, trace the triangles.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.2 12
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture we have to draw and color 4 triangle shaped flags in 2 banners. So, there will be 2 banners with 4 flags each. Therefore the addition sentence is 4+4=8.

Lesson 11.3 Rectangles

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Cut out the Rectangle or Not a Rectangle Sort Cards. Sort the cards into the categories shown.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 1
Answer:

Think and Grow

Directions:
Color any rectangles. Tell why your answers are correct.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 2
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the rectangles are colored as rectangles have 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Color any rectangles. Tell why your answers are correct. 3 Trace the shapes that are rectangles. Write the number of sides and the number of vertices of a rectangle.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 3
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the rectangle is colored as rectangles have 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 4
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the rectangle is colored as rectangles have 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 5
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the rectangles are traced and rectangles have 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • Trace and color 4 rectangular posters on the wall.
  • You put 3 more posters on another wall. Draw and color 3 rectangular posters on the wall.
  • Write an addition sentence to tell how many posters are on the walls in all.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 6
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture 4 rectangular posters are traced and colored and 3 extra rectangular posters are drawn and colored. When we add all the posters ie 4+3 we have 7 rectangular posters in all.

Rectangles Homework & Practice 11.3

Directions:
1 – 3 Color any rectangles. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 7
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the rectangle is colored as rectangles have 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 8
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the rectangle is colored as rectangles have 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 9
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the rectangle is colored as rectangles have 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Directions:
4 Color any rectangles. Tell why your answers are correct. 5 Trace the shapes that are rectangles. Write the number of sides and the number of vertices of a rectangle. 6 You make rectangle.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 10
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the rectangle is colored as rectangles have 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 11
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the rectangles are traced as rectangles have 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.3 12
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture we have to draw 1 large rectangular picture frame and 4 small rectangular picture frames. Therefore the addition sentence is 1+4=5. So, there are 5 rectangular picture frames in all.

Lesson 11.4 Squares

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Cut out the Square or Not a Square Sort Cards. Sort the cards into the categories shown.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 1
Answer:

Think and Grow

Directions:
Color any squares. Tell why your answers are correct.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 2
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the square are colored as the squares have 4 sides of equal length and 4 vertices.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Color any squares. Tell why your answers are correct. 3 Trace the shapes that are squares. Write the number of sides and the number of vertices of a square.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 3
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the square are colored as the squares have 4 sides of equal length and 4 vertices.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 4
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the square are colored as the squares have 4 sides of equal length and 4 vertices.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 5
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the square are traced as the squares have 4 sides of equal length and 4 vertices.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • Use squares and rectangles to draw 6 windows and 1 door on the house. Color the house.
  • Write an addition sentence to tell how many squares and how many rectangles you draw in all.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 6
Answer:

Explanation:
In the house picture given above draw 6 square shaped windows and 1 rectangular door.Color all the shapes and the house. The addition sentence for shapes in all is 6+1=7.

Squares Homework & Practice 11.4

Directions:
1 – 3 Color any squares. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 7
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the square is colored as the squares have 4 sides of equal length and 4 vertices.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 8
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the square is colored as the squares have 4 sides of equal length and 4 vertices.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 9
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the squares are colored as the squares have 4 sides of equal length and 4 vertices.

Directions:
4 Color any squares. Tell why your answers are correct. 5 Trace the shapes that are squares. Write the number of sides and the number of vertices of a square. 6 Use squares and rectangles to draw 4 windows and 1 door on the castle. Color the castle. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many squares and rectangles you draw in all.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 10
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the squares are colored as the squares have 4 sides of equal length and 4 vertices.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 11
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the squares are traced as the squares have 4 sides of equal length and 4 vertices.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.4 12
Answer:

Explanation:

In the castle given above draw 4 square shaped windows and 1 rectangular door.Color all the shapes and the castle. The addition sentence for shapes in all is 4+1=5.

Lesson 11.5 Hexagons and Circles

Explore and Grow

Directions:

  • Use your finger to trace around the yellow hexagon. Trace and color the shapes that are hexagons.
  • Use your finger to trace around the blue circle. Use a different color to trace and color the shapes that are circles.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 1
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagons colored yellow and the circles are colored blue.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Color any hexagons red. Color any circles blue. Tell why your answers are correct.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 2
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagons are colored red and the circles are colored blue as hexagons have 6 sides and 6 vertices and the circle has curves.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Color any hexagons red. Color any circles blue. Tell why your answers are correct. 3 Trace the shapes that are hexagons. Write the number of sides and the number of vertices of a hexagon.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 3
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagon is colored red and the circle is colored blue as hexagons have 6 sides and 6 vertices and the circle has curves.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 4
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagon is colored red and the circle is colored blue as hexagons have 6 sides and 6 vertices and the circle has curves.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 5
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagons are traced as hexagons have 6 sides and 6 vertices.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: Follow the steps to complete the robot.

  • Draw 2 circles for the robot’s eyes, a triangle for the nose, and a rectangle for the mouth.
  • Draw a hexagon for each of the robot’s hands.
  • How many of each shape is used for the whole robot? Write the number next to each shape.
  • Color your robot.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 6
Answer:

Explanation:
In the Robot picture given above draw 2 circles for the robot’s eyes, a triangle for the nose, a rectangle for the mouth and a hexagon for each of the robot’s hands. Color all the shapes. So, there are 2 circles, 3 hexagons, 3 triangles and 7 rectangles in all.

Hexagons and Circles Homework & Practice 11.5

Directions:
1 – 3 Color any hexagons red. Color any circles blue. Tell why your answers are correct.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 7
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagon is colored red and the circle is colored blue as hexagons have 6 sides and 6 vertices and the circle has curves.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 8
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagons are colored red and the circle is colored blue as hexagons have 6 sides and 6 vertices and the circle has curves.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 9
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagon is colored red and the circle is colored blue as hexagons have 6 sides and 6 vertices and the circle has curves.

Directions:
4 Color any hexagons red. Color any circles blue. Tell why your answers are correct. 5 Trace the shapes that are circles. Write the number of straight sides and the number of vertices of a circle. 6 Draw a hexagon at the end of the cat’s tail. Draw 2 circles for the eyes. How many of each shape is used for the cat? Write the numbers next to the shapes. Color your cat.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 10
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagon is colored red and the circle is colored blue as hexagons have 6 sides and 6 vertices and the circle has curves.

Question 5.

Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes the hexagons are traced as the circle has curves.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.5 12
Answer:

Explanation:
in the cat picture given above draw 2 circles for eyes of cat, a hexagon at the end of the tail of the cat.Color all the shape.So, there are 5 circles, 2 hexagons, 5 triangles and 7 rectangles in all.

Lesson 11.6 Join Two-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Directions:

  • Use 2 squares to make a rectangle. Trace your shape.
  • Add another square to make a larger rectangle. Trace your shape.
  • Add another square to make a larger square. Trace your shape.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 1
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above question the rectangle in first box is made by using 2 squares, the rectangle in second box is made by adding another square and the square in the third box is made by adding another square to it.Trace all the shapes.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Use the pattern block shown to form the shape. Count and write how many pattern blocks you use.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 2
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shape 5 triangle pattern blocks are used to form the large triangle and 6 triangle pattern blocks are used to form a hexagon.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Use the pattern blocks shown to form the shape. Count and write how many of each pattern block you use. 3 Draw a rectangle that can be formed by the 2 triangles shown.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 3
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture 3 triangle shape pattern blocks and 2 square shaped pattern blocks are used to form the given shape.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 4
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture 6 triangle shaped pattern blocks and 1 hexagon shaped pattern block are used to form the given shape.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 5
Answer:

Explanation:
The above picture the 2 triangle shaped pattern blocks are used to a rectangle.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Use the pattern blocks shown to create the rocket ship. Count and write how many of each pattern block you use.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 6
Answer:

Explanation:
In the Rocket picture given above 3 triangle shaped pattern blocks, 2 square shaped pattern blocks and 1 hexagon pattern block are used to form the complex shape of a rocket.

Join Two-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 11.6

Directions:
1 and 2 Use the pattern blocks shown to form the shape. Count and write how many of each pattern block you use.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 7
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture 4 square shaped pattern blocks are used to form the large square.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 8
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture 3 triangle shaped pattern blocks and 1 hexagon pattern blocks are used to form the large triangle shape .

Directions:
3 Draw a square that can be formed by the 2 triangles shown. 4 Use the pattern blocks shown to create the butterfly. Count and write how many of each pattern block you use.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 9
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture the 2 triangle shaped pattern blocks are used to form a square.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.6 10
Answer:

Explanation:
In the butterfly picture given above there are 6 triangle pattern blocks, 4 square pattern blocks and 1 hexagon pattern block. All these pattern blocks together form the shape of a butterfly.

Lesson 11.7 Build Two-Dimensional Shapes

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Use your materials to build one of the two-dimensional shapes shown. Circle the two-dimensional shape that you make.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 1

Think and Grow

Directions:

  • Use your materials to build a triangle. Draw your triangle or attach it to the page.
  • Use your materials to build a rectangle. Draw your shape or attach it to the page.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 2

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Use your materials to build a hexagon. Draw your hexagon or attach it to the page. 2 Use your materials to build a circle. Draw your circle or attach it to the page. 3 Use your materials to build a two-dimensional shape that has 4 vertices. Then build a different shape that has 4 vertices. Draw your shapes or attach them to the page.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 3
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 4
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 5
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • Use your materials to build the front of the house in the picture. Draw your shape or attach it to the page.
  • Circle the shapes that you use to make the front of the house.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 6
Answer:

Build Two-Dimensional Shapes Homework & Practice 11.7

Directions:
1 – 3 Use your materials to build the shape shown. Draw your shape or attach it to the page. 4 Use your materials to build a two-dimensional shape that has 6 vertices. Draw your shape or attach it to the page.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 7
Answer:

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 8
Answer:

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 9
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 10
Answer:

Directions:
5 Use your materials to build a two-dimensional shape that is not a rectangle. Then build a different two-dimensional shape that is not a rectangle. Draw your shapes or attach them to the page. 6 Use your materials to build the front of the sand castle tower in the picture. Draw your shape or attach it to the page. Circle the shapes that you use to make the front of the tower.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 11
Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 11.7 12
Answer:

Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes Performance Task

Directions: 1 Use the clues to draw each two-dimensional shape to make an animal.

  • The face is a shape that has 1 more than 5 sides.
  • The eyes are shapes that are curved and have no vertices.
  • The nose and ears are shapes that have 1 more than 2 vertices.
  • The mouth, the body, and the tail are shapes that have more than 3 sides, but less than 5 sides and have L-shaped vertices.
  • The 4 legs are shapes that have 1 less than 5 sides and have all equal side lengths.

2 Count and write how many of each shape you draw.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 1
Answer:

Explanation:
To form the above cat picture we need to draw 1 hexagon shape for face, 2 circles for eyes , 3 triangles for nose and ears,4 rectangles for body and tail of the cat and 2 squares for the legs.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 2
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above cat picture there are 2 circles, 2 squares, 1 hexagon, 4 rectangles and 3 triangles.

Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes Activity

Shape Flip and Find

Directions:
Place the Shape Flip and Find Cards face down in the boxes. Take turns flipping 2 cards. If your cards show the same shape, keep the cards. If your cards show different shapes, flip the cards back over. Repeat until all cards have been used.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes 3
Answer:

Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice

Directions:
1 Color the shape that has only 3 vertices. 2 Color the shape that has a curve. 3 Color the shapes that have 6 sides. 4 Color the shapes that have 4 vertices.

11.1 Describe Two-Dimensional Shapes

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 1
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes color the triangle as the triangle has only 3 vertices.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 2
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes color the circle as circle has a curve.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 3
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes color the hexagons as the hexagons have 6 sides and 6 vertices.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 4
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes color the square and the rectangle as the square and fectangle has 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Directions:
5 and 6 Color the triangle. Tell why your answer is correct. 7 and 8 Color any rectangles. Tell why your answers are correct.

11.2 Triangles

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 5
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes color the triangle as the triangle has 3 sides and 3 vertices.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 6
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes color the triangle as the triangle has 3 sides and 3 vertices.

11.3 Rectangles

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 7
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes color the rectangle as the trectangle has 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 8
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes color the rectangle as the rectangle has 4 sides and 4 vertices.

Directions:
9 Use squares and rectangles to draw 5 windows and 1 door on the bus. Color the bus. Then write an addition sentence to tell how many squares and rectangles you draw in all. 10 Trace the shapes that are hexagons. Write the number of sides and the number of vertices of a hexagon.

11.4 Squares

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 9
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above bus picture given above draw 5 square shaped windows, 1 rectangular shaoed door and color all the shapes.Therefore the addition sentence of the shapes is 5+1=6.

11.5 Hexagons and Circles

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 10
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above shapes trace the hexagon as the hexagon has 6 sides and 6 vertices.

Directions:
11 Use the pattern block shown to form the shape. Count and write how many pattern blocks you use. 12 Draw a larger triangle that can be formed by the 2 triangles shown. 13 Use your materials to build the shape. Draw your shape or attach it to the page. 14 Use your materials to build a two-dimensional shape that has 4 sides of the same length. Draw your shape or attach it to the page. 15 Use your materials to build a two-dimensional shape that is not a hexagon. Draw your shape or attach it to the page.

11.6 Join Two-Dimensional Shapes

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 11
Answer:

Explanation:
In the above picture 4 triangle shaped pattern blocks are used to form the given shape.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 12
Answer:

Explanation:
The above given 2 triangle shaped pattern blocks are used to form a large triangle.

11.7 Build Two-Dimensional Shapes

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 13
Answer:

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 14
Answer:

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes chp 15
Answer:

Conclusion:
Hope Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 11 Identify Two-Dimensional Shapes pdf is beneficial for all the elementary school students. Make use of the above links and kickstart your preparation. Keep in touch with our site to get the solution key for all Big Ideas Math Grade K Chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens helps the students to overcome the difficulties in math. Learning in a fun way will make maths more interesting to students. You can see step-by-step explanations for all the questions by using the figures. You can easily understand the concepts deeply with the help of our Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens.

Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens

In order to excel in the exam, we suggest the students of 1st standard refer to the Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens. The topics shown in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens are as per the latest syllabus. Hit the links and start solving the problems using easy methods.

Vocabulary

Lesson: 1 Mental Math: 10 More

Lesson: 2 Mental Math: 10 Less

Lesson: 3 Add Tens

Lesson: 4 Add Tens Using a Number Line

Lesson: 5 Subtract Tens

Lesson: 6 Subtract Tens Using a Number Line

Lesson: 7 Use Addition to Subtract Tens

Lesson: 8 Add Tens to a Number

Chapter: 8 Add and Subtract Tens

Add and Subtract Tens Vocabulary

Organize It

Review Words:
decade numbers
digits

Use the review words to complete the graphic organizer.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 1
The ____________ of 16 are 1 and 6.

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Vocabulary

The digits of 16 Are 1 and 6.

Explanation:
10, 20, 30, 40 and so on are decade numbers.
Any of the numerals from 0 to 9, especially when forming part of a number are called as digits.

Define It

What am I?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 2

Answer:

Big-Ideas-Math-Book-1st-Grade-Answer-key-Chapter-8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Define It

 

Explanation:
13 – 3 = 10= B                  4 + 4 = 8 = P
5 + 1 = 6 = O                   3 + 2 = 5 = L
5 + 4 = 9 = I                    12 – 8 = 4 = R
6 – 4 = 2 = M                   10 – 3 = U
1 + 2 = 3 = E
9 – 8 = 1 = N
Hence , YOU are open number line.

Lesson 8.1 Mental Math: 10 More

Explore and Grow

Find each sum. What do you notice?

13 + 10 = __________

39 + 10 = __________

52 + 10 = __________

Answer:
13 + 10 = 23
39 + 10 = 49
52 + 10 = 62

Explanation:
Addition is bringing two or more numbers (or things) together to make a new total.
The numbers to be added together are called the “Addends”:
1. Here, 13 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
13 + 10 = 23.
2. Here, 39 and 10 are addends.
39 + 10 = 49.
3. Here, 52 and 10 are addends.
52 + 10 = 62.
Hence, its noticed that total number of groups are 10 in all the counters.

Show and Grow

Use mental math.

Question 1.
14 + 10 = __________
Answer:
14 + 10 = 24

Explanation:
Here, 14 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
14 + 10 = 24.
Hence, Sum = 24.

Question 2.
46 + 10 = __________
Answer:
46 + 10 =56.

Explanation:
Here, 46 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
46 + 10 = 56.
Hence, Sum = 56.

Question 3.
83 + 10 = __________
Answer:
83 + 10 = 93.

Explanation:
Here, 83 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
83 + 10 = 93.
Hence, Sum = 93.

Question 4.
75 + 10 = __________
Answer:
75 + 10 = 85.

Explanation:
Here, 75 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
75 + 10 = 85.
Hence, sum = 85.

Question 5.
21 + 10 = __________
Answer:
21 + 10 = 31.

Explanation:
Here, 21 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
21 + 10 = 31.
Hence, Sum = 31.

Question 6.
60 + 10 = __________
Answer:
60 + 10 = 70.

Explanation:
Here, 60 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
60 + 10 = 70.
Hence, Sum = 70.

Question 7.
10 + 89 = __________
Answer:
10 + 89 = 99.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 89 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 89 = 99.
Hence, Sum = 99.

Question 8.
10 + 68 = __________
Answer:
10 + 68 = 78.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 68 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 68 = 78.
Hence, Sum = 78.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use Mental math.

Question 9.
16 + 10 = __________
Answer:
16 + 10 = 26.

Explanation:
Here, 16 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
16 + 10 = 26.
Hence, Sum = 26.

Question 10.
63 + 10 = __________
Answer:
63 + 10 = 73.

Explanation:
Here, 63 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
63 + 10 = 73.
Hence, Sum = 73.

Question 11.
8 + 10 = __________
Answer:
8 + 10 = 18.

Explanation:
Here, 8 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
8 + 10 = 18.
Hence, Sum = 18.

Question 12.
44 + 10 = __________
Answer:
44 + 10 = 54.

Explanation:
Here, 44 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
44 + 10 = 54.
Hence, Sum = 54.

Question 13.
19 + 10 = __________
Answer:
19 + 10 = 29.

Explanation:
Here, 19 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
19 + 10 = 29.
Hence, Sum = 29.

Question 14.
59 + 10 = __________
Answer:
59 + 10 = 69.

Explanation:
Here, 59 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
59 + 10 = 69.
Hence, Sum = 69.

Question 15.
10 + 22 = __________
Answer:
10 + 22 = 32.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 22 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 22 = 32.
Hence, Sum = 32.

Question 16.
10 + 50 = __________
Answer:
10 + 50 = 60.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 50 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 50 = 60.
Hence, Sum = 60.

Question 17.
10 + 71 = __________
Answer:
10 + 71 = 81.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 71 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 71 = 81.
Hence, Sum = 81.

Question 18.
10 + 38 = __________
Answer:
10 + 38 = 48.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 38 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 38 = 48.
Hence, Sum = 48.

Question 19.
55 + __________ = 65
Answer:
55 + _10__ = 65

Explanation:
Here, 55 and Missing number are addends.
Sum is given = 65
Let the missing number be X.
Now add the numbers:
55 + X= 65
X = 65 – 55
X = 10.
Hence, equation is  55 + 10 = 65.

Question 20.
87 + __________ = 97
Answer:
87 + __10__ = 97

Explanation:
Here, 87 and Missing number are addends.
Sum is given = 97
Let the missing number be X.
Now add the numbers:
87 + X = 97
X = 97 – 87
X = 10.
Hence, equation is 87 + 10 = 97.

Question 21.
DIG DEEPER!
Use each number once to complete the equations.
86       76       10         66
_________ + 10 = __________              ___________ + __________ = 96
Answer:
66 + 10 = 76
86 + 10 = 96

Explanation:
The numbers to be added together are called the “Addends”.
1.  _________ + 10 = __________
We know among two addends, one is 10.
2.     ___________ + __________ = 96
Given numbers 86,76,10,66.
Place every given number next to given addend 10:
86 + 10 = 96
76 + 10 = 86
10 + 10 = 20
66 + 10 =76.
Among this equations, for the first equation is  66 + 10 =76.
and the second  is 86 + 10 = 96 because the  it fulfills the given condition. (Use each number once to complete the equations.)

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

There are 33 students on a bus. 10 more get on. How many students are on the bus now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 3
Addition equation:

___________ students

Answer:
Total number of students on the bus now = 43.
Given:
Number of students in a bus = 33
Number of students more got into the bus = 10

Explanation:
Total number of students on the bus now = Number of students in a bus + Number of students more get into the bus = 33 + 10
= 43.
Hence, Total number of students on the bus now = 43.

Show and Grow

Question 22.
There are 61 tents at a campground. 10 more are put up. How many tents are at the campground now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 4
Addition equation:

____________ tents

Answer:
Number of tents at the campground now = 71.

Given:
Number of tents at a campground =61
Number of tents more put up at the campground= 10

Explanation:
Number of tents at the campground now = Number of tents at a campground – Number of tents more put up at the campground
= 61 + 10
= 71
Hence, Number of tents at the campground now = 71.

Mental Math: 10 More Practice 8.1

Use Mental math.

Question 1.
30 + 10 = __________
Answer:
30 + 10 = 40

Explanation:
Here, 30 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
30 + 10 = 40
Hence, Sum = 40.

Question 2.
81 + 10 = __________
Answer:
81 + 10 = 91

Explanation:
Here, 81 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
81 + 10 = 91.
Hence, Sum = 91.

Question 3.
6 + 10 = __________
Answer:
6 + 10 = 16

Explanation:
Here, 6 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
6 + 10 = 16.
Hence, Sum = 16.

Question 4.
57 + 10 = __________
Answer:
57 + 10 = 67

Explanation:
Here, 57 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
57 + 10 = 67.
Hence, Sum = 67.

Question 5.
48 + 10 = __________
Answer:
48 + 10 = 58.

Explanation:
Here, 48 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
48 + 10 = 58.
Hence, Sum = 58.

Question 6.
26 + 10 = __________
Answer:
26 + 10 = 36.

Explanation:
Here, 26 and 10 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
26 + 10 = 36.
Hence, Sum = 36.

Question 7.
10 + 43 = __________
Answer:
10 + 43 = 53.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 43 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 43 = 53.
Hence, Sum = 53.

Question 8.
10 + 65 = __________
Answer:
10 + 65 = 75.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 65 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 65 = 75.
Hence, Sum = 75.

Question 9.
10 + 82 = __________
Answer:
10 + 82 = 92.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 82 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 82 = 92.
Hence, Sum = 92.

Question 10.
10 + 79 = __________
Answer:
10 + 79 = 89.

Explanation:
Here, 10 and 79 are addends.
Now add both the numbers:
10 + 79 = 89.
Hence, Sum = 89.

Question 11.
22 + __________ = 32
Answer:
22 + 10 =32.

Explanation:
Here, 22 and Missing number are addends.
Let the missing number be X.
Sum is given =32
Now add the numbers:
22 + X = 32
X = 32 – 22
X = 10.
Hence, equation is 22 + 10 =32.

Question 12.
85 + __________ = 95
Answer:
85 + 10 = 95.

Explanation:
Here, 85 and Missing number are addends.
Let the missing number be X.
Sum is given = 95
Add the numbers.
85 + X = 95
X = 95 – 85
X = 10.
Hence, equation is 85 + 10 = 95.

Question 13.
64 + __________ = 74
Answer:
64 + 10 = 74.

Explanation:
Here, 64 and Missing number are addends.
Let the missing number be X.
Sum is given = 74.
Add the numbers.
64 + X = 74
X = 74 – 64
X = 10.
Hence, equation  is 64 + 10 = 74.

Question 14.
41 + __________ = 51
Answer:
41 + 10 = 51.

Here, 41 and Missing number are addends.
Let the missing number be X.
Sum is given = 51.
Add the numbers.
41 + X = 51
X = 51 – 41
X = 10.
Hence, equation is 41 + 10 = 51 .

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
Use each number once to complete the equations.
25        10       15       35
10 + __________ = _________              25 + __________ = ___________
Answer:
10 + 15 = 25
25 +10 = 35

Explanation:
The numbers to be added together are called the “Addends”.
1. 10 + __________ = _________
2. 25 + __________ = ___________
Given 10 and 25 as one of the addends among two addends in their respective addition.
Given numbers 25,10,15,35 are other addends.
Check out placing each addend next to 10.
Equation are ,
10 + 25 = 35
10 + 10 = 20
10 + 15 = 25
10 + 35 =45.
Among this equations, for the first equation is 10 + 15 = 25
and the second  is 25 + 10 = 35 because the  it fulfills the given condition .(Use each number once to complete the equations.)

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
There are 142 teachers at a school. The school hires 10 more. How many teachers are there now?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 5

_____________ teachers
Answer:
Number of teachers are there now = 152.

Given:
Number of teachers at a school = 142
Number of teachers the school hired more = 10

Explanation:
Number of teachers are there now = Number of teachers at a school + Number of teachers the school hired more
= 142 + 10
= 152.
Hence, Number of teachers are there now = 152.

Review & Refresh

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 6
10 less than 87 is _________ .
Answer:
87 – 10 = 77.

Explanation:
There are 87 mangoes in a  basket.
10 mangoes got spoiled. How many mangoes left??
Subtract the mangoes
87 – 10 = 77.
Hence, equation is 87 – 10 = 77.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 7
1 less than 33 is __________ .
Answer:
33 – 1 = 32

Explanation:
There are 33 mangoes in a  basket.
1 mango got spoiled. How many mangoes left??
Subtract the mangoes
33 – 1 = 32.
Hence, equation is 33 – 1 = 32.

Lesson 8.2 Mental Math: 10 Less

Explore and Grow

Find each difference. What do you notice?

33 – 10 = __________

67 – 10 = __________

82 – 10 = __________
Answer:
33  -10 = 23
67 – 10 = 57
82 – 10 = 72

Explanation:
1. The number that is to be subtracted from is called Minuend.
The number that is to be subtracted is called Subtrahend:
The result of subtracting one number from another is called Difference:
In this case, 33 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
=> 33  -10 = 23
Hence, difference is  23.
2. In this case, 67 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
=> 67 – 10 = 57
Hence, difference is 57.
3. In this case, 82 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
=> 82 – 10 = 72
Hence, difference is 72.

Show and Grow

Use mental math.

Question 1.
55 – 10 = __________
Answer:
55 – 10 = 45

Explanation:
In this case, 55 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
55 – 10 = 45
Hence, Difference = 45.

Question 2.
21 – 10 = __________
Answer:
21 – 10 = 11

Explanation:
In this case, 21 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
21 – 10 = 11
Hence, Difference = 11.

Question 3.
18 – 10 = __________
Answer:
18 – 10 =8.

Explanation:
In this case, 18 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
18 – 10 =8.
Hence, Difference = 8.

Question 4.
74 – 10 = __________
Answer:
74 – 10 = 64.

Explanation:
In this case, 74 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
74 – 10 = 64.
Hence, Difference = 64.

Question 5.
89 – 10 = __________
Answer:
89 – 10 = 79.

Explanation:
In this case, 89 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
89 – 10 = 79.
Hence, Difference = 79.

Question 6.
72 – 10 = __________
Answer:
72 – 10 = 62.

Explanation:
In this case, 72 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
72 – 10 = 62.
Hence, Difference = 62.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use mental math

Question 7.
60 – 10 = __________
Answer:
60 – 10 = 50.

Explanation:
In this case, 60 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
60 – 10 = 50.
Hence, Difference = 50.

Question 8.
45 – 10 = __________
Answer:
45 – 10 = 35

Explanation:
In this case, 45 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
45 – 10 = 35
Hence, Difference = 35.

Question 9.
50 – 10 = __________
Answer:
50 – 10 = 40

Explanation:
In this case, 50 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
50 – 10 = 40
Hence, Difference = 40.

Question 10.
34 – 10 = __________
Answer:
34 – 10 = 24

Explanation:
In this case, 34 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
34 – 10 = 24
Hence, Difference = 24.

Question 11.
51 – 10 = __________
Answer:
51 – 10 = 41

Explanation:
In this case, 51 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
51 – 10 = 41
Hence, Difference = 41.

Question 12.
86 – 10 = __________
Answer:
86 – 10 = 76.

Explanation:
In this case, 86 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
86 – 10 = 76.
Hence, Difference = 76.

Question 13.
64 – 10 = __________
Answer:
64 – 10 = 54.

Explanation:
In this case, 64 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
64 – 10 = 54.
Hence, Difference = 54.

Question 14.
97 – 10 = __________
Answer:
97 – 10 = 87.

Explanation:
In this case, 97 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
97 – 10 = 87.
Hence, Difference = 87.

Question 15.
28 – 10 = __________
Answer:
28 – 10 = 18.

Explanation:
In this case, 28 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
28 – 10 = 18.
Hence, Difference = 18.

Question 16.
73 – 10 = __________
Answer:
73 – 10 = 63.

Explanation:
In this case, 73 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
73 – 10 = 63.
Hence, Difference = 63.

Question 17.
__________ – 10 = 22
Answer:
32 – 10 = 22.

Explanation:
In this case, Missing number is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Let missing number be X.
Sum is given = 22
Now subtract:
X – 10 = 80
X = 22 + 10
X = 32.
Hence, Equation = 32 – 10 = 22 .

Question 18.
__________ – 10 = 80
Answer:
90 – 10 = 80.

Explanation:
In this case, Missing number is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Let missing number be X.
Sum is given = 80.
Now subtract :
X – 10 = 80
X = 80 + 10
X = 90.
Hence, Equation = 90 – 10 = 80.

Question 19.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 8
Answer:
94 – 10 = 84.

Explanation:
In this case, 94 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
94 – 10 = 84.
Hence, Difference = 84.
Therefore, Newton is correct.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You want to ride all 47 rides at an amusement park. You ride 10 of them. How many rides are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 9
Subtraction equation:

_________ rides.

Answer:
Number of rides left = 37.

Given:
Total number of rides you want to ride at an amusement park = 47
Number of rides you have taken out of them = 10

Explanation:
Number of rides left = Total number of rides you want to ride at an amusement park – Number of rides you have taken out of them
= 47 – 10
= 37.
Hence, Number of rides left = 37.

Show and Grow

Question 20.
You want to try all 65 flavors at a frozen yogurt shop. You try 10 of them. How many flavors are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 10
Subtraction equation:

_________ flavors.

Answer:
Number of flavors left = 55.

Given:
Total number of flavors you want to try at a frozen yogurt shop = 65
Number of flavors you have tried out of them = 10

Explanation:
Number of flavors left = Total number of flavors you want to try at a frozen yogurt shop – Number of flavors you have tried out of them
= 65 – 10
= 55
Hence,  Number of flavors left = 55.

Mental Math: 10 Less Practice 8.2

Use mental math.

Question 1.
12 – 10 = __________
Answer:
12 – 10 = 2.

Explanation:
In this case, 12 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
12 – 10 = 2.
Hence, Difference = 2.

Question 2.
49 – 10 = __________
Answer:
49 – 10 = 39.

Explanation:
In this case, 49 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
49 – 10 = 39.
Hence, Difference = 39.

Question 3.
37 – 10 = __________
Answer:
37 – 10 = 27.

Explanation:
In this case, 37 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
37 – 10 = 27.
Hence, Difference = 27.

Question 4.
26 – 10 = __________
Answer:
26 – 10 = 16.

Explanation:
In this case, 26 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
26 – 10 = 16.
Hence, Difference = 16.

Question 5.
40 – 10 = __________
Answer:
40 – 10 = 30.

Explanation:
In this case, 40 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
40 – 10 = 30.
Hence, Difference = 30.

Question 6.
62 – 10 = __________
Answer:
62 – 10 = 52.

Explanation:
In this case, 62 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
62 – 10 = 52
Hence, Difference = 52.

Question 7.
88 – 10 = __________
Answer:
88 – 10 = 78.

Explanation:
In this case, 88 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
88 – 10 = 78.
Hence, Difference =78.

Question 8.
91 – 10 = __________
Answer:
91 – 10 = 81.

Explanation:
In this case, 91 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
91 – 10 = 81.
Hence, Difference = 81.

Question 9.
54 – 10 = __________
Answer:
54 – 10 = 44

Explanation:
In this case, 54 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
54 – 10 = 44.
Hence, Difference = 44.

Question 10.
76 – 10 = __________
Answer:
76 – 10 = 66.

Explanation:
In this case, 76 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
76 – 10 = 66.
Hence, Difference = 66.

Question 11.
__________ – 10 = 15
Answer:
25 – 10 = 15

Explanation:
In this case, Missing number  is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Let missing number be X.
Sum is given = 15.
Now subtract :
X – 10 = 15
X = 15 + 10
X = 25.
Hence, Equation is 25 – 10 = 15.

Question 12.
__________ – 10 = 77
Answer:
87 – 10 = 77

Explanation:
In this case, Missing number is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Let missing number be X.
Sum is given = 77.
Now subtract :
X – 10 = 77
X = 77 + 10
X = 87.
Hence, Equation is 87 – 10 = 77.

Question 13.
__________ – 10 = 34
Answer:
44 – 10 = 34

Explanation:
In this case, Missing number is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Let missing number be X.
Sum is given = 34.
Now subtract :
X – 10 = 34
X = 34 + 10
X = 44.
Hence, Equation is 44 – 10 = 34.

Question 14.
__________ – 10 = 53
Answer:
63 – 10 = 53.

Explanation:
In this case, Missing number is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Let missing number be X.
Sum is given = 53.
Now subtract :
X – 10 = 53
X = 53 + 10
X = 63.
Hence, Equation is 63 – 10 = 53.

Question 15.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Descartes correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 11
Answer:
40 – 10 = 30

Explanation:
In this case, 40 is minuend and 10 is subtrahend.
Now subtract this two:
40 – 10 = 30.
Difference = 30.
Therefore, Descartes answer 50 is incorrect because he did not subtract the numbers instead he added the number.

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
There are 99 levels in a video game. You complete 10 of them. How many are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 12

____________ levels

Answer:
Number of games left = 89.

Given:
Total number of levels in a video game = 99
Number of games I have completed out of them = 10

Explanation:
Number of games left = Total number of levels in a video game – Number of games I have completed out of them
= 99 – 10
= 89
Hence, Number of games left = 89.

Review & Refresh

Question 17.
A group of students are at the arcade. 4 of them leave. There are 5 left. How many students were there to start?

________ students

Answer:
Total number of students were there to start = 9.

Given:
Number of students leave = 4
Number of students left = 5

Explanation:
Total number of students were there to start = Number of students leave + Number of students left
= 4 + 5
= 9
Hence, total number of students were there to start = 9.

Lesson 8.3 Add Tens

Explore and Grow

Model each problem. How are the problems alike? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 13

3 + 2 = _______

30 + 20 = _______
Answer:
3 + 2 = 5.
30 + 20 = 50.

Explanation:
A number that is added to another number is known as an addend.
1. In this case, 3 and 2 are the addends.
Sum is the result of adding two numbers.
3 + 2 = 5.
2. In this case, 30 and 20 are the addends.
Sum is the result of adding two numbers.
30 + 20 = 50.
Hence, the problem is alike in its addition process and different in its sum.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
40 + 50 = ?
____________ tens + ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 40 + 50 = ____________ .

Answer:
40 + 50 = 90.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
4 value in 40 = 4 tens
5 value in 50 = 5 tens
Add the two numbers:
=> 4 tens + 5 tens = 9 tens.
So, 40 + 50 = 90.

Question 2.
30 + 30 = ?
____________ tens + ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 30 + 30 = ____________ .

Answer:
30 + 30 = 60.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
3 value in 30 = 3 tens
3 value in 30 = 3 tens
Add the two numbers:
3 tens + 3 tens = 6 tens
So, 30 + 30 = 60.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
20 + 40 = ?
____________ tens + ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 20 + 40 = ____________ .
Answer:
20 + 40 = 60

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
2 value in 20 = 2 tens
4 value in 40 = 4 tens
Add the two numbers:
2 tens + 4 tens = 6 tens
So, 20 + 40 = 60.

Question 4.
50 + 30 = ?
____________ tens + ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 50 + 30 = ____________ .
Answer:
50 + 30 = 80.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
5 value in 50 = 5 tens
3 value in 30 = 3 tens
Add the two numbers:
5 tens + 3 tens = 8 tens
So, 50 + 30 = 80.

Question 5.
40 + 10 = _________
Answer:
40 + 10 = 50.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
4 value in 40 = 4 tens
1 value in 10 = 1 tens
Add the two numbers:
4 tens + 1 tens = 5 tens
So, 40 + 10 = 50.

Question 6.
70 + 20 = _________
Answer:
70 + 20 = 90.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
7 value in 70 = 7 tens
2 value in 20 = 2 tens
Add the two numbers:
7 tens + 2 tens = 9 tens
So, 70 + 20 = 90..

Question 7.
30 + 40 = _________
Answer:
30 + 40 = 70.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
3 value in 30 = 3 tens
4 value in 40 = 4 tens
Add the two numbers:
3 tens + 4 tens = 7 tens
So, 30 + 40 = 70.

Question 8.
20 + 60 = __________
Answer:
20 + 60 = 80.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
2 value in 20 = 2 tens
6 value in 60 = 6 tens
Add the two numbers:
2 tens + 6 tens = 8 tens
So, 20 + 60 = 80.

Question 9.
_________ + 10 = 40
Answer:
30 + 10 = 40.

Explanation:
Let the first addend be X.
Second addend given= 10
Sum is given = 40
Now add :
X + 10 = 40
X = 40 – 10
x = 30.
Hence, Equation is 30 + 10 = 40.

Question 10.
_________ + 60 = 90
Answer:
30 + 60 = 90.

Explanation:
Let the first addend be X.
Second addend given = 60
Sum is given = 90
Now add :
X + 60 = 90
X = 90 – 60
X = 30.
Hence, Equation is 30 + 60 = 90.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Which choices match the model?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 14
50                                       20 + 30
2 tens + 3 ones                  1 ten + 4 tens

Answer:
1 ten + 4 tens = 5 tens.

Explanation:
In the above picture, 5 lines are given.
Considered each line value as 10.
Here, two addends are given in each choice:
Now add this two :
1. 50
2. 20 + 30 = 50
3. 2 tens + 3 ones = 20 + 3=23
4. 1 ten + 4 tens = 5 tens
Hence, 4th choice matches the model because five lines of each value 10 = 50 not others as addition of two numbers it did not refer in the model.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

One tray has 20 meatballs. Another tray has the same number of meatballs. How many meatballs are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 15
Model:

Addition equation:

__________ meatballs

Answer:
Total number of meatballs are there in all = 40.

Given:
Number of meatballs one tray has = 20
Number of meatballs same another tray has = 20
Explanation:
Total number of meatballs are there in all =  Number of meatballs one tray has – Number of meatballs same another tray has
= 20 + 20
= 40
Hence, Total number of meatballs are there in all = 40.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
One box has 40 bags of pretzels. Another box has the same number of bags. How many bags are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 16
Model:

Addition equation:

__________ bags

Answer:
Total number of bags are there in all = 80.

Given:
Number of bags of pretzels one box has = 40
Number of bags of pretzels another box has = 40

Explanation:
Total number of bags are there in all = Number of bags of pretzels one box has + Number of bags of pretzels another box has
= 40 + 40
= 80.
Hence, Total number of bags are there in all = 80.

Add Tens Practice 8.3

Question 1.
20 + 70 = ?
____________ tens + ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 20 + 70 = ____________ .
Answer:
2tens + 7tens = 9tens
20 + 70 = 90.

Explanation:
Here place value of 2 and 7 are considered.
Add the two numbers.
2tens + 7tens = 9tens
20 + 70 = 90.

Question 2.
50 + 30 = ?
____________ tens + ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 50 + 30 = ____________ .
Answer:
5tens + 3tens = 8tens
50 + 30 = 80.

Explanation:
Here place value of 2 and 7 are considered.
Add the two numbers.
5tens + 3tens = 8tens
50 + 30 = 80.

Question 3.
60 + 20 = ___________
Answer:
6tens + 2tens = 8tens.
60 + 20 = 80.

Explanation:
Here place value of 2 and 7 are considered.
Add the two numbers.
6tens + 2tens = 8tens.
60 + 20 = 80.

Question 4.
40 + 40 = ____________
Answer:
4tens + 4tens = 8tens.
40 + 40 = 80.

Explanation:
Here place value of 4 and 4 are considered.
Add the two numbers.
4tens + 4tens = 8tens.
40 + 40 = 80.

Question 5.
__________ + 40 = 50
Answer:
1 tens + 4 tens = 5 tens.
10 + 40 = 50.

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X.
Add the numbers now.
X + 40 = 50
X = 50 – 40
X = 10
1 tens + 4 tens = 5 tens.
10 + 40 = 50.

Question 6.
___________ + 30 = 60
Answer:
3 tens + 3 tens = 6 tens.
30 + 30 = 60.

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X.
Add the numbers now.
X + 30 = 60
X = 60 – 30
X = 30
3 tens + 3 tens = 6 tens.
30 + 30 = 60.

Question 7.
___________ + 20 = 70
Answer:
5 tens + 2 tens = 7 tens.
50 + 20 = 70.

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X.
Add the numbers now.
X + 20 = 70
X = 70 – 20
X = 50
5 tens + 2 tens = 7 tens.
50 + 20 = 70.

Question 8.
_____________ + 50 = 90
Answer:
5 tens + 4 tens = 90.
50 + 40 = 90.

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X.
Add the numbers now.
X + 50 = 90
X = 90 – 50
X = 40
5 tens + 4 tens = 90.
50 + 40 = 90.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Which choices match the model?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 17
3 tens + 4 ones                   5 tens + 2 tens
60                                        30 + 40
Answer:
3 tens + 4 tens = 7 tens
5 tens + 2 tens = 7 tens

Explanation:
1. 3 tens + 4 tens = 7 tens
2. 60
3. 5 tens + 2 tens = 7 tens
4. 30 + 40 = 70
Hence, 2nd and 3rd choice matches the model because five lines of each value 10  x 7 = 70 not others as addition of two numbers it did not refer in the model.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
One magic set has 30 pieces. Another set has the same number of pieces. How many pieces are there in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 18

_____________ pieces
Answer:
Total Number of  pieces are there in all = 60.

Explanation:
Number  of pieces magic sets has = 30
Number of  pieces another magic sets has same  = 30
Total Number of  pieces are there in all = Number  of pieces magic sets has + Number of  pieces another magic sets has same
= 30 + 30
= 60.
Hence, Total Number of  pieces are there in all = 60.

Review & Refresh

Question 11.
__________ = 6 + 5
Answer:
11 = 6 + 5

Explanation:
Let the sum of addends 6 and 5 be X.
add the two numbers.
X = 6 + 5
X = 11.
Hence, 11 = 6 + 5.

Question 12.
__________ = 3 + 17
Answer:
20 = 3 + 17

Explanation:
Let the sum of addends 3 and 17 be X.
Add the two numbers.
X = 3 + 17
X = 20.
Hence, 20 = 3 + 17.

Question 13.
__________ = 11 + 5
Answer:
16 = 11 + 5.

Explanation:
Let the sum of addends 11 and 5 be X.
Add the two numbers.
X = 11 + 5
X = 16.
Hence, 16 = 11 + 5.

Question 14.
__________ = 5 + 9
Answer:
14 = 5 + 9.

Explanation:
Let the sum of addends 5 and 9 be X.
Add the two numbers.
X = 5 + 9
X = 14.
Hence, 14 = 5 + 9.

Lesson 8.4 Add Tens Using a Number Line

Explore and Grow

Write the missing numbers. How do the hops help you solve?

30 + 20 = _________

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 19

Answer:
30 + 20 = 50.

Explanation:
In math, a number line can be defined as a straight line with numbers placed at equal intervals or segments along its length.
Here, in the above picture the interval is calculated and added.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-
30 + 10 + 10
= 40 + 10
= 50 .
Hence, 30 + 20 = 50.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
50 + 40 = __________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 20
Answer:
50 + 40 = 90.

Explanation:
On the number line, give the interval of 10 for 4 times  and add them to given number.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Show and Grow1
Hence, 50 + 40 = 90.

Question 2.
60 + 20 = _____________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 21
Answer:
60 + 20 = 80

Explanation:
On the number line, give the interval of 10 for 2 times and add them to given number.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Show and Grow2
Hence, 60 + 20 = 80

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
40 + 20 = _________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 22
Answer:
40 + 20 = 60.

Explanation:
On the number line, give the interval of 10 for 2 times and add them to given number.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Show and Grow3
Hence, 40 + 20 = 60.

Question 4.
50 + 30 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 23
Answer:
50 + 30 = 80.

Explanation:
On the number line, give the interval of 10 for 3 times and add them to given number.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Show and Grow4
Hence, 50 + 30 = 80.

Question 5.
60 + 40 = __________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 23
Answer:
60 + 40 = 100.

Explanation:
On the number line, give the interval of 10 for 4 times and add them to given number.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Show and Grow5

Hence, 60 + 40 = 100.

Question 6.
20 + 50 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 23
Answer:
20 + 50 = 70.

Explanation:
On the number line, give the interval of 10 for 5 times and add them to given number.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Show and Grow6
Hence, 20 + 50 = 70.

Question 7.
MP Structure
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 24
Answer:
Equation: 70 + 10 +10 = 90.

Explanation:
On the number line, give the interval of 10 for 2 times and add them to given number.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 24

Equation:
70 + 10 +10
= 80 + 10
= 90.
Hence, Equation: 70 + 10 +10 = 90.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 20 cans. You collect 20 more cans. Your friend collects 45 cans in all. Who collects more cans?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 25
Model:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 26
Addition equation:
Compare: ___________ ○ ___________
Who collects more cans?          You          Friend

Answer:
My friend collects  5 more cans than me .

Given:
Number of cans I have = 20
Number of cans I have collected more = 20

Explanation:
Total number of cans I have in all = Number of cans I have + Number of cans I have collected more
20 + 20 = 40.
Total number of cans my friend has = 45
Difference in cans collection = Total number of cans my friend has – Total number of cans I have in all
= 45 – 40
= 5

Comparison:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life

Hence, my friend collects  5 more cans than me .

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Your class makes 62 paper airplanes. Your friend’s class makes 30 small airplanes and 30 large airplanes. Whose class makes more airplanes?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 27
Model:
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 28
Addition equation:
Compare: ___________ ○ ___________
Whose class makes more airplanes?
Your class                   Friend’s class

Answer:
Total number of paper airplanes I make are 2 more than my friends paper making airplanes.

Given:
Total number of paper airplanes I make = 62
Number of paper small airplanes my friend’s class makes = 30
Number of paper large airplanes my friend’s class makes  = 30

Explanation:
Total number of airplanes my friend’s class makes = Number of paper small airplanes my friend’s class makes + Number of paper large airplanes my friend’s class makes
= 30 + 30
= 60
Number of airplanes who makes more = Total number of paper airplanes class I makes – Total number of airplanes my friend’s class makes
=62 – 60
= 2

Comparison:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life-Show and Grow8
Hence, Total number of paper airplanes I make  2 more than my friends paper making airplanes.

Add Tens Using a Number Line Practice 8.4

Question 1.
60 + 30 = __________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 29
Answer:
60 + 30 = 90.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Practice- 8.4-1
Equation:
60+ 10 +10 +10
=70 + 10 +10
= 80 + 10
=90.

Question 2.
20 + 20 = __________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 30
Answer:
20 + 10+ 10 = 40.

Explanation:

Equation:
20 + 10+ 10
= 30 + 10
= 40.

Question 3.
30 + 70 = __________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 30
Answer:
30 + 70 = 100.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Practice- 8.4-3
Equation:
30 + 10 + 10+ 10+ 10+ 10+ 10 +10
= 40 + 10+ 10+ 10+ 10+ 10 +10
= 50 +10+ 10+ 10+ 10 +10
= 60  +10+ 10+ 10 +10
= 70 + 10 + 10 +10
= 80 + 10 +10
= 90 + 10
= 100.

Question 4.
MP Structure
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 31
Answer:
Equation:
10 + 40 = 50.

Explanation:
The number line shows the interval of 10 for 4 times.
10 + 10 + 10 + 10 +10
= 20 + 10 + 10 + 10
= 30 + 10 + 10
= 40 + 10
= 50.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You make 3 snow bricks. Your friend makes 20 small snow bricks and 30 large snow bricks. Who makes more snow bricks?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 32
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 33
Who makes more snow bricks?                You              Friend
Answer:
My friend has 47 more snow bricks than me.

Given:
Total number of snow bricks I have made = 3
Number of small snow bricks my friend has made = 20
Number of large snow bricks my friend has made = 30

Explanation:
Total number of small and large snow bricks my friend has made = Number of small snow bricks my friend has made + Number of large snow bricks my friend has made
= 20 + 30
= 50
Number of  snow bricks who makes more = Total number of small and large snow bricks my friend has made – total number of snow bricks I have made
= 50 – 3
= 47.

Comparison:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.4-Add-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Think and Grow-Modeling Real Life-Show and Grow5.
Hence, my friend has 47 more snow bricks than me.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
Get to lo to subtract.
17 – 8 = ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 34
17 – __________ = 10
10 – __________ = __________
So, 17 – 8 = __________ .
Answer:
17 – 8 = 9.

Given:
1. 17 – ____ = 10
Let the missing subtrahend be X.
Difference is given = 10
Subtract the numbers.
17 – X = 10
17 = 10 + X
17 – 10 = X
7 = X
Equation: 17 – 7 = 10.

Lesson 8.5 Subtract Tens

Explore and Grow

Model each problem. How are the problems alike? How are they different?

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 35

5 – 2 = ___________

50 – 20 = ___________
Answer:
5 – 2 = 3.
50 – 20 = 30.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 5 and the subtrahend is 2.
Now, Subtract the two numbers.
5 – 2 = 3.
Here, the minuend is 50 and the subtrahend is 20.
Now, Subtract the two numbers.
50 – 20 = 30.
Hence, the two equations are alike in the subtraction process yet different in the answers.

Show and Grow

Question 1.

70 – 30 = ?
____________ tens – ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 70 – 30 = ____________ .
Answer:
7 tens – 3 tens = 4 tens
70 – 30 = 40.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
7 value in 70 =7 tens
3 value in 30 = 3 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
7 tens – 3 tens = 4 tens
So, 70 – 30 = 40.

Question 2.
40 – 20 = __________
____________ tens – ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 40 – 20 = ____________ .
Answer:
4 tens – 2 tens = 2 tens.
40 – 20 = 20.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
4 value in 40 =4 tens
2 value in 20 = 2 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
4 tens – 2 tens = 2 tens.
So, 40 – 20 = 20.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
90 – 30 = ?
____________ tens – ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 90 – 30 = ____________ .
Answer:
9 tens – 3 tens = 6 tens.
90 – 30 = 60.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
9 value in 90 =9 tens
3 value in 30 = 3 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
9 tens – 3 tens = 6 tens.
So, 90 – 30 = 60.

Question 4.
50 – 10 = ?
____________ tens – ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 50 – 10 = ____________ .
Answer:
5 tens – 1 tens = 4 tens.
50 – 10 = 40.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
5 value in 50 = 5 tens
1 value in 10 = 1 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
5 tens – 1 tens = 4 tens.
So, 50 – 10 = 40.

Question 5.
30 – 20 = __________
Answer:
30 – 20 = 10.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
3 value in 30 = 5 tens
2 value in 20 = 2 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
3 tens – 2 tens = 1 tens.
So, 30 – 20 = 10.

Question 6.
40 – 40 = __________
Answer:
40 – 40 = 0.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
4 value in 40 = 4 tens
4 value in 40 = 4 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
4 tens – 4 tens = 0 tens.
So, 40 – 40 = 0.

Question 7.
80 – 50 = __________
Answer:
80 – 50 = 30.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
8 value in 80 = 8 tens
5 value in 50 = 5 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
8 tens – 5 tens = 3 tens.
So, 80 – 50 = 30.

Question 8.
90 – 70 = ___________
Answer:
90 – 70 = 20.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
9 value in 90 = 9 tens
7 value in 70 = 7 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
9 tens – 7 tens = 2 tens.
So, 90 – 70 = 20.

Question 9.
20 – __________ = 10
Answer:
20 – 10 = 10.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 20.
Difference is 10.
Let the subtrahend be X.
Now, subtract the numbers.
20 – X = 10.
20 = 10 + X
20 – 10 = X
10 = X.
Hence, 20 – 10 = 10.

Question 10.
50 – __________ = 20
Answer:
50 – 30 = 20.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 50.
Difference is 20.
Let the subtrahend be X.
Now, subtract the numbers.
50 – X = 20.
50 = 20 + X
50 – 20 = X
30 = X.
Hence, 50 – 30 = 20.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Which choices match the model?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 36
50 – 30                               80 – 30
5 tens – 3 tens                   8 tens – 3 tens
Answer:
8 tens – 3 tens = 5 tens.

Explanation:
In the given picture,  total there are eight lines.
Consider each line value is 10. Out of them 3 lines are removed.
=> 80 – 30 = 50.
2. 50 – 30 = 20
3. 5 tens – 3 tens = 2 tens.
4. 8 tens – 3 tens = 5 tens.
Hence, 4th equation is suitable for the model .

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have 80 math problems. You have 40 fewer spelling words. How many spelling words do you have?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 37
Model:

Subtraction equation:

______________ spelling words

Answer:
Number of spelling words I have = 40.

Explanation:
Total number of math problems I have = 80
Number of fewer spelling words = 40

Subtraction equation:
Number of spelling words do you have = Total number of math problems I have – Number of fewer spelling words
= 80 – 40
= 40.
Hence, Number of spelling words I have = 40.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
There are 60 students in a play. A football team has 30 fewer students. How many students are on the football team?
Model:

Subtraction equation:

______________ students

Answer:
Number of students on the football team = 30.

Explanation:
Total number of students in a play = 60
Number of fewer students in a football team = 30

Subtraction equation:
Number of students on the football team = Total number of students in a play – Number of fewer students in a football team
= 60 – 30
= 30
Hence, Number of students on the football team = 30.

Subtract Tens Practice 8.5

Question 1.
70 – 50 = ?
____________ tens – ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 70 – 50 = ____________ .
Answer:
70 – 50 = 20.
7 tens – 5 tens = 2 tens.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
7 value in 70 = 7 tens
5 value in 50 = 5 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
7 tens – 5 tens = 2 tens.
So, 70 – 50 = 20.

Question 2.
60 – 20 = ?
____________ tens – ____________ tens = ____________ tens
So, 60 – 20 = ____________ .
Answer:
60 – 20 = 40.
6 tens – 2 tens = 4 tens.

Explanation:
Place value is the value of each digit in a number.
6 value in 60 = 6 tens
2 value in 20 = 2 tens
Subtract the two numbers:
6 tens – 2 tens = 4 tens.
So, 60 – 20 = 40.

Question 3.
60 – 60 = __________
Answer:
60 – 60 = 0.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 60 and subtrahend is 60.
Subtract the two numbers:
60 – 60 = 0.

Question 4.
30 – 10 = ____________
Answer:
30 – 10 = 20.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 30 and subtrahend is 10.
Subtract the two numbers:
30 – 10 = 20.

Question 5.
70 – __________ = 0
Answer:
70 – 70 =0.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 70.
Let the subtrahend be X
Difference = 0.
Subtract the two numbers:
70 – X = 0
70 = 0 + X
70 – 0 = X
70 = X
Equation is 70 – 70 =0.

Question 6.
50 – ___________ = 40
Answer:
50 – 10 =40.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 50.
Let the subtrahend be X
Difference = 40.
Subtract the two numbers:
50 – X = 40
50 = 40 + X
50 – 40 = X
10 = X
Equation is 50 – 10 =40.

Question 7.
40 – ____________ = 20
Answer:
40 – 20 = 20.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 40.
Let the subtrahend be X
Difference = 20.
Subtract the two numbers:
40 – X = 20
40 = 20 + X
40 – 20 = X
20 = X
Equation is 40 – 20 = 20.

Question 8.
90 – ____________ = 50
Answer:
90 – 40 =50.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 90.
Let the subtrahend be X
Difference = 50.
Subtract the two numbers:
90 – X = 50
90 = 50 + X
90 – 50 = X
40 = X
Equation is 90 – 40 =50.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Which choices match the model?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 38
9o – 50                          40 – 50
4 tens – 5 ones              9 tens – 5 tens
Answer:
9 tens – 5 tens = 4 tens.

Explanation:
In the given picture,  total there are nine lines.
Consider each line value is 10. Out of them 5 lines are removed.
=> 9 tens – 5 tens = 4 tens
2. 90 – 50 = 40
3. 40 – 50 = -10
4. 4 tens – 5 ones = 40 + 5 = 45.
Hence, out of four choices, the first choice is correct for the model than other three equations.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
There are 40 chairs in the library. There are 30 fewer tables than chairs. How many tables are there?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 39

___________ tables
Answer:
Number of tables are there = 10.

Explanation:
Total number of chairs in a library = 40
Number of fewer tables than chairs = 30
Number of tables are there = Total number of chairs in a library – Number of fewer tables than chairs
= 40 – 30
= 10.
Hence, Number of tables are there = 10.

Review & Refresh

Question 11.
11 – 7 = ____________
Answer:
11 – 7 = 4

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 17 and subtrahend is 7.
Subtract the two numbers:
11 – 7 = 4
Hence, 11 – 7 = 4.

Question 12.
16 – 8 = ____________
Answer:
16 – 8 = 8.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 16 and subtrahend is 8.
Subtract the two numbers:
16 – 8 = 8.
Hence, 16 – 8 = 8.

Question 13.
15 – 8 = ____________
Answer:
15 – 8 = 7.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 15 and subtrahend is 8.
Subtract the two numbers:
15 – 8 = 7.
Hence, 15 – 8 = 7.

Question 14.
18 – 9 = ____________
Answer:
18 – 9 = 9.

Explanation:
Here, the minuend is 18 and subtrahend is 9.
Subtract the two numbers:
18 – 9 = 9.
Hence, 18 – 9 = 9.

Lesson 8.6 Subtract Tens Using a Number Line

Explore and Grow

Write the missing numbers. How do the hops help you solve?

40 – 20 = ___________

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 40
Answer:
40 – 20 = 20.

Explanation:
In math, a number line can be defined as a straight line with numbers placed at equal intervals or segments along its length.
Here, we need to represent 20 subtracted from 40.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.6-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number- Line1

Show and Grow

Question 1.
80 – 50 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 41
Answer:
80 – 50 = 30.

Explanation:
Here, we need to represent 50 subtracted from 80.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.6-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number- Line2

Question 2.
70 – 30 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 42
Answer:
70 – 30 = 40.

Explanation:
Here, we need to represent 30 subtracted from 70.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.6-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number- Line-Show and Grow2

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
60 – 20 = __________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 43
Answer:
60 – 20 = 40.

Explanation:
Here, we need to represent 20 subtracted from 60.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.6-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number- Line-Apply-and- Grow-Practice3

Question 4.
40 – 30 = ____________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 44
Answer:
40 – 30 = 10.

Explanation:
Here, we need to represent 30 subtracted from 40.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.6-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number- Line-Apply-and-Grow-Practice4

Question 5.
90 – 40 = ____________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 44
Answer:
90 – 40 = 50.

Explanation:
Here, we need to represent 40 subtracted from 90.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.6-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number- Line-Apply-and-Grow-Practice5

Question 6.
90 – 70 = ____________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 44
Answer:
90 – 70 = 20.

Explanation:
Here, we need to represent 70 subtracted from 90.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.6-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number- Line-Apply-and-Grow-Practice6

Question 7.
MP Structure
Write the equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 45
Answer:
80 – 40 = 40

Explanation:
80 – 10 -10 – 10 -10
= 70 -10 – 10 -10
= 60 – 10 -10
= 50 -10
= 40.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You have a bucket of 80 golf balls. You hit 60 of them. Your friend has 28 golf balls left. Who has more golf balls left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 46
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 47
Subtraction equation:
Compare: __________ ○ ___________
Who has more golf balls left?               You               Friend
Answer:
My friend has left 8 golf balls more than me.

Given:
Total number of golf balls I have = 80
Number of golf balls I hit out of them = 60
Explanation:
Number of gold balls I left = Total number of golf balls I have – Number of golf balls I hit out of them
= 80 – 60
= 20
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Think and Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Number of golf balls my friend left = 28
Comparison:
Number of golf balls who left more = Number of golf balls my friend left –  Number of gold balls I left
= 28 – 20
= 8.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.6-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number- Line-Think and Grow-Modeling-Real-Life
Hence, my friend has left 8 golf balls more than me.

Show and Grow

Question 8.
Pack A has 50 batteries. 40 of them have been used. Pack B has 15 batteries. Which pack has more bafferies left?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 48
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 49
Subtraction equation:
Compare: __________ ○ ___________
Who has more golf balls left?             Pack A              Pack B
Answer:
5 batteries are left more in pack B than pack A.

Given:
Total number of batteries in pack A has= 50
Number of batteries used in pack A = 40
Total number of batteries in pack B has = 15
Explanation:
Number of batteries left in pack A = Total number of batteries in pack A has – Number of batteries used in pack A
= 50 – 40
= 10.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-8.6-Show-and-Grow-8.
Comparison:
Number of batteries which pack has left more = Total number of batteries in pack B has – Number of batteries left in pack A
= 15 – 10
= 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-8.6-Show-and-Grow8
Hence,5 batteries are left more in pack B than pack A.

Subtract Tens Using a Number Line Practice 8.6

Question 1.
50 – 30 = _____________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 50
Answer:
50 – 30 = 20.

Explanation:
Here, we need to represent 30 subtracted from 50.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Practice-8.6.1

Question 2.
80 – 60 = ____________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 51
Answer:
80 – 60 = 20.

Explanation:
Here, we need to represent 60 subtracted from 80.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Practice-8.6.2

Question 3.
90 – 20 = ____________
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 51
Answer:
90 – 20 = 70.

Explanation:
Here, we need to represent 20 subtracted from 90.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number-Line-Practice-8.6.3

Question 4.
MP Structure
Write the equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 52
Answer:
60 – 50 = 10.

Explanation:
Here we need to subtract 10 5times from 60.
60 – 10 -10 -10 -10 -10
= 50 -10 -10 -10 -10
=  40 – 10 -10 -10
= 30 – 10 -10
= 20 – 10
= 10.

Question 5.
Modeling Real Life
You have 80 raffle tickets and give away 30 of them. Your friend has 47 raffle tickets. Who has more raffle tickets?
Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 53

Big Ideas Math Answers 1st Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 54

Who has more raffle tickets? You Friend

Answer:
I have 5 raffle tickets more than my friend.

Given:
Total number of raffle tickets = 80
Number of raffle tickets I gave away = 30
Explanation:
Number of raffle tickets I have now = Total number of raffle tickets – Number of raffle tickets I gave away
= 80 -30
= 50
Number of raffles tickets my friend has = 47

Comparison:
Number of raffle ticket who has more = Number of raffle tickets I have now – Number of raffles tickets my friend has
= 50 – 47
= 3
Hence, I have 5 raffle tickets more than my friend.

Review & Refresh

Question 6.
13 – 8 = ?
Think 8 + __________ = 13.
So, 13 – 8 = __________ .
Answer:
13 – 8 = 5.

Explanation:
Think 8 + ____5______ = 13.
So, 13 – 8 = ___5_______ .

Question 7.
15 – 7 = ?
Think 7 + _________ = 15
So, 15 – 7 = ____________ .
Answer:
15 – 7 = 8.

Explanation:
Think 7 + ____8_____ = 15
So, 15 – 7 = ______8______ .

Lesson 8.7 Use Addition to Subtract Tens

Explore and Grow

Complete each equation. What do you notice?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 55
Answer:
20 + 50 = 70
50 – 20 = 30.

Explanation:
Here, for number 20 we are adding 5 times 10.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.7-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens

Here, we are subtracting 20 from number 50.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.7-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
90 – 70 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 56
Think 70 + _________ = 90
So, 90 – 70 = _________ .
Answer:
90 – 70 = 20.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.7-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Show and Grow1
Think 70 + ____20_____ = 90
So, 90 – 70 = ___20______ .

Question 2.
60 – 30 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 57
Think 30 + _________ = 60
So, 60 – 30 = _________ .
Answer:
60 – 30 = 30.

Explanation:

Think 30 + __30___ = 60
So, 60 – 30 =____30___.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Question 3.
50 – 30 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 58
Think 30 + _________ = 50
So, 50 – 30 = _________ .
Answer:
50 – 30 = 20.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.7-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Apply-and-Grow-Practice3
Think 30 + __20_______ = 50
So, 50 – 30 = ___20______ .

Question 4.
70 – 20 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 59
Think 20 + _________ = 70
So, 70 – 20 = _________ .
Answer:
70 – 20 = 50.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.7-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Apply-and-Grow-Practice4

Think 20 + ____50_____ = 70
So, 70 – 20 = __50_______ .

Question 5.
90 – 50 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 59
Think 50 + _________ = 90
So, 90 – 50 = _________ .
Answer:
90 – 50 = 40.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.7-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Apply-and-Grow-Practice5
Think 50 + _____40____ = 90
So, 90 – 50 = _____40____ .

Question 6.
MP Structure
Match the related addition and subtraction equations.
60 + 10 = 70                      70 – 50 = 20
50 + 10 = 60                      70 – 60 = 10
50 + 20 = 70                      60 – 50 = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson 8.7-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-MP Structure6
Explanation:
60 + 10 = 70 and 70 – 60 = 10 are related addition and subtraction equations because both deals with 60, 10 and 70.
50 + 10 = 60 and 60 – 50 = 10 are related addition and subtraction equations because both deals with 60, 10 and 50.
50 + 20 = 70 and 70 – 50 = 20 are related addition and subtraction equations because both deals with 70, 20 and 50.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

A dentist has 40 toothbrushes. She gives away 20 of them. How many toothbrushes does she have left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 60
Model:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 61
Subtraction equation:

______________ toothbrushes
Answer:
Number of tooth brushes left = 20.

Explanation:
Total number of tooth brushes a dentist has = 40
Number of tooth brushes gave away = 20
Number of tooth brushes left = Total number of tooth brushes a dentist has – Number of tooth brushes gave away
= 40 – 20
= 20
Hence, Number of tooth brushes left = 20.

Show and Grow

Question 7.
An art room has 70 bottles of glitter. 30 have been used. How many bottles are left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 62
Model:

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 61
Subtraction equation:

______________ bottles
Answer:
Number of bottles of glitter left = 40.

Explanation:
Total number bottles of glitter in an art room = 70
Number of  bottles of glitter used = 30
Number of bottles of glitter left = Total number bottles of glitter in an art room – Number of  bottles of glitter used
= 70 – 30
= 40.
Hence, Number of bottles of glitter left = 40.

Use Addition to Subtract Tens Practice 8.7

Question 1.
70 – 40 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 63
Think 40 + __________ = 70
So, 70 – 40 = _________ .
Answer:
70 – 40 = 30.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Practice 8.7.1
Think 40 + ____30______ = 70
So, 70 – 40 = ___30______ .

Question 2.
90 – 30 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 64
Think 60 + __________ = 90
So, 90 – 30 = _________ .
Answer:
90 – 30 = 60.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Practice 8.7.2

Think 60 + _____30_____ = 90
So, 90 – 30 = ____60_____ .

Question 3.
MP Structure
Match the related addition and subtraction equations.
30 + 10 = 40                  50 – 40 = 10
40 + 10 = 50                  50 – 30 = 20
30 + 20 = 50                  40 – 30 = 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Practice-MP Structure-3

Explanation:
30 + 10 = 40 and 40 – 30 = 10 are related addition and subtraction equations because both deals with 40, 10 and 30.
40 + 10 = 50 and 50 – 40 = 10 are related addition and subtraction equations because both deals with 40, 10 and 50.
30 + 20 = 50 and 50 – 30 = 20 are related addition and subtraction equations because both deals with 30, 20 and 50.

Question 4.
Modeling Real Life
Newton has 80 newspapers to deliver. He delivers 50 of them. How many newspapers does he have left?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 65

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 66

______________ newspapers
Answer:
Number of newspapers left = 30.

Explanation:
Total number of newspapers to deliver = 80
Number of newspapers delivered = 50
Number of newspapers left = Total number of newspapers to deliver – Number of newspapers delivered
= 80 – 50
= 30.
Hence, Number of newspapers left = 30.

Review & Refresh

Question 5.
Make quick sketches to compare the numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 67
Answer:
43 > 34.
34 < 43.

Explanation:
43 is greater than 34.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Practice-5-
34 is lesser than 43.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Practice-5-

Lesson 8.8 Add Tens to a Number

Explore and Grow

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 68

15 + 10 = ________               27 + 10 = __________
15 + 20 = ________               27 + 20 = __________
15 + 30 = ________               27 + 30 = __________
Answer:
15 + 10 = ___25_____               27 + 10 = ___37_______
15 + 20 = ___35_____               27 + 20 = ____47______
15 + 30 = _____45___               27 + 30 = ___57_______

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.8-Add-Tens-to-a-Number-Explore and Grow

Show and Grow

Question 1.
23 + 50 = ____________
Answer:
23 + 50 =  73.

Question 2.
6 + 70 = ____________
Answer:
6 + 70 = 76.

Apply and Grow: practice

Question 3.
27 + 40 = ____________
Answer:
27 + 40 = 67.

Question 4.
8 + 80 = ____________
Answer:
8 + 80 = 88.

Question 5.
60 + 35 = ____________
Answer:
60 + 35 =  95.

Question 6.
30 + 44 = ____________
Answer:
30 + 44 = 74.

Question 7.
____________ = 33 + 20
Answer:
53 = 33 + 20.

Question 8.
____________ = 70 + 22
Answer:
92= 70 + 22.

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Newton correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 69
Answer:
36 +50 = 86.
Newton is correct.

Explanation:
36 +50 = 86.
Hence, Newton is correct because the addition of both the addends is correct.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You count 8 birds on your way to school. You count 40 more on your way home. Your friend counts 45 birds in all. Who counts more birds?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 70
Model:

Addition equation:

Compare: ___________ ○ ____________

Who counts more birds?            You             Friend

Answer:
I have counted 3 birds more than my friend.

Explanation:
Number of birds I counted on the way to school = 8
Number of birds I counted more on your way home = 40
Total number of birds my friend counts in all = 45
Total number of birds I counted in all = Number of birds I counted on the way to school – Number of birds I counted more on your way home
= 8 + 40
= 48.

Comparison:
Number of birds who counted more = Total number of birds I counted in all – Total number of birds my friend counts in all
= 48 – 45
= 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-8.6-Show-and-Grow8--and-Grow-Real-Life

Hence, I have counted 3 birds more than my friend.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You make 21 snowballs. Your friend makes 11 small snowballs and 20 large snowballs. Who makes more snowballs?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 71
Model:

Addition equation:

Compare: ___________ ○ ____________

Who counts more birds?          You      Friend
Answer:
Number of snow balls who made more = 10.

Explanation:
Total number of snow balls I made = 21
Total number of small snow balls my friend made =11
Total number of large snow balls my friend made = 20
Total number of snow balls my friend made = Total number of small snow balls my friend made + Total number of large snow balls my friend made
= 11 + 20
= 31

Comparison:
Number of snow balls who made more = Total number of snow balls my friend made – Total number of snow balls I made
=  31 – 21
= 10.
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-8.6-Show and Grow10
Hence, the Number of snow balls who made more = 10.

Add Tens to a Number Practice 8.8

Question 1.
19 + 40 = __________
Answer:
19 + 40 = 59.

Question 2.
60 + 23 = __________
Answer:
60 + 23 = 83.

Question 3.
__________ = 5 + 90
Answer:
95 = 5 + 90.

Question 4.
__________ = 37 + 30
Answer:
67 = 37 + 30.

Question 5.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Is Descartes correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 72
Answer:
Descartes is incorrect.

Explanation:
46 + 20 = 66.
Hence, Descartes is incorrect because he did not do the addition correctly.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You have 24 glow sticks and buy 40 more. Your friend has 66 glow sticks. Who has more glow sticks?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 73

Who has more glow sticks?                 You             Friend

Answer:
My friend has 2 glow sticks more than me.

Explanation:
Number of glow sticks I have = 24
Number of glow sticks I have purchased more = 40
Total number of glow sticks I have = Number of glow sticks I have + Number of glow sticks I have purchased more
= 24 + 40
= 64
Number of  glow sticks my friend has = 66
Comparison:
Number of  glow sticks who has more = Number of  glow sticks my friend has – Total number of glow sticks I have
= 66 – 64
= 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-8.6-Show and Grow-Modeling Real Life6
Hence, my friend has 2 glow sticks more than me.

Review & Refresh

Question 7.
Circle the solid shapes that stack.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 74

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Lesson-8.8-Add-Tens-to-a-Number-Review & Refresh7

Explanation:
In Geometry, Solids are three-dimensional shapes because they have three dimensions such as length, breadth and height. The bodies which occupy space are called solids.
here in the above picture, cone , cylinder ,cube are solid shapes that stack not sphere shape ball.

Add and Subtract Tens Performance Task

Question 1.
The tables show the numbers of seconds 3 pinwheels and 3 fops spin.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 75

a. How many more seconds does the yellow top spin than the red pinwheel?
__________ seconds
Answer:
Number of more seconds the yellow top spin than the red pinwheel taken = 50.

Explanation:
Number of seconds red pinwheel taken =  40
Number of seconds yellow pinwheel taken = 90
Number of more seconds the yellow top spin than the red pinwheel taken = Number of seconds red pinwheel taken – Number of seconds yellow pinwheel taken
= 90 – 40
= 50.
Hence, Number of more seconds the yellow top spin than the red pinwheel taken = 50.

b. The red pinwheel spins 30 fewer seconds than the red top. How long does the red top spin?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 76
__________ seconds
Answer:
The number of seconds the red top taken = 70.

Explanation:
Number of seconds the red pinwheels spins = 40
Let the number of seconds the red top taken be X
The number of seconds the red top taken – 30 =  Number of seconds the red pinwheels spins
(The red pinwheel spins 30 fewer seconds than the red top)
=>  X – 30 = 40
=> X = 40 + 30
=> X = 70
Hence, The number of seconds the red top taken = 70.

c. The blue pinwheel and the blue top spin for 96 seconds in all. How long does the blue pinwheel spin?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 77
__________ seconds
Answer:
Number of seconds blue  pinwheel spin taken = 60.

Explanation:
Number of seconds blue top spin taken = 36
Total number of seconds the blue pinwheel and the blue top spins = 96
Number of seconds blue pinwheel spin taken = Number of seconds blue top spin taken – Total number of seconds the blue pinwheel and the blue top spins
= 96 – 36
= 60.
Hence, Number of seconds blue pinwheel spin taken = 60.

d. Which pinwheel spins the longest?
Red                     Yellow                   Blue
Answer:
The yellow pinwheel spins the longest than other pinwheels.

Explanation:
Number of seconds blue pinwheel spin taken = 60
Number of seconds yellow pinwheel spin taken = 90
Number of seconds red pinwheel spin taken = 40
Among, the three pinwheels, the yellow pinwheel spins the longest than other pinwheels.

Add and Subtract Tens Chapter Practice

Mental Math: 10 More Homework & Practice 8.1

Use mental math.

Question 1.
58 + 10 = ___________
Answer:
58 + 10 = 68.

Question 2.
15 + 10 = ___________
Answer:
15 + 10 = 25.

Question 3.
29 + 10 = ___________
Answer:
29 + 10 = 39.

Question 4.
41 + 10 = ___________
Answer:
41 + 10 = 51.

Question 5.
10 + 7 = ___________
Answer:
10 + 7 =  17.

Question 6.
10 + 36 = ___________
Answer:
10 + 36 = 46.

Question 7.
84 + ___________ = 94
Answer:
84 + 10= 94

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X.
Add the addends.
84 + X = 94
X = 94 – 84
X = 10.

Question 8.
47 + ___________ = 57
Answer:
47 + 10 = 57.
Explanation:
Let the missing number be X.
add the addends.
47 + X = 57
X = 57 – 47
X =10.

Mental Math: 10 Less Homework & Practice 8.2

Use mental math.

Question 9.
24 – 10 = ___________
Answer:
24 – 10 = 14.

Question 10.
78 – 10 = ___________
Answer:
78 – 10 =  68.

Question 11.
31 – 10 = ___________
Answer:
31 – 10 = 21.

Question 12.
95 – 10 = ___________
Answer:
95 – 10 = 85.

Question 13.
___________ – 10 = 7
Answer:
17 – 10 = 7.

Explanation:
Let the Missing minuend be X.
Subtrahend = 10
Difference = 7
Subtract the numbers:
X – 10 = 7
X = 7 + 10
X = 17.
Hence, 17 – 10 = 7.

Question 14.
___________ – 10 = 43
Answer:
53 – 10 = 43.

Explanation:
Let the Missing minuend be X.
Subtrahend = 10
Difference = 43
Subtract the numbers:
X – 10 = 43
X = 43 + 10
X = 53.
Hence, 53 – 10 = 43.

Add Tens Homework & Practice 8.3

Question 15.
60 + 20 = ?
__________ tens + ___________ tens = ___________ tens
So, 60 + 20 = ___________ .
Answer:
60 + 20 = 80.

Explanation:
_______6___ tens + _______2____ tens = ______8_____ tens
So, 60 + 20 = _____80______ .

Question 16.
30 + 50 = ___________
Answer:
30 + 50 = 80.

Question 17.
___________ + 30 = 90
Answer:
60 + 30 = 90.

Explanation:
Let the missing addend be X.
sum = 90
Add the numbers
X + 30= 90
X = 90  – 30
X = 60.
Hence, 60 + 30 = 90.

Add Tens Using a Number Line Homework & Practice 8.4

Question 18.
50 + 40 = ___________
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 78
Answer:
50 + 40 = 90.

Explanation:

Question 19.
MP Structure
Write an equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 79
Answer:
Equation:
20 + 30 =50.

Explanation:
20 + 10 +10 +10
= 30 +10 +10
= 40 + 10
= 50.

Subtract Tens Homework & Practice 8.5

Question 20.
90 – 40 = ?
__________ tens – ___________ tens = ___________ tens
So, 90 – 40 = ___________ .
Answer:
90 – 40 = 50.

Explanation:
___9__tens – __4_____ tens = ______5_____ tens
So, 90 – 40 = _50__________ .

Question 21.
70 – 40 = ___________
Answer:
70 – 40 = 20.

Question 22.
80 – __________ = 60
Answer:
80 – 20 = 60.

Explanation:
Let the missing number be X.
Add the addends.
80 – X = 60
80 = 60 + X
80 – 60 = X
20 = X.

Subtract Tens Using a Number Line Homework & Practice 8.6

Question 23.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 80
60 – 40 = __________
Answer:
60 – 40 = 20.

Explanation:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Subtract-Tens-Using-a-Number- Line- Homework & Practice 8.6.23

Question 24.
MP Structure
Write the equation that matches the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 81
Answer:
Equation: 70 –  20 = 50.

Explanation:
Number line representation :
70 – 10 -10
= 60 -10
= 50.

Use Addition to Subtract Tens Homework & Practice 8.7

Question 25.
80 – 60 = ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 82
Think 60 + __________ = 80
So, 80 – 60 = __________ .
Answer:
80 – 60 = 20.

Explanation:

Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-1-Chapter 8-Add-and-Subtract-Tens-Use-Addition-to-Subtract-Tens-Homework- &- Practice 8.7-25
Think 60 + ____20______ = 80
So, 80 – 60 = _____20_____ .

Question 26.
Modeling Real Life
A mail carrier has 90 packages to deliver. She delivers 60 of them. How many packages are left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 83
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 1 Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens 84

______________ packages
Answer:
Number of packages left = 30.

Explanation:
Number of packages are there for deliver = 90
number of packages she delivered = 60
Number of packages left = Number of packages are there for deliver – number of packages she delivered
= 90 – 60
= 30.
Hence, Number of packages left = 30.

Add Tens to a Number Homework & Practice 8.8

Question 27.
27 + 50 = ____________
Answer:
27 + 50 = 77.

Question 28.
_____________ = 80 + 12
Answer:
92 = 80 + 12.

Conclusion:

You can know how to use the number line in a simple method from our Big Ideas Math Book 1st Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Add and Subtract Tens. Learn the fundamentals of maths like addition and subtraction from this page. Bookmark our page to get the Answer Key of all Big Ideas Math Grade 1 Chapters from 1 to 14.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14

Understand the concept of Two-Dimensional Shapes with the help of Big Ideas Math Grade 4 Answer Key Chapter 14. The lesson Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes involves line symmetry, symmetric shapes, Classify Quadrilaterals, Classify Triangles, and so on. We have provided a clear cut explanation for all the questions topic wise. Thus Download Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes pdf for free.

Big Ideas Math Book 4th Grade Answer Key Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes

Quick learning is possible with the clear explanations of Grade 4 Chapter 14 Answer Key. So, instantly start your practicing now and strengthen the knowledge. Complete concepts are solved with simple steps included in the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes. Tap the below-attached links and improve your math skills.

Lesson: 1 Line Symmetry

Lesson: 2 Draw Symmetric Shapes

Lesson: 3 Classify Triangles by Sides

Lesson: 4 Classify Triangles by Angles

Lesson: 5 Classify Quadrilaterals

Performance Task

Lesson 14.1 Line Symmetry

Explore and Grow

How many ways can you fold the Letter X so that the two parts match exactly? Draw models to support your Answer:
2 ways as shown in the below diagram.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 1

Structure
What other letters can you fold so that the two parts match exactly? Draw models to support your answer. Compare your models with a partner.
Answer:
The letter W can be folded. Both the letters formed after folding will be the same.

Think and Grow:

A shape has line symmetry when it can be folded on a line so that two parts match exactly. The fold line is called a line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 2
Example
Determine whether the shape has line symmetry.

The shape can be folded so that two parts match exactly.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 3
The shape has __4_ lines of symmetry.
So, the shape ___ line symmetry.

Example
Determine whether the shape has line symmetry.
The shape cannot be folded so that two parts match exactly.
The shape has ___ lines of symmetry.
So, the shape ___ line symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 4

Show and Grow

Determine whether the line is a line of symmetry.
We say there is symmetry when the exact reflection or mirror image of a line, shape or object gets created.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 5
Answer:
No, because it’s not dividing the figure into identical Halves.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 6
Answer:
Yes, divides it into identical halves.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 7
Answer:
Yes, divides it into identical halves.

Determine whether the shape has line symmetry. Draw each line of symmetry

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 8
Answer:
Yes, divides it into identical halves.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 9
Answer:
Yes,divides it into identical halves.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 10
Answer:
No, As it cannot divide the shape into identical halves.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Determine whether the shape has line symmetry. Draw each line of symmetry.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 11
Answer:
No, as it is a scalene triangle with different sides.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 12
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 13
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 14
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 15
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 16
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 13.
Structure
Create a three-digit number that has a line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 17
Answer:

Question 14.
Writing
How can you tell when a line is not a line of symmetry?
Answer:
The line of symmetry can be defined as the axis or imaginary line that passes through the center of the shape or object and divides it into identical halves.
When the line of symmetry doesn’t divide the shape into identical halves then it is not a line of symmetry.

Question 15.q
DIG DEEPER!
Draw four lines of symmetry for the circle. Can you draw more lines of symmetry? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 18
Answer:
Yes.Circle has infinite lines of symmetry.
Since there are an infinite number of lines through the center, the circle has an infinite number of lines of symmetry. … This means that the parts of the circle on each side of the line  must  have the same area. So a line of symmetry divides the circle into two parts with equal area.

Think and Grow:Modeling Real Life

Example
Divide the archery target into multiple sections using each of its lines of symmetry. An archer gets 2 arrows in each section. How many arrows does the archer get on the target? Draw each line of symmetry on the target.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 19
The target has _4__ lines of symmetry.
Count the sections.
The lines of symmetry divide the target into _8__ sections.
The archer gets 2 arrows in each section, so multiply the number of sections by 2.
_8__ × _2_ = 16
So, the archer gets _16__ arrows on the target.
Answer:
16.

Show and Grow

Question 16.
Divide the soccer field into multiple sections using each of its lines of symmetry. At the start of the game, there are 3 players in each section. How many players are on the field?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 20
Answer:
Number of players in each section = 3
Number of sections = 6.
Total number of players = Number of sections x Number of players in each section
= 3 X 6. = 18 players.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend folds a rectangular sheet of paper in half horizontally, and then in half again vertically. She then draws the shape shown on the folded paper, cuts it out, and then unfolds it. How many lines of symmetry does your friend’s cutout have? Explain.
Answer:
The rectangle paper is folded into 4 small rectangle.
Then the rectangle is cut it out. it means 2 side edges cuts.
Two rectangles with adjacent are left.
lines of symmetry does your friend’s cutout = 2.

Line Symmetry Homework & Practice 14.1

Determine whether the shape has line symmetry.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 21
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 22
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 23
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Determine whether the line is a line of symmetry. Draw each line of symmetry.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 24
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 25
Answer:
NO, as the line of symmetry cannot divide it into identical halves.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 26
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 27
Answer:
No, as the line of symmetry cannot divide it into identical halves.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 28
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 29
Answer:
Yes, as the line of symmetry divides it into identical halves.

Question 10.
Precision
Which figure correctly shows all the lines of symmetry of a square?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 30
Answer:
Figure 4

Question 11.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend says the shape has exactly three lines of symmetry. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 31
Answer:
No
Explanation:
A regular hexagon with six equal sides has six lines of symmetry.
For all regular polygons, the number of lines of symmetry is equal to the number of sides.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
Divide the tennis court into multiple sections using each of its lines of symmetry. There are 4 players on the court with an equal number of players in each section. How many players are in each section?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 32
Answer:
Number of players = 4.
Number of sections= 2.
Number of players in each section = 4 /2=2.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
In art class, you are making a black and white art piece. Your teacher says it has to have exactly 1 line of diagonal symmetry. Shade the square below to show what the art piece could look like.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 33
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Question 14.
\(\frac{8}{12}\)
Answer:
8/12=2/3=0.66

Question 15.
\(\frac{5}{100}\)
Answer:
5/100=0.05

Lesson 14.2 Draw Symmetric Shapes

Explore and Grow

You want to create a mask that has at least 1 line of symmetry. Does either mask meet your requirement? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 34
Answer:

Complete the mask below so that it has 1 line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 35
Answer:

Reasoning
When given one half of a figure and a line of symmetry, how can you draw the other half of the figure? Explain.
Answer:
Line symmetry and mirror reflection are naturally related and linked to each other.Mirror image of the given image helps to draw the other half of the figure.

Think and Grow: Draw Symmetric Shapes

Example
One half of a symmetric shape is shown. Draw the rest of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 36

One way: Draw a line of Symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 37
Draw the other half of the shape on the opposite side of the line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 38

Another Way: Draw a different line of symmetry
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 39
Draw the other half of the shape on the opposite side of the line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 40
Answer:

Show and Grow

Question 1.
One half of a shape and a line of symmetry are shown. Draw the rest of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 400
Answer:

Question 2.
One half of a symmetric shape is shown. Draw the rest of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 41
Answer:

Apply and Grow: Practice

One half of a symmetric shape is shown. Draw the rest of the shape.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 42
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 43
Answer:

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 44
Answer:

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 45
Answer:

Question 7.
Reasoning
Draw a shape that has exactly one line symmetry. Draw the line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 46
Answer:

Question 8.

YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend draws the other half of the shape on the opposite side of the line of symmetry. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 47
Answer:
Yes,The line of symmetry can be defined as the axis or imaginary line that passes through the center of the shape or object and divides it into identical halves.
As per above figure both are two identical halves.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A rokkaku is a six-sided Japanese kite. One half of a symmetric rokkaku and a line of symmetry are shown. Draw the rest of the kite. Then draw each additional line of symmetry, if any.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 48
Draw the other half of the rokkaku on the opposite side of the line of symmetry.
The rokkaku can also be folded in half vertically so that two parts match exactly. So, draw a vertical line of symmetry.

Show and Grow

Question 9.
The Jamaican flag is symmetric. One half of the flag and a line of symmetry are shown. Draw the rest of the flag. Then draw each additional line of symmetry, if any.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 49
Answer:

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
A symmetric quilt is folded in half horizontally, and then in half again vertically. The folded quilt and fold lines are shown. Draw the unfolded quilt. Then draw each line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 50
Answer:

Draw Symmetric Shapes Homework & Practice 14.2

Example
One half of a symmetric shape is shown. Draw the rest of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 51

One Way: Draw a line symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 52
Draw the other half of the shape on the opposite side of the line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 53
Another Way: Draw a different line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 54
Drawthe other half of the shape on the opposite side of the line of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 55

Question 1.
One half of a shape and a line of symmetry are shown. Draw the rest of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 56
Answer:

Question 2.
One half of a symmetric shape is shown. Draw the rest of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 57
Answer:

One half of a symmetric shape is shown. Draw the rest of the shape.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 58
Answer:

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 59
Answer:

Question 5.
Structure
Draw a shape that has 5 sides and exactly 1 line of symmetry.
Answer:

Question 6.
One fourth of a shape and two lines of symmetry are shown. Draw the rest of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 60
Answer:

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
The flag of the Bahamas is symmetric. One half of the flag and a line of symmetry are shown. Draw the rest of the flag. Then draw each additional line of symmetry, if any.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 61
Answer:
No other line of symmetry is possible.

Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
Snowflakes are symmetric. One half of a snowflake and a line of symmetry are shown. Draw the rest of the snowflake. Then draw each additional line of symmetry, if any.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 62
Answer:

Review & Refresh

Find the equivalent weight.

Question 9.
2T = lb
Answer:
1Ton =2,000 pounds
2Ton =4,000 pounds

Question 10.
15lb = ___oz
Answer:
1pound = 16 ounce
15lb = 240 oz

Lesson 4.3 Classify Triangles by Sides

Explore and Grow

Sort the triangles into two or more groups using their side lengths. Explain how you sorted the triangles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 63
Answer:
Triangle A = Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has both two equal sides.
Triangle B = Scalene Triangle- no sides with same length
Triangle C -Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has both two equal sides.
Triangle D-Scalene Triangle- no sides with same length
Triangle E – Equilateral Triangle – All sides equal.
Triangle F – Equilateral Triangle – All sides equal.

Structure
Can you draw a triangle that does belong in any of your groups above? Explain.

Think and Grow: Classify Triangles by Sides

Triangles can be classified by their sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 64
Answer:

Example
Classify the triangle by its sides.
The triangle has _2_ sides with the same length.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 66
So, it is an ___ triangle.
Answer:
Isosceles Triangle.

Show and Grow

Classify the triangle by its sides.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 401

Answer:
Scalene Triangle-no sides with same length

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 402

Answer:
Equilateral Triangle – All sides equal.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 403

Answer:
Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has both two equal sides.

Question 4.
Use the triangular grid to draw any triangle. Classify the triangle by its sides
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 67
Answer:
It is Equilateral triangle with all sides equal.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Classify the triangle by its sides.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 68
Answer:
Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has both two equal sides.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 69
Answer:
Scalene Triangle-no sides with same length

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 70
Answer:
Equilateral Triangle – All sides equal.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 71
Answer:
Scalene Triangle-no sides with same length

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 72
Answer:
Equilateral Triangle – All sides equal.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 73
Answer:
Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has both two equal sides.

Question 11.
Draw a triangle that has three lines of symmetry. Classify the triangle by its sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 74
Answer:
Equilateral Triangle – All sides equal.It has 3 lines of symmentry.

Question 12.
Draw a triangle that has no sides with the same length. Classify the triangle by its sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 75
Answer:

Question 13.
Reasoning
How many lines of symmetry does a scalene triangle have? Explain.
Answer:
A scalene triangle have is zero lines of symmetry
Explanation:
It has no equal sides and no equal angles.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
Write an addition equation and a multiplication equation for the perimeter, P, of the triangle
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 76
Answer:
if a triangle has sides a, b, and c, then the perimeter of that triangle will be P = a + b + c.
As the above Triangle given is an Equilateral Triangle then perimeter = s +s+s=3s.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Classify the yield sign by its sides. Then find the perimeter of the sign.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 77
The yield sign is a triangle that has 3 sides with the same length.
So, it is an _Equilateral__ triangle.
To find the perimeter of the yield sign, find the sum of all of its side lengths.
36 + 36 + 36 = _108__
So, the perimeter of the yield sign is _108__ inches.
Answer:
108 inches.

Show and Grow

Question 15.
Classify the sports pennant by its sides. Then find the perimeter of the pennant.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 78
Answer:
Perimeter of triangle = a + b+ c (Where a,b,c are 3 sides of triangle).
P=  30(5/10) +77(7/10) + 77(7/10)
P=(305+777+777)/10
P=1859/10=185.9cms.

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
The perimeter of the canoe sail is 29.75 feet. Find the unknown side length. Then classify the sail by its sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 79
Answer:
Perimeter of triangle = a + b+ c (Where a,b,c are 3 sides of triangle).
P=29.75feet
29.75=12+6.5+c
c=29.75-18.5=11.25 feet.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
An emergency warning triangle is an equilateral triangle. It has a perimeter of 51 inches. What are the side lengths of the warning triangle?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 410
Answer:
Perimeter of Equilateral Triangle= s +s+s=3s.(s=side of the triangle)
P = 51 inches.
51=3s.
s=51/3=17 inches.

Classify Triangles by Sides Homework & Practice 14.3

Classify the triangle by its sides.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 80
Answer:
Equilateral Triangle – All sides equal.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 81
Answer:
Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has both two equal sides.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 82
Answer:
Scalene Triangle-no sides with same length

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 83
Answer:
Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has both two equal sides.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 84
Answer:
Scalene Triangle-no sides with same length

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 85
Answer:
Equilateral Triangle – All sides equal.

Question 7.
Draw a triangle that has exactly 2 sides with the same length. Classify the triangle by its sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 86
Answer:
Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has both two equal sides.

Question 8.
Draw a triangle that has exactly 1 line of symmetry. Classify the triangle by its sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 87
Answer:
Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has two equal sides.

Question 9.
Draw a triangle that has no lines of symmetry. Classify the triangle by its sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 88
Answer:

A scalene triangle have is zero lines of symmetry
Explanation:
It has no equal sides and no equal angles.

Question 10.
Structure
Classify the triangle pattern block by its sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 89
Answer:
It is a Equilateral Triangle as it has 3 equal sides.

Question 11.
Reasoning
Can the triangle have 3 lines of symmetry? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 90
Answer:
The above given Triangle is the Isosceles triangle it have only one line of symmentry.
Isosceles Triangle -An isosceles triangle has both two equal sides.
Only an equilateral triangle has three lines of symmetry.

Question 12.
Reasoning
Your friend draws a triangle with side lengths of 25.3 centimeters, 15.2 centimeters, and 12.6 centimeters. Classify your friend’s triangle.
Answer:
Scalene Triangle have 3 different sides, none of the side is equal.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
Classify the roof truss by its sides. Then find the perimeter of the roof truss.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 91
Answer:
P=a+b+c where a,b and c are sides.
P=30+16+34=80ft.

Review & Refresh

Find the perimeter of the rectangle

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 92
Answer:
Perimeter of a rectangle= 2(l+b) (where l=length and b=breadth of the rectangle).
Perimeter=2(32+20)=2(52)
Perimeter=104 yd.

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 93
Answer:
Perimeter of a rectangle= 2(l+b) (where l=length and b=breadth of the rectangle).
Perimeter=2(36+45)=2(81)
Perimeter=162ft.

Lesson 14.4 Classify Triangles by Angles

Explore and Grow

Sort the triangles into two or more groups using their angle measures. Explain how you sorted the triangles.
Big Ideas Math Answers 4th Grade Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 94

Construct Arguments
Your friend saysa triangle that has three angles with the same measure also has three sides with the same length. Is your friend correct? Explain.

Think and Grow: Classify Triangles by Angles

Triangles can be classified by their angles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 95
Example
Classify the triangle by its angles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 96
The triangle has one _obtuse_ angle.
So, it is an _obtuse__ triangle.
Answer:
Obtuse Triangle

Example
Classify the triangle by its angles and its sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 97
The triangle has one _right_ angle.
and _2_ sides with the same length.
So, it is an _right angled_ ___ triangle.
Answer:
Right angled triangle.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Classify the triangle by its angles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 98
Answer:
Right-angled triangle-it have one right angle.

Question 2.
Classify the triangle by its angles and its sides
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 99
Answer:
Acute triangle.
Isosceles Triangle – 2 equal sides.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Classify the triangle by its angles.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 100
Answer:
Right angle triangle.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 101
Answer:
Acute triangle

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 102
Answer:
Equiangular Triangle.

Classify the triangle by its angles and its sides.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 103
Answer:
Acute triangle-angles
Isosceles triangle-sides

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 104
Answer:
Right angle triangle-angle
Scalene triangle-sides

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 105
Answer:
Obtuse triangle-angle
Scalene triangle-side

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 106
Answer:
Right angle triangle -angle
Isosceles triangle – side

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 107
Answer:
Equiangular triangle-angles
Equilateral triangle – sides

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 108
Answer:
Acute triangle-angle
Isosceles triangle-side

Question 12.
Precision
Draw an acute scalene triangle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 109
Answer:

Question 13.
Can an obtuse triangle also be an equilateral triangle? Explain.
Answer:
An equilateral triangle can never be obtuse. Since an equilateral triangle has equal sides and angles, each angle measures 60°, which is acute.
Therefore, an equilateral angle can never be obtuse-angled.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Classify the large triangle on the shuffleboard court by its angles. Verify your answer by finding the measure of each angle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 110
The triangle does not have a right angle or an obtuse angle.
So, it is an _Acute__ triangle.
Verify: Use a protractor to find the measure of each angle.
The measure of ∠ABC is ___.
The measure of ∠BCA is ___.
The measure of ∠CAB is ___.
Because each angle measure is less than 90°, you can conclude that the triangle is a ___ triangle.
Answer:
Acute triangle
The measure of ∠CAB is 70°.
The measure of ∠BCA is 70°.
The measure of ∠ABC is 40°.


Show and Grow

Question 14.
Classify the triangle in the clothes hanger by its angles. Verify your answer by finding the measure of each angle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 111
Answer:
Obtuse angle triangle.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
In the picture, the tree is perpendicular to the ground. Draw the triangle formed by the tree, the wire, and the ground. Classify the triangle by its angles. Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 112
Answer:
It is right angles triangle. As the angled formed here is 90°.

Classify Triangles by Angles Homework & Practice 14.4

Classify the triangle by its angles.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 113
Answer:
Right angle triangle

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 114
Answer:
Acute triangle

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 115
Answer:
Acute triangle

Classify the triangle by its angles and its sides

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 116
Answer:
Equiangular triangle-angles
Equilateral triangle – sides

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 117
Answer:
Acute triangle- angles
Scalene triangle-sides

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 118
Answer:
Obtuse triangle-angle
Isosceles triangle-side

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 119
Answer:
Right angle triangle-angle
Scalene triangle – side

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 120
Answer:
Equiangular triangle-angles
Equilateral triangle – sides

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 121
Answer:
Acute triangle – angles
Isosceles triangle – sides

Question 10.
Precision
Draw a right isosceles triangle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 122
Answer:

Question 11.
Reasoning
Can a triangle have more than one right angle? Explain.
Answer:
No a triangle cannot have more than one right angle as if there are 2 right angles the their sum will be 180° and the third angle will exceed the sum.
Therefore the construction is not possible.

Question 12.
Which One Doesn’t Belong? Which triangle does not belong with the other three?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 123
Answer:
Figure 2

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw \(\overline{B D}\). Then classify each triangle by its angles and its sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 124
Answer:

△BAD and △BDC form Isosceles triangle and acute angle triangle.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
Classify the face of the bird house by its angles. Verify your answer by finding the measure of each angle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 125
Answer:
It is a Right angled triangle. As the angle formed is 90°.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
A construction worker measures a triangle formed by the supports on a bridge. The angle measures are 120°, 36°, and 24°. The side lengths are 12.65 meters, 8.61 meters, and 5.91 meters. Classify the triangle by its angles and its sides.
Answer:
It is a Obtuse angle Triangle and Scalene Triangle (all different sides).

Review & Refresh

Add.

Question 16.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 126
Answer:
(14/6)+(27/6)=(14+27)/6
=41/6=6.833

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 127
Answer:
=(51/5)+(44/5)=(51+44)/5
=95/5=19.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 128
Answer:
(35/10)+(63/10)+(6/10)
=(35+63+6)/10
=104/10
=10.4

Lesson 14.5 Classify Quadrilaterals

Explore and Grow

Sort the quadrilaterals into two or more groups. Explain how you sorted the quadrilaterals.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 129
Answer:
G and A are Trapezoids – one pair of parallel lines.
E and H are rhombus – all sides equal.
C is a Rectangle parallelogram – 2 pairs of parallel sides and 4 right angles.

Precision
You draw a quadrilateral with four right angles. Your friend draws a quadrilateral with two pairs of parallel sides. Did you and your friend draw the same type of quadrilateral? Explain.
Answer:
Figure can be drawn indifferent many ways. The figure can be Square , Rectangle as they too have with two pairs of parallel sides and four right angles.

Think and Grow: Classify Quadrilaterals

Quadrilaterals can be classified by their angles and sides.

A trapezoid is a quadrilateral that has exactly one pair of parallel sides.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 130

A parallelogram is a quadrilateral that has two pairs of parallel sides. Opposite sides have the same length.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 131

A rectangle is a parallelogram that has four right angles.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 132
A rhombus is a parallelogram that has four sides with the same length.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 133
A square is a parallelogram that has four right angles and four sides with the same length.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 134
Answer:
No square is not a rectangle because rectangle have only opposite sides equal. square cannot be rhombus because it does not have right angles.

Example
Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.
The quadrilateral has __ right angles,
___ pairs of parallel sides, and
___ pairs of opposite sides with the same length.
So, it is a ___ and a ___.
Answer:

Show and Grow

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 135
Answer:
It is a Trapezoid
A trapezoid is a quadrilateral that has exactly one pair of parallel sides.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 136
Answer:
It is a Rhombus
A rhombus is a parallelogram that has four sides with the same length.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 137
Answer:
It is a rectangle
A rectangle is a parallelogram that has four right angles.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 138
Answer:
It is a trapezoid.
A trapezoid is a quadrilateral that has exactly one pair of parallel sides.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 139
Answer:
It is a Square.
A square is a parallelogram that has four right angles and four sides with the same length.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 140
Answer:
It is a parallelogram.
A parallelogram is a quadrilateral that has two pairs of parallel sides. Opposite sides have the same length.

Question 7.
The formula for the perimeter of a square with side length of s is P = 4 × s. Can you use this formula to find the perimeter of any other type of quadrilateral? If so, name the type of quadrilateral.
Answer:
It can be used to find the perimeter of a Rhombus.
A rhombus is a parallelogram that has four sides with the same length.

Question 8.
Structure
How many lines of symmetry can a parallelogram have?
Answer:
lines of symmetry can a parallelogram have is 2.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Write All, Some, or No for each statement
___ parallelograms are rectangles.
___ squares are rectangles.
___ trapezoids are parallelograms.
___ rectangles are squares.
___ trapezoids have four sides with the same length.
Answer:
_Some__ parallelograms are rectangles.
_All__ squares are rectangles.
__No_ trapezoids are parallelograms.
__No_ rectangles are squares.
_No__ trapezoids have four sides with the same length.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Two artists each want to paint an identical half of a painting, like the one shown. Classify the shape of the painting in as many ways as possible. Then identify and show how many different ways the artists can divide the painting, if any.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 141
Classify the shape of the painting in as many ways as possible.
The painting has _4__ sides,
_2__ pairs of parallel sides,
_0__ right angles, and
_4__ sides with the same length.
So, it is a Rhombus.
Determine whether the painting has line symmetry. If so, find how many different ways the artists can divide the painting.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 142
The rhombus-shaped painting has __ lines of symmetry.
So, the artists can divide the painting __ different ways.
Answer:
The rhombus-shaped painting has _2_ lines of symmetry.
So, the artists can divide the painting _2_ different ways.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You and your friend each want to share an identical half of the tabletop. Classify the shape of the tabletop in as many ways as possible. Then identify and show how many different ways you and your friend can divide the tabletop, if any.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 143
Answer:
The given shape is a Trapezoid.

Question 11.
A horse needs at least 4,046 square meters of pasture. Classify the shape of the pasture in as many ways as possible. Is the pasture large enough for the horse? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 144
Answer:
The side of the square = 64m
Area of the Square = side x side=64m x 64 m =4096sqmtrs.
Area required by horse = 4046 sqmtrs.
Therefore area of square is more than pasture of horse.

Classify Quadrilaterals Homework & Practice 14.5

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 145
Answer:
It is a parallelogram
A parallelogram is a quadrilateral that has two pairs of parallel sides. Opposite sides have the same length.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 146
Answer:
It is a Trapezoid.
A trapezoid is a quadrilateral that has exactly one pair of parallel sides.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 147
Answer:
It is a rhombus.
A rhombus is a parallelogram that has four sides with the same length.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 148
Answer:
It is a Rectangle.
A rectangle is a parallelogram that has four right angles.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 149
Answer:
It is a Trapezoid.
A trapezoid is a quadrilateral that has exactly one pair of parallel sides.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 150
Answer:
It is a Square.
A square is a parallelogram that has four right angles and four sides with the same length.

Question 7.
Structure
Your friend sorts the shapes into two different groups. How do you think she sorted? Where does the shape below belong? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 151
Answer:
The above belong to the group 2 . The group 2 images have 2 pairs of sides equal.

Question 8.
Reasoning
All of the sides of an equilateral triangle have the same length. Is an equilateral triangle a rhombus? Explain.
Answer:
A Rhombus have all sides equal. 2 equilateral triangles form a rhombus.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Within the star, trace at least two different examples of trapezoids and parallelograms. Explain how you found each quadrilateral.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 152
Answer:

A parallelogram is a quadrilateral that has two pairs of parallel sides. Opposite sides have the same length. BJGD and CAIF are two parallelograms.
A trapezoid is a quadrilateral that has exactly one pair of parallel sides. LEGJ and KLFI are two trapezoids.

A Quadilateral can be defined as a closed, two-dimensional shape which has four straight sides.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
You and your friend each want to share an identical half of the whiteboard shown. Classify the shape of the whiteboard in as many ways as possible. Then identify and show how many different ways you and your friend can divide the whiteboard, if any.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 153
Answer:
The image is divided into four identical parts with two lines of symmetry.

Review & Refresh

Question 11.
Write \(\frac{7}{10}\) as hundredths in fraction form and decimal form.
Answer:
7/10=0.7

Question 12.
Write \(\frac{50}{100}\) as tenths in fraction form and decimal form.
Answer:
50/100=0.5

Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes Performance Task 14

Roof trusses are wooden structures that support the roof of a building. They come in many different shapes and sizes.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 154
1. The truss has exactly one pair of parallel sides.
a. What polygon describes the shape of the truss?
Answer:   ABCD.
b. Does the truss have line symmetry? Explain.
Answer:
The line of symmetry divide the given truss into identical halves.

c. Name an acute angle, a right angle, and an obtuse angle.
Answer:
Right angle = ∠AED
Acute angle =∠DAE.
Obtuse angle =∠ABC.
d. Name a ray.
Answer: AD.

Question 2.
Most trusses are built in the shape of a triangle.
a. Classify each triangle by its sides. Identify any lines of symmetry.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 156
Answer:

b. Why do you think roof trusses come in different shapes and sizes?
Answer:
Roof trusses come in all shapes and sizes depending on your build project.

Question 3.
You see a truss in the shape of an obtuse isosceles triangle. The perimeter of the triangle is 36 feet. The length of the side opposite the obtuse angle is 16 feet. What are the lengths of the other two sides?
Answer:
An Isosceles triangle have 2 sides equal.
side of Isosceles triangle=16 feet.
Perimeter of isosceles triangle = s1+s2+s3. = s+s+16
36 feet =2s +16
2s=36-16
2s=20
s=10feet.
The other two sides lengths are 10 feet each.

Question 4.
Draw a triangular roof truss that has line symmetry. Include a few support lines inside the truss. Classify your triangle by its sides. What types of angles are on the inside of the truss?
Answer:

△ABF  = Isosceles triangle.
△BFC= Scalene Triangle.
△FEC = Isosceles Triangle.
△EDC=Scalene Triangle.

Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes Activity

Pyramid Climb and Slide

Directions:
1. Players take turns spinning the spinner.
2. On your turn, move your counter to the next triangle that best matches your spin.
3. If you land at the bottom of a ladder, climb to the top of the ladder. If you land at the top of a slide, slide down to the bottom of the slide.
4. The first player to reach the top of the pyramid wins!
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 157
Answer:

Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes Chapter Practice

14.1 Line Symmetry

Determine whether the line is a line of symmetry.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 158
Answer:
Yes it is a line of Symmetry .It divides the given shape into two identical halves.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 159
Answer:
No, it is not a line of symmetry it doesnot divide the given shape into two identical halves.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 160
Answer:
Yes it is a line of Symmetry .It divides the given shape into two identical halves.

Determine whether the shape has line symmetry. Draw each line of symmetry.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 161
Answer:
Yes it is a line of Symmetry .It divides the given shape into two identical halves.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 162
Answer:
Yes it is a line of Symmetry .It divides the given shape into two identical halves.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 163
Answer:
No, It doesnot divides the given shape into two identical halves.

Question 7.
Modeling Real Life
Divide the parking lot shown into multiple sections using each of its lines of symmetry. When there are 4 cars in each section, how many cars are in the parking lot?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 164
Answer:
Number of sections=4
Number of car parking slots in each section=4.
Total car parking slots in all sections = 4 x 4 =16 cars.

14.2 Draw Symmetric Shapes

Question 8.
One half of a shape and a line of symmetry are shown. Draw the rest of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 165
Answer:

Question 9.
One half of a symmetric shape is shown. Draw the rest of the shape.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 166
Answer:

14.3 Classify Triangles by Sides

Classify the triangles by its sides.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 167
Answer:
Scalene triangle

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 168
Answer:
Equilateral triangle

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 169
Answer:
Isosceles triangle

14.4 Classify Triangles by Angles

Classify the triangle by its angles and its sides.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 170
Answer:
Equiangular -Angles
Equilateral-Sides

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 171
Answer:
Obtuse triangle -Angle
Isosceles triangle- Sides

Question 15.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 172
Answer:
Right angled Triangle-Angle
Scalene Triangle-Sides.

Question 16.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which triangle does not belong with the other three? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 173
Answer:
First triangle is obtuse angle triangle. where other 3 triangles are acute triangles.

14.5 Classify Quadrilaterals

Classify the quadrilateral in as many ways as possible

Question 17.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 174
Answer:
It is parallelogram.
A parallelogram is a quadrilateral that has two pairs of parallel sides. Opposite sides have the same length.

Question 18.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 175
Answer:
It is a Square.
A square is a parallelogram that has four right angles and four sides with the same length.

Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes Cumulative Practice 1-14

Question 1.
What is the difference of 10 and 4\(\frac{7}{8}\) ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 176
Answer:
C – 5(1/8)

Question 2.
Which letters have at least one line of symmetry?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 177
Answer:
W,Z AND H

Question 3.
The table shows the amount of rain that falls in each city in 1 day. Which city has more rainfall than Detroit and less rainfall than Seattle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 178
Answer:
Chicago – 0.72

Question 4.
Which shapes have four sides with the same length?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 179
Answer:
Rhombus and Square.

Question 5.
A movie starts at 2:55 P.M. and ends at 4:45 P.M. How long was the movie?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 180
Answer:
1 Hour 50 Mins

Question 6.
Which are equivalent to \(3 \times \frac{5}{6}\) ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 181
Answer:
Expect 8/6 all the options are equal to \(3 \times \frac{5}{6}\) .

Question 7.
The rectangle has a perimeter of 48 centimeters. What is the width of the rectangle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 182
Answer:
Perimeter of Rectangle = width + length.
48 = w + 15.
w=48-15
w=33cms.

Question 8.
Which two lines appear to be parallel?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 183
Answer:
Option A.

Question 9.
Your friend draws a triangle with side lengths of 10 centimeters,12 centimeters, and 10 centimeters. What type of triangle did your friend draw?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 184
Answer:
It is a Isosceles Triangle. It has 2 sides equal.

Question 10.
What is the quotient of 846 and 3?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 185
Answer:
282

Question 11.
Which rectangular dimensions have an area of 3,600 square miles?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 186
Answer:
72 miles long and 50 miles wide.

Question 12.
The angle measures of a triangle are 57°, 60°, and 63°. How can you classify the triangle?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 187
Answer:
An acute-angled triangle is a type of triangle in which all the three internal angles of the triangle are acute, that is, they measure less than 90°.

Question 13.
Newton is walking on Path X that continues straight ahead. He turns onto Path Y.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 188
Using a protractor, which statement is true about ∠FGH
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 189
Answer:
The angle is 45°, and is acute.

Question 14.
You jump 3\(\frac{1}{2}\) feet. How far do you jump in inches?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 190
Answer:
3(1/2)=7/2=3.5feet.

Question 15.
Which of the following shows \(\overrightarrow{D E}\) ?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 191
Answer:
Option DE.

Question 16.
A rectangular backyard has a perimeter of 280 feet. The length of the backyard is 75 feet. What is the area of the backyard?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 192
Answer:
The perimeter of the backyard =280 feet.
length of the backyard =75 feet
The breadth of the backyard = b feet.
280=75 + b
b=280-75
b=205.
Area of the backyard= l x b.
Area = 205 x 75.
Area=15375 sq feet.

Question 17.
Your friend makes a banner by taping the edges of 10 pieces of paper together. Each piece of paper is 28 centimeters long and 22 centimeters wide.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 193
Part A What is the length of the entire banner? Explain.
Answer:
28 centimeters long and 22 centimeters wide. As the tapping is done for the edges only.
Part B Your friend wants to place ribbon along the outside of the entire banner. How much ribbon will she need?
Answer:
Perimeter = length + breadth.
P= 28 + 22= 50 cms.

Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes Steam Performance Task 1-14

In computer graphic design, polygons are connected at the vertices and edges to create a two-dimensional image that appears three-dimensional. This is called polygon mesh.
1. The elephant graphic is made from different polygons. Do the polygons have the same number of sides? Why do you think that is?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 194
2. Use the quadrilateral shown from the elephant graphic.
a. Exactly one pair of sides are parallel. Classify the quadrilateral.
Answer:
It is a Trapezoid.
b. Which two lines are parallel?
Answer:
BC ll AD.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 195
c. Which angles are acute?
Answer:
ADC.
d. The perimeter is 22 millimeters. Find the missing side lengths.
Answer:
Perimeter = 22 mm.
P= x +3 + x + 9 mm.
22= 2x + 12.
2x=10.
x=5 mm.

Question 3.
There are many different triangles in the elephant graphic. Use the side lengths and angle measures to classify two of the triangles. Trace your triangles in the elephant graphic
Answer:

Question 4.
In a polygon mesh, each polygon is shaded differently to make the object appear more three-dimensional. In the drawing, two polygons still need to be shaded. Which one should be darker, the triangle or the quadrilateral? Why?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 600
Answer:
One should be darker is the triangle.A Triangle is a polygon with three edges and three vertices.

Question 5.
Triangle mesh is when a three-dimensional design is created using only triangles. The triangle mesh design below has line symmetry.
a. Use the line of symmetry to finish the design.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 4 Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes 196

b. Name two types of triangles you see in the design. Trace your triangles above. Explain.
Answer:
∆ DFE is Isosceles triangle.
∆ ABC is Scalene triangle.

Question 6.
Use the Internet or some other resource to find out more about polygon mesh and how it is used in graphic design. Write one thing that you learn.
Answer:
A polygon mesh is a collection of vertices, edges and faces that defines the shape of a polyhedral object.
In graphic design, it is used to make up a 3D object, 3D animated film, advertising, or video games.
We learn in making different animated pictures, videos.

Conclusion:

Enhance your performance by practicing the problems from Big Ideas Math Grade 4 Solution Key Chapter 14 Identify Symmetry and Two-Dimensional Shapes. Understand the concepts of symmetry and 2-D shapes and apply them to the real-time problems. Solving the problems of math is fun. Enjoy it by solving the questions given at the end of the chapter. So that you can know at which topic who were lagging. We are here to clarify your doubts. For any doubts, you can post the comments in the below section.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10

Do you want any help to solve Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions Questions? If yes, then refer this page. Here, we have provided a study material i.e BIM Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions which helps you to improve math skills. Find answers for all questions and also clear your doubts regarding Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions topics. Start your preparation by taking help from BIM Book 3rd Grade 10th Chapter Understand Fractions Answers and learn the concepts from practice tests, cumulative tests and others.

Big Ideas Math Book 3rd Grade Answer Key Chapter 10 Understand Fractions

Score good marks in your exams can make you achieve what you are looking for. We have provided BIM 3rd Grade 10th Chapter Understand Fractions Solutions prepared by the subject experts which is helpful to improve your subject knowledge. So, learn all the lessons from Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions.

The different topics included in the answer key are Equal Parts of a Whole, Understand a Unit Fraction, Write Fractions of a Whole, Fractions on a Number Line: Less Than 1, Fractions on a Number line: Greater Than 1. The success criteria of Understand Fractions is able to name equal parts, identify a unit fraction, write a fraction and plot a fraction. So, download Big Ideas Math Book Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions Answer Key PDF and prepare well.

Lesson 1: Equal Parts of a Whole

Lesson 2: Understand a Unit Fraction

Lesson 3: Write Fractions of a Whole

Lesson 4: Fractions on a Number Line: Less Than 1

Lesson 5: Fractions on a Number line: Greater Than 1

Performance Task

Lesson 10.1 Equal Parts of a Whole

Explore and Grow

Use the name of the equal parts to divide each rectangle. Write the number of equal parts for each rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 1
Repeated Reasoning
How many equal parts are in a rectangle that is divided into eighths? Explain.
Answer:

Think and Grow: Equal Parts of a Whole
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 2
The rectangle represents a whole. A whole is all of the parts of one shape or group.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 3
2 equal parts, or halves
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 4
3 equal parts, or thirds
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 5
4 equal parts, or fourths
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 6
6 equal parts, or sixths
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 7
8 equal parts, or eighths

Example
Tell whether the shape shows equal parts or unequal parts. If the shape shows equal parts, then name them.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 8
_____ parts.
_________
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 9
_____ parts.
_________

Show and Grow

Tell whether the shape shows equal parts or unequal parts. If the shape shows equal parts, then name them.

Question 1.

__6__ parts.

_____sixths____

Answer:
i) 6
ii) sixths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the rectangle is divided into 6 parts and the parts are named as sixths and they are unequal

Question 2.
Tell whether the shape shows equal parts or unequal parts. If the shape shows equal parts, then name them.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 11
____ parts.
_________

Answer:
i) 4
ii) Fourths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the rhombus is divided into 4 equal parts and the parts are named as fourths.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 12
_____ parts.
_________

Answer:
i) 3
ii)Thirds

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the rectangle is divided into 3 equal parts and the parts are named as thirds. They become three rectangles

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 13
_____ parts.
_________

Answer:
i) 8
ii)Eighths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the  Rectangle is divided into 8 equal parts and the parts are named as eighths.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 14
_____ parts.
_________

Answer:
i) 4
ii) Fourths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the rhombus is divided into 4 equal parts and the parts are named as fourths.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 15
_____ parts.
_________

Answer:
i) 6
ii) sixths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the circle is divided into 6 equal parts and the parts are named as sixths.They are equal in parts after dividing it becomes 6 equal triangles.

Question 7.
Divide the rectangle into 2 equal parts. Then name the equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 16

Answer:
When a rectangle is divided into two equal parts then it becomes two halfs.

Question 8.

Divide the square into 6 equal parts. Then name the equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 17
________

Answer:
i) sixths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the square is divided into 6 equal parts and the parts are named as sixths.

Question 9.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says he divided each shape into fourths. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 18

Answer:

From the above figures we can see that they are divided.
From figure one and two they are divided equally and they are named as fourths.
From the third figure the circle is not divided equally.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Three students want to share a whiteboard to solve math problems. Each student wants to use an equal part of the board. Should the students divide the whiteboard into halves, thirds, or fourths?

Draw to show:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 19
The students should divide the whiteboard into ____.

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions Draw to Show
The students should divide the whiteboard into three equal parts and name the parts as thirds.
As the whiteboard looks like a rectangle if we divide the rectangle into three equal parts then it becomes three rectangles

Show and Grow

Question 10.
Six friends want to share an egg casserole. Each friend wants an equal part. Should the friends cut the casserole into halves, fourths, or sixths?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 20
Answer:
Friend should cut the egg casserole into six equal parts. And the name as sixths

Question 11.
Eight students need to sit around two tables. Each student needs an equal part of a table. Should the tables be divided into thirds, fourths, or sixths?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 21

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions Question 8

Explaination:
Each table should be divided into fourths as the eight students want to have equal parts

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Ten friends want to share five rectangular sheets of paper. Each friend wants an equal part. Should the friend cut the sheets of paper into halves or thirds? Explain.

Answer:

The friends should cut each sheet into halves.
As there are five papers if one paper is cutting in two parts it becomes two halves similarly all five.
All five into halves becomes 10

Equal Parts of a Whole Homework & Practice 10.1

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 22
1 equal part, or whole
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 23
2 equal parts, or halves
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 24
3 equal parts, or third
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 25
4 equal parts, or fourths
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 26
6 equal parts, or sixths
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 27
8 equal parts, or eighths

Tell whether the shape shows equal parts or unequal parts. If the shape shows equal parts, then name them.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 150
_____ parts.
_________

Answer
i) 6
ii) sixths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the rectangle is divided into 6 equal parts and the parts are named as sixths. They are equal.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 151
_____ parts.
_________

Answer:
i) 3
ii) thirds

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the circle is divided into 3 unequal parts and the parts are named as fourths.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 152
_____ parts.
_________

Answer
i) 4
ii) Fourths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the hexagon is divided into 4 equal parts and the parts are named as fourths.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 153
_____ parts.
_________

Answer
i) 8
ii) eighths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the circle is divided into 8 equal parts and the parts are named as eighths.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 154
_____ parts.
_________

Answer
i) 4
ii) Fourths

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the rectangle is divided into 4 equal parts and the parts are named as fourths.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 155
_____ parts.
_________

Answer
i) 3
ii) thirds

Explanation:
From the above figure, we can see that the triangle is divided into 3 unequal parts and the parts are named as thirds.

Question 7.
Divide the square into 3 equal parts. Then name the equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 28
_____

Explanation:
If the square is divided into three equal parts the name is thirds

Question 8.
Divide the triangle into 2 equal parts. Then name the equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 29
______

Explanation:
If the triangle is divided into two equal then it becomes two halves

Question 9.
Patterns
Use the pattern to divide the square into equal parts. Name the equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 30
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 31
_____

Answer:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions Question 9

Explanation:
According to the pattern, the sixth square is divided into 4 parts Horizontally. The name of the equal part is fourths.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
Eight friends want to share a lasagna. Each friend wants an equal part. Should the friends cut the lasagna into fourths, sixths, or eighths?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 32

Explanation:
From the above figure the lasagna is to be shared between 8 friends. In order to share we have to cut the lasagna in to eight equal parts.

Therefore it becomes eighths

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Twelve friends want to pull weeds from three community gardens. Each friend wants to pull weeds from an equal part. Should the friends divide each garden into thirds, fourths, or sixths?

Answer: fourths

Explanation

As twelve friends want to pull weeds from three community gardens. They have to get equal parts each community garden should be divided into four parts.

As each garden divided into four equal parts 3gardens*4parts=12people

3*4=12

So,twelve people get equal parts.

Review & Refresh

Question 12.
2 × (3 × 3) = ___18

Question 13.
(4 × 2) × 9 = ____72

Question 14.
2 × (8 × 5) = ____80

Lesson 10.2 Understand a Unit Fraction

Explore and Grow

Match each shaded part to its name.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 33
Precision
What is the same about each shape? What is different?

Think and Grow: Understand a Unit Fraction

A fraction is a number that represents part of a whole.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 34
A unit fraction represents one equal part of a whole.

Example
What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 35

Show and Grow

What fraction of the whole is shaded?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 36

Answer

i(one thirds)

Three equal parts

 

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the circle is divided into 3 parts equally in which 1 part is shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one thirds.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 37

Answer

i(one eighths)

Eight equal parts

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the square is divided into 8 parts equally in which 1 part are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one eighths.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 38

i(one halves)

Two equal parts

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the parallelogram is divided into 2 parts equally in which 1 parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one halves.

 

Apply and Grow: Practice

What fraction of the whole is shaded?

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 39

i(one sixths)

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the rectangle is divided into 6 parts equally in which 1 parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one sixths.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 40

iii (one fourths)

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the ellipse is divided into 4 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one fourths.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 41

iii (one halves)

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the hexagon is divided into 2 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one halvess.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 42

iii (one eighths)

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the rhombus is divided into 8 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one eighths.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 43

iii (one fourths)

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the rectangle is divided into 4 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one fourths.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 44

iii (one sixths)

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the triangle is divided into 8 parts equally in which 3 parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one eighths.

Question 10.
Divide the circle into 4 equal parts. Shade one part. What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 45

iii (one fourths)

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the circle is divided into 4 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part is one fourths.

Question 11.
Divide the square into 3 equal parts. Shade one part. What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 46

iii ( one thirds)

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the square is divided into 3 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part one thirds.

Question 12.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Descartes says the part he shaded can be represented by a unit fraction. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 47

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

For which nation’s flag can you use a unit fraction to represent the amount of green? Explain.
Flag of ____
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 48
Explain:

Flag of Nigeria:two thirds.

Flag of Mauritius:one fourths.

Flag of Seychelles:one fifths

Explanation:

The above figure shows that the flag of Nigeria is divided into 3 parts equally in which two  parts are green shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded parts is two thirds.

The above figure shows that the flag of Mauritius is divided into 4 parts equally in which one  parts are green shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded parts is one fourths.

The above figure shows that the flag of Seychelles is divided into 5 parts equally in which one  parts are green shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded parts is one fifths.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
For which nation’s flag can you use a unit fraction to represent the amount of red? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 49

Flag of Bahrain:two thirds.

Flag of Australia:two thirds.

Flag of France:one thirds

 

Explanation:

The above figure shows that the flag of Bahrain is divided into 3 parts equally in which two  parts are red shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded parts is two thirds.

The above figure shows that the flag of Australia is divided into 3 parts equally in which one  parts are red shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded parts is one thirds.

The above figure shows that the flag of France is divided into 3 parts equally in which one  parts are red shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded parts is one thirds.

Question 14.
You paint a plate that has 4 equal parts. You paint two parts orange and one part red. You paint the rest of the plate yellow. What fraction of the plate is yellow?

One fourths

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
Draw a quilt square that has blue, red, and white parts, but only the blue part can be represented by a unit fraction.

Understand a Unit Fraction Homework & Practice 10.2

What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 50

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the circle is divided into 4 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part one sixths.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 51

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the rectangle is divided into 8 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part one eighths.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 52

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the square is divided into 3 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part one thirds.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 53

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the triangle is divided into 4 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part one fourths.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 54

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the parallelogram is divided into 2 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part one halves.

Question 6.
Divide the square into 6 equal parts. Shade one part. What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 55

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the square is divided into 6 parts equally in which one parts are shaded. Therefore, the shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator. So, the fraction name of the shaded part one sixths.

Question 7.
Precision
Did Descartes label the shaded part correctly? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 56

Explanation:
The above figure shows that the rectangle is divided into 8 parts equally in which one parts are shaded.  The shaded part will be in the numerator and the total parts will be in the denominator.

The precision done was wrong numerator place is changed with the denominator

Question 8.

DIG DEEPER!
You want to make a card. You fold a sheet of paper in half, then in half again. What fraction of the sheet of paper represents the front of the card?

Explanation:

One by fourth represent the front of the card

Question 9.
Writing
Explain how you know Newton ate \(\frac{1}{3}\) of his taco.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 57

Explanation

The above taco is divided into two three equal parts in that one by third of the taco is eaten as it has shown empty

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
For which foods can you use a unit fraction to represent the amount eaten? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 58

Explanation:

From the above figures.

  • Wheat is uncountable so we can’t represent as units we can’t share the wheat as units.
  • The leaves are also uncountable.
  • Apple is countable we can represent as units.
  • Maize is also uncountable so we can’t represent as units we can’t share the wheat as units.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
You prepare a rectangular dip tray that has 6 equal parts. Three parts are hummus, one part is queso, and one part is guacamole. The rest of the tray is salsa. What fraction of the tray is salsa?

Explanation:

The total number of parts are 6

In that 3 parts one third part is hummus.

One part meant one sixth part is queso.

One by sixth part is guacamole.

The remaining one by sixth part is salsa.

Therefore one sixth is answer

Review & Refresh

Compare

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 59

Answer:24 is less than 36.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 60

Answer: 30 is greater than 20.

Question 14.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 61

Answer: 42 is equal to 42.

Lesson 10.3 Write Fractions of a Whole

Explore and Grow

Write a fraction for the shaded part of each whole.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 62

Reasoning
All of the equal parts of a shape are shaded. What do you know about the numerator and denominator of the fraction that describes the shaded parts?

Think and Grow: Fractions of a Whole

Example
What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 63

Show and Grow

What fraction of the whole is shaded?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 64

Answer:4 parts, three fourths.

Explanation:
There are 4 blocks in the square out of which 3 parts are shaded. Each part of the square is 1/4 and the name for the shaded part is three fourths. The fraction of the shaded part is 3/4 three fouth.

Question 2.

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 65

Answer:6 parts, 6 parts

Explanation:
There are 6 blocks in the rectangle out of which 6 parts are shaded. Each part of the rectangle is 1/6 and the name for the shaded part whole. The fraction of the shaded part is whole.

 

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 66

Answer:5 parts, 8 parts.

Explanation:
There are 8 blocks in the circle out of which 5 parts are shaded. Each part of the circle is 1/8 and the name for the shaded part is Five Eights. The fraction of the shaded part is 5/8.

Question 4.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 67

Answer:two sixths

Explanation:
There are 6 blocks in the hexagon out of which 2 parts are shaded. Each part of the hexagon is one sixth.the name for the shaded parts is two sixths. The fraction of the shaded part is 2/6.

Apply and Grow: Practice

What fraction of the whole is shaded?

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 68

Explanation:
There are 6 blocks in the rectangle out of which 4 parts are shaded. Each part of the rectangle is 1/6 and the name for the shaded part is four sixths. The fraction of the shaded part is 4/6.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 69

Explanation:
There are 3 blocks in the circle out of which 3 parts are shaded. Each part of the circle is 1/3 and the name for the shaded part is whole. The fraction of the shaded part is 3/3.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 70

Explanation:
There are 8 blocks in the square out of which 5 parts are shaded. Each part of the square is 1/8 and the name for the shaded part is Five Eights. The fraction of the shaded part is 5/8.

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 71

Explanation:
There are 4 blocks in the hexagon out of which 3 parts are shaded. Each part of the hexagon is 1/4 and the name for the shaded part is three fourths. The fraction of the shaded part is 3/4.

Question 9.
Divide the rectangle into eighths. Shade three of the equal parts. What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 72

Explanation:
There are 8 blocks in the rectangle out of which 3 parts are shaded. Each part of the rectangle is 1/8 and the name for the shaded part is three Eights. The fraction of the shaded part is 3/8.

Question 10.
Divide the triangle in half. Shade two of the equal parts. What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 73

Explanation:
If we divide There are 2 blocks in the triangle out of which 2 parts are shaded means the whole is shaded the fraction is 2/2

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Newton is thinking of a fraction. What is his fraction?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 74

Explanation:

According to Newton let us consider a rectangular shape in that it is divided into 6 parts. Here conditions are the number should be odd and greater than three so the number will be five.

There fore the fraction is 5/6.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

You are making a stained glass window that has 6 equal parts. You finish 1 part of the window. What fraction of the window do you have left to finish?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 75

Draw to show:
You have Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 76 of the window left to finish.

Answer: 5/6 fraction.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
You color 8 equal parts of a banner for a school play. You write the title in 4 of the parts. What fraction of the banner does not have the title?

Explanation:
There are 8 blocks in the rectangle out of which 4 parts are written title. Each part of the rectangle is 1/8 and the name for the shaded is two eigths. The fraction of the shaded part is 2/8.

Question 13.
A fruit tray has 4 equal parts. One part of the tray has grapes. Another part of the tray has pineapple. The rest of the tray has watermelon. What fraction of the tray has watermelon?

Answer:2/4

Explanation:
There are 4 blocks in the rectangle out of which 1 is filled with grapes and the other with pineapple. Each part of the rectangle is 1/4 and the name for the covered watermelon is two fourths . The fraction of the shaded part is 2/4.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
You divide a flower bed into equal parts. You plant sunflowers in 1 part. You plant daisies in the other 2 parts. What fraction of the flower bed has sunflowers?
Answer: 1/3

Write Fractions of a Whole Homework & Practice 10.3

What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 77

Explanation:
There are 6 blocks in the square out of which 4 parts are shaded. Each part of the square is 4/6 and the name for the shaded part is four sixths. The fraction of the shaded part is 4/6.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 78

Explanation:
There are 2 blocks in the triangle out of which 2 parts are shaded. Each part of the triangle is 1/2 and the name for the shaded part is whole. The fraction of the shaded part is 2/2.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 79

Explanation:
There are 8 blocks in the octagon out of which 5 parts are shaded. Each part of the octagon is 1/8 and the name for the shaded part is Five Eights. The fraction of the shaded part is 5/8.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 80

Explanation:
There are 6 blocks in the circle out of which 5 parts are shaded. Each part of the circle is 1/6 and the name for the shaded part is Five sixths. The fraction of the shaded part is 5/6.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 81

Explanation:

Rectangle is divided into 4 parts in it 2 parts are shaded. Fraction is 2/4

Question 6.
Divide the rectangle into sixths. Shade 2 of the equal parts. What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 82

Explanation:

The fraction of the whole shaded is 2/6.

Question 7.
Divide the square into thirds. Shade 2 of the equal parts. What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 83

Answer:2/3 parts of the square is shared

Question 8.

Open-Ended
Divide and shade the square to show more than \(\frac{4}{8}\), but less than \(\frac{8}{8}\). What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 84

Answer:

The square is divided into 8 parts in that four are already shaded 3/8

Question 9.
Reasoning
A pool has 4 swim lanes. Swimmers are using all of the lanes. Draw and shade a model that represents the lanes being used. Then write a fraction for your model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 85

Answer:4/4 fraction

Question 10.
Patterns
What fraction of each circle is shaded? Think: What do you notice about the numerators? Model and write the next fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 850

Answer:1/6, 2/6, 3/6 and the partsnof the circle to be shaded is 4/6

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
A vegetable tray has 8 equal parts. Three parts have peppers. One part has broccoli. Another part has tomatoes. The rest of the tray has carrots. What fraction of the tray has carrots?

Answer:let us assume a square

  • Three parts are peppers 3/8.
  • One part is broccoli 1/8.
  • One part is tomatoes 1/8.
  • The remaining 3 parts are carrots that is 3/8.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You divide an art canvas into equal parts. You paint 1 part blue, 2 parts orange, and the last part yellow. What fraction of the canvas is painted orange?

Answer: 2/4

Explanation:

Canvas divided into two parts out of 4.

Review & Refresh

Complete the fact family.

Question 13.
6 × ___ = 42
___ × ___ = 42
42 ÷ 7 = ___
42 ÷ ___ = 7

Answer:

6×7=42

7×6=42

42/7=6

42/6=7

Question 14.
9 × ___ = 9
___ × 9 = 9
9 ÷ 1 = ___
9 ÷ ___ = 1

Answer:

9×1=9

1×9=9

9÷1=9

1÷9=9

 

Lesson 10.4 Fractions on a Number Line : Less Than 1

Explore and Grow

Use the \(\frac{1}{6}\) Fraction Strips to complete the fractions on the number line. Then plot \(\frac{3}{6}\) on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 86

Precision
Plot \(\frac{6}{6}\) on the number line. What do you notice? Explain.

Think and Grow: Fractions on a Number Line: Less Than 1

Every number on a number line represents a distance from 0. The distance from 0 to 1 is one whole. A number line can be divided into any number of equal parts or distances.
Example:
Plot \(\frac{3}{4}\) on the number line.
Step 1: Divide the length from 0 to 1 into ___ equal parts.
Step 2: Label each tick mark on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 87

Show and Grow

Plot the fraction on the number line.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 88

Answer:

One 1/2 is 1/2

1×1/2 is 1/2

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 2 equal parts. Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/2

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 89

Answer:

Two 1/6 is 2/6

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 6 equal parts. Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/6.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Plot the fraction on a number line.
Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 90

Answer:

Two 1/4s are 2/4

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 4 equal parts. Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/4.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 91

The above figure shows the number line 0 to 1

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 92

The above figure is a number line

Question 6.
\(\frac{6}{8}\)

6/8

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 8 equal parts. Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/8.and the latex is 6/8.

Question 7.
\(\frac{3}{4}\)

Answer:3/4

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 4 equal parts. Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/4.

Question 8.
Structure
Complete the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 93

Answer:

The above number line is divided into seven equal parts. They are0 , 1/7,2/7, 3/7 4/7, 5/7, 6/7 ,1

 

Question 9.
Writing
How are the number lines the same? How are they different?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 94

Answer: The both number lines are same because both are divided into same equal parts.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Three laps around a walking trail is 1 mile. How many laps does it take you to walk \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile?
Model:
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 95
You need to walk ___ laps to walk \(\frac{2}{3}\) mile.

Explanation:

Mark first 0 and 1

Then divide it into 3 equal parts as 1/3 2/3,

That is 2 times of 1/3 is 2/3

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You follow a recipe and make four servings. How many servings can you make using \(\frac{1}{4}\) of each ingredient in the recipe?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 96

Answer: Four 1/4 of ingredients can be served.

Explanation:

There are four types of ingredients making once with one ingredient as 1/4.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
A gymnast needs to take 8 equal-sized steps to get from one end of a balance beam to the other. She starts on the left end of the beam and takes 6 steps. What fraction of the beam is behind her? What fraction of the beam is in front of her?

Answer:

Fraction of the beam behind her is 4/6.

Fraction of the beam front of her is 2/6.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
A tightrope walker needs to take 6 equal-sized steps to get from one end of a tightrope to the other. He starts on the left side of the rope and takes 5 steps. What fraction of the rope is behind him? What fraction of the rope is in front of him ?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 97

Answer:

The fraction of the beam behind him is 5/6.

Fraction of the beam front of him is 1/6.

Fractions on a Number Line : Less Than 1 Homework & Practice 10.4

Plot the fraction on a number line.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 98

Answer: four 1/6 are 4/6

Question 2.
\(\frac{3}{8}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 99

Answer:

The above number line is divided into eight equal parts and the latex is 3×1/8 is 3 /8th parts of 0-1

Question 3.
\(\frac{1}{4}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 100

Answer:

The above number line is divided into four equal parts and the latex is 1×1/4 is 1/4th parts of 0-1

Question 4.

\(\frac{2}{6}\)

Answer:

The above number line is divided into eight equal parts and the latex is 3×1/8 is 3 /8th parts of 0-1

Question 5.
\(\frac{5}{8}\)

Answer:

The above number line is divided into eight equal parts and the latex is

5×1/8 is 5/8th parts of 0-1

Question 6.
Logic
What fraction is located halfway between 0 and 1?

Ans: The fraction is located halfway between 0 and 1 is 1/2 and 1/2.

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend draws a number line and plots \(\frac{2}{6}\). Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 101

Answer: no

My friend marked the correct point but he did not divided into equal parts.

Question 8.
Structure
Which number line shows \(\frac{2}{3}\) ?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 102

Answer: Second number line.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
Four laps around a soccer field is 1 mile. How many laps does it take you to run \(\frac{3}{4}\) mile?

Question 4.
DIG DEEPER!
A diver needs to take 8 equal-sized steps before diving into the pool. She starts at the beginning of the diving board and takes 6 steps. What fraction of the diving board is behind the diver? What fraction of the diving board is in front of the diver?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 103

Answer:

The diving behind the driver is 5/6 and the diving board in front of the driver is 1/6

Review & Refresh

Find the area of the shape.

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 104
Area = _21/70__ square units.

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 105
Area = __20/70_ square units.

Lesson 10.5 Fractions on a Number line: Greater Than 1

Explore and Grow

Divide each circle into halves. Shade three halves. Write the fraction.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 106

Precision
Complete the fractions on the number line. Plot \(\frac{3}{2}\) on the number line. What do you notice? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 107

Think and Grow : Fractions on a Number Line: Greater Than 1

When the numerator is greater than the denominator, the fraction is greater than one whole.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 108
You can show fractions greater than one whole on a number line.

Example:
Plot \(\frac{2}{3}\) on the number line.
Step 1: Divide each whole into ___ equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 109

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Plot \(\frac{15}{8}\) on the number line
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 110

Answer:

The above number line is divided into sixteen equal parts that is from  0 to 2 and the latex is fifteen of 1/8 is 15/8

Apply and Grow: Practice

Plot the fraction on the number line.

Question 2.
\(\frac{7}{4}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 111

Explanation:

The number line is divided into eight equal parts from 0 to 2. Each part is divided as 1/4. The latex is seven parts of 1/4

Question 3.
\(\frac{9}{6}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 112

Explanation: above number line is divided into nine equal parts 9/6 is the nine of 1/6

Question 4.
\(\frac{5}{3}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 113

Explanation:

The above number line is divided into six equal parts three from 0 to 1 and three from 1 to 2. 5×1/3 =5/3

Structure
Complete the number line.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 114

Answer: the number line is divided into eight equal parts 1/8

From 0 to 1 is 4 parts and from 1 to 2 is 4 parts.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 115

Answer:

The above number line is divided in twelve equal parts.

From 0 to 1 is 1/6 and from 0 to 2 is 1/6.

Number Sense
Draw and shade a model for the plotted fraction.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 116

3/2

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 to two parts.and 1 to 2 two parts total 4 parts

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 117

Explanation:

The above number line is divided into eight equal parts and are represented 1/4.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

How far is the aquarium from the bank?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 118
The aquarium is ___ miles from the bank.

Show and Grow

Use the number line to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 119

Question 9.
How far is the gas station from the school?

Explanation:the school is 5/4 of the total distance from school to gas station.

 

Question 10.
A post office is the same distance from the restaurant as it is from the hospital. How far is the post office from the school?

Explanation:

10/4 miles to the school A

As shown in figure postoffice is the same distance from the restaurant and to the hospital.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
How far is the gas station from the hospital?

The gas station is 7/4 miles from the hospital.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
How far is the library from the amusement park?

Answer:

3 miles far from the amusement park to the library.

Fractions on a Number line: Greater Than 1 Homework & Practice 10.5

Plot the fraction on a number line.

Question 1.
\(\frac{8}{6}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 120

Question 2.
\(\frac{3}{2}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 121

3/2

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 2 equal parts.  And divided the 1 to 2 to two equal parts.Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/2.and the latex is 3/2.

Question 3.
\(\frac{7}{4}\)
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 122

7/4

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 4 equal parts and again 1 to 2 it is divided into 4 parts.Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/4.and the latex is 7/4

Question 4.
\(\frac{7}{6}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 123

7/6

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 12 equal parts. Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/6.and the latex is 7/6.

Question 5.
\(\frac{4}{3}\)

4/3

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 8 equal parts. Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/8.and the latex is 4/3.

Question 6.
\(\frac{6}{4}\)

6/4

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 8 equal parts. Labeled each tick mark on the number line as 1/8.and the latex is 6/4.

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says 2 is between 1 and \(\frac{9}{8}\) on a number line. Is he correct? Explain.

Answer: he is correct.

Explanation: consider a number line and mark 0 to 3 in between divide the line in to eight equal parts each16/8 is 2.

Question 8.
Writing
Explain what the numerator \(\frac{7}{4}\) of the fraction represents.

Answer: greater

Explanation:

As the number line dividing basis it is divided into 8 equal parts as is greater side.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
What fraction is shaded? Plot the fraction on the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 124

 

Question 10.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 125

Modeling Real Life
Use the number line to answer the questions.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 126

Question 11.
How far is the grocery store from the school ?

Answer: 2

Explanation:

The grocery store is two miles away from the school.

From the above figure, we can see that each part is divided into 4 equal parts in that way school is 2 miles away.

Question 12.
A playground is the same distance from the grocery store as it is from the library. How far is the playground from the mall?

Answer:1 mile

Explanation:

The grocery store is 1 mile away from the play ground.as it has the same distance each.

Review & Refresh

Question 13.
25 Nearest ten: ___30

The 10 which comes after 25 is 30

Question 14.
182 Nearest hundred: ___200

The 100 which comes after 182 is 200.

Understand Fractions Performance Task

Question 1.
You, your friend, and your cousin are making spinners for a board game.
a. You design a spinner with 3 equal parts for your game. Draw the equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 127
b. Your friend designs a spinner that is split into sixths. Does this spinner work for your game?
c. Your cousin wants to design a spinner that is \(\frac{1}{3}\) blue, \(\frac{2}{3}\) yellow, and \(\frac{1}{3}\) red. Is your cousin correct? Explain.

Answer: the spinner is divided into three equal parts to play the game.

B. The spinner which is divided by my friend is useful for the game as he spotted the circle into 6 equal parts it is shown.

C. He is wrong because he divided the circle into 3 parts and saying coloring as four parts.

 

Question 2.
Use the game board above to find the area of each color in square inches. Which color has the greatest area?

Explanation:

Blue color has 4 inches length in to breadth.

L*B.

2*2=4

Area of the blue surface is4 into no of blocks is 4*12 is 24.

Question 3.

Design a spinner that has 8 equal parts. One part is red, two parts are blue, one part is yellow, and the rest is green.
a. What fraction of the spinner is green?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 129
b. Which colour are you most likely to spin ? Explain

Understand Fractions Activity

Fraction Spin and Cover

Directions:

  1. Take turns using the spinners to find which fraction model to cover.
  2. Use a counter to cover the fraction model.
  3. Repeat this process until you cover all of the models.
  4. The player with the most fraction models covered wins!

Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 130

Understand Fractions Chapter Practice

10.1 Equal Parts of a Whole

Tell whether the shape shows equal parts or unequal parts. If the shape shows equal parts, then name them.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 132

Answer: 6 parts.

Explanation: the above rectangle is divided into 6 equal parts. and name  sixths.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 133

Answer:4 equal parts

Explanation:

The above triangle is divided into 4 equal parts which are equal in size. they name as fourths.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 134

Answer:9 parts unequal

Explanation:

The above circle is divided but it is not equal. the name as ninths.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 135

Answer:3 equal parts

Explanation:The above square is divided into three equal parts. and named as thirds.

Question 5.
Divide the triangle into two equal parts. Then name the equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 136

Answer: Halves

Explanation: the above circle is divided into two equal parts. they named as halves.

Question 6.
Divide the circle into eight equal parts. Then name the equal parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 137

Answer: eighths.

Explanation: the circle is divided into eight equal parts. the named as eighths.

10.2 Understand a Unit Fraction

What fraction of the whole is shaded?

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 138

Answer: 1/6 is shaded.

Explanation: the above rectangle is divided into 6 parts and in that one part is shaded. that is 1/6

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 139

Answer: 1/3

Explanation: the above parallelogram is divided into three equal parts in which one part is coloured. That is 1/3

Question 9.
Divide the square into four equal parts. Shade one part. What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 140

Answer:1/4.

Explanation:The above square is divided into four parts in which one is shaded. that is 1/4th part of the whole is shaded.

Question 10.
Divide the circle into eight equal parts. Shade one part. What fraction of the whole is shaded?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 156

Answer:1/8

Explanation: the above circle is divided into eight equal parts. in that one part is shaded. the whole part shaded is 1/8.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Descartes arranges his bedroom into four equal parts. His bed takes up two parts. His dresser takes up one part. The rest of his bedroom is free space. What fraction of Descartes’s bedroom is free space?

10.3 Write Fractions of a Whole

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 157

Answer:3/4

Explanation: from the above semicircle the number of divided parts are 4. In that three are shaded that is 3/4th of the whole is shaded.

Question 13.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 158

Answer: whole.

Explanation: the above triangle is divided into two equal parts in that two equal parts are shaded. so the whole part is shaded.

Question 14.
Divide the circle into sixths. Shade 4 of the equal parts. Then write a fraction for the shaded parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 141

Answer:4/6 parts is shaded.

Explanation: the circle is divided into 6.the 4 parts are shaded the shaded part is 4/6.

 

Question 15.
Divide the square into thirds. Shade 2 of the equal parts. Then write a fraction for the shaded parts.
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 142

Answer:2/3 is shaded.

Explanation.

The square is divided into three equal parts of two equal parts are shaded. the shaded part is 2/3.

Question 16.
Modeling Real Life
A circular mandala poster is divided into eight equal parts. You color one part red, three parts green, and two parts yellow. What fraction of the poster do you have left to color?
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 143

Answer: 2/8

Explanation: the circle mandala poster is divided into 8 equal parts.

Red=1

Green=3

Yellow=2

The two parts should be colored.

10.4 Fractions on a Number Line: Less Than 1

Plot the fraction on the number line

Question 17.
\(\frac{3}{4}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 144

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 4 equal parts. Point and mark each tick mark on the number line as 1/4 that of divided parts and the latex is 3 of 1/4 s are 3/4

Question 18.
\(\frac{5}{6}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 145

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 6 equal parts. Point and mark each tick mark on the number line as 1/6 that of divided parts and the latex is 5 of 1/6 s are 5/6.

Question 19.
\(\frac{2}{3}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 146

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 3 equal parts. Point and mark each tick mark on the number line as 1/3 that of divided parts and the latex is 2 of 1/3 s are 2/3.

Plot the fraction on a number line.

Question 20.
\(\frac{3}{6}\)

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 6 equal parts. Point and mark each tick mark on the number line as 1/6 that of divided parts and the latex is 3 of 1/6 s are 3/6.

Question 21.
\(\frac{5}{8}\)

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 into 8 equal parts. Point and mark each tick mark on the number line as 1/8 that of divided parts and the latex is 5 of 1/8s are 5/8.

Question 22.
Modeling Real Life
You follow a recipe and make three servings. How many servings can you make using \(\frac{1}{3}\) of each ingredient in the recipe?

10.5 Fractions on a Number Line: Greater Than 1

Plot the fraction on the number line.

Question 23.
\(\frac{4}{3}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers 3rd Grade Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 147

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 and 1 to 2 into 6 equal parts. Point and mark each tick mark on the number line as 1/3 that of divided parts and the latex is 4 of 1/3 s are 4/3.

Question 24.
\(\frac{9}{6}\)
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 148

Explanation:

Divided the length from 0 to 1 and 1 to 2 into 12 equal parts. Point and mark each tick mark on the number line as 1/6 that of divided parts and the latex is 9 of 1/6 s are 9/6.

Question 25.
Structure
Complete the number line.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 149

Divided the length from 0 to 1 and 1 and 2 into 1/2 equal parts. Point and mark each tick mark on the number line as 1/2 and 3/2.

Question 26.
Number Sense
What fraction is shaded? Plot the fraction on the number line
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions 160

Explanation:

The above two circles are divided into 16 equal parts.

From 0 to 1 eight equal parts which are fully shaded.

From 1 to 2 eight equal parts in that 6 parts are shaded.

BIM Grade 3 Answer Key Chapter 10 Understand Fractions

We believe that the information mentioned in this article is helpful for the students. Our main aim is to make easy and fun learning for the 3rd grade students. If you have any queries about Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 3 Chapter 10 Understand Fractions, you can leave a comment below. Bookmark our site to get the solutions of other grades chapters and grade 3 remaining chapters.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10

Students can learn the concepts of addition and subtraction from Big Ideas Math Answer Grade K. This is the best source for your child to improve their performance skills. Big Ideas Math Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 Answer Key is given in the pdf format so that you can prepare in the online or offline mode. They learn counting numbers, subtraction and solve problems by using those concepts. Understand the way of representing the numerical operations with the help of Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10.

Big Ideas Math Book Grade K Answer Key Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10

Children develop strategies for subtracting the whole numbers by referring to our BIM Grade K 7th Chapter Subtract Numbers within 10. This Subtract Numbers within 10 chapter discusses the concepts like Vocabulary, Understand Subtraction, Take From, etc. We provide different methods to solve the problems by using the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10. Hence Download Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 pdf for free.

Lesson: 1 Understand Subtraction

Lesson: 2 Subtraction: Take From

Lesson: 3 Subtraction: Take Apart

Lesson: 4 Subtraction Number Patterns

Lesson: 5 Practice Subtraction

Lesson: 6 Use a Group of 5 to Subtract

Lesson: 7 Related Facts

Chapter 7: Subtract Numbers within 10

Subtract Numbers within 10 Vocabulary

Directions:
Name the parts and the whole for the group. Then complete the number bond.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 v 1

Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-v-1

Explanation:
Number bond:
A number bond is a simple addition of two numbers that add up to give the sum. Using number bonds, one can instantly tell the answer without the need for the actual calculation.
Whole: Here we know that 5 is a whole number. The number 3 combines with other number 2 gives the result 5.
Parts: A number can be thought of as a whole made up of different pairs, or parts, added together.

Vocabulary Cards
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 v 2

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 v 3

Lesson 7.1 Understand Subtraction

Explore and Grow

Directions: Use counters to act out the story.

  • There are 4 students in the school. Write the number.
  • 3 students leave the school. Write the number.
  • Tell how many students are left in the school.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-1

Explanation:
There are 4 students in the school.
In that 3 students leave the school.
Now we have to take away 3 from 4.
4 – 3 = 1
Hence 1 student is left in the school.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Complete the sentence to tell how many students there are in all how many are leaving, and how many are left.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-2

Explanation:
There are 5 students in the class.
Out of them 3 students left the class.
Now we have to find how many students are left in the class.
Take away 3 from 5
5 – 3 = 2
Thus there are 2 students in the class.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Complete the sentence to tell how many students there are in all, how many are leaving, and how many are left.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-3

Explanation:
There are 6 students in the football ground.
2 students are leaving the ground.
We have to take away 2 from the total number of students.
6 – 2 = 4

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-4

Explanation:
There are 8 students in the room.
Out of which 3 students left the room.
So, 8 – 3 = 5
Thus there are 5 students left in the room.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-5

Explanation:
There are 10 students in the bus.
In which 3 students are getting down.
Take away 3 from 10.
10 – 3 = 7
Thus there are 7 students in the bus.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • You have 8 green beans on your plate. You eat 6 of them. Cross out the green beans you eat. Then complete the sentence to match your picture.
  • You have 6 carrots on your plate. You eat some of them. Cross out the carrots you eat. Then complete the sentence to match your picture.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-6

Explanation:
You have 8 green beans on your plate. You eat 6 of them
So, you have to subtract 6 from 8.
Takeaway 6 from 8 which gives 2.
8 – 6 = 2
Thus there are 2 green beans on your plate.
You have 6 carrots on your plate. You eat some of them.
Takeaway 2 from 6 which gives 4.
6 – 2 = 4
Thus there are 4 carrots on your plate.

Understand Subtraction Homework & Practice 7.1

Directions:
1 and 2 Complete the sentence to tell how many students there are in all, how many are leaving, and how many are left.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-7

Explanation:
There are 3 students in the ground.
Among them 1 student leaving the ground.
So, takeaway 1 from 3
3 – 1 = 2
Thus 2 students left in the ground.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-8

Explanation:
5 students playing the room.
In which 1 student is leaving the room.
So, takeaway 1 from 5 we get 4
5 – 1 = 4
Thus 4 students left in the room.

Directions:
3 and 4 Complete the sentence to tell how many students there are in all, how many are leaving, and how many are left. 5 You have 9 blueberries on your plate. You eat some of them. Cross out the blueberries you eat. Then complete the sentence to tell how many blueberries there are in all, how many you eat, and how many are left.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-9

Explanation:
There are 7 students in the library.
3 students are leaving the library.
Takeaway 3 from 7.
7 – 3 = 4
Hence 4 students are left in the library.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-10

Explanation:
Total number of students in the playground are 10.
Of which 4 students left the playground
That means we have takeaway 4 from 10.
10 – 4 = 6
Thus 6 students are left in the playground .

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.1 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.1-11

Explanation:
You have 9 blueberries on your plate. You eat some of them.
Takeaway 1 blueberry from your plate.
9 – 1 = 8
Thus there are 8 blueberries on your plate.

Lesson 7.2 Subtraction: Take From

Explore and Grow

Directions: Use counters to act out the story.

  • There are 5 birds in the cage. Write the number.
  • 3 of the birds fly away. Write the number.
  • Tell how many birds are left in the cage.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-1

Explanation:
There are 5 birds in the cage. In which 3 of the birds fly away.
Now we have to take away 3 from 5.
5 – 3 = 2
Thus 2 birds are left in the cage.

Think and Grow

Directions:
Complete the sentence to tell how many animals there are in all, how many are leaving, and how many are left. Then complete the subtraction sentence to match.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-2

Explanation:
There are 5 animals on the ground.
Among them 1 animal leaving the ground.
So, take away 1 from 5
5 – 1 = 4
Thus 1 animal left in the ground.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Complete the sentence to tell how many deer there are in all, how many are leaving, and how many are left. Then complete the subtraction sentence to match. 2 and 3 Complete the subtraction sentence to tell how many animals are left.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-3

Explanation:
There are 5 deers in all. Among them, 4 are leaving.
So subtract 4 deers from 5. So that we can know how many deers are left.
5 – 4 = 1
Thus only 1 deer is left.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-4

Explanation:
There are 4 deers in all. Among them, 2 are leaving.
So subtract 2 deers from 4. So that we can know how many deers are left.
4 – 2 = 2
Thus 2 deers are left.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-5

Explanation:
There are 9 sheep in all. Out of 9 three sheep are leaving.
9 – 3 = 6
Thus 6 sheep are left.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:
Some of the bats in a cave fly away. Cross out the bats that fly away. Then complete the subtraction sentence to tell how many are left.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-6

Explanation:
By seeing the figure we can say that there are 9 bats in all.
Now we have to subtract 2 bats from 9.
We get 9 – 2 = 7

Subtraction: Take From Homework & Practice 7.2

Directions:
1 Complete the sentence to tell how many panthers there are in all, how many are leaving, and how many are left. Then complete the subtraction sentence to match.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-7

Explanation:
From the above figure we can see that there are 3 panthers.
In that 1 panther is leaving.
So we have to subtract 3 from 1.
3 – 1 = 2
Thus 2 panthers are left.

Directions:
2 and 3 Complete the subtraction sentence to tell how many animals are left. 4 Some of the wolves leave the group. Cross out the wolves that leave. Then complete the subtraction sentence to tell how many wolves are left.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-8

Explanation:
There are 4 rabbits in all.
We observe that 1 rabbit is leaving.
4 – 1 = 3
Thus 3 rabbits are left.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-9

Explanation:
There are 7 eagles in all.
We observe that four eagles are leaving.
7 – 4 = 3
Thus 3 eagles are left.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.2 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.2-10

Explanation:
There are 10 wolves in all.
We have to subtract 2 wolves from them.
Cross any two wolves to find the subtraction equation.
10 – 2 = 8

Lesson 7.3 Subtraction: Take Apart

Explore and Grow

Directions:
There are 7 apples in the tree. Some are red and some are yellow. Use counters to show the apples in the tree. Write the number above the tree. Take apart the group of apples by placing the red apples in one group and the yellow apples in another group. Write the numbers.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.3 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.3-1 (1)

Explanation:
Given that,
There are 7 apples in the tree. Some are red and some are yellow.
There are 4 apples on the tree and 3 yellow apples on the tree.
4 + 3 = 7

Think and Grow

Directions:
Circle the linking cubes to show the parts in the number bond. Then write a subtraction sentence by taking one of the parts from the whole. Cross out the part on the number bond that you take away.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.3 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.3-2

Explanation:
There are 5 cubes in all.
3 and 2 are the parts and 5 is the number bond.
Now we have to take away 3 from 5.
5 – 3 = 2

Apply and Grow

Directions:
1 Circle the linking cubes to show the parts in the number bond. Then write a subtraction sentence by taking one of the parts from the whole. Cross out the part on the number bond that you take away. 2 Take apart the linking cubes. Circle the parts. Write a subtraction sentence by taking one of the parts from the whole. Then write another subtraction sentence by taking the other part from the whole.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.3 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.3-3

Explanation:
There are 8 cubes in all. Among them we have to take away 3 cubes, we get
8 – 3 = 5

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.3 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.3-4

Explanation:
There are 9 cubes in all. Among them we have to take away 2 cubes, we get
9 – 2 = 7
There are 9 cubes in all. Among them we have to take away 3 cubes, we get
9 – 3 = 6

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: You have 10 balloons. You want to share some with your friend.

  • Put the balloons into 2 groups. Circle the groups. Then cross out the group you give to your friend. Write a subtraction sentence to match your picture. Circle the number that shows how many balloons you have left.
  • Show another way you can share the balloons. Then write a subtraction sentence to match your picture. Circle the number that shows how many balloons you have left.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.3 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.3-5

Explanation:
There are 10 ballons in all.
Put the balloons into 2 groups. Circle the groups. Then cross out the group you give to your friend.
From the figure, we observe that you give 3 balloons to your friend.
10 – 3 = 7
From the figure, we observe that you give 5 balloons to your friend.
10 – 5 = 5

Subtraction: Take Apart Homework & Practice 7.3

Directions:
1 Circle the linking cubes to show the parts in the number bond. Then write a subtraction sentence by taking one of the parts from the whole. Cross out the part on the number bond that you take away. 2 Take apart the linking cubes. Circle the parts. Then write a subtraction sentence by taking one of the parts from the whole.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.3 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.3-6 (1)

Explanation:
There are 4 cubes in all.
Make a group and cross 3 cubes from the total.
4 – 3 = 1

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.3 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.3-7

Explanation:
There are 6 cubes in all.
Make a group and cross 2 cubes from the total.
6 – 2 = 4

Directions:
3 Take apart the linking cubes. Circle the parts. Write a subtraction sentence by taking one of the parts from the whole. Then write another subtraction sentence by taking the other part from the whole. 4 You pick 8 flowers. You want to give some to your friend. Put the flowers into 2 groups. Circle the groups. Then cross out the group you give to your friend. Write a subtraction sentence to match your picture. Circle the number that shows how many flowers you have left.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.3 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.3-8

Explanation:
There are 8 cubes in all.
Make a group and cross 3 cubes from the total.
8 – 3 = 5
There are 8 cubes in all.
Make a group and cross 2 cubes from the total.
8 – 2 = 6

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.3 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.3-9

Explanation:
There are 8 flowers in all.
Out of which 4 flowers are crossed.
8 – 4 = 4

Lesson 7.4 Subtraction Number Patterns

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Shade the boxes to show how many there are to start. Cross out the shaded boxes to show how many are being taken away. Tell how many are left.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-1

Think and Grow

Directions:
Complete the subtraction sentence to tell how many dots are left. Tell what you notice.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-2

Explanation:
In the first block 4 boxes are shaded.
4 shaded blocks are crossed.
Now we have to write the subtraction equation for that
4 – 4 = 0
In the first block 7 boxes are shaded.
0 shaded blocks are crossed.
Now we have to write the subtraction equation for that
7 – 0 = 7

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 3 Complete the subtraction sentence to tell how many dots are left. Tell what you notice. 4 – 6 Complete the subtraction sentence. Tell what you notice.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-3

Explanation:
In the first block 8 boxes are shaded.
0 shaded blocks are crossed.
Now we have to write the subtraction equation for that
8 – 0 = 8

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-4

Explanation:
In the first block 8 boxes are shaded.
8 shaded blocks are crossed.
Now we have to write the subtraction equation for that
8 – 8 = 0

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-5

Explanation:
In the first block 8 boxes are shaded.
1 shaded blocks are crossed.
Now we have to write the subtraction equation for that
8 – 1 = 7

Question 4:

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-6

Explanation:
In the first block 6 boxes are shaded.
6 shaded blocks are crossed.
Now we have to write the subtraction equation for that
6 – 6 = 0

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-7

Explanation:
In the first block 9 boxes are shaded.
1 shaded blocks are crossed.
Now we have to write the subtraction equation for that
9 – 1 = 8

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-8

Explanation:
In the first block 10 boxes are shaded.
0 shaded blocks are crossed.
Now we have to write the subtraction equation for that
10 – 0 = 1

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • You make 9 bracelets. You give all of them away. Cross out the bracelets you give away. Then write a subtraction sentence to tell how many bracelets you have left.
  • Your friend makes 6 bracelets. She does not give away any of her bracelets. Draw and color your friend’s bracelets. Then write a subtraction sentence to tell how many bracelets she has left.
  • Your friend gives you a bracelet. Write a subtraction sentence to tell how many bracelets she has left now.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-9

Subtraction Number Patterns Homework & Practice 7.4

Directions:
1 – 3 Complete the subtraction sentence to tell how many dots are left. Tell what you notice.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-10

Explanation:
There are 3 shaded blocks.
Out of them 1 block is crossed.
3 – 1 = 2
Thus 2 are left.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-11

Explanation:
There are 3 shaded blocks.
Out of them 0 block is crossed.
3 – 0 = 3
Thus 3 are left.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-12

Explanation:
There are 3 shaded blocks.
Out of them 3 blocks are crossed.
3 – 3 = 0
Thus 0 are left.

Directions:
4 – 6 Complete the subtraction sentence. Tell what you notice. 7 Your friend makes 10 cards. She does not give away any of her cards. Draw and color your friend’s cards. Then write a subtraction sentence to tell how many cards she has left. Your friend gives you a card. Write a subtraction sentence to tell how many cards she has left now.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 13
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-13

Explanation:
There are 10 cards.
You give all the cards.
10 – 10 = 0

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-14

Explanation:
There are 7 cards.
You give away 1 card.
7 – 1 = 6

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-15

Explanation:
There are 9 cards.
You give away 0 card.
9 – 0 = 9

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.4 16
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.4-16

Explanation:
There are 10 cards.
You give away 0 card.
10 – 0 = 10
There are 10 cards.
You give away 1 card.
10 – 1 = 9

Lesson 7.5 Practice Subtraction

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Use counters in the five frame to show how many there are to start. Show how many counters are being taken away. Tell and write how many are left.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-1

Think and Grow

Directions:
Complete the subtraction sentence. Tell how you found your answer.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-2

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 – 4 Complete the subtraction sentence. Tell how you found your answer. 5 Circle all of the subtraction problems that equal 3.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-3

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence for 2 – 2 is 0.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-4

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence for 5 – 0 = 5

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-5

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence for 4 – 2 = 2

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 6
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-6

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence for 5 – 3 = 2

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-7

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: You are playing a video game.

  • You have 5 spaceships. Some of them are captured. Cross out the spaceships that are captured. Then write a subtraction sentence to tell how many spaceships you have left.
  • You need to capture 5 aliens to win. You capture some aliens. Cross out the aliens that you capture. Then write a subtraction sentence to tell how many aliens you still need to capture.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-8

Practice Subtraction Homework & Practice 7.5

Directions:
1 – 3 Complete the subtraction sentence. Tell how you found your answer.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-9

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence for 5 – 5 is 0.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 10
Answer: 4
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-10

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence for 4 – 0 is 4.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 11
Answer: 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-11

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence for 5 – 2 is 3.

Directions:
4 and 5 Complete the subtraction sentence. Tell how you found your answer. 6 Circle all of the subtraction problems that equal 2. 7 You are playing a video game. You need to visit 5 moons. You visit some moons. Cross out the moons you visit. Then write a subtraction sentence to tell how many moons you have left to visit.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 12
Answer: 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-12

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence for 4 – 3 = 1

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 13
Answer: 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-8

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence for 3 – 1 is 2.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 14
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-14

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.5 15
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.5-15

Explanation:
There are 5 moons.
We have to cross 1 moon from them.
The subtraction sentence for 5 – 1 is 4.

Lesson 7.6 Use a Group of 5 to Subtract

Explore and Grow

Directions:
Color the counters to show how many there are in all. Cross out counters to take away 5. Complete the subtraction sentence.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-1

Explanation:
Shade the counters given in the figure.
We have to cross 5 counters.
The subtraction sentence for 6 – 5 = 1

Think and Grow

Directions:
Cross out 5 counters to show how many to take away. Use the ten frame to complete the subtraction sentence.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-2

Explanation:
There are 7 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 7 – 5 = 2
There are 9 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 9 – 5 = 4

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 and 2 Cross out 5 counters to show how many to take away. Use the ten frame to complete the subtraction sentence. 3 Draw 10 counters. Cross out 5 counters to show how many to take away. Use the ten frame to complete the subtraction sentence.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 3
Answer: 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-3

Explanation:
There are 5 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 5 – 5 = 0

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 4
Answer: 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-4

Explanation:
There are 6 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 6 – 5 = 1

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 5
Answer: 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-5

Explanation:
There are 10 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 10 – 5 = 5

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions: You have 2 rolls to knock down 10 bowling pins.

  • On your first roll, you knock down 5 pins. Cross out the pins you knock down. Then write a subtraction sentence to match your picture. How many pins do you need to knock down on your second roll? Circle the answer.
  • On your second roll, you knock down the pins that are left. Write a subtraction sentence to show how many pins you have left now.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 6
Answer:
10 – 5 = 5
5 – 5 = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-6

Use a Group of 5 to Subtract Homework & Practice 7.6

Directions:
1 and 2 Cross out 5 counters to show how many to take away. Use the ten frame to complete the subtraction sentence.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-3

Explanation:
There are 5 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 5 – 5 = 0

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 8
Answer: 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-8

Explanation:
There are 7 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 7 – 5 = 2

Directions:
3 Cross out 5 counters to show how many to take away. Use the ten frame to complete the subtraction sentence. 4 Draw 8 counters. Cross out 5 counters to show how many to take away. Use the ten frame to complete the subtraction sentence. 5 You have 2 throws to knock down 9 bottles. On your first throw, you knock down 5 bottles. Cross out the bottles you knockdown. Then write a subtraction sentence to match your picture. How many more bottles do you need to knock down? Circle the answer.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 9
Answer: 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-9

Explanation:
There are 5 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 5 – 5 = 0

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 10
Answer: 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-10

Explanation:
There are 8 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 8 – 5 = 3

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.6 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.6-11

Explanation:
There are 9 counters. Among them 5 counters are crossed.
The subtraction sentence for 9 – 5 = 4

Lesson 7.7 Related Facts

Explore and Grow

Directions:

  • You have 3 yellow linking cubes and 2 green linking cubes. How many linking cubes do you have in all? Write an addition sentence to match the picture.
  • You have 5 linking cubes. You give your friend 2 linking cubes. How many linking cubes do you have left? Write a subtraction sentence to match the picture.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 1
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-1

Explanation:
There are 3 yellow linking cubes and 2 green linking cubes.
The addition sentence is 3 + 2 = 5
There are 5 linking cubes. You give your friend 2 linking cubes.
5 – 2 = 3

Think and Grow

Directions:
Tell whether the pictures show addition or subtraction. Then write addition and subtraction sentences to show the related facts.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-2

Explanation:
The addition sentence for the first figure is 2 + 3 = 5
The subtraction sentence for the second figure is 5 – 3 = 2

Apply and Grow: Practice

Directions:
1 Tell whether the pictures show addition or subtraction. Then write addition and subtraction sentences to show the related facts. 2 and 3 Circle the addition and subtraction sentences that show related facts. Tell how you know.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-3

Explanation:
There are 5 bees in all.
4 bees are leaving.
5 – 4 = 1
There is 1 bee and 4 bees are coming.
1 + 4 = 5

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-4

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-5

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Directions:

  • A zoo has 5 lizards. Some are green and some are brown. Color the lizards. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture.
  • Write a subtraction sentence that shows the related fact. Tell a story to match your subtraction sentence.

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 6
Answer:
3 + 2 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-6

Explanation:
There are 3 green lizards and 2 brown lizards.
Additional sentence 3 + 2 = 5
There are 5 lizards in all.
subtraction sentence 5 – 2 = 3

Related Facts Homework & Practice 7.7

Directions:
1 Tell whether the pictures show addition or subtraction. Then write addition and subtraction sentences to show the related facts.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-7

Explanation:
There are 5 seals and 1 seal is leaving.
The subtraction sentence is 5 – 1 = 4
There are 4 seals on the ice and 1 seal is coming.
4 + 1 = 5

Directions:
2 and 3 Circle the group of addition and subtraction sentences that shows related facts. Tell how you know. 4 A tank at a pet store has 5 tree frogs. Some are blue and some are red. Color the frogs. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture. Write a subtraction sentence that shows the related fact. Tell a story to match your subtraction sentence.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 8
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-8

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 9
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-9

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 7.7 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answer-Key-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-7.7-10

Subtract Numbers within 10 Performance Task

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 1
Directions:
1 You blow 9 bubbles in the air. There are more big bubbles than small bubbles. Draw the bubbles. Then write a subtraction sentence to tell how many small bubbles are in the air. 2 Some of the bubbles pop. Cross out the bubbles that pop. Then write a subtraction sentence to tell how many bubbles are left. 3 All of the remaining bubbles pop. Write a subtraction sentence to tell how many bubbles are left now.

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 2
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-2

Explanation:
Given that,
There are 9 bubbles in the air.
There are more big bubbles than small bubbles.
9 – 4 = 5
Thus the subtraction sentence is 9 – 4 = 5

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 3
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-3
Thus the subtraction sentence is 9 – 5 = 4

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-4
Thus the subtraction sentence is 9 – 9 = 0

Subtract Numbers within 10 Activity

Losing Teeth
Directions:
Spin the blue spinner. Put that many counters on the ten frame. Spin the red spinner. Take away that many counters from the ten frame. Tell how many counters are left. Complete the subtraction sentence on your Subtraction Recording Sheet. Repeat this process until you fill your sheet.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 5
Answer:
10 – 4 = 6

Explanation:
Let the number in the blue spinner be 10
Let the number in the red spinner be 4
10 – 4 = 6

Subtract Numbers within 10 Chapter Practice

Directions:
1 Complete the sentence to tell how many students there are in all, how many are leaving, and how many are left. 2 Complete the sentence to tell how many lions there are in all, how many are leaving, and how many are left. Then complete the subtraction sentence to match.

7.1 Understand Subtraction

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 1
Answer: 7 – 6 = 1
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-1

Explanation:
There are 7 students in all.
6 students are leaving.
So, we have to take away 6 from 7.
7 – 6 = 1
Thus 1 student left.

7.2 Subtraction: Take From

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 2
Answer: 6 – 3 = 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-2

Explanation:
There are 6 lions in all.
3 lions are leaving.
Take away 3 lions from 6
6 – 3 = 3
Thus 3 lions left.

Directions:
3 Circle the linking cubes to show the parts in the number bond. Then write a subtraction sentence by taking one of the parts from the whole. Cross out the part on the number bond that you take away. 4 You have 9 toys. You want to give some to your friend. Put the toys into 2 groups. Circle the groups. Then cross out the group you give to your friend. Write a subtraction sentence to match your picture. Circle the number that shows how many toys you have left. 5 Complete the subtraction sentence to tell how many dots are left. Tell what you notice.

7.3 Subtraction: Take Apart

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 3
Answer: 7 – 2 = 5
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-3

Explanation:
There are 7 linking cubes in all.
2 cubes are crossed.
7 – 2 = 5
Thus 5 cubes are left.

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 4
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-4

Explanation:
There are 9 dragons in all.
9 dragons are crossed.
9 – 9 = 0

7.4 Subtraction Number Patterns

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 5
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-5

Explanation:
There are 6 shaded blocks. In that 6 blocks are crossed.
6 – 6 = 0

Directions:
6 and 7 Complete the subtraction sentence. Tell what you notice. 8 and 9 Complete the subtraction sentence. Tell how you found your answer. 10 Circle all of the subtraction problems that equal 4.

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 6
Answer: 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-6

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence is 3 – 0 = 3

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 7
Answer: 7
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-7

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence is 8 – 1 = 7

7.5 Practice Subtraction

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 8
Answer: 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-8

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence is 3 – 1 = 2

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 9
Answer: 2
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-9

Explanation:
The subtraction sentence is 4 – 2 = 2

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-10

Directions:
11 Cross out 5 counters to show how many to take away. Use the ten frame to complete the subtraction sentence. 12 An aquarium has 5 starfish. Some are orange and some are purple. Color the starfish. Then write an addition sentence to match your picture. Write a subtraction sentence that shows the related fact. Tell a story to match your subtraction sentence.

7.6 Use a Group of 5 to Subtract

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 11
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-11

Explanation:
There are 9 shaded blocks. 5 blocks are grouped.
So cross 5 blocks from 9.
9 – 5 = 4

7.7 Related Facts

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 chp 12
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Answers-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-chp-12

Explanation:
There are 3 orange stars and 2 violet stars.
The addition sentence is 3 + 2 = 5
The subtraction sentence is 5 – 2 = 3

Subtract Numbers within 10 Cumulative Practice

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 1 Which group of animals matches the number bond? 2 Which animal is shown 2 times? 3 Which partner numbers do not make 5?

Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 1
Answer: ii option
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-1

Explanation:
1 + 3 = 4
1 is left and 3 are leaving.
1 and 3 are the parts and 4 is the number bond.

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 2
Answer: i option
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-2

Explanation:
There are 2 polar bears.
Thus the answer is option i.

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 3
Answer: iii option
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-3

Directions:
Shade the circle next to the answer. 4 Which ten frame shows the number of camels? 5 Which sentence tells how many students are in the group to start, how many join, and how many there are in all? 6 Which subtraction sentence tells how many dots are left?

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 4
Answer: ii option
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-4

Explanation:
There are 8 camels in all.
Now we have to match it to the tens pattern.
Option ii is the correct answer.

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 5
Answer: iv option
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-5

Explanation:
There are 6 students in all.
3 students are joining them.
6 + 3 = 9
Thus the correct answer is option iv.
Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 6
Answer: ii option
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-6

Explanation:
By seeing the figure we can say that there are 6 shaded blocks among them 6 are crossed.
That means the subtraction sentence is 6 – 6 = 0
option ii is the correct answer.

Directions:
7 Match the subtraction sentences with the pictures that show how many there are in all, how many are leaving, and how many are left. 8 Count the objects in each group. Write each number. Draw a line through the number that is less than the other number. 9 Circle 2 groups of bear counters that make 10 bear counters in all. Then write an addition sentence.

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 7
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-7

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 8
Answer:
horses = 7
apples = 8
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-8

Explanation:
By seeing the figure we observe that,
There are 7 horses and 8 apples.

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 9
Answer: 5 + 5 = 10
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-9

Directions:
10 Color 5 cars blue and the rest red. Then complete the number bond to match your picture. 11 Draw lines between the objects in each group. Circle the group that is greater in number than the other group. 12 You are playing a video game. You need to catch 5 pigs that escaped. You catch some of the pigs. Cross out the pigs you catch. Then write a subtraction sentence to tell how many pigs you have left to catch.

Question 10.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 10
Answer:
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-10

Question 11.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 11
Answer: 4 > 3
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-11

Question 12.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 cp 12
Answer: 5 – 5 = 0
Big-Ideas-Math-Solutions-Grade-K-Chapter-7-Subtract-Numbers-within-10-cp-12

Conclusion:

We wish the Big Ideas Math Answers Grade K Chapter 7 Subtract Numbers within 10 Pdf is beneficial for you. If you have any doubts regarding the concepts you can post the comments in the below-mentioned comment box.

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals

Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals

What are you searching for? If you are really on the hunt for the best source to learn the Multiply Decimals concept, then refer to Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals. Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals is the one-stop solution for better learning. All types of problems, practice tests, explanations, step-by-step solving processes, real-time examples are provided on our material. Therefore, students who want to become math experts can use our material and get good marks in the exam. Chapter-wise topics are given for the best practice of students. Make use of our Big Ideas Grade 5 Math Answers and learn perfectly.

Big Ideas 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals Math Book Answer Key

For the best practice, refer to all the links available below. Every link refers to every individual topic. On our website, we have given various methods to learn in-depth concepts. Therefore, find the best way that makes your preparation easy. never waste a single moment. Immediately start your preparation and finish all problems. Accurate learning is in your hands if you prepare with the Big Ideas Math Book 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals Answer Key.

Lesson: 1 Multiplication Patterns with Decimals

Lesson: 2 Estimate Products of Decimals and Whole Numbers

Lesson: 3 Use Models to Multiply Decimals and Whole Numbers

Lesson: 4 Multiply Decimals and Whole Numbers

Lesson 5.5 Use Models to Multiply Decimals

Lesson: 6 Use Partial Products to Multiply Decimals

Lesson: 7 Use Strategies to Multiply Decimals

Lesson: 8 Multiply Decimals

Lesson: 9 Problem Solving: Multiply with Money

Chapter: 5 – Multiply Decimals

Lesson 5.1 Multiplication Patterns with Decimals

Explore and Grow

Use the relationship between positions in a place value chart to find each product.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 1
What patterns do you notice?
Answer:

I notice that in first value chart the decimal point  shifts one place to the right and in the second value chart the decimal point shifts one place to the left.

Structure
Describe the placement of the decimal point when multiplying a decimal by 10, 100, 0.1, and 0.01.
Answer:
When we multiply 0.01with 10 the decimal point shifts one place to the right(10×0.01=0.1)
When we multiply 0.01with 100 the decimal point shifts two places to the right(100×0.01=1)
When we multiply 0.01 with 0.1 the decimal point shifts one place to the left(0.1×0.01=0.001).

Think and Grow: Use Patterns to Find Products

Example
Find 0.38 × 103.
Use place value concepts. Every time you multiply a number by 10, each digit in the number shifts one position to the left in a place value chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 2
So, 0.38 × 103 = ______.
Notice the pattern: In each product, the number of places the decimal point moves to the right is the same as the exponent.

Example
Find 9.2 × 0.01.
Use place value concepts. Every time you multiply a number by \(\frac{1}{10}\) = 0.1, 10each digit in the number shifts one position to the right in a place value chart.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 3
Notice the pattern: When you multiply by0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the left. When you multiply by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the left.

Show and Grow

Find the product.
Question 1.
2.51 × 104 = _______
Answer:
2.51×10000=25,100

Explanation:
2.51×1=2.51
2.51x 101 =2.51×10=25.1
2.51x 102 =2.51×100=251
2.51x 103 =2.51×1000=2510
2.51x 104 =2.51×10000=25100
So, 2.51x 104 =25100
When we multiply 2.51 by 104 the number of places the decimal point moves to the right is the same as the exponent ie 4 places.

Question 2.
0.7 × 0.01 = ______
Answer:
0.7 × 0.01 = 0.007

Explanation:
0.7×1=0.7
0.7×0.1=0.07
0.7×0.01=0.007
So, 0.7×0.01=0.007
When you multiply 0.7 by 0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the left. When you multiply 0.7 by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the left.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product.
Question 3.
4.1 × 102 = _______
Answer:
4.1×100=410

Explanation:
4.1×1=4.1
4.1x 101 =4.1×10=41
4.1x 102 =4.1×100=410
So, 4.1×102 =410
When we multiply 4.1 by 102 the number of places the decimal point moves to the right is the same as the exponent ie 2.

Question 4.
7.03 × 0.1 = _______
Answer:
7.03×0.1=0.703

Explanation:
7.03×1=7.03
7.03×0.1=0.703
So, 7.03×0.1=0.703
When you multiply 7.03 by 0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the left.

Question 5.

16.579 × 104 = _______
Answer:
16.579×10000=1,65,790

Explanation:
16.579×1=16.579
16.579x 101 =16.579×10=165.79
16.579x 102 =16.579×100=1657.9
16.579x 103 =16.579×1000=16,579
16.579x 104 =16.579×10000=1,65,790
So, 16.579x 104 =1,65,790
When we multiply 16.579 by 104 the number of places the decimal point moves to the right is the same as the exponent ie 4.

Question 6.
843.7 × 0.01 = _______
Answer:
843.7×0.01=8.437

Explanation:
843.7×1=843.7
843.7×0.1=84.37
843.7×0.01=8.437
So, 843.7×0.01=8.437
When we multiply 843.7 by 0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the left.When you multiply 843.7 by 0.01, the decimal point moves two placs to the left.

Question 7.
A contractor installs a new floor of a room using 1,000 square tiles. Each tile has an area of 1.25 square feet. What is the area of the floor?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 4
Answer:
There are 1,000 square tiles in a room, Area of each tile is 1.25 square feet
Find the area of the floor by multiplying Area of tile by Number of tiles.
Multiplying 1.25 by 1000, shifts the digits 3 positions to the left in a place value chart.So, the decimal point moves 3 places to the right.
=1.25×1000=1,250 square feet
Therefore Area of floor is 1,250 square feet.

Reasoning
complete the equation

Question 9.
_____ × 103 = 6,209
Answer:
6.209×1000=6,209

Explanation:
Multiplying something by 1000, shifts the digits 3 positions to the left in a place value chart.So, the decimal point moves 3 places to the right.As the number 6,209 is already multiplyed by 1000 now to know the missing factor shift the decimal point 3 places to the left.
So, the number is 6.209

Question 10.
_____ × 0.01 = 1.879
Answer:
187.9=0.01=1.879

Explanation:
When you multiply by 0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the left.When you multiply by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the left.As the number 1.879 is already multiplied by 0.01 now to know the missing factor shift the decimal point two places to the right.
So, the number is 187.9

Question 11.
0.045 × _____ = 45
Answer:
0.045×1000=45

Explanation:
0.045×1=0.045
0.045×10=0.45
0.045×100=4.5
0.045×1000=45
When we multiply 0.045 by 1000 the decimal point moves 3 placed to the right.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A flea is 1.5 millimeters long. A magnified image of the flea is 100 times as long as its actual length. How much longer is the flea in the image than its actual length?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 5
Find the length of the flea in the image by multiplying the length of the flea by 100.
Multiplying 1.5 by 100, or 102, shifts the digits _____ positions to the left in a place value chart. So, the decimal point moves ____ places to the right.
1.5 × 100 = 1.5 × 102 = ______
The length of the flea in the image is _______ millimeters.
Subtract the length of the flea from the length of the flea in the image.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 6
The flea in the image is ________ millimeters longer than its actual length.

Answer:
Multiplying 1.5 by 100, or 102, shifts the digits right positions to the left in a place value chart. So, the decimal point moves left places to the right.
1.5 × 100 = 1.5 × 102 = 150
The length of the flea in the image is 150 millimeters.
150 – 1.5 = 148.5
The flea in the image is 148.5 millimeters longer than its actual length.

Show and Grow

Question 12.
The London Eye is a 443-foot-tall Ferris wheel. A model is 0.01 times as tall as the actual Ferris wheel. How much taller is the actual London Eye than the model?
Answer:
The London Eye is 443 feet tall Ferris, a model is 0.01 times tall as actual Ferris.
When we multiply 443 by 0.01 the decimal point moves 2 places to the left
443×0.01=4.43. So, the area of the model is 4.43 feet.
Subtract the area of the model from the actual area of the Ferris.
443.00‐ 4.43=438.57
The actual London Eye ferris wheel is 438.57 feet taller than a model ferris wheel.

Question 13.
Each day,you ride your bike from home to school and back. Your school is 0.9 mile from home. How far do you ride your bike in 10 days?
Answer:
My school is 0.9 mile from my home.If I ride bike from home to school and back every day then I ride 1.8(0.9×2) miles every day.
If each day I ride 1.8 miles then for 10 days i ride 1.8×10=18 miles.
When we multiply 1.8 by 10 and the decimal point moves 1 places to the right.
Therefore I ride 18 miles in 10 days.

Question 14.
DIG DEEPER!
An eel travels at a speed of 2 miles per hour. A starfish travels one hundredth the speed of the eel. A falcon travels 10,000 times as fast as the starfish. How many more miles per hour can the falcon travel than the eel?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 7
Answer:
An eel travels at a speed of 2 miles per hour.A starfish and travels one hundredth the speed of the eel.
Speed of starfish is 2×0.01(one hundredth)=0.02miles per hour.
When we multiply 2 by 0.01 the decimal point moves 2 places to the left
A falcon travels 10,000 times as fast as the starfish.
Speed of falcon is 10,000×0.02(speed of starfish)=200 miles per hour.
When we multiply 0.02 by 10000 the decimal point moves 4 places to the right
A falcon can travel 200 miles more miles per hour than the eel.

Multiplication Patterns with Decimals Homework & Practice 5.1

Find the product.
Question 1.
5.201 × 10 = ______
Answer:
5.201 × 10 =52.01

Explanation:
5.201×1=5.201
5.201×10=52.01
So, 5.201×10=52.01
When we multiply 5.201 by 10 the decimal point moves one place to the right.

Question 2.
26.7 × 0.01 = _____
Answer:
26.7 × 0.01 =0.267

Explanation:
26.7×1=26.7
26.7×0.1=2.67
26.7×0.01=0.267
So, 26.7 × 0.01 =0.267
When we multiply 26.7 by 0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the left. When you multiply 26.7 by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the left.

Question 3.
0.095 × 103 = ______
Answer:
0.095 × 103 =0.095×1000=95

Explanation:
0.095×1=0.095
0.095x 101 =0.095×10=0.95
0.095x 102 =0.095×100=9.5
0.095x 103 =0.095×1000=95
So, 0.095 × 103 =95
When we multiply 0.095 by 103 the number of places the decimal point moves to the right is the same as the exponent ie 3 places.

Question 4.
37.84 × 0.1 = ______
Answer:
37.84 × 0.1 =3.784

Explanation:
37.84×1=37.84
37.84×0.1=3.784
So, 37.84×0.1=3.784
When we multiply 37.84 by 0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the left.

Question 5.
0.26 × 104 = ______
Answer:
0.26 × 104 =0.26×10000=2600

Explanation:
0.26×1=0.26
0.26x 101 =0.26×10=2.6
0.26x 102 =0.26×100=26
0.26x 103 =0.26×1000=260
0.26x 104 =0.26×10000=2600
So, 0.26x 104 =2600
When we multiply 0.26 by 104 the number of places the decimal point moves to the right is the same as the exponent ie 4 places.

Question 6.
15.9 × 0.01 = ______
Answer:
15.9 × 0.01 =0.159

Explanation:
15.9×1=15.9
15.9×0.1=1.59
15.9×0.01=0.159
So, 15.9×0.01=0.159
when we multiply 15.9 by 0.01 the decimal point moves two places to the left.

Find the product.
Question 7.
0.8 × 0.01 = ______
Answer:
0.8 × 0.01 =0.008

Explanation:
0.8×1=0.8
0.8×0.1=0.08
0.8×0.01=0.008
So, 0.8×0.01=0.008
When we multiply 0.8 by 0.1, the decimal point moves one place to the left. When you multiply 0.8 by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the left.

Question 8.
3.1 × 104 = ______
Answer:
3.1 × 104 =3.1×10000=31000

Explanation:
3.1×1=3.1
3.1x 101 =3.1×10=31
3.1x 102 =3.1×100=310
3.1x 103 =3.1×1000=3100
3.1x 104 =3.1×10000=31000
So, 3.1x 104 =31000
When we multiply 3.1 by 104 the number of places the decimal point moves to the right is the same as the exponent ie 4 places.

Question 9.
Writing
Explain how you can use mental math to find 5.4 × 103 and 5.4 × 0.01.
Answer:
5.4 × 103 and 5.4 × 0.01
5.4 × 103
5.4 × 10 × 10 × 10
= 54 × 100
= 5400
5.4 × 0.01 = 0.054

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
What is Newton’s number?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 8
Answer:
Newton’s number is 49.874

Explanation:
Subtract 12.6 from 5000
5000‐12.6=4987.4
Divide the balance with 100 to find Newton’s number.
4987.4×0.01=49.874
When you multiply 4987.4 by 0.01, the decimal point moves two places to the left.
Newton’s number is 49.874

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
A house cat weighs 9.22 pounds. Hercules the liger is the world’s largest cat, and weighs 100 times the weight of the house cat. How much more does Hercules weigh than the house cat?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 9
Answer:
Hercules weigh  912.7 pounds more than the house cat.

Explanation:
A house cat weighs 9.22 pounds, Hercules the liger is the world’s largest cat and weighs 100 times more than a house cat.
The weight of Hercules is 9.22×100=922 pounds
When we multiply 9.22 by 100 the decimal point moves 2 places to the right.
Subtract weight of house cat from the weight of Hercules =922‐9.22=912.7
Hercules weigh  912.7 pounds more than the house cat.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
A Tyrannosaurus rex weighed about 1.4 tons more than one-tenth the weight of a Patagotitan. About how much did the mayorumTyrannosaurus rex weigh?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.1 10
Answer:
MayorumTyrannosaurus rex weigh=9 tons.

Explanation:
Weight of patagotitan mayorum is 76 tons and One‐tenth of patagotitan is 76×0.1=7.6 tons.
When you multiply 76.0 by 0.1 , the decimal point moves one places to the left.
A Tyrannosaurus rex weighed about 1.4 tons more than one-tenth the weight of a Patagotitan
Weight of Tyrannosaurus rex=1.4 tons + 7.6 tons= 9 tons
MayorumTyrannosaurus rex weigh=9 tons.

Review & Refresh

Question 13.
Newton and Descartes have a $50.00 gift card to a pet store. Newton’s total is $18.95 and Descartes’s total is $24.38. How much money do they have left on their gift card?
Answer:
Newton’s total is $18.95 and Descartes’s total is $24.38.
Total money they spent in a pet store =$18.95+$24.38 =$43.33
Newton and Descartes have a $50.00 gift card to a pet store
Subtract the money they spent in a pet store from the gift card money
$50.00‐$43.33=$6.67
Therefore , $6.67 is the amount they have left on their gift card.

Lesson 5.2 Estimate Products of Decimals and Whole Numbers

Explore and Grow

Choose an expression to estimate each product. Write the expression. You may use an expression more than once.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 1
Compare your answers with a partner. Did you choose the same expressions?
Answer:

when i compared my answers with my partners answers i found that we didnot choose the same expressions.

Construct Arguments
Which estimated product do you think will be closer to the product of 2.7 and 9? Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 2
Answer:
The estimated product of 3 and 9 is closer to the product of 2.7 and 9.

Explanation:
The product of 2.7 and 9 is 2.7×9=24.3
The product of 3 and 9 is 3×9=27
The product of 3 and 10 is 3×10=30
24.3 is closer to 27
Therefore the estimated product of 3 and 9 is closer to the product of 2.7 and 9.

Think and Grow: Estimate Products

Example
Estimate 3.85 × 27.
One Way: Use rounding. Round 3.85 to the nearest whole number. Then multiply.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 3
4 × 27 = ______
So, 3.85 × 27 is about = ______

Answer:
4 × 27 = 108
So, 3.85 × 27 is about = 104

Another Way: Use compatible numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 4
4 × 25 = ______
So, 3.85 × 27 is about = ______.

Answer:
4 × 25 = 100
So, 3.85 × 27 is about = 100.

Example
Estimate 77 × 93.6.
One Way: Use rounding. Round to the nearest ten. Then multiply.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 5
80 × 90 = _____
So, 77 × 93.6 is about = ______

Answer:
80 × 90 = 7200
So, 77 × 93.6 is about = 7200

Another Way: Use compatible numbers.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 6
75 × 100 = _______
So, 77 × 93.6 is about = ______.

Answer:
75 × 100 = 7500
So, 77 × 93.6 is about = 7207.

Show and Grow

Estimate the product.
Question 1.
11.6 × 9

Answer:
Use rounding. Round 11.6 to the nearest whole number. Then multiply.

12×9=108
So, 11.6×9 is about =108
Another Way: Use compatible numbers

10×10=100
So, 11.6× 9 is about =100

Question 2.
159.81 × 17
Answer:
One Way: Use rounding. Round 159.81 to the nearest whole number. Then multiply.

160×17=2720
So, 159.81×17 is about =2720
Another Way: Use compatible numbers

150×20=3000
So, 159.81×17 is about =3000

Apply and Grow: Practice

Estimate the product.
Question 3.
72 × 0.76
Answer:
Use rounding. Round 0.76 to the nearest whole number. Then multiply.

72×1 =72
So, 72×0.76 is about =72

Question 4.
6.1 × 4
Answer:
Use rounding. Round 6.1 to the nearest whole number. Then multiply.

6×4=24
So, 6.1×4 is about =24

Question 5.
1.54 × 12
Answer:
Use rounding. Round 1.54 to the nearest whole number. Then multiply.

2×12=24
So, 1.54×12 is about =24

Question 6.
22 × 8.02
Answer:
Use rounding. Round 8.02 to the nearest whole number. Then multiply.

22×8=176
So, 22 × 8.02 is about = 176

Question 7.
147 × 11.6
Answer:
Use compatible numbers

145×12=1740
So, 147×11.6 is about =1740

Question 8.
217 × 13.42
Answer:
Use compatible numbers

200×15=3000
So, 217×13,42 is about =3000

Question 9.
There are 1.36 liters of pineapple juice in 1 can. You buy a case of 8 cans. About how many liters of pineapple juice do you buy?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 7
Answer:
There are 1.36 liters of pineapple juice in 1 can, there are 8 cans in a case.
Number of liters of pineapple juice in a case is about 1.36×8
Use rounding. Round 1.36 to the nearest whole number. Then multiply.

1×8=8 liters
About 8 liters of pineapple juice i shall buy.

Question 10.
Open-Ended
Write a decimal and a whole number that have an estimated product of 16.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 8
Answer:
Imagine the numbers as 1.9 and 8
1.9 × 8
Use rounding.Round 1.9 to the nearest whole number. Then multiply

2×8=16
So, 1.9×8 is about =16.

Question 11.
Number Sense
You use 50 × 4 to estimate 45 × 3.56. Is your estimate an overestimate or an underestimate? Explain.
Answer:
My estimate is an overestimate.

Explanation:
50×4=200
45×3.56=160.2
As the product of 50 and 4 is more than the product of 45 and 3.56 so mu estimate is over estimate.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Describe a situation in which an estimate of the product of a whole number and a decimal is suffcient.
Answer:
A biscuit packet costs 4.83 rupees for a vendor and he sells 15 packets of biscuits he will earn an amount of 75 rupees(15 × 4.83=72.45).

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A space probe is 756,600 miles from Earth. The probe travels 9.7 miles farther from Earth each second. About how far is the space probe from Earth after 60 seconds?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 9
Find the distance the probe travels in 60 seconds by multiplying the distance the probe travels in 1 second by60. Round 9.7 to the nearest whole number because you do not need a precise answer.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 10
The probe travels about ______ miles in 60 seconds.
Add the distance the probe is from Earth to the distance it travels in 60 seconds.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 11
The probe is about ______ miles from Earth after 60 seconds.

Answer:
10 × 60 = 600
The probe travels about 600 miles in 60 seconds.
Add the distance the probe is from Earth to the distance it travels in 60 seconds.
756,600 + 600 = 757200
The probe is about 757200 miles from Earth after 60 seconds.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
A bucket weighs 1.4 pounds. One gallon of sand weighs 13.4 pounds. About how much does the bucket and 4 gallons of sand weigh in all?
Answer:
A bucket weighs 1.4 pounds, A gallon of sand weighs 13.4 pounds.
Use rounding. Round 1.4 and 13.4 to the nearest whole number

Weight of 4 gallons = 4 × weight of gallon= 4 × 13=52
The bucket and 4 gallons of sand weight=1+52=53 pounds

Question 14.
An 8.2-centimeter-tall plant grows 2.9 centimeters each month for 1 year. About how tall is the plant at the end of 1 year?
Answer:
Length of the plant now is 8.2 centimeters. If it grows about 2.9 centimeter for each month the length of the plant increased is product of 12months and the length of plant that grows each month.
Round of 8.2 and 2.9 to the nearest whole numbers

The length of the plant increased is product of 12months and the length of plant that grows each month
12×3=36
Total length= length of plant + increased length after a year=8+36 =44 centimeters
About 44 centimeters tall is the plant at the end of 1 year.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
A motorcycle travels 52.3 miles using 1 gallon of gasoline. A car travels 29.8 miles using 1 gallon of gasoline. About how much farther does the motorcycle travel using 6 gallons of gasoline than the car?
Answer:
A motorcycle travels 52.3 miles using 1 gallon of gasoline and a car travels 29.8 miles using 1 gallon of gasoline
Round of 52.3 and 29.8 sto the nearest whole number.

For 6 gallons of gasoline motorcycle travels    30× 6=180 miles
For 6 gallons of gasoline car travels                 52× 6=312 miles
312‐180=132 miles
About 132 miles farther the motorcycle travel using 6 gallons of gasoline than the car.

Estimate Products of Decimals and Whole Numbers Homework & Practice 5.2

Estimate the product.
Question 1.
0.8 × 36
Answer:
Use rounding. Round of 0.8 to nearest whole number. And multiply

1×36=36
So, 0.8×36=36

Question 2.
2.34 × 16
Answer:
Use rounding. Round of 2.34 to the nearest whole number. And multiply

2×16=32
So, 2.34×16 is about =32

Question 3.
9 × 1.67
Answer:
Use rounding. Round of 1.67 to the nearest whole number. And multiply

9×2=18
So, 9×1.67 is about = 18

Question 4.
105 × 4.6
Answer:
Use rounding. Round of 4.6 to the nearest whole number. And multiply

105×5=525
So, 105×4.6 is about =525

Question 5.
88 × 0.9
Answer:
Use rounding. Round of 0.9 to the nearest whole number. And multiply

88×1=88
So, 88×0.9 is about =8

Question 6.
5.5 × 131
Answer:
Use rounding. Round of 5.5 to the nearest whole number. And multiply

6×131=786
So, 5.5×131 is about =786

Question 7.
An athlete runs 6.23 miles in 1 hour. At this pace, about how far does the athlete run in 4 hours?
Answer:
An athlete runs 6.23 miles in 1 hour.
Use rounding.
Round of 6.23 to the nearest whole number.
6.23——6
Number of miles athlete run in 4 hours
=4× Number of miles athlete run in 1 hour
=4×6=24
About 24 miles the athlete run in 4 hours.

Question 8.
Number Sense
Which expressions are underestimates of 26.5 × 91?
20 × 90
30 × 100
30 × 90
25 × 90
Answer:
20×90 and 25×90 are the underestimates of 26.5×91 as both the estimated numbers in these expressions are less than original numbers.

Question 9.
Writing
Which strategy can you use to estimate the product of 8.02 and 106? Explain.
Answer:
I use compatible numbers strategy because numbers are near to round figures.

Question 10.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds the product. Is her answer reasonable? Estimate to check.?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.2 12
Answer:
1.06 × 103 = 109.18
Use rounding.Round 1.06 to the nearest whole number. And multiply.

1×103 =103
So, my friend’s answer is reasonable.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
Newton pays for 5 pounds of pears that cost $3.75 per pound. Descartes pays$15 for 5 pounds of apples. About how much more do the 5 pounds of pears cost than the 5 pounds of apples?
Answer:
Cost of 5 pounds of pears 5×$3.75
Round 3.75 to the nearest whole number. And multiply
5×$4=$20
Descartes pays$15 for 5 pounds of apples
Subtract cost of apples from pears $20‐$15=$5
About $5 more the 5 pounds of pears cost than the 5 pounds of apples.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
A hospital employee works 3 days each week. The route from her house to the hospital is 9.9 miles and the route back to her house is 10.5 miles. About how many miles does she travel for work each week?
Answer:
Use rounding.Round 9.9 and 10.5 to the nearest whole numbers.

A hospital employee works 3 days each week.
So, as the route from her house to the hospital is 9.9 miles per day for 3 days it is 10×3= 30 miles
As the route back to her house is 10.5 miles per day for 3 days it is 10×3=30 miles
Total number of miles =30+30=60
Therefore About 60 miles she travel for work each week.

Review & Refresh

Question 13.
Write the number in two other forms.
Standard form:
Word form: four and twenty-six thousandths
Expanded form:
Answer:
4.26000

Lesson 5.3 Use Models to Multiply Decimals and Whole Numbers

Explore and Grow

Complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 1
Answer:

Structure
How does the relationship between addition and multiplication help you find each product?
Answer:
Addition is the process of combining a number of individual items together to form a new total.Multiplication, however, is the process of using repeated addition and combining the total number of items that make up equal-sized groups.

Think and Grow: Use Models to Multiply Decimals and Whole Numbers

Example
Find 0.23 × 3.
Use a model. Shade 3 groups of 0.23.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 2

Example
Find 0.48 × 4.
Use a model. Shade 4 groups of 0.48.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 3

Show and Grow

Find the product.
Question 1.
0.19 × 3 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 4
Answer:


0.19+0.19+0.19=0.57
So, 0.19×3=0.57

Question 2.
0.37 × 5 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 5
Answer:


0.37+0.37+0.37+0.37+0.37=1.85
S0, 0.37×5=1.85

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product.
Question 3.
0.09 × 5 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 6
Answer:


0.09+0.09+0.09+0.09+0.09=0.45
So, 0.09×5=0.45

Question 4.
8 × 0.2 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 7
Answer:


0.2+0.2+0.2+0.2+0.2+0.2+0.2=1.6
So, 8×0.2=1.6

Question 5.
7 × 0.14 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 8
Answer:


0.14+0.14+0.14+0.14+0.14+0.14+0.14=0.98
So, 7×0.14=0.98

Question 6.
0.96 × 2 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 9
Answer:

0.96+0.96=1.92
So, 0.96×2=1.92

Question 7.
A hummingbird’s heart beats once every 0.05 second. How long does it take for its heart to beat 7 times?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 10
Answer:
Given,
A hummingbird’s heart beats once every 0.05 second.
0.005 × 7 = 0.035 seconds

Question 8.
Precision
When multiplying a decimal less than one by a whole number, how does the product compare to the whole number? Is this true when multiplying two whole numbers?
Answer:
When we multiply a decimal less than one by a whole number the product will be a decimal or a whole number but when we multiply two whole numbers the product will be only a whole number.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Write two multiplication equations involving a decimal and a whole number whose product is shown.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 11
Answer:
0.2×3=0.6 and 0.3×2=0.6

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You build the card tower shown. Each row is 0.08 meter tall. Your friend’s card tower is 0.3 meter tall. Whose tower is taller?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 12
Because your card tower has 4 rows, multiply 4 by0.08 to find the height of your tower.
Use a model. Shade 4 groups of 0.08.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 13
0.08 + 0.08 + 0.08 + 0.08 = ______
Compare the height of your tower to the height of your friend’s tower.
So, ______ tower is taller.

Answer:
0.08 + 0.08 + 0.08 + 0.08 = 0.32
Compare the height of your tower to the height of your friend’s tower.
So, 0.32tower is taller.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
You have 1 meter of ribbon. Do you have enough ribbon to border the outside of the square picture frame?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 14
Answer:
No

Explanation:
Length of side of the square picture is 0.33m.
Border of the square picture is 4 × length of side=4×0.33m=1.32m
I have 1 meter of ribbon 1.32>1
So, i don’t have enough ribbon to border the square picture.

Question 11.
Organic shaved coconut originally costs $0.34 per ounce. A baker buys 8 ounces on sale for $0.27 per ounce.How much money does the baker save?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 15
Answer:
Money the baker save is 0$2.72‐$2.16=$0.56

Explanation:
Original cost of organic shaved coconut is $0.34 per ounce
Then for 8 ounces it will be 8×$0.34=$2.72
Cost of the baker is $0.27 per ounce
Then for 8 ounces it will be 8×$0.27=$2.16
Money the baker save is 0$2.72‐$2.16=$0.56

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You have 4 pennies, 3 nickels, and 2 quarters. Find the total weight and the total value of your coins.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 16
Answer:
4 × 2.5 = 10
3 × 5 = 15
2 × 5.67 = 11.34
10 + 15 + 11.34 = 36.34

Use Models to Multiply Decimals and Whole Numbers Homework & Practice 5.3

Find the product.
Question 1.
0.4 × 2 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 17
Answer:


0.4+0.4=0.8
So, 0.4×2=0.84

Question 2.
6 × 0.31 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 18
Answer:


0.31+0.31+0.31+0.31+0.31+0.31=1.86
So, 6×0.31=1.86

Question 3.
0.54 × 3 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 19
Answer:


0.54+0.54+0.54=1.62
So, 0.54×3=1.62

Question 4.
0.25 × 7 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 20
Answer:


0.25+0.25+0.25+0.25+0.25+0.25+0.25=1.75
So, 0.25×7=1.75

Find the product
Question 5.
0.22 × 4 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 21
Answer:


0.22+0.22+0.22+0.22=0.88
So, 0.22×4=0.88

Question 6.
5 × 0.4 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 22
Answer:


0.4+0.4+0.4+0.4+0.4=2
So, 5×0.4=2

Question 7.
A city mayor plans to build two new parks. Each park will cover 1.45 acres. How many acres will the new parks cover altogether? Explain.
Answer:
2.9 Acers

Explanation:
Acres covered by one park is 1.45 acres, A city mayor plans to build two new parks.
Acres covered by two new parks is 2×1.45=2.9acers.

Question 8.
Structure
Write an equation represented by the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.3 23
Answer:
0.35+0.35+0.35+0.35+0.35=1.75
So, 0.35×5=1.75

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the product of 0.03 and 4. How does the product change when you replace 4 with 0.4? Explain.
Answer:
The product of 0.03 and 4 is 0.03×4=0.12
The product of 0.03 and 0.4 is 0.03×0.4=0.012
When we replace the 4 with 0.4 then the product will become very small.

Question 10.
Modeling Real Life
In 1 year, you spend $1.50 on electricity to charge your tablet. In 1 month, you spend $0.02 on electricity to charge your smart phone. Which device costs more to charge in 1 year?
Answer:
In 1 year, i spend $1.50 on electricity to charge my tablet
If In 1 month, i spend $0.02 on electricity to charge my smart phone in a year i spend = 12months × electricity charge per month
=12×0.02=$0.24
$0.24<$1.50
Therefore Tablet costs more to charge in 1 year.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
You have a 2-pound carton of blueberries. You eat 0.2 of the carton on Monday and 0.35 of the carton on Tuesday. How many pounds of blueberries are left?
Answer:
Weight of carton of blueberries is 2 pounds
I ate 0.2 of carton on Monday 0.2×2=0.4 pounds
I ate 0.35 of carton on Tuesday 0.35×2=0.7
Total of berries i ate is 0.4+0.7=1.1
pounds of blueberries are left=2‐1.1=0.9
Therefore 0.9 pounds of blueberries are left in the carton.

Review & Refresh

Evaluate the expression.
Question 12.
(12 ÷ 4) × 30 – 15
Answer:
(12 ÷ 4) × 30 – 15=75

Explanation:
(12 ÷ 4) × 30 – 15
=(3)×30‐15
=90‐15
=75
S0, (12 ÷ 4) × 30 – 15=75

Question 13.
(11 + 7) ÷ (3 + 5 + 1)
Answer:
(11 + 7) ÷ (3 + 5 + 1)=2

Explanation:
(11 + 7) ÷ (3 + 5 + 1)
=(18)÷(9)
=2
So, (11 + 7) ÷ (3 + 5 + 1)=2

Question 14.
35 ÷ [(153 – 139) ÷ 2]
Answer:
35 ÷ [(153 – 139) ÷ 2]=5

Explanation:
35 ÷ [(153 – 139) ÷ 2]
=35÷[(14÷2)]
=35÷7
=5
So, 35 ÷ [(153 – 139) ÷ 2]=5

Lesson 5.4 Multiply Decimals and Whole Numbers

Explore and Grow

Complete the table.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 1
What pattern do you notice in the placement of the decimal point?
Answer:


We can notice that the decimal point moves one place to the left.

Structure
How is multiplying decimals similar to multiplying whole numbers?
Answer:
Decimal multiplication is similar to the multiplication of whole numbers after decimal point the product of the numbers is the same.

Think and Grow: Multiply a Decimals and a Whole Numbers

Example
Find 5.8 × 4. Estimate ________
One Way: Multiply as you do with whole numbers. Then place the decimal point.
Find 58 × 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 2

Another Way: Use place value and partial products.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 3
So, 5.8 × 4 = ______.

Show and Grow

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 1.
2.4 × 7 = ______
Answer:
2.4 × 7 =16.8

Explanation:
2.4 × 7

Multiply 24 with 7
24×7=168
Multiply 168 with 0.1
168×0.1=16.8 decimal point moves one place to the left.
So, 2.4 × 7 =16.8

Question 2.
8.15 × 3 = ______
Answer:
8.15 × 3 =24.45

Explanation:
8.15 × 3

Multiply 8.15 with 3
815×4=2445
Multiply 2445 with 0.01
2445×0.01=24.45 decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 8.15 × 3 =24.45

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product.
Question 3.
6 × 5.3 = _____
Answer:
6×5.3=31.8

Explanation:
6×5.3=

6×53=318
318 ×0.1=31.8decimal point moves one place to the left.
So,6 ×5.3=31.8

Question 4.
4.68 × 4 = ______
Answer:
4.68×4=18.72

Explanation:
4.68×4

468×4=1872
1872×0.01=18.72decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 4.68 × 4 =18.72

Question 5.
7 × 0.81 = ______
Answer:
7×0.81=5.56

Explanation:
7×0.81

7×81=567
567×0.01=5.67decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 7 × 0.81 =5.67

Question 6.
1.45 × 5 = _____
Answer:
1.45 × 5=7.25

Explanation:
1.45 × 5

145×5=725
725×0.01=7.25decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 1.45 × 5 =7.25

Question 7.
34 × 7.2 = _____
Answer:
34 × 7.2=244.8

Explanation:
34 × 7.2

34×72=2448
2448×0.1=244.8decimal point moves one place to the left.
So, 34 × 7.2=244.8

Question 8.
23.66 × 19 = ______
Answer:
23.66 × 19=499.54

Explanation:
23.66 × 19

2366×19=44954
44954×0.01=449.54decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 23.66 × 19 =449.54

Question 9.
How much do you pay for 3 pounds of grapes?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 4
Answer:
One pound of grapes costs $1.98
3 pounds of grapes cost is 3×$1.98

=3×198=598
598×0.01=5.98decimal point moves two places to the left.
Therefore cost of 3 pounds of grapes is 5.98

Question 10.
Which One Doesn’t Belong?
Which equation is not true?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 5
Answer:
0.4×15=60 is not correct

Explanation:
0.4×15

4×15=60
60×0.1=6decimal point moves one place to the left.
0.4×15=6
Therefore it is a wrong equation.

Question 11.
Number Sense
Without calculating, determine whether the product of 0.67 and 8 is greater than or less than 8. Explain.
Answer:
The product of 0.67 and 8 is less than 8.

Explanation:
We know that 0.67 is less than 1 so 0.67 when multiplied with 8 will be less than 8.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
Find the missing digits. Then find the product.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 6
Answer:

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You buy a 40-pack of bottled water. Each bottle contains 16.9 fluid ounces of water. You drink 10 bottles. How many total fluid ounces of water do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 7
Subtract 10 from the number of bottles you buy to find the number of bottles you have left.
40 – 10 = 30
To find how much water you have left, multiply the number of bottles you have left by16.9. Multiply as you do with whole numbers. Then place the decimal point.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 8
You have _______ total fluid ounces of water left.

Show and Grow

Question 13.
The stories of a residential building are 3.2 meters tall. The stories of an office building are 0.4 meter taller than the stories in the residential building. The office building has 12 stories. How tall is the office building?
Answer:
The stories of a residential building are 3.2 meters tall.The stories of an office building are 0.4 meter taller than the stories in the residential building
So stories of office building is 3.2+0.4=3.6 meter tall
Office building has 12 stories and each storey is 3.6 meters tall
So, 12×3.6=

12×36=432
432×0.1=43.2decimal point moves one place to the left.
Therefore the office building is 43.2 meters tall.

Question 14.
You have3 strands of lights that are each 10.8 feet long. You buy 5 strands of lights that are each 16.25 feet long. How many feet of lights do you have in all?
Answer:
If i have3 strands of lights that are each 10.8 feet long
The length of 3 strands is 3×10.8

3×10.8=324×0.1 = 32.4 feet decimal point moves one place to the left.
If i buy 5 strands of lights that are each 16.25 feet long
The length of 5 strands is 5×16.25

5×1625=8125
1825×0.01=81.25decimal point moves two places to the left.
Feet of lights i have in all is32.4+81.25=133.65 feet.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
You stack $1 in dimes and you stack $1 in quarters. Which stack is taller? How much taller?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 9
Answer:
1.35 × 1 = 1.35
1.75 × 1 = 1.75

Multiply Decimals and Whole Numbers Homework & Practice 5.4

Find the product.
Question 1.
9.8 × 2 = _____
Answer:
9.8×2=19.6

Explanation:
9.8×2

98×2=196
196×0.1=19.6 decimal point moves one place to the left.
So, 9.8×2=19.6

Question 2.
0.61 × 8 = ______
Answer:
0.61 × 8 =4.88

Explanation:
0.61×8

61×8=488
488×0.01=4.88decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 0.61 × 8 =4.88

Question 3.
82 × 1.1 = ______
Answer:
82×1.1=90.2

Explanation:
82×1.1

82×11=902
902×0.1=90.2decimal point moves one place to the left.
So, 82×1.1=90.2

Question 4.
43 × 0.6 = ______
Answer:
43×0.6=25.8

Explanation:
43×0.6

43×6=258
258×0.1=25.8decimal point moves one place to the left.
So, 43×0.6=25.8

Question 5.
2.39 × 57 = _______
Answer:
2.39×57=136.23

Explanation:
2.39×57

239×57=13623
13623×0.01=136.23decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 2.39×57=136.23

Question 6.
10.75 × 24 = ______
Answer:
10.75×24=258

Explanation:
10.75×24

1075×24=25800
25800×0.01=258.00=258decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 10.75×24=258

Question 7.
There are 6.3 grams of protein in a boiled egg. You eat 3 boiled eggs. How many grams of protein do you consume?
Answer:
There are 6.3 grams of protein in a boiled egg
I eat 3 boiled eggs and grams of protein i consumed=3×6.3

3×63=189
189×0.1=18.9decimal point moves one place to the left.
Therefore 18.9 grams of protein i consumed.

Question 8.
Reasoning
Newton says the product of 7.55 and 8 is 60.40. Descartes says the product is 60.4.Who is correct? Explain.
Answer:
Both Newton’s and Descartes answers are correct as zero at the end of a number after decimal point does not change the value of the number 60.40 and 60.4 is same.

Question 9.
Patterns
Describe and complete the pattern.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 10
Answer


In the above table the decimal point is shifting one place to the left in each expression respectively.

Question 10.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Your friend finds 14 × 0.82. Is your friend correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 11
Answer:
My friend is incorrect.

Explanation:
14×0.82

14×82=1148
1148×0.01=11.48decimal point moves two places to the left.
14×0.82=11.48.
so, my friends answer is correct.

Question 11.
Modeling Real Life
A person weighs 2.34 times as much on Jupiter as on Earth. An 85-pound student would weigh 90.1 pounds less on Saturn than on Jupiter. How much would he weigh on Saturn?
Answer:
85 pounds student weighs 2.34 times as much on Jupiter as on Earth.So, weight on jupiter is 85×2.34

85×234=19890
19890×0.01=198.90decimal point moves two places to the left.
Weight on jupiter is 198.9
student would weigh 90.1 pounds less on Saturn than on Jupiter
So, weight on saturn = weight on Jupiter ‐ 90.1=198.9‐90.1=108.8
Therefore An 85-pound student would weigh 108.8 on saturn.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
A landscaper digs a rectangular region for a garden. The length is a one-digit whole number of meters. What is the least possible area? What is the greatest possible area?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.4 12
Answer:
If length of rectangular region is a one-digit whole number of meters and breadth is 4.75 meters.
Smallest 1 digit whole number is 1
The least possible area is 1×4.75 =4.75 squaremeters
Largest 1 digit whole number is 9
The greatest possible area is 9×4.75

9×475=4275
4275×0.01=42.75 square meters decimal point moves two places to the left.
Therefore The least possible area and the greatest possible area is 4.75 and 42.75 square meters respectively.

Review & Refresh

Find the sum or difference.
Question 13.
0.83 – 0.14 = ______
Answer:
0.83 – 0.14=0.96

Explanation:
0.83‐0.14=
83‐14=69
69×0.01=0.69decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 0.83 – 0.14=0.96

Question 14.
1.34 + 1.35 = _______
Answer:
1.34 + 1.35 =2.69

Explanation:
1.34 + 1.35
134+135=269
269×0.01=2.69decimal point moves two places to the left.
So, 1.34 + 1.35 =2.69

Lesson 5.5 Use Models to Multiply Decimals

Explore and Grow

A rectangle is 0.8 meter long and 0.7 meter wide.
Use a model to find the area of the rectangle.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 1.1

Answer:

Use a model to find 0.8 × 0.7
Use a model. Shade 8 rows to represent 0.8 and shade 7 columns to represent 0.7
56 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.8 × 0.7=0.56

Use a model to find 0.8 × 1.7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 1
Answer:

Use a model to find 0.8 × 1.7
Use a model. Shade 8 rows to represent 0.8 and shade 17 columns to represent 1.7
136 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.8 × 1.7 =1.36

Reasoning
When using a model to multiply decimals, how do you determine the number of rows and columns to shade?
Answer:
For a given multiplication of decimals. The multiplyer is used to determine the number of rows and the multiplicand is used to determine the number of columns.

Think and Grow: Use Models to Multiply Decimals

Example
Use a model to find 0.4 × 0.6
Use a model. Shade 4 rows to represent 0.4 and shade 6 columns to represent 0.6.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 2

Example
Use a model to find 0.7 × 1.4.
Use a model. Shade 7 rows to represent 0.7 and shade 14 columns to represent 1.4.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 3
_____ squares are shaded twice.
So, 0.7 × 1.4 = ______.

Show and Grow

Use the model to find the product.
Question 1.
0.9 × 0.2 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 4
Answer:


Use a model to find 0.9 × 0.2
Use a model. Shade 9 rows to represent 0.9 and shade 2 columns to represent 0.2
18 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.9 × 0.2 =0.18

Question 2.
0.8 × 1.5 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 5
Answer:


Use a model to find 0.8 × 1.5
Use a model. Shade 8 rows to represent 0.8 and shade 15 columns to represent 1.5
120 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.8 × 1.5 =1.2

Apply and Grow: Practice

Use the model to find the product.
Question 3.
0.4 × 0.4 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 6
Answer:

Use a model to find 0.4 × 0.4
Use a model. Shade 4 rows to represent 0.4 and shade 4 columns to represent 0.4
16 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.4 × 0.4 =0.16

Question 4.
0.9 × 0.9 = _______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 7
Answer:


Use a model to find 0.9 × 0.9
Use a model. Shade 9 rows to represent 0.9 and shade 9 columns to represent 0.9
81 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.9 × 0.9 =0.81

Question 5.
0.2 × 1.7 = ____

Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 8
Answer:

Use a model to find 0.2 × 1.7
Use a model. Shade 2 rows to represent 0.2 and shade 17 columns to represent 1.7
34 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.2 × 1.7 =0.34

Question 6.
0.6 × 1.6 = _______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 9
Answer:

Use a model to find 0.6 × 1.6
Use a model. Shade 6 rows to represent 0.6 and shade 16 columns to represent 1.6
96 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.6× 1.6 =0.96

Question 7.
On Saturday, you ride your bike 1.5 miles. On Sunday, you ride your bike 0.7 times as far as you did on Saturday. How far do you ride your bike on Sunday?
Answer:
On saturday i rode my bike for 1.5 miles
On sunday i rode 0.7 times as far as i did on saturday
miles i rode bike on sunday =0.7×1.5=1.05
Therefore, 1.05miles far i rode my bike on sunday.

Question 8.
Reasoning
When multiplying 0.4 × 0.3, why is the product less than each of the factors?
Answer:
When we multiply 0.4 with 0.3 the product is less than each of their factors this is because we are finding a fractional amount of a quantity.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
Shade the model to represent the product of 0.6 and 0. What is the product? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 11
Answer:


Use a model to find 0.6 × 0
Use a model. Shade 6 rows to represent 0.6 and shade 0 columns to represent 0
No squares are shaded twice
So, 0.6× 0=0

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A donkey is 0.9 meter tall. A horse is 1.7 times as tall as the donkey. How much taller is the horse than the donkey?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 12
Multiply 0.9 by 1.7 to find the height of the horse.
Use a model. Shade 9 rows to represent 0.9 and shade 17 columns to represent 1.7.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 13
So, the horse is ______ meter taller than the donkey.

Answer:
0.9 × 1.7 = 1.53
1.53 squares are shaded twice.
1.53 – 0.9 = 0.63
So, the horse is 0.63 meter taller than the donkey.

Show and Grow

Question 10.
On Sunday, you run 0.6 mile. On Monday, you run 1.3 times as far as you run on Sunday. How many more miles do you run on Monday than on Sunday?
Answer:
Multiply 0.6 by 1.3 to find the number of miles i run on monday.
usinga model. Shade 6 rows to represent 0.6 and shade 13 columns to represent 1.3.
78 squares are shaded twice.
So, i ran 0.78 miles on monday.
Subtract the number of miles i ran on monday from the miles i ran on sunday.
0.78‐0.6=0.72
Therefore 0.72miles i ran on Monday than on Sunday

Question 11.
A candle burns 0.2 ounce of wax each hour. A candle with 14.5 ounces of wax burns for 2.5 hours. How much wax is left?
Answer:
A candle with 14.5 ounces of wax burns for 2.5 hours and a candle burns 0.2 ounce of wax each hour.
Ounces of wax burnt in 2.5 hours is
2.5 hours × ounces of wax burns in each hour.
2.5×0.2=0.5 ounces
Ounced of Wax left=14.5‐0.5=14 ounces.

Question 12.
DIG DEEPER!
You have a bottle that contains 1.5 liters of apple juice. You drink 0.2 of the bottle on Friday, and 0.3 of the juice remaining in the bottle on Saturday. How much apple juice do you have left?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 14
Answer:
A bottle contains 1.5 liters of apple juice.
If i  drink 0.2 of the bottle on Friday the amount of juice left is 1.5‐(1.5×0.2)=1.5 ‐ 0.3= 1.2
If i drink 0.3 of the juice remaining in the bottle on Saturday the amount of juice left is
=1.2‐(1.2×0.3)=1.2 ‐ 0.36= 0.84
Apple juice i have left id 0.84 liters.

Use Models to Multiply Decimals Homework & Practice 5.5

Use the model to find the product.
Question 1.
0.8 × 0.9 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 15
Answer:


Use a model to find 0.8 × 0.9
Use a model. Shade 8 rows to represent 0.8 and shade 9 columns to represent 0.9
72 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.8 × 0.9 =0.72

Question 2.
0.4 × 0.2 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 16
Answer:


Use a model to find 0.4 × 0.2
Use a model. Shade 4 rows to represent 0.4 and shade 2 columns to represent 0.2
8 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.4 × 0.2 =0.08

Question 3.
0.6 × 1.9 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 17
Answer:


Use a model to find 0.6 × 1.9
Use a model. Shade 6 rows to represent 0.6 and shade 19 columns to represent 1.9
114 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.6 × 1.9 =1.14

Question 4.
0.7 × 1.2 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 18
Answer:


Use a model to find 0.7 × 1.2
Use a model. Shade 7 rows to represent 0.7 and shade 12 columns to represent 1.2
84 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.7 × 1.2 =0.84

Question 5.
One banana contains 1.3 grams of protein. How much protein is in 0.5 of a banana?
Answer:
One banana contains 1.3 grams of protein
0.5 of a banana contains 1.3×0.5=0.65 grans of proteins.

Question 6.
Reasoning
When multiplying 0.6 and 1.2, why is the product less than only one of the factors?
Answer:
When multiplying 0.6 and 1.2, the product less than only one of the factors because we are finding a fractional amount of a quantity a part of the number.

Question 7.
YOU BE THE TEACHER
Newton says that 0.2 × 0.2 = 0.36, because there are 36 squares shaded. Is he correct? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 19
Answer:
No

Explanation:
No, Newton’s answer is not correct as the number of squares shaded twice are 4 so, the product will be 0.4 not 0.36.

Question 8.
Structure
Write a multiplication equation that is represented by the model.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 20
Answer:
Number of rows shaded are 6 so, the decimal is 0.6
Number of columns shaded are 7 so, the decimal is 0.7
Number of squares shaded twice are 42 so, the product is 0.42
Therefore multiplication equation is 0.6×0.7=0.42.

Question 9.
Modeling Real Life
A pancake batter recipe calls for 0.5 cup of water. The recipe calls for 1.5 times as much pancake mix as water.How much more pancake mix is needed than water?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 21
Answer:
A pancake batter recipe calls for 0.5 cup of water.
The recipe calls for 1.5 times as much pancake mix as water
Amount of pancake mix is 0.5×1.5=0.75 cups
Subtract the amount of pancake mix from the amount of water
0.75‐0.5=0.70 cups
Therefore 0.70 cups more pancake mix is needed than water.

Question 10.
DIG DEEPER!
To make crafts, you buy colored paper for $1.90. You buy a pack of googly eyes that costs 0.4 times as much as the colored paper. How much money do you spend in all?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.5 22
Answer:
Cost of colored paper is $1.90
Cost of a pack of googly eyes is 0.4 times as much as the colored paper=0.4×1.90=$0.76
Add the money spent on colored paper and on googly eyes=$1.90+$0.76=$2.66
The money i spent in all is $2.66.

Review & Refresh

Write the value of the underlined digit.
Question 11.
5,120,379
Answer:
5,120,379
Value of 1 in the above number is 1 Hundred Thousands

Question 12.
400,681
Answer:
400,681
Value of 6 in the above number is 6 hundred.

Question 13.
7,245,819
Answer:
7,245,819
Value of 7 in the above number is 7 million.

Question 14.
23, 504
Answer:
23, 504
Value of  2 in the above number is 2 Ten Thousands

Lesson 5.6 Use Partial Products to Multiply Decimals

Explore and Grow

Use the area model and partial products to find 1.4 × 1.5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 1
Answer:
From the above grid we can note down the following expressions
1×1
1×0.4
1×0.5
0.4×0.5
Find the product of the four equations and then add their products to find the area of the model
1×1=1
1×0.4=0.4
1×0.5=0.5
0.4×0.5=0.2
Add the products of the above four equations
1+0.4+0.5+0.2=2.1

Structure
How can you use partial products to multiply decimals?
Answer:
Breaking up the number to multiply into parts, multiplying the parts separately, and then adding is called partial product.we can use partial product strategy to find the product of decimals by breaking them into parts.

Think and Grow: Use Partial Products toMultiply

Example
Use partial products to find 3.2 × 4.8. Estimate ________
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 2

Show and Grow

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 3
Answer:
4.5×2.1
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.5×0.1=0.05
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.5×2=1
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 4×0.1=0.4
4.Multiply the ones by ones =4×2=8
Add all the partial products =0.05+1+0.4+8=9.45
Therefore 4.5×2.1=9.45

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 4
Answer:
2.7×5.3
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.7×0.3=0.21
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.3×2=0.6
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 5×0.7=3.5
4.Multiply the ones by ones =5×2=10
Add all the partial products =0.21+0.6+3.5+10=14.31
Therefore  2.7×5.3=14.31

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 5
Answer:
5.4×3.3
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.3×0.4=0.12
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.3×5=1.5
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 4×0.3=1.2
4.Multiply the ones by ones =5×3=15
Add all the partial products=0.12+1.5+1.2+15=17.82
Therefore 5.4×3.3=17.82

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 6
Answer:
4.1×2.3
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.1×0.3=0.03
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.1×2=0.2
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 4×0.3=1.2
4.Multiply the ones by ones =4×2=8
Add all the partial products=0.03+0.2+1.2+8=9.43
Therefore 4.1×2.3=9.43

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 7
Answer:
16.7×0.4
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.7×0.4=0.28
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.7×0=0
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 16×0.4=6.4
4.Multiply the ones by ones =16×0=0
Add all the partial products=0.28+6.4=6.68
Therefore 16.7×0.4=6.68

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 8
Answer:
5.9×8.6
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.9×0.6=0.54
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.9×8=7.23.
Multiply the tenths by ones = 5×0.6=3
4.Multiply the ones by ones =5×8=40
Add all the partial products=0.54+7.2+3+40=50.74
Therefore 5.9×8.6=50.74

Question 7.
23.7 × 3.5 = ______
Answer:
23.7×3.5
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.7×0.5=0.35
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.7×3=2.1
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 23×0.5=11.5
4.Multiply the ones by ones =23×3=69
Add all the partial products=0.35+2.1+11.5+69=82.95
Therefore 23.7×3.5=82.95

Question 8.
10.6 × 14.7 = ______
Answer:
10.6×14.7
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.6×0.7=0.42
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.6×14=8.4
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 10×0.7=7
4.Multiply the ones by ones =10×14=140
Add all the partial products=0.42+8.4+9.8+140=155.82
Therefore 10.6×14.7=155.82

Question 9.
1.2 × 3.71 = ______
Answer:
1.2×3.71
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.2×0.71=0.142
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.2×3=0.6
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 1×0.71=0.71
4.Multiply the ones by ones =1×3=3
Add all the partial products=0.142+0.6+0.71+3=4.452
Therefore 1.2×3.71=4.452

Question 10.
A space probe travels 643.5 miles every minute. How far does it travel in 1.5 minutes?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 9
Answer:
A space probe travels 643.5 miles every minute.
The distance it travel in 1.5 minutes is 643.5×1.5
643.5×1.5
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.5×0.5=0.25
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.5×1=0.5
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 643×0.5=321.5
4.Multiply the ones by ones =643×1=643
Add all the partial products is=0.25+0.5+321.5+643=965.25
Therefore 643.5×1.5=965.25

Question 11.
Number Sense
Which products are greater than 20.4?
3.4 × 7.2
2.5 × 4.8
3.2 × 6.3
8.6 × 2.4
Answer:
3.4 × 7.2=24.48>20.4
2.5 × 4.8=12<20.4
3.2 × 6.3=20.16<20.4
8.6 × 2.4=2.64>20.4
The products of 3.4×7.2 and 8.6×2.4 are greater than 20.4.

Question 12.
Precision
How can you use estimation to help you place the decimal point in a product? Explain.
Answer:
You will need to multiply and then estimate the solution. Start by multiplying just as if you are multiplying whole numbers. Because the original numbers have 4 digits total after their decimal points , insert a decimal point into your answer so that it has 4 digits to its right.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Write a multiplication equation shown by the partial products.
0.14 + 0.2 + 2.1 + 3
Answer:
0.14 + 0.2 + 2.1 + 3 = 5.44

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A geologist has a blue geode that weighs 2.5 pounds. The geologist has a purple geode that weighs 1.6 times as much as the blue geode. What is the total weight of the geodes?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 10
Find the weight of the purple geode by multiplying the weight of the blue geode by 1.6
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 11
The weight of the purple geode is ______ pounds.
Add the weights of the blue geode and the purple geode.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 12
The total weight of the geodes is ______ pounds.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You buy 3.5 yards of yellow fabric to make a Chinese dragon. You buy 2.5 times as much red fabric as yellow fabric. How many yards of fabric do you buy in all?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 13
Answer:
Find the yards of red fabric by multiplying the yards of yellow fabric by 2.5
3.5×2.5=8.75(0.25+1.5+1+6)
8.75 yards of red fabric is required to make a dragon.
Add the yards of yellow and red fabric
3.5+8.75=12.25
Total fabric i need to buy to make a dragon is 12.25 yards.

Question 15.
An employee cleans the surface of the rectangular ice rink. What is the area of the ice rink?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 14
Answer:
Ice rink here is in rectangular shape.
Area of a rectangle is length × breadth
Length of ice rink is 18.3 m, breadth of ice rink is 9.1 m
18.3×9.1=0.03+2.7+1.8+162
Area of ice rink is 166.53 square meters

Question 16.
There are 89.1 milligrams of Vitamin C in 1 cup of strawberries. There are 83.2 milligrams of Vitamin C in 1 cup of orange slices. You eat2.5 cups of strawberries and 1.5 cups of orange slices. How much Vitamin C do you consume?
Answer:
Multiply vitamin C in 1 cup of strawberries with 2.5
89.1×2.5=222.75
Multiply vitamin C in 1 cup of orange slices with 1.5
83.2×1.5=124.8
Add both the quantities 222.75+124.8=347.55
Total vitamin c consumed by me is 347.55 milligrams.

Use Partial Products to Multiply Decimals Homework & Practice 5.6

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 15
Answer:
2.4×1.2=
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.4×0.2=0.08
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.4×1=0.4
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 2×0.2=0.4
4.Multiply the ones by ones =2×1=2
Add all the partial products =0.08+0.4+0.4+2=2.88
Therefore 2.4×1.2=2.88

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 16
Answer:
3.1×6.7
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.1×0.7=0.07
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.1×6=0.6
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 3×0.7=2.1
4.Multiply the ones by ones =3×6=18
Add all the partial products =0.07+0.6+2.1+18=20.77
Therefore 3.1×6.7=20.77

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 17
Answer:
7.3×5.9=
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.3×0.9=0.27
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.3×5=1.5
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 7×0.9=6.3
4.Multiply the ones by ones =7×5=35
Add all the partial products =0.27+1.5+6.3+35=42.07
Therefore 7.3×5.9=43.07

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 18
Answer:
2.8×3.7
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.8×0.7=0.56
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.8×3=2.4
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 2×0.7=1.4
4.Multiply the ones by ones =2×3=6
Add all the partial products =0.56+2.4+1.4+6=10.36
Therefore 2.8×3.7=10.36

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 19
Answer:
5.6×4.6
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.6×0.6=0.36
2.Multiply the ones by tenths =0.6×4=2.4
3.Multiply the tenths by ones =0.6×5=3
4.Multiply the ones by ones =5×4=20
Add all the partial products =0.36+2.4+3+20=25.76
Therefore 5.6×4.6=25.76

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 20
Answer:
14.5×7.8=
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.5×0.8=0.4
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.5×7=3.5
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 14×0.8=11.2
4.Multiply the ones by ones =14×7=98
Add all the partial products =0.4+3.5+11.2+98=133.1
Therefore  14.5×7.8=113.1

Question 7.
21.4 × 9.3 = ______
Answer:
21.4×9.3=
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.4×0.3=0.12
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.4×9=3.6
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 21×0.3=6.3
4.Multiply the ones by ones =21×9=189
Add all the partial products =0.12+3.6+6.3+189=199.02
Therefore  21.4×9.3=199.02

Question 8.
58.1 × 8.6 = ______
Answer:
58.1×8.6=
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.1×0.6=0.06
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.1×8=0.8
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 58×0.6=34.8
4.Multiply the ones by ones =58×8=464
Add all the partial products =0.06+0.8+34.8+464=499.66
Therefore  58.1×8.6=499.66

Question 9.
0.6 × 1.45 = ______
Answer:
0.6×1.45=
1.Multiply the tenths by tenths =0.6×0.45=0.27
2.Multiply the ones by tenths = 0.6×1=0.6
3.Multiply the tenths by ones = 0×0.45=0
4.Multiply the ones by ones =0×1=0
Add all the partial products =0.27+0.6+0+0=0.87
Therefore  0.6×1.45=0.87

Question 10.
Writing
How is multiplying two decimals different than multiplying a whole number and a decimal?
Answer:
You have to line up the decimals in the two numbers with decimals, but the decimal and the whole numbers you don’t have to line up the decimals because there is only one number with a decimal.

Question 11.
DIG DEEPER!
Two numbers each have one decimal place. Is it possible for their product to be a whole number? Explain.
Answer:
No. When you multiply something by a decimal, you make it smaller. Since you’ve started with something smaller than a whole number, and then you make it smaller, the answer will always be less than a whole number, and thus never a whole number

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
A red-bellied snake is 11.5 inches long. A ring-necked snake is 1.4 times as long as the red-bellied snake. How much longer is the ring-necked snake than the red-bellied snake?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.6 21
Answer:
To find the length of a ring‐necked snake multiply the length of red‐bellied snake by 1.4
11.5×1.4=16.1
Length of ring‐necked snake is 16.1 inches.
Subtract 11.5 from 16.1=4.6 inches.
4.6 inches much longer is the ring-necked snake than the red-bellied snake.

Question 13.
Modeling Real Life
You use 2 cans of tomato sauce with mushrooms and 1.5 cans of plain tomato sauce to make lasagna. Each can contains 10.5 ounces. How many ounces of tomato sauce are in the lasagna?
Answer:
Each can contains 10.5 ounces of tomato sauce
2 cans contains 2×10.5=21 ounces
1.5 cans of plain sauce contains
1.5×10.5=15.75 ounces of sauce
Add 21 and 15.75 to find ounces of tomato sauce in the lasagna
21+15.75=36.75 ounces.
36.75 ounces of tomato sauce are in the lasagna.

Review & Refresh

Find the product.
Question 14.
24 × 104 = ______
Answer:
24×10000=240000

Question 15.
700 × 30 = ______
Answer:
700×30=21000

Question 16.
200 × 600 = _______
Answer:
200×600=120000

Lesson 5.7 Use Strategies to Multiply Decimals

Explore and Grow

Without multiplying, determine the pairs of expressions that have the same value. Explain your reasoning.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 1
Answer:

Reasoning
How do you know how many decimal places are in each product? Explain.
Answer:
The number of decimal places in each product is the sum of decimal places in the multiplyer and the multiplicand.

Think and Grow: Use Strategies to Multiply

You can use estimation and place value, or multiplication properties to multiply.

Example
Find 3.84 × 2.1. Estimate _______
Multiply 384 by21. Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after the ______.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 2
So, 3.84 × 2.1 = _____.

Example
Find 0.3 × 0.7.
You can use properties to multiply.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 3

Show and Grow

Find the product. Explain the strategy you used.
Question 1.
4.91 × 0.8 = _____
Answer:
Estimate:4×1=4
Multiply 491×8=3928
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after one digit ie thousands place.
3.928

Question 2.
10.2 × 5.6 = ______
Answer
Estimate:10×6=60
Multiply 102×56=5712
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after one digit ie thousands place.
57.12

Question 3.
12.03 × 4.2 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:12×4=48
Multiply 1203×43=51729
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after two digits ie thousands place.
51.729

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product. Explain the strategy you used.
Question 4.
0.9 × 3.2 = _____
Answer:
Estimate:1×3=3
Multiply 9×32=288
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after one digit ie hundreds place.
2.88

Question 5.
1.7 × 0.84 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:2×1=2
Multiply 17×84=1428
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after one digit ie thousands place.
1.428

Question 6.
2.4 × 2.4 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:2×3=6
Multiply 24×24=576
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after one digit ie hundreds place.
5.76

Question 7.
12.1 × 0.8 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:12×1=12
Multiply 121×8=968
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after one digit ie hundreds place.
9.68

Question 8.
0.05 × 0.9 = ______
Answer:
Think: 0.05=5×0.01 and 0.9=9×0.1
Use properties to multiply (commutative property of multiplication and associative property of multiplication)
0.05×0.9=5×0.01×9×0.1
=(5×9)×(0.1×0.01)
=45(0.001)
=0.045
Multiplying 45 by 0.001 moves the decimal point three places to  the left.
Therefore 0.05×0.9=0.045.

Question 9.
7.4 × 8.6 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:7×9=63
Multiply 74×86=6364
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after two digits ie hundreds place.
63.64

Question 10.
A newly hatched fish is 0.25 inch long. An adult fish is 7.6 times as long as the newly hatched fish. How long is the adult fish?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 4
Answer:
A newly hatched fish is 0.25 inch long, An adult fish is 7.6 times as long as the newly hatched fish.
Multiply 7.6 by 0.25
7.6×0.25=(76×25)×(0.1×0.01)=1900×0.001=1.9Therefore the adult fish is 1.9 inches long.

Question 11.
Writing

Which strategy do you prefer to use to multiply decimals? Explain.
Answer:
I prefer estimate strategy as it is very easy find the product of decimals by estimating the product of their whole numbers and placing the decimal point.

Question 12.
Structure
Your friend multiplies two decimals by rewriting the product as (56 × 3) × (0.01 ×0.1). What two decimals could she be multiplying?
Answer:
My friend multiplies two decimals by rewriting the product as (56 × 3) × (0.01 ×0.1)
Use multiplication properties.
(56 × 3) × (0.01 ×0.1)=(56×0.01)×(3×0.1)=0.56×0.3
Therefore my friend multiplied 0.56 by 0.3.

Question 13.
Precision
How many decimal places are in the unknown factor? Explain
_____ × 2.8 = 4.48
Answer:
_____ × 2.8 = 4.48
In the above equation the multiplicand in the equation has one decimal place after decimal point.
As the product has two decimal places after the decimal point the multiplyer will also have 1 digit after decimal point.
Therefore there is one decimal place is in the unknown factor.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
You measure the distance between Los Angeles and Anaheim on a map. Each centimeter represents 2.5 kilometers. What is the actual distance between the cities?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 5
Because each centimeter represents 2.5 kilometers, multiply 15.4 and 2.5 to find the actual distance.
Multiply 154 by 25. Then place the decimal point. Estimate ______
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after the ______
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 6
15.4 × 2.5 = _______
So, the actual distance between the cities is _________ kilometers.

Show and Grow

Question 14.
You measure the height of the replica of the Lincoln statue. Each centimeter represents 2.5 meters. What is the actual height of the Lincoln statue?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 7
Answer:
Because each centimeter represents 2.5 meters, multiply 2.32 and 2.5 to find the actual height.
Multiply 232 by 25. Then place the decimal point. Estimate 232×25
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after the one digit ie 3 places from the left.
232×25=5800
2.32 × 2.5 = 5.800=5.8
So, the actual height is 5.8 meters
Therefore the actual height of the Lincoln statue is 5.8 meters.

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
How much does the bunch of bananas cost? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 8
Answer:
The above picture tells us that there are 2.3 pounds of bananas.
Each pound of banana costs $0.59
To find the cost of 2.3 pounds of bananas
Multiply 2.3×0.59=
Estimate
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after the one digit ie 3 places from the left
23×59=1357
Therefore 2.3×0.59=1.357

Question 16.
DIG DEEPER!
Your friend has a digital photograph file that is 0.25 mega byte larger than 7.5 times the file size of your photograph. What is the file size of your friend’s photograph?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 9
Answer:
File size of my photograph is 0.5 MB
My friend has a digital photograph file that is 0.25 mega byte larger than 7.5 times the file size of my photograph.
Estimate
Multiply 0.5×7.5
(5×75)×(0.1×0.1)=375×0.01=3.75 MB
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after the one digit ie 2 places from the left
Add 0.25 MB to 3.75 MB
=3.75+0.25=4 MB
The file size of my friend’s photograph is 4 MB.

Use Strategies to Multiply Decimals Homework & Practice 5.7

Find the product. Explain the strategy you used.
Question 1.
0.8 × 1.4 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:1×1=1
Multiply 8×14=112
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after one digit ie hundreds place.
1.12

Question 2.

1.3 × 2.9 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:1×3=3
Multiply 13×29=377
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after one digit ie hundreds place.
3.77

Question 3.
1.7 × 0.6 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:1×1=1
Multiply 17×6=102
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after one digit ie hundreds place.
1.02

Question 4.
3.86 × 2.8 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:3×3=9
Multiply 386×28=10808
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after two digits ie hundreds place.
10.808

Question 5.
0.07 × 4.5 = _______
Answer:
Estimate:0x4=0
Multiply 7×45=315
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point before three digits ie hundreds
place.
0.315

Question 6.
2.56 × 6.25 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:3×6=18
Multiply 256×625=160000
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after two digits ie ten thousands place.
16.0000=16

Question 7.
1.18 × 0.8 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:1×1=1
Multiply 118×8=944
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point before three digits ie hundreds place.
0.944

Question 8.
18.2 × 0.9 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:18×1=18
Multiply 182×9=1638
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after two digits ie hundreds place.
16.38

Question 9.
6.7 × 5.2 = ______
Answer:
Estimate:7×5=35
Multiply 67×52=3484
Then place the decimal point.
Because the product should be close to your estimate, place the decimal point after two digits ie hundreds place.
34.84

Question 10.
A beaker contains 0.75 liter of a solution. You use 0.1 of the solution for an experiment. How much of the solution do you use?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 10
Answer:
To find the amount of solution used multiply 0.75 by 0.1
0.75×0.1=0.075
0.075 litrrs of solution is used.

Question 11.
Structure
Which expressions are equivalent to 0.6 × 0.3?
(6 × 3) × (0.1 × 0.1)
(6 × 3) × (0.01 × 0.01)
(6 × 3) × (\(\frac{1}{10}\) × \(\frac{1}{10}\))
(6 × 0.1) × (3× 0.1)
Answer:
(6 × 3) × (0.1 × 0.1), (6 × 0.1) × (3× 0.1) are equivalent to 0.6×0.3 as their product is equal to the product of 0.6×0.3.

Question 12.
Number Sense
Your friend finds 0.92 × 0.3 by multiplying 92 and 3. Explain how your friend will know where to place the decimal point in the product.
Answer:
My friend finds 0.92×0.3 by multiplying 92 and 3
In 0.92 there are two digits after decimal point and in 0.3 there are three digits after decimal point so the product should have 3 digits after decimal point.
When we multiply 92 by 3 the product is 276
Therefore the decimal  point is placed before 3 digits from the left 0.276 will be the product.

Question 13.
Number Sense
When finding 75 × 0.01, where will the decimal point be placed? Explain.
Answer:
While finding the product of 75 and 0.01 the decimal point will be placed before two digits as the decimal point in 0.01 has two places after decimal.
Therefore 0.75 is the product and decimal point is placed two places from the left.

Question 14.
Modeling Real Life
A toy car designer measures the length of the actual car shown. A toy car is 0.05 times as long as the actual car. How long is the toy car?
Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.7 11
Answer:
A toy car designer measures the length of the actual car shown.
Length of the actual car is 160.6 inches
A toy car is 0.05 times as long as the actual car
Multiply 160.6×0.05=8.03
Therefore Toy car is 8.03 inches long.

Question 15.
Modeling Real Life
A carpet installer measures 3 rectangular bedrooms for new carpeting. Which bedroom needs the most carpeting?
Bedroom A: 3.1 meters by3.1 meters
Bedroom B: 2.9 meters by3.2 meters
Bedroom C: 2.5 meters by3.4 meters160.6 inches
Answer:
Bedroom A: 3.1×3.1= (31×31)×(0.1×0.1)=961×0.01=9.61
Bedroom B: 2.9×3.2=(29×32)×(0.1×0.1)=928×0.01=9.28
Bedroom C: 2.5×3.4=(25×34)×(0.1×0.1)=850×0.01=8.50
Bedroom A needs the most carpeting.

Review & Refresh
Question 16.
Round 4.163
Nearest whole number: ______
Nearest tenth: ______
Nearest hundredth: ______
Answer:
Nearest whole number: 4
Nearest tenth: 4.2
Nearest hundredth: 4.16

Question 17.
Round 10.187.
Nearest whole number: ______
Nearest tenth: ______
Nearest hundredth: ______
Answer:
Nearest whole number:10
Nearest tenth: 10.2
Nearest hundredth: 10.19

Lesson 5.8 Multiply Decimals

Explore and Grow

Choose any strategy to find each product.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 1
Answer:

0.8×0.4=
Estimate
=(8×4)×(0.1×0.1)
=32(0.01)
= 0.32
0.8×0.4=0.32

2.1×1.25=
Use partial products
2.1×1.25=
0 .1×0.25=0.025
0 .1×1=0.1
0 .25×2=0.5
2×1=2
2.1×1.25=0.025+0.1+0.5+2=2.625

0.22×4.5
Estimate and place value

22×45=990
There are 3 decimal places in the factors so place the decimal point before three digits ie hundreds place.
0.990=0.99
0.22×4.5=0.99

1.4×1.6
Think: 1.4=14×0.1 and 1.6=16×0.1
Use properties to multiply (commutative property of multiplication and associative property of multiplication
=1.4×1.6
=14×0.1×16×0.1
=(14×16)×(0.1×0.1)
=224(0.01)
= 2.24

Reasoning
How can you determine the number of decimal places a product will have before multiplying?
Answer:
The decimal places of the product is the sum of the decimal places of the factors.

Think and Grow: Multiply Decimals

Key Idea
To multiply decimals, multiply as you do with whole numbers. The number of decimal places in the product is equal to the sum of the number of decimal places in the factors.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 2
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 3

Show and Grow

Find the product.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 4
Answer:
1.8×7.3
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

18×73=1314
There are 1 decimal place each in both the factors so the product will have 2 decimal places
Place the decimal point before 2 digits feom the left 13.14
Therefore 1.8×7.3=13.14

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 5
Answer:
12.41×62
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

1241×62=76942
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 76.942

Therefore 12.41×62=76.942

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 6
Answer:
0.14×0.7
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

14×7=98
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal place each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 0.098
Therefore 0.14×0.7=0.098

Apply and Grow: Practice

Find the product.
Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 7
Answer:
2.4×8.9
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

24×89=2136
There are 1 decimal places each in both the factors so the product will have 2 decimal places
Place the decimal point before two digits from the left 21.36
Therefore 2.4×8.9=21.36

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 8
Answer:
0.17×0.3
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

17×3=51
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 0.051
Therefore 0.17×0.3=0.051

Question 6.

Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 9
Answer:
35.4×6.2
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

354×62=21948
There are 1 decimal place each in both the factors so the product will have 2 decimal places
Place the decimal point before two digits from the left 219.48
Therefore 35.4×62=219.48

Question 7.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 10
Answer:
9.87×23.6
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

987×236=232932
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 232.932
Therefore 9.87×23.6=232.932

Question 8.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 11
Answer:
16.4×7.95
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

164×795=130380
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 130.380
Therefore 16.4×79.5=130.380

Question 9.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 12
Answer:
0.8×0.9
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points
8×9=72
There are 1 decimal place  each in both the factors so the product will have 2 decimal places
Place the decimal point before two digits from the left 0.72
Therefore 0.8×0.9=0.72

Question 10.
46.5 × 0.73 = ______
Answer:
46.5×0.73
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal point

465×73=33945
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 33.945
Therefore 46.5×0.73=33.945

Question 11.
14.8 × 9.3 = ________
Answer:
14.8×9.3
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

148×93=13764
There are 1 decimal place  each in both the factors so the product will have 2 decimal places
Place the decimal point before two digits from the left 137.64
Therefore 14.8×9.3×=137.64

Question 12.
1.54 × 2.6 = ______
Answer:
1.54×2.6
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

154×26=4004
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left4.004
Therefore 1.54×2.6=4.004

Question 13.
A sugar glider weighs 0.35 times the weight of the pygmy slow loris. How much does the sugar glider weigh?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 13
Answer:
A sugar glider weighs 0.35 times the weight of the pygmy slow loris
Weight of pygmy slow loris is 14.9 ounces
Multiply 14.9 by 0.35 to find the weight of sugar glider 14.9×0.35=
149×35

5215
There are 3 decimal places in the factors so the product will have 3 decimal places
Place the decimal point before 3 digits from the left. 5.215
Therefore 14.9×0.35=5.215

Question 14.
Structure
Use the equation to write two different multiplication expressions that have products of 28.34.
109 × 26 = 2,834
Answer:
Equation 1:10.9×2.6=28.34
Equation 2:109×26×0.1×0.1=28.34

Question 15.
DIG DEEPER!
Without calculating, explain how many decimal places are in the product 0.6 0.4 1.9. Rewrite the expression as the product of two decimals to support your answer.
Answer:
0.6 × 0.4 × 1.9
= 0.456

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
Nutritionists recommend that fifth-graders should consume about 28 grams of fiber each day. One serving of broccoli contains 3.8 grams of fiber. You eat 4.5 servings of broccoli in 1 day. Do you consume enough fiber for the day by eating broccoli? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 14
Multiply 3.8 by4.5 to find how many grams of fiber you consume by eating broccoli.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 15
Compare the product to 28.
So, you ______ consume enough fiber for the day by eating broccoli.

Show and Grow

Question 16.
Your aunt drives a car from Cincinnati to Nashville. The car travels 30.4 miles using 1 gallon of gasoline. There are 6.5 gallons of gasoline in the tank. Can she drive the entire distance without adding more gas to the 6.5 gallons already in the tank? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 16
Answer:
My aunt drives a car from Cincinnati to Nashville.
The distance from cincinnati to Nashville is 274 miles
The car travels 30.4 miles using 1 gallon of gasoline, There are 6.5 gallons of gasoline in the tank.
To find the total distance that my aunt can travel by using 6.5 gallons of gasoline
Multiply 6.5×30.4=65×304

65×304=19760
Place the decimal point before 2 digits from the left 197.60 miles
197.6<274 miles
So, my aunt cannot drive the entire distance without adding more gas to the 6.5 gallons already in the tank.

Question 17.
DIG DEEPER!
The equation shows how to convert a temperature C in degrees Celsius to a temperature F in degrees Fahrenheit. Convert the temperature shown to Fahrenheit.
1.8 × C + 32 = F
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 17
Answer:
Given 1.8×C+32=F
In the above picture the temperature is 37.1°C
To find degrees in Farenheit
Multiply 1.8 by 37.1 and add 32 to the product.

1.8×37.1=66.78+32=98.78°F
Therefore the temperature is 98.78°Farenheit.

Question 18.
DIG DEEPER!
Pennies dated 1982 or later contain about 0.06 gram of copper. Pennies dated prior to 1982 contain about 49.2 times as much copper as newer pennies. How many total grams of copper are in the pennies shown?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 18
Answer:
Pennies dated 1982 or later contain about 0.06 gram of copper
There is 3 pennies which are dated after 1983
Multiply 3×0.06=0.18
Pennies dated prior to 1982 contain about 49.2 times as much copper as newer pennies
Multiply 49.2 by the copper in penny dated after 1982 ie 0.06
49.2×0.06=2.952
Multiply 49 by 6 and place the decimal point before 3 digits from the left

Add 0.18 to 2.952 to find the total amount of copper in all the coins
2.952+0.18=3.132 grams
The total amount of copper in all the coins is 3.132 grams.

Multiply Decimals Homework & Practice 5.8

Find the product.
Question 1.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 19
Answer:
12.8×0.4
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points


128×4=512
There are 1 decimal place  each in both the factors so the product will have 2 decimal places
Place the decimal point before two digits from the left 5.12
Therefore 12.8×0.4=512

Question 2.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 20
Answer:
3.97×62.4
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal point

397×624=247728
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 247.728
Therefore 3.97×62.4=247.728

Question 3.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 21
Answer:
5.2×0.9
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

52×9=468
There are 1 decimal place  each in both the factors so the product will have 2 decimal places
Place the decimal point before two digits from the left 4.68
Therefore 5.2×0.9=4.68

Question 4.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 22
Answer:
18.3×9.27
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal point

183×927=169641
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 169.641
Therefore 18.3×9.27=169.641

Question 5.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 23
Answer:
2.57×4.6
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal point

257×46=11822
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 11.822
Therefore 2.57×4.6=11.822

Question 6.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 24
Answer:
22.5×3.7
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal point

225×37=8325
There are 1 decimal place each in both the factors so the product will have 2 decimal places
Place the decimal point before 2 digits from the left 83.25
Therefore 22.5×3.7=83.25

Question 7.
0.89 × 0.3 = ______
Answer:
0.89×0.3
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal point

89×3=267
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 0.269
Therefore 0.89×0.3=0.269

Question 8.
7.1 × 5.6 = ______
Answer:
7.1×5.6
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal points

71×56=3976
There are 1 decimal place  each in both the factors so the product will have 2 decimal places
Place the decimal point before two digits from the left 39.76
Therefore 7.1×5.6=39.76

Question 9.
13.63 × 9.2 = ______
Answer:
13.63×9.2
Multiply the whole numbers first and place the decimal point

1363×92=125396
There are 2 decimal places and 1 decimal each in both the factors so the product will have 3 decimal
places
Place the decimal point before three digits from the left 125.396
Therefore 13.63×9.2=125.396

Question 10.
The Miniature pinscher weighs 0.12 times the weight of the Doberman pinscher. How much does the Miniature pinscher weigh?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 25
Answer:
The Miniature pinscher weighs 0.12 times the weight of the Doberman pinscher
Weight of Doberman pinscher is 32.65 kilograms
Multiply 3265 by 12 and place the decimal point before 4 digits from the left.

Weight of miniature pinscher is 32.65×0.12=3.918
Miniature pinscher weigh is 3.918 kilograms.

Question 11.
Reasoning
Explain how you can tell which product is greater without multiplying or estimating.
3.75 × 922 or  37.5 × 9.22
Answer:
Product of 3.75 × 922 is greater because the number contains bigger whole number when compared to the other product.

Question 12.
Modeling Real Life
Nutritionists recommend that fifth-graders should consume about 5 ounces of protein each day. One serving of yogurt contains 0.6 ounce of protein. You eat 2.5 servings of yogurt in 1 day. Do you consume enough protein for the day by eating yogurt? Explain.
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 26
Answer:
Nutritionists recommend that fifth-graders should consume about 5 ounces of protein each day.
One serving of yogurt contains 0.6 ounce of protein.
If i eat 2.5 servings of yogurt in 1 day then i consume 2.5×0.6 ounce sof protein per day
Multiply 25 by 6 and place the decimal point 2before 2 digitd from the left

2.5×0.6=1.5 ounces of protein
Compare 1.5 with 5
1.5<5
So, i cannot consume enough protein for the day by eating yogurt.

Question 13.
DIG DEEPER!
Each 18-karat gold ring shown is a mixture of gold and other metals. One gram of 18-karat gold contains 0.75 gram of gold. How many total grams of gold are in the rings shown?
Big Ideas Math Solutions Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.8 27
Answer:
Each 18-karat gold ring shown is a mixture of gold and other metals.
If one gram of 18-karat gold contains 0.75 gram of gold then
Multiply 18 by 75 and place the decimal point before 3 digits from the left

1.8 grams ring contains 1.8×0.75 grams of gold 1.8×0.75=1.35 grams of gold.
Multiply 19 by 75 and place the decimal point before 3 digits from the left

1.9 grams ring contains 1.9×0.75 grams of gold 1.9×0.75=1.425 grams of gold
Multiply 21 by 75 and place the decimal point before 3 digits from the left

2.1 grams ring contains 2.1×0.75 grams of gold 2.1×0.75=1.575 grams of gold
Add 1.35 , 1.425 and 1.575 to find the total grams of gold 1.35+1.425+1.575=4.35
Total 4.35 grams of gold are in the rings shown.

Review & Refresh

Write the words as an expression. Then interpret the expression.
Question 14.
Subtract 10 from 50, then divide by 5
Answer:
8

Explanation:
Subtract 10 from 50=50‐10=40
divide by 5=40÷5=8

Question 15.
Add the product of 12 and 6 to the product of 6 and 8.
Answer:
120

Explanation:
product of 12 and 6=12×6=72
product of 6 and 8=6×8=48
Add the product of 12 and 6 to the product of 6 and 8=72+48=120

Lesson 5.9 Problem Solving: Multiply with Money

Explore and Grow

Explain how you would estimate the cost of 1.9 pounds of ham, 0.8 pound of turkey, and 1 pound of cheese.
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.9 1
Answer:

At Descartes’s Deli the Ham costs $8.90;per pound , Turkey costs $9.80 per pound and Cheese costs $6.70 per pound
Estimated solution
Use rounding
Cost of ham is 9, cost of turkey is 10 and cost of cheese is 7 per pound
By using rounding to find
Cost of 2 pounds of ham=2×9=18
Cost of 1 pound of turkey=10
Cost of 1 pound of cheese=7
Total =18+10+7=35
Original solution
To find the cost of
1.9 pounds of ham, Multiply 1.9×$8.9=$16.91
0.8 pound of turkey, Multiply 0.8×$9.8=$7.84
1 pound of cheese , Multiply 1×$6.7=$6.7
Therefore Total cost is $16.91+$7.84+$6.7=$31.45.

Reasoning
Is your answer an overestimate or an underestimate? Explain.
Answer:
My answer is an overestimate as it is more than the actual cost.

Think and Grow: Problem Solving: Multiply with Money

Example
Carrots cost $0.90 per pound. You buy 2.6 pounds of carrots and give the cashier $5. How much change do you receive?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.9 2
Understand the Problem
What do you know?
• Carrots cost $0.90 per pound.
• You buy 2.6 pounds of carrots.
• You pay with $5.

What do you need to find?
• You need to find the amount of change you receive.

Make a Plan
How will you solve?
Write and solve an equation: Multiply the number of pounds by the cost per pound, and subtract from $5.

Solve
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.9 3
So, you receive $ ______ in change.

Show and Grow

Question 1.
Landscaping rocks cost $0.35 per pound. A landscaper buys 86.4 pounds of rocks with $40. How much change does she receive?
Answer:
What i know is
Cost of landscaping rocks per pound is $0.35
A landscaper buys 86.4 pounds of rocks with $40
What i need to find is the change landscaper receives.
The amount of change landscaper receives =Amount spent ‐cost of rock per pound × 86.4 pounds of rock
=($40)‐($0.35×86.4)=$40‐$30.24=$9.76
$9.76 is the change landscaper receives.

Apply and Grow: Practice

Understand the problem. What do you know? What do you need to find? Explain.
Question 2.
A gallon of milk cost $0.82 in 1960. In2015, it cost $0.03 more than 4 times the cost in 1960. How much did a gallon of milk cost in 2015?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.9 4
Answer:
What we know is
The cost of gallon of milk in 1960 is $0.82
What we have find is
The Cost of gallon of milk in 2015 is
(4×$0.82)+$0.03=$3.28+$0.03=$3.31
A gallon of milk cost in 2015 is $3.31

Question 3.
A secretary earns $10.75 each hour. He works 8 hours each day,5 days each week. How much money does he earn in 1 week?
Answer:
What we know is
A secretary earns $10.75 each hour, he works 8 hours each day,5 days each week
What we have to find is
The amount he earns in a weekIf he works 8 hours each day and 5 days a week then he works for 40 hours in a week
The amount he earns in a week =Amount he earns per hour × Number of hours he work in a week.
=$10.75×40=$430
The money he earn in 1 week is $430.

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 4.
You download 8 songs for $1.29 each and 1 song for $0.99. How much do you pay for all of the songs?
Answer:
If i download 8 songs for $1.29 each then the money for 8 songs is number of songs multiplied by charges per
song
Ie 8×$1.29=$10.32
If i download another song for $0.99 then total charges i spent is charges of 8 songs plus charges of 1 song
$10.32+$0.99=$11.31
Therefore i pay $11.31 for all the songs.

Question 5.
Your friend buys a snack for $2.75, and a book that costs 5 times as much as the snack. He also buys a poster that costs $3.50 less than the book. How much does the poster cost?
Answer:
Cost of snack is $2.75
Book costs 5 times as much as the snack
The cost of book = 5×cost of snack
=5×$2.75=13.75
poster costs $3.50 less than the book
The cost of the poster = cost of book‐$3.50
=$13.75‐3.50=$10.25
Therefore cost of the poster is $10.25

Question 6.

A pair of shoes costs $35. Newton has a coupon topay 0.8 of the price.Descartes has a $10 off coupon. Who will pay more for the shoes?
Answer:
A pair of shoes costs $35
Newton has a coupon topay 0.8 of the price
=0.8×$35=28
Newton pays $28
Descartes has a $10 off coupon
=$35‐$10=$25
Descartes pay $25
28>25 so, Newton pays more for the pair of shoes.

Question 7.
Two friends eat at a restaurant for $34. They calculate the tip by multiplying $34 by 0.18. How much do they pay for the meal, including the tip?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.9 5
Answer:
Two friends eat at a restaurant for $34
If they calculate the tip by multiplying $34 by 0.18
Amount of tip =0.18×$34=$6.12
The money they pay for the meal, including the tip =$34+$6.12=$40.12
Therefore the money they paid is $40.12.

Think and Grow: Modeling Real Life

Example
A traveler gives a cashier 100 U.S. dollars to exchange for European euros. A $7.50 service fee is deducted from the amount given. How many European euros does the traveler receive?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.9 6
Think: What do you know? What do you need to find? How will you solve?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.9 7

Answer:
m = (100 – 7.5) × 0.86
92.5 × 0.86
= 79.55

Show and Grow

Use the table above.
Question 8.
DIG DEEPER!
You need 50 Canadian dollars. You give a cashier 50 U.S. dollars to exchange for Canadian dollars. A $9.50 service fee is deducted from the amount given. Do you have enough Canadian dollars? Explain.
Answer:
I need 50 canadian dollars
I gave 50 U.S. dollars for exchange and the service fee is $9.50
Exchange rate for US dollar to canadian dollar is 1.28
So, 50 US dollars ×1.28=64 canadian dollars
64>50
Therefore i have enough Canadian dollars.

Question 9.
DIG DEEPER!
In the example, the traveler decides to exchange the same number of U.S. dollars for British pounds. Without calculating, determine whether the traveler receives more European euros or British pounds. Explain.
Answer:
The traveler receives more European euros because the exchange rate of European euros ia more than the
exchange rate of British pounds.

Problem Solving: Multiply with Money Homework & Practice 5.9

Understand the problem. Then make a plan. How will you solve? Explain.
Question 1.
One gallon of gasoline costs $2.75. Your cousin fills his car with 10 gallons of gasoline each week. How much money does he spend on gasoline in 1 year?
Answer:
One gallon of gasoline costs $2.75
My friend fills his car with 10 gallons of gasoline each week
We have to find the money he spend on gasoline for a year.
An year consists of 52 weeks
So, multiply 52 by 10 to find number of gallons used in a year
52×10=520
If Cost of a gallon of gasoline is $2.75 then cost of 52p gallons is $2.75×520=$1430
$1430 is the money spend by my cousin on gasoline in 1 year.

Question 2.
Newton buys a guitar for $46 and a guitar amplifier. The amplifier costs $1.54 more than 1.26 times the cost of the guitar. How much does the amplifier cost?
Answer:
Cost of guitar is $46
The amplifier costs $1.54 more than 1.26 times the cost of the guitar
Cost of amplifier = ($46×1.26)+$1.54
=$57.96+$1.54
$59.5
Therefore the amplifier costs $59.5.

Question 3.
One pound of cheese costs $3.98. You buy a box of crackers for $3.37 and 2.5 pounds of cheese. How much do you spend in all?
Answer:
One pound of cheese costs $3.98
Cost of 2.5 pounds of cheese =2.25×$3.98=$8.955
If i  buy a box of crackers for $3.37 and 2.5 pounds of cheese
The money is spent =$3.37+$8.955=$12.325
$12.325 is the money i spend in all.
Question 4.

Writing
Write and solve a two-step word problem involving money.
Answer:
A boy buys a toy car for $3 and also a toy bike for 2.4 times as much as the cost of the toy car. Find the money spend by the boy in all.
Solution:
The cost of toy car is $3
Cost of toy bike is 2.4 × cost of toy car
=2.4×$3=$7.2
Add cost of toy car and toy bike =$3+$7.2=$10.2
The money spent by the boy in all is $10.2

Question 5.Modeling Real Life
You buy 2.75 pounds of pistachios and 2 pounds of cashews. Do you pay more for the pistachios or for the cashews? How much more?
Big Ideas Math Answer Key Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 5.9 8
Answer:
Cost of pistachios per pound is $6.60
If i buy 2.75 pounds of pistachios then the money spend is 2.75×$6.60=$18.15
Cost of cashews per pound is $8.66
If i buy 2 pounds of cashews then the money spend is 2×$8.66=$17.32
18.15>17.32
So, i pay more for the pistachios.

Question 6.
Modeling Real Life
You, Newton, and Descartes sell items at a craft show. You earn $34.50. Newton earns 5 times as much as you do. Descartes earns 0.1 times as much as Newton does. How much do the three of you earn in all?
Answer:
You, Newton, and Descartes sell items at a craft show
Money i earned is $34.50
Newton earns 5 times as much as i do
Money earned by Newton is 5×$34.50=$172.5
Descartes earns 0.1 times as much as Newton does
Money earned by descartes is 0.1×$172.5=$17.25
Sum of $34.5, $172.5 and $17.25 is 224.25.
$22425 is the money the three earn in all.

Question 7.
DIG DEEPER!
A daycare employee earns $10.90 per hour for the first works in 1 week. He is paid 1.5 times that rate for each additional hour that he works. How much money does he earn working for 43 hours in 1 week?
Answer:
Given,
A daycare employee earns $10.90 per hour for the first works in 1 week.
He is paid 1.5 times that rate for each additional hour that he works.
10.90 × 1.5 = 16.35
16.35 × 43 = 703.05

Review & Refresh

Find the sum. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 8.
24.93 + 3.86 = ______
Answer:
24.93 + 3.86 = 28.79
Explanation:

Question 9.
105.6 + 37.1 = _____
Answer:
105.6 + 37.1 = 142.7
Explanation:

Multiply Decimals Performance Task

You study the different parts of a corn plant in science class.
Question 1.
You have a corn root sample and a corn stem sample on microscope slides. When you view the samples through a microscope, the magnification number tells you how many times larger the image will be than the actual size.You see only a portion of the enlarged image.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 1
a. The corn root sample is 0.6 millimeter wide. You magnify the image by400. What is the width of the magnifiedCorn root corn root image?

b. You magnify the corn root sample by1,200. How much wider is the image when magnified by 1,200 than by 400?

c. You have a sample of a corn stem. The corn stem sample is 9.6 times wider than the corn root sample. What is the width of the corn stem sample?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 2
Answer:

a.The corn root sample is 0.6 millimeter wide
If i  magnify the image by 400 then the magnifird width =0.6×400=240 millimeters.

b.The corn root sample is 0.6 millimeter wide
If i  magnify the image by 1200 then the magnifird width =0.6×1200=720 millimeters
Subtract 240 millimeters from 720 millimeters
480 millimeters wider is the image when magnified by 1,200 than by 400.

c.Given that the corn stem sample is 9.6 times wider than the corn root sample
The corn root sample is 0.6 millimeter wide
Width of corn stem =9.6 × width of corn root
=9.6×0.6=5.76 millimeters.

Question 3.
An ear of corn has about 16 rows of kernels. Each row has about 50 kernels of corn.
a. About 0.2 of the kernels are white and the rest are yellow. How many kernels are yellow?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 3
b. Each ear of corn has about 0.25 pound of corn kernels. How many pounds of kernels are in a dozen ears of corn?
Answer:

a.An ear of corn contains 16×50=800kernels of corn
0.2 of corn are white 0.2×800=160
Subtract 160 from total number  of kernels of corn =800‐160=640
Therefore number of yellow kernels of corn are 640.

b.Each ear of corn has about 0.25 pound of corn kernels.
Dozen corn ears contains 12×0.25 =3 pounds of corn kernels
3 pounds of kernels are in a dozen ears of corn.

Question 3.
You measure the growth of a corn stalk. The corn stalk grows about 1.75 inches each day.About how many inches does the plant growin 1 month? Justify your answer.
Answer:
The corn stalk grows about 1.75 inches each day.
If there are 30 days in a month then the length of corn stalk after month is 1.75 inches ×30=52.5 inches
Therefore, the plant grow 52.5 inches in 1 month.

Multiply Decimals Activity

Race Around the world: Multiplication
Directions:
1. Players take turns.
2. On your turn, flip a RaceAround the World: Multiplication Card and find the product.
3. Move your piece to the next number on the board that is highlighted in the product.
4. The first player to make it back to North America wins!
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals 4

Multiply Decimals Chapter Practice

5.1 Multiplication Patterns with Decimals

Find the product.
Question 1.
0.9 ×103 = ______
Answer:
0.9×103 =900

Explanation:
0.9×1=0.9
0.9×10=9
0.9×100=90
0.9×1000=900
So, 0.9×103 =900
When we multiply 0.9 by 1000 the number of places of decimal point moves to the right is same as the exponent ie 3.

Question 2.
612.5 × 0.1 2 = ______
Answer:
612.5 × 0.1 2 =73.5
Multiply 6125 by 12 and place the decimal places before three places from the left.

So, 612.5×0.12=73.5

Question 3.
30.1 × 102 = _____
Answer:
30.1×100=3010

Explanation:
30.1×1=30.1
30.1×10=301
30.1×100=3010
When we multiply 30.1 by 100 the number of places of decimal point moves to the right is same as the exponent ie 2.
So, 30.1×100=3010.

Question 4.
45.7 × 0.01 = ______
Answer:
45.7×0.01=0.457

Explanation:
45.7×1=45.7
45.7×0.1=4.57
45.7×0.01=0.457
When we multiply 45.7 by 0.01 the decimal point moves two places to the left
So, 45.7×0.01=0.457

Question 5.
8.6 × 10 = ______
Answer:
8.6×10=86

Explanation:
8.6×1=8.6
8.6×10=86
When we multiply 8.6 by 10 the decimal point moves 1 place to the right.
So, 8.6×10=86

Question 6.
5.24 × 0.1 = _______
Answer:
5.24×0.1=0.524

Explanation:
5.24×1=5.24
5.24×0.1=0.524
When we multiply 5.24 by 0.1 the decimal point moves one places to the left
So, 5.24×0.1=0.524

5.2 Estimate Products of Decimals and Whole Numbers

Estimate the product.
Question 7
0.99 × 45
Answer:
Use Rounding

1×45=45
0.99×45 is about 45

Question 8.
3.15 × 8
Answer:
Use Rounding

3×8=24
3.15×8 is about 24

Question 9.
17 × 1.68
Answer:
Use Rounding

17×2=34
17×1.68 is about 34

Question 10.
95 × 5.02
Answer:
Use Rounding

95×5=475
95×5.02  is about 475

5.3 Use Models to Multiply Decimals and Whole Numbers

Find the product.
Question 11.
0.3 × 3 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 11
Answer:


0.3+0.3+0.3 =0.9
Therefore 0.3×3=0.9

Question 12..
0.17 × 8 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 12
Answer:


0.17+0.17+0.17+0.17+0.17+0.17+0.17+0.17=1.36
Question 13.
Structure
Write an equation represented by the model.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 13
Answer:
0.29×8=2.32

5.4 Multiply Decimals and Whole Numbers

Find the product.
Question 14.
3 × 1.64 = ______
Answer:
3×1.64=3×164

=492
Place the decimal point before 2 places from the left
4.92
Therefore 3 × 1.64 =4.92

Question 15.

2.3 × 8 = ______
Answer:
2.3×8=23×8

=184
Place the decimal point before 1 place from the left
18.4
Therefore 2.3×8=18.4

Question 16.
9 × 10.7 = ______
Answer:
9×10.7=9×107

=963
Place the decimal point before 1 place from the left
96.3
Therefore 9×10.7=96.3

Question 17.
18.65 × 6 = _____
Answer:
18.65×6=1865×6

=11190
Place the decimal point before 2 places from the left
111.90
Therefore 18.65×6=111.90

5.5 Use Models to Multiply Decimals

Use the Models to find the product.
Question 18.
0.5 × 0.6 = ______
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 18
Answer:


Shade 5 rows to represent 0.5 and 6 column to represent 0.6
30 squares are shaded twice
So, 0.5×0.6=0.30

Question 19.
1.8 × 0.9 = _____
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 19
Answer:


Shade 9 rows to represent 0.9 and 18 columns to represent 1.8
162 squares are shaded twice
So, 1.8 × 0.9= 1.62

5.6 Use Partial Products to Multiply Decimals

Find the product. Check whether your answer is reasonable.
Question 20.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 20
Answer:
Step 1:0.1×0.3=0.03
Step 2:0.1×2=0.2
Step 3:8×0.3=2.4
Step 4:8×2=16
Add 0.03+0.2+2.4+16=18.63

Question 21.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 21
Answer:Step 1:0.2×0.5=0.10

Step 2:
.2×9=1.8
Step 3:4×0.5=2
Step 4:4×9=36
Add 0.10+1.8+2+36=39.9

Question 22.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 22
Answer:
Step1:0.6×0.8=0.48
Step2:0.6×6=3.6
Step3:7×0.8=5.6
Step4:7×6=42
Add 0.48+3.6+5.6+42=51.68

7.6×6.8=51.68

Question 23.
0.7 × 6.5 = ______
Answer:
Step1:0.7×0.5=0.35
Step2:0.7×6=4.2
Step3:0×0.5=0
Step4:0×6=0
Add 0.35+4.2=4.55

Therefore 0.7×6.5=4.55

Question 24.
25.6 × 16.9 = ______
Answer:
Step1:0.6×0.9=0.54
step2:0.6×16=9.6
Step3:25×0.9=22.5
Step4:25×16=400
Add 0.54+9.6+22.5+400=432.64
Therefore 25.6×16.9=432.64

Question 25.
2.5 × 6.81 = _____
Answer:
Step1:0.5×0.81=0.405
Step2:0.5×6=3
Step3:2×0.81=1.62
Step4:2×6=12
Add 0.405+3+1.62+12=17.025
Therefore 2.5×6.81=17.025

5.7 Use Strategies to Multiply Decimals

Find the product. Explain the strategy you used.
Question 26.
0.4 × 0.16 = ______
Answer:
Estimate
4×16

=64 place the decimal point before three places from the left
0.064
Therefore 0.4×0.16=0.064

Question 27.
0.2 × 0.8 = _______
Answer:
Estimate
2×8=16 and place the decimal point before two places from the left
0.16
Therefore 0.2×0.6=0.16

Question 28.
2.5 × 0.3 = ______
Answer:
Estimate
25×3

=74 and place the decimal point before two places from the left
0.74
Therefore 2.5×0.3=0.74

Question 29.
Structure
Your friend multiplies two decimals by rewriting the product as (8 × 3) × (0.1 × 0.1). What two decimals is she multiplying?
Answer:
(8×3)×(0.1×0.1)
(8×0.1)×(3×0.1)
0.8×0.3
The two decimals she is multiplying are 0.8 and 0.3

5.8 Multiply Decimals

Find the product.
Question 30.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 30
Answer:
Multiply 58 by 3 and place the decimal point
58×3

=174
Place the decimal point before two places from the left.
1.74
Therefore 5.8×0.3=1.74

Question 31.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 31
Answer:
Multiply 722 by 16 and place the decimal point
722×16

=11552
Place the decimal point before three places from the left
11.552
Therefore 7.22×1.6=11.552

Question 32.
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 32
Answer:
Multiply 408 by 95 and place the decimal point
408×95

=38760
Place the decimal point before two places from the left
387.60
Therefore 40.8×9.5=387.60

5.9 Problem Solving: Multiply with Money

Question 33.
Your friend buys 4 glow sticks for $0.99 each. She pays with a $10 bill. How much change does she receive?
Answer:
My friend buys 4 glow sticks for $0.99 each
Total cost =4×$0.99=$3.96
Subtract cost from $10
$10‐$3.96=$6.04
change she receives is $6.04

Question 34.
Modeling Real Life
Descartes parks in the parking garage for 3 hours on Monday, 5 hours on Tuesday, and 10 hours on Wednesday. How much does he pay altogether?
Big Ideas Math Answers 5th Grade Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals chp 34
Answer:
Descartes parks in the parking garage for 3 hours on Monday, 5 hours on Tuesday, and 10 hours on Wednesday.
parking garage rates are $4.50 per hour and $10.00 for more than 8 hours
charges on monday =3hoursx$4.50=$13.5
charges on tuesday =5hoursx$4.5=$22.5
on wednesday deacartes parks his car for more than 8 hours so, charges on wednesday are $10
Add 13.5+22.5+10=$46
Therefore Descartes pay $46 altogether.

Conclusion:

Take the help from the direct links available below and solve the problems covered in Big Ideas Math Answers Grade 5 Chapter 5 Multiply Decimals. Test your knowledge by solving the questions given at the end of the chapter. If you have any doubts regarding the concepts post the comments in the below attached comment box.

Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units

Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Length in Customary Units Concepts

Length in Customary Units Show What You Know

Compare Lengths
Question 1.
Order the pencils from shortest to longest.
Write 1, 2, 3.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 1.1
Answer:

Explanation:
The yellow color pencil is longest and the green color pencil is shortest pencil.

Use Nonstandard Units to Measure Length
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 1.2
Question 2.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 1.3
Answer:

Explanation:
There are 6 color tiles that cover the object.Each color tile is 1 inch.So, the object given above is 6 inches long.

Question 3.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 1.4
Answer:

Explanation:
There are 5 color tiles that cover the object.Each color tile is 1 inch.So, the object given above is 5 inches long.

Measure Length Twice: Nonstandard Units
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 1.5
Question 4.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 1.6
Answer:

Explanation:
There are 9 push pins that cover the object.So, the length of the given object is 9.

Question 5.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 1.7
Answer:

Explanation:
There are 23 linking cubes that cover the object.So, the length of the object is 23.

Length in Customary Units Vocabulary Builder

2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 2.1
Visualize It
Fill in the graphic organizer to describe the lengths of different objects.

Understand Vocabulary
Use review words. Complete the sentences.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 2.3

Question 1.
The blue pencil is the _______ pencil.
Answer:
The blue pencil is the longest pencil

Question 2.
The red pencil is the _______ pencil.
Answer:
The red pencil is the sortest pencil

Question 3.
The red pencil is ______ than the yellow pencil.
Answer:
The red pencil is shorter than the yellow pencil.

Question 4.
The blue pencil is _______ than the yellow pencil.
Answer:
The blue pencil is longer than the yellow pencil.

Length in Customary Units Game Longer or Shorter?

Materials
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 2.4

  1. Each player chooses a picture on the board and then finds a real object that matches that picture.
  2. Place the objects next to each other to find which is longer and which is shorter. If the objects are the same length, choose another object.
  3. Spin the pointer on the spinner. The player with the object that matches the spinner puts a cube on that picture on the board.
  4. Take turns until all the pictures have cubes. The player with more cubes on the board wins.
    2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 2.5

Length in Customary Units Vocabulary Game

2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 3.1
Guess the Word
For 3 to 4 players
Materials

  • timer

How to Play

  1. Take turns to play.
  2. Choose a math word, but do not say it aloud.
  3. Set the timer for 1 minute.
  4. Give a one-word clue about your word. Give each player one chance to guess your word.
  5. If nobody guesses correctly, repeat Step 4 with a different clue. Repeat until a player guesses the word or time runs out. Give a different one-word clue each time.
  6. The first player to guess the word gets 1 point. If the player can use the word in a sentence, he or she gets 1 more point. Then that player gets the next turn.
  7. The first player to score 5 points wins.

The Write Way
Reflect
Choose one idea. Write about it in the space below.

  • When would you measure the length of an object? When would you estimate its length? Write 2–3 sentences to explain.
  • Explain when you would use each measuring tool. measuring tape yardstick inch ruler
  • Tell at least two things you know about a line plot.
    2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 3.2

Lesson 8.1 Measure with Inch Models

Essential Question How can you use inch models to measure length?

2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 1 ______ color tiles

Answer:
6 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 6 color tiles long.
So, the object is 6 inches long.

2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 2 ______ color tiles

Answer:
7 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 7 color tiles long.
So, the object is 7 inches long.

2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 3 ______ color tiles

Answer:
4 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 4 color tiles long.
So, the object is 4 inches long.

HOME CONNECTION • Your child used color tiles as an introduction to measurement of length before using standard measurement tools.

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Attend to Precision Describe how to use color tiles to measure the length of an object.
Answer:
To measure the length of an object place the color tiles side by side and count the number of tiles that cover the object.Each tile is about 1 inch.Therefore the length of the object will be the total number of tiles.

Share and Show

Use color tiles. Measure the length of the object in inches.
Question 1.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 4 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
6 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 6 color tiles long.
So, the object is 6 inches long.

Question 2.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 5 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
9 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 9 color tiles long.
So, the object is 9 inches long.

Question 3.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 6 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
6 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 6 color tiles long.
So, the object is 6 inches long.

Question 4.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 7 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
10 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 10 color tiles long.
So, the object is 10 inches long.

On Your Own

Use color tiles. Measure the length of the object in inches.
Question 5.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 8 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
5 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 5 color tiles long.
So, the object is 5 inches long.

Question 6.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 9 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
9 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 9 color tiles long.
So, the object is 9 inches long.

Question 7.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 10 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
13 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 13 color tiles long.
So, the object is 13 inches long.

Question 8.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 11 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
7 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 7 color tiles long.
So, the object is 7 inches long.

Question 9.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 12 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
9 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 9 color tiles long.
So, the object is 9 inches long.

Question 10.
GO DEEPER
Blue paper chains are 4 inches long. Red paper chains are 3 inches long. How many are needed to have 10 inches of paper chains?
______ blue paper chain
_______ red paper chains
Answer:

Problem Solving • Applications

Question 11.
THINK SMARTER
Blue paper chains are 8 inches long. Red paper chains are 6 inches long. How many are needed to have 22 inches of paper chains?
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 13
______ blue paper chains
_______ red paper chain
Answer:

Question 12.
MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE
Use Reasoning
Liza has a ribbon that is 12 inches long. She needs to cut it into pieces that are each 4 inches long. How many pieces can she make?
______ Pieces
Answer:

Question 13.
THINK SMARTER +
Jeremy used color tiles to measure a string. Each tile is 1 inch long. How long is the string? Circle the number in the box to make the sentence true.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 14
Answer:

Explanation:
There are 2 color tiles that cover the length of the string.Each color tile measures 1 inch.So, the string is about 2 inches long.

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child use several of the same small item (such as paper clips) to measure the lengths of some objects at home.

Measure with Inch Models Homework & Practice 8.1

Use color tiles. Measure the length of the object in inches.
Question 1.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 15 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
13 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 13 color tiles long.
So, the object is 13 inches long.

Question 2.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 16 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
4 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 4 color tiles long.
So, the object is 4 inches long.

Question 3.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 17 about ______ inches
Answer:

Answer:
8 inches long

Explanation:
The object is 8 color tiles long.
So, the object is 8 inches long.

Problem Solving
Question 4.
Look around your classroom. Find an object that is about 4 inches long. Draw and label the object.
Answer:

Explanation:
The pencil i use is 4 inches long.

Question 5.
WRITE
Describe how you would find an object that is about 8 inches long.
Answer:
We can find an object that is about 8 inches long by placing color tiles along the object if the is about 8 color tiles then it is about 8 inches long.

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Jessie used color tiles to measure the rope. Each color tile measures 1 inch. The rope is about _____ inches long.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 18
Answer:
3 inches long

Explanation:
There are 3 color tiles that cover the lengthe of the rope.Each color tile measures 1 inch. The rope is about 3 inches long.

Spiral Review
Question 2.
Adam has these coins. How much money is this?
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 19
Answer:

Question 3.
Look at the clock hands. What time does this clock show?
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 20
Answer:

Explanation:
The clock has the hours hand on 4 and the minutes hand on the 6 ie 30 mins.So, the time shown in the above watch is 4.30.

Question 4.
Hank has 84 marbles in a bag. His friend Mario has 71 marbles in his bag. How many marbles do they have altogether?
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.1 21
Answer:

Explanation:
Hank has 84 marbles in a bag. His friend Mario has 71 marbles in his bag.Therefore they have 84+71=155 marbles altogether.

Lesson 8.2 Make and Use a Ruler

Essential Question Why is using a ruler similar to using a row of color tiles to measure length?

Listen and Draw

Use color tiles. Make the given length. Trace along the edge to show the length.
4 inches

2 inches

3 inches

HOME CONNECTION • Your child used color tiles as 1-inch models to show different lengths. This activity helps to make inch units a more familiar concept.

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE
Describe how you knew how many color tiles to use for each length.
Answer:

Share and Show

Measure the length with your ruler. Count the inches.
Question 1.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 1 about ______ inches
Answer:

Question 2.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 2 about ______ inches
Answer:

Question 3.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 3 about ______ inches
Answer:

On Your Own

Measure the length with your ruler. Count the inches.

Question 4.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 4 about ______ inches
Answer:

Question 5.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 5 about ______ inches
Answer:

Question 6.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 6 about ______ inches
Answer:

Question 7.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 7 about ______ inches
Answer:

Question 8.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 8 about ______ inches
Answer:

Problem Solving • Applications

Question 9.
THINK SMARTER
Work with a classmate. Use both of your rulers to measure the length of a bulletin board or a window. What is the length?
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 9
about _____ inches
Answer:

Question 10.
MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE
Explain Describe what you did in Exercise 9. How did you measure a length that is longer than your rulers?
______________________
______________________
Answer:

Question 11.
THINK SMARTER
Measure the length of the yarn with your ruler. Does the sentence describe the yarn. Choose Yes or No.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 10
Answer:

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Choose one object in this lesson. Have your child find objects that are longer, about the same length, and shorter.

Make and Use a Ruler Homework & Practice 8.2

Measure the length with your ruler.
Count the inches.
Question 1.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 11 about _____ inches
Answer:

Question 2.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 12 about ______ inches
Answer:

Question 3.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 13 about ______ inches
Answer:

Problem Solving
Question 4.
Use your ruler. Measure the width of this page in inches.
about ______ inches
Answer:

Question 5.
WRITE
Would you rather use color tiles or your ruler to measure the length of an object? Explain your choice.
Answer:

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Use your ruler. What is the length of this ribbon?
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 14
about _____ inches
Answer:

Spiral Review
Question 2.
What time is shown on this clock?
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 15
Answer:

Question 3.
What is the total value of these coins?
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.2 16
_____ cents
Answer:

Question 4.
The first group collected 238 cans. The second group collected 345 cans. How many cans did the two groups collect?
_________
Answer:

Question 5.
There are 2 children in each row. How many children are in 5 rows?
_____ children
Answer:

Lesson 8.3 Estimate Lengths in Inches

Essential Question How do you estimate the lengths of objects in inches?

Listen and Draw

Choose three objects. Measure their lengths with your ruler. Draw the objects and write their lengths.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 1

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Describe how the three lengths compare. Which is the longest object?
Answer:

Share and Show

Circle the best estimate for the length of the string.
Question 1.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 2
Answer:

Question 2.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 3
Answer:

Question 3.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 4
Answer:

On Your Own

Circle the best estimate for the length of the string.
Question 4.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 5
Answer:

Question 5.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 6
Answer:

Question 6.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 7
Answer:

Question 7.
THINK SMARTER
Use the 1 -inch mark. Estimate the length of each ribbon.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 8
Answer:

Problem Solving • Applications

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE
Analyze Relationships
Question 8.
Sasha has a string that is the length of 5 beads. Each bead is 2 inches long. What is the length of the string?
_______ inches
Answer:

Question 9.
Maurice has a string that is 15 inches long. He has beads that are each 3 inches long. How many beads will fit on the string?
________ beads
Answer:

Question 10.
THINK SMARTER
Tameka has this string. She has many beads that are 1 inch long, like this blue bead. What is the best estimate for the length of the string? Draw more beads on the string to show your estimate.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 9
______ inches
Answer:

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • With your child, estimate the lengths in inches of some small objects, such as books.

Estimate Lengths in Inches Homework & Practice 8.3

The bead is 1 inch long.
Circle the best estimate for the length of the string.
Question 1.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 10
Answer:

Question 2.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 11
Answer:

Question 3.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 12
Answer:

Problem Solving
Solve. Write or draw to explain.
Question 4.
Ashley has some beads. Each bead is 2 inches long. How many beads will fit on a string that is 8 inches long?
______ beads
Answer:

Question 5.
WRITE
Describe a way that someone could estimate the length of a book.
Answer:

Lesson Check
Question 1.
The bead is 1 inch long. Estimate the length of the string.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 13
______ inches
Answer:

Spiral Review
Question 2.
Draw hands on the clock to show 5 minutes after 6.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.3 14
Answer:

Question 3.
Ella read 16 pages of her book on Monday and 26 pages on Tuesday. There are 64 pages in the book. How many more pages are left for Ella to read?
_______ pages
Answer:

Question 4.
What is the sum?
38 + 24 = _____
Answer:

Lesson 8.4 Measure with an Inch Ruler

Essential Question How do you use an inch ruler to measure lengths?

Listen and Draw

Draw each worm to match the given length.

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Use Reasoning Describe how you decided how long to draw the 2-inch and 3-inch worms.
Answer:

Share and Show

Measure the length to the nearest inch.
Question 1.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 1 ______ inches
Answer:

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 2 ______ inches
Answer:

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 3 ______ inches
Answer:

Question 4.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 4 ______ inches
Answer:

On Your Own

Measure the length to the nearest inch.
Question 5.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 5 ______ inches
Answer:

Question 6.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 6 ______ inches
Answer:

Question 7.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 7 ______ inches
Answer:

Question 8.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 8 ______ inches
Answer:

Question 9.
GO DEEPER
Measure the lengths to the nearest inch. How much shorter is the ribbon than the yarn?
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 9
______ inch shorter
Answer:

Problem Solving • Applications

Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 10
Question 10.
THINK SMARTER
How much longer is the red string than the blue string?
_______ inch longer
Answer:

Question 11.
THINK SMARTER
If the red and
blue strings were straight and placed end to end, what would the total length be?
______ inches
Answer:

Question 12.
THINK SMARTER
Mrs. Grant’s pencil is 5 inches long. Is this Mrs. Grant’s pencil? Use an inch ruler to find out. Use the numbers and words on the tiles to make the sentences true.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 11
The pencil is ______ inches long.
This pencil _____ Mrs. Grant’s pencil.
Answer:

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child measure the lengths of some objects to the nearest inch using a ruler or a similar measuring tool.

Measure with an Inch Ruler Homework & Practice 8.4

Measure the length to the nearest inch.
Question 1.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 12 ______ inches
Answer:

Question 2.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 13 ______ inches
Answer:

Question 3.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 14 ______ inches
Answer:

Problem Solving
Question 4.
Measure the string. What is its total length?
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 15 _______ inches
Answer:

Question 5.
WRITE
Compare the ruler you made to an inch ruler. Describe how they are alike and how they are different.
Answer:

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Use an inch ruler. What is the length to the nearest inch?
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 16
_____ inches
Answer:

Question 2.
Use an inch ruler. What is the length to the nearest inch?
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 17
______ inches
Answer:

Spiral Review
Question 3.
The clock shows the time that Jen got to school. What time did Jen get to school?
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 18
Answer:

Question 4.
What is the difference?
13 – 5 = _______
Answer:

Question 5.
Each color tile is about 1 inch long. About how long is the ribbon?
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.4 19
Answer:

Lesson 8.5 Problem Solving • Add and Subtract in Inches

Essential Question How can drawing a diagram help when solving problems about length?

There is a paper clip chain that is 16 inches long. Aliyah removes 9 inches of paper clips from the chain. How long is the paper clip chain now?

Unlock the Problem
What information do I need to use?
The chain is _____ inches long. ______ inches of paper clips are removed from the chain.

Show how to solve the problem.
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 1
The paper clip chain is ______ inches long now.

HOME CONNECTION • Your child drew a diagram to represent a problem about lengths. The diagram can be used to choose the operation for solving the problem.

Try Another Problem

Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 2
Draw a diagram. Write a number sentence using a ☐ for the missing number. Solve.
Question 1.
Carmen has a string that is 13 inches long and a string that is 8 inches long. How many inches of string does she have?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 3
_________________
Carmen has ________ inches of string.
Answer:

Question 2.
Eli has a cube train that is 24 inches long. He removes 9 inches of cubes from the train. How long is Eli’s cube train now?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 4
______________
Eli’s cube train is ______ inches long now.
Answer:

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Describe how your diagram shows what happened in the second problem.
Answer:

Share and Show

Draw a diagram. Write a number sentence using a ☐ for the missing number. Solve.
Question 3.
Lee has a paper strip chain that is 25 inches long. He unhooks 13 inches from the chain. How long is Lee’s paper strip chain now?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 5
______________
Lee’s paper strip chain is _______ inches long now.
Answer:

Question 4.
THINK SMARTER
Sue has two ribbons that have the same length. She has 18 inches of ribbon in all. How long is each ribbon?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 6
_____________
Each ribbon is _______ inches long.
Answer:

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child explain how he or she used a diagram to solve a problem in this lesson.

Problem Solving • Add and Subtract in Inches Homework & Practice 8.5

Draw a diagram. Write a number sentence using a ☐ for the missing number. Solve.
Question 1.
Molly had a ribbon that was 23 inches long. She cut 7 inches off the ribbon. How long is her ribbon now?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 7
_______________
Molly’s ribbon is _________ inches long now.
Answer:

Question 2.
WRITE
Describe how you could draw a diagram for a problem about finding the total length for two strings, 15 inches long and 7 inches long
______________________
________________________
Answer:

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Allie has two pieces of string. Each one is 8 inches long. How many inches of string does she have altogether?
_______ inches
Answer:

Question 2.
Jeff has a cube train that is 26 inches long. He removes 12 inches of cubes from the train. How long is Jeff’s cube train now?
_______ inches
Answer:

Spiral Review
Question 3.
Ann buys a pencil for 45 cents. Make a list of coins that would equal 45 cents.
__________
Answer:

Question 4.
Use an inch ruler. About how long is the string?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 8
about _______ inch
Answer:

Question 5.
Jason has these coins in a jar.
What is the total value of these coins?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 9
$ ______ or _______ cents
Answer:

Length in Customary Units Mid-Chapter Checkpoint

Concepts and Skills

Use color tiles. Measure the length of the object in inches.
Question 1.
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 10 about _______ inches
Answer:

The bead is one inch long. Circle the best estimate for the length of the string.
Question 2.
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 11
Answer:

Draw a diagram. Write a number sentence using a ☐ for the missing number. Solve.
Question 3.
A mark is 17 inches long. Katy erases 9 inches from the mark. How long is the mark now?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 12
___________________
The mark is ________ inches long now.
Answer:

Question 4.
THINK SMARTER
Use an inch ruler. What is the length of the string to the nearest inch?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts 8.5 13 _______ inches
Answer:

Lesson 8.6 Measure in Inches and Feet

Essential Question Why is measuring in feet different from measuring in inches?

Listen and Draw

Draw or write to describe how you did each measurement.
First Measurement

Second Measurement

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Use Reasoning Describe how the length of a sheet of paper and the length of a paper clip are different.
Answer:

Share and Show

Measure to the nearest inch.
Then measure to the nearest foot.
Question 1.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 1
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

Question 2.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 2
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

Question 3.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 3
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

On Your Own

Measure to the nearest inch.
Then measure to the nearest foot.
Question 4.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 4
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

Question 5.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 5
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

Question 6.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 6
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

Question 7.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 7
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

Question 8.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 8
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

Problem Solving • Applications

Question 9.
THINK SMARTER
Estimate the length of a real shelf in inches and in feet. Then measure.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 9
Answer:

Question 10.
MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Explain
Look at your measurements for the shelf. Why is the number of inches different from the number of feet?
________________
__________________
Answer:

Question 11.
THINK SMARTER
Use the words on the tiles that make the sentence true.
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 10
A book shelf is 4 ______ long.
Deb’s necklace is 20 ______ long.
A marker is 3 _______ long.
Jim’s bicycle is 4 _____ long.
Answer:

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child measure the distance of a few footsteps in inches and then in feet.

Measure in Inches and Feet Homework & Practice 8.6

Measure to the nearest inch.
Then measure to the nearest foot.
Question 1.
bookcase
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 11
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

Question 2.
window
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 12
______ inches
______ feet
Answer:

Problem Solving
Question 3.
Jake has a piece of yarn that is 4 feet long. Blair has a piece of yarn that is 4 inches long. Who has the longer piece of yarn? Explain.
___________________
_____________________
Answer:

Question 4.
WRITE
Would you measure the length of a jump rope in inches or in feet? Explain your choice.
Answer:

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Larry is telling his sister about using a ruler to measure length. Fill in the blanks with ‘inch’ or ‘foot’ to make the sentence true.
I ______ is longer than I ______.
Answer:

Spiral Review
Question 2.
Matt put this money in his pocket. What is the total value of this money?
$ ______
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 13
Answer:

Question 3.
What time is shown on this clock?
2nd Grade Go Math Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.6 14
Answer:

Question 4.
Ali had 38 game cards. Her friend gave her 15 more game cards. How many game cards does Ali have now?
_____ cards
Answer:

Lesson 8.7 Estimate Lengths in Feet

Essential Question How do you estimate the lengths of objects in feet?

Look for 3 classroom objects that are about the same length as a 12-inch ruler. Draw and label the objects.

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE
Which objects have a greater length than the ruler? Explain.
Answer:

Model and Draw

Estimate how many 12-inch rulers will be about the same length as this bulletin board.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 1
_______ rulers, or ______ feet

Share and Show

Find each object. Estimate how many 12-inch rulers will be about the same length as the object.
Question 1.
bookshelf
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 2
Estimate: ______ rulers, or ______ feet
Answer:

Question 2.
chair
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 3
Estimate: ______ rulers, or ______ feet
Answer:

On Your Own

Find each object. Estimate how many 12-inch rulers will be about the same length as the object.
Question 3.
desktop
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 4
Estimate: ______ rulers, or ______ feet
Answer:

Question 4.
wall map
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 5
Estimate: ______ rulers, or ______ feet
Answer:

Question 5.
window
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 6
Estimate: ______ rulers, or ______ feet
Answer:

Question 6.
teacher’s desk
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 7
Estimate: ______ rulers, or ______ feet
Answer:

Problem Solving • Applications

Question 7.
THINK SMARTER
Estimate the distance from your desk to the door in feet. Then estimate the same distance in inches.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 8
______ feet
_______ inches
Explain how you made your estimates for the number of feet and for the number of inches.
___________________
___________________
Answer:

Question 8.
THINK SMARTER
Match the object with the estimate of its length in feet.
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 9
Answer:

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • With your child, estimate the lengths of some objects in feet.

Estimate Lengths in Feet Homework & Practice 8.7

Find each object.
Estimate how many 12-inch rulers will be about the same length as the object.
Question 1.
door
Estimate: ______ rulers, or _____ feet
Answer:

Question 2.
flag
Estimate: ______ rulers, or _____ feet
Answer:

Problem Solving
Solve. Write or draw to explain.
Question 3.
Mr. and Mrs. Baker place 12-inch rulers along the length of a rug. They each line up 3 rulers along the edge of the rug. What is the length of the rug?
about ______ feet
Answer:

Question 4.
WRITE
Choose an object that is a few feet long. Explain how to estimate its length in feet.
___________________
___________________
Answer:

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Estimate how many 12 inch rulers will be about the same length as a bike.
_____ rulers, or ______ feet
Answer:

Question 2.
Estimate how many 12 inch rulers will be about the same length as a keyboard.
_______ rulers, or _____ feet
Answer:

Spiral Review
Question 3.
What is the total value of 2 quarters, 3 dimes, and 4 nickels?
$ ______
Answer:

Question 4.
What is the total value of 2 dimes, 3 nickels, and 2 pennies?
$ _____ or _____ cents
Answer:

Question 5.
There are 68 children in the school. There are 19 children on the playground. How many more children are in the school than on the playground?
_______ children
Answer:

Question 6.
What is the sum?
Go Math 2nd Grade Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.7 10
Answer:

Lesson 8.8 Choose a Tool

Essential Question How do you choose a measuring tool to use when measuring lengths?

Listen and Draw

Draw or write to describe how you measured the distances with the yarn.
Distance 1

Distance 2

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Which distance was longer? Explain how you know.
Answer:

Share and Show

Choose the best tool for measuring the real object.
Then measure and record the length or distance.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 1
Question 1.
the length of a book
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 2
Tool : ________
Length : __________
Answer:

Question 2.
the distance around a cup
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 3
Tool : ________
Length : __________
Answer:

On Your Own

Choose the best tool for measuring the real object.
Then measure and record the length or distance.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 4
Question 3.
the length of a chalkboard
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 5
Tool : ________
Length : __________
Answer:

Question 4.
the length of a marker
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 6
Tool : ________
Length : __________
Answer:

Question 5.
the distance around a globe
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 7
Tool : ________
Length : __________
Answer:

Question 6.
the length of a classroom wall
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 8
Tool : ________
Length : __________
Answer:

Problem Solving • Applications

Question 7.
THINK SMARTER
Rachel wants to measure the length of a sidewalk. Should she use an inch ruler or a yardstick? Explain.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 9
Rachel should use _______ because
___________________
Answer:

Question 8.
MATHEMATICAL PRACTICE Apply
What is an object that you would measure with a measuring tape? Explain why you would use this tool.
________________________
________________________
Answer:

Question 9.
THINK SMARTER+
Jim measures the length of a picnic table with an inch ruler. Is Jim using the best tool for measuring? Explain.
_________________________
________________________
Answer:

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child name some objects that he or she would measure using a yardstick.

Choose a Tool Homework & Practice 8.8

Choose the best tool for measuring the real object. Then measure and record the length or distance.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 10
Question 1.
the length of your desk
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 11
Tool : _____________
Length : ___________
Answer:

Question 2.
the distance around a basket
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 12
Tool : _____________
Length : ___________
Answer:

Problem Solving
Choose the better tool for measuring.
Explain your choice.
Question 3.
Mark wants to measure the length of his room. Should he use an inch ruler or a yardstick?
Mark should use ________ because
______________________
Answer:

Question 4.
WRITE
Describe how you would use a yardstick to measure the length of a rug.
Answer:

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Kim wants to measure the distance around her bike tire. Circle the best tool for her to use.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 13
Answer:

Question 2.
Ben wants to measure the length of a seesaw. Circle the best tool for him to use.
Go Math Answer Key Grade 2 Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.8 14
Answer:

Spiral Review
Question 3.
Estimate how many 12 inch rulers will be about the same length as a sheet of paper.
______ ruler, or _____ foot
Answer:

Question 4.
Andy has a rope that is 24 inches long. He cuts off 7 inches from the rope. How long is the rope now?
_____ inches
Answer:

Question 5.
Jan is telling her friend about using a ruler to measure length. Fill in the blanks with inches or foot to make the sentence true.
12 ______ is the same length as 1 _______.
Answer:

Lesson 8.9 Display Measurement Data

Essential Question How can a line plot be used to show measurement data?

Listen and Draw

Use an inch ruler. Measure and record each length.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 1 ______ inches

Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 2 ______ inches

Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 3 ______ inches

HOME CONNECTION • Your child practiced measuring different lengths in inches in preparation for collecting measurement data in this lesson.

MATHEMATICAL PRACTICES
Describe how the lengths of the three strings are different.
Answer:

Share and Show

Question 1.
Use an inch ruler. Measure and record the lengths of 5 books in inches.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 4
Answer:

Question 2.
Write a title for the line plot. Then write the numbers and draw the Xs.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 5
Answer:

On Your Own

Question 3.
Use an inch ruler. Measure and record the lengths of 5 pencils in inches.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 6
Answer:

Question 4.
Write a title for the line plot. Then write the numbers and draw the Xs.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 7
Answer:

Question 5.
Use an inch ruler. Measure and record the lengths of 4 crayons in inches. Then complete the line plot.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 8
Answer:

Problem Solving • Applications

Question 6.
THINK SMARTER
Use the data in the list to complete the line plot.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 9
Answer:

Question 7.
THINK SMARTER
Sarah made a line plot to show the data about the length of leaves. Is Sarah’s line plot correct? Tell why or why not.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 10
________________________
_________________________
Answer:

TAKE HOME ACTIVITY • Have your child describe how to make a line plot.

Display Measurement Data Homework & Practice 8.9

Question 1.
Use an inch ruler. Measure and record the lengths of 4 different books in inches.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 11
Answer:

Question 2.
Make a line plot of the information above. Write a title for a line plot. Then write the numbers and draw the Xs.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 12
Answer:

Problem Solving
Question 3.
Jesse measured the lengths of some strings. Use his list to complete the line plot.
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 13
Answer:

Question 4.
WRITE
Describe how you made a line plot in this lesson.
Answer:

Lesson Check
Question 1.
Use the line plot. How many sticks are 4 inches long?
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 14
______ sticks
Answer:

Spiral Review
Question 2.
Kim wants to measure a ball. Circle the best tool for Kim
Go Math Grade 2 Answer Key Chapter 8 Length in Customary Units 8.9 15
Answer:

Question 3.
Estimate how many 12 inch rulers will be about the same length as a teacher’s desk.
_____ rulers, or _____ feet
Answer:

Question 4.
Kurt has a string that is 12 inches long and another string that is 5 inches long. How many inches of string does he have altogether?
_______ inches
Answer:

Question 5.
One box has 147 books. The other box has 216 books. How many books are there in both boxes?
_______ books
Answer:

Length in Customary Units Review/Test

Question 1.
THINK SMARTER
Josh wants to measures the distance around a soccer ball.
Circle the best choice of tool.
inch ruler
yardstick
measuring tape
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 1
Explain your choice of tool.
Answer:

Question 2.
GO DEEPER
Luke has a string that is 6 inches long and a string that is 11 inches long. How many inches of string does Luke have?
Draw a diagram. Write a number sentence using a ☐ for the missing number. Solve.
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 2
Luke has ______ inches of string.
Answer:

Question 3.
Use an inch ruler. What is the length of the lip balm to the nearest inch?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 3
Circle the number in the box to make the sentence true.
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 4
Answer:

Question 4.
Tom uses tiles to measure a string. Each tile is 1 inch long. Tom says the string is 3 inches long. Is he correct? Explain.
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 5.1
___________________
___________________
Answer:

Question 5.
Dalia made a line plot to show the lengths of her ribbons. How many ribbons are shown in the line plot?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 5
The line plot shows ______ ribbons.
Suppose Dalia cut one of the ribbons that is 6 inches long into two pieces that are each 3 inches long. Explain how she should change the line plot.
_________________
_________________
Answer:

Question 6.
Use the words on the tiles to make the sentence true.
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 6
The table is 3 ______ long.
The belt is 30 ______ long.
The hallway is 15 ______ long.
Answer:

Question 7.
Use the 1-inch mark. Estimate the length of each object.
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 7
Answer:

Question 8.
Use an inch ruler. What is the length of the paper clip to the nearest inch?
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 8
______ inches
Answer:

Question 9.
Estimate how many 12-inch rulers will be about the same height as a classroom door. Does the sentence describe the door? Choose Yes or No.
Go Math Grade 2 Chapter 8 Answer Key Pdf Length in Customary Units Concepts rt 9
What is your estimate of how wide the door is?
Answer: